Netscreen CLI

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide
Version 5.2.0 Command Descriptions
Version 5.2.0 P/N 093-1592-000 Rev. A
Copyright Notice
Copyright 2005 Juniper Networks, Inc. All rights reserved. Juniper Networks, the Juniper Networks logo, NetScreen, NetScreen Technologies, NetScreen-Global Pro, ScreenOS, and GigaScreen are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. in the United States and other countries. NetScreen-5GT, NetScreen-5XP, NetScreen-5XT, NetScreen-25, NetScreen-50, NetScreen-100, NetScreen-204, NetScreen-208, NetScreen-500, NetScreen-5200, NetScreen-5400, NetScreen-IDP 10, NetScreen-IDP 100, NetScreen-IDP 500, NetScreen-IDP 1000, IDP 50, IDP 200, IDP 600, IDP 1100, ISG 1000, ISG 2000, NetScreen-Global Pro Express, NetScreen-Remote Security Client, NetScreen-Remote VPN Client, GigaScreen ASIC, and GigaScreen-II ASIC are trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective companies. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without receiving written permission from: Juniper Networks, Inc. ATTN: General Counsel 1194 N. Mathilda Ave. Sunnyvale, CA 94089-1206
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with NetScreens installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Caution: Changes or modifications to this product could void the user's warranty and authority to operate this device.
Disclaimer
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR JUNIPER NETWORKS REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
FCC Statement
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. The equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.
Contents
Contents
Preface .......................................................................... v
Organization............................................................... v CLI Syntax .................................................................. vi Object Name Conventions....................................... viii CLI Variables.............................................................. ix
Variable Notation......................................................... ix Common CLI Variable Names ...................................... x
av .............................................................................. 65 BGP Commands........................................................ 74

advertise-def-route.......................................................78 aggregate ...................................................................79 always-compare-med .................................................82 as-number ...................................................................83 as-path-access-list .......................................................84 comm-rib-in .................................................................87 community-list..............................................................88 confederation ..............................................................92 config...........................................................................94 enable .........................................................................95 flap-damping...............................................................96 hold-time .....................................................................97 keepalive .....................................................................98 local-pref .....................................................................99 med ...........................................................................100 neighbor ....................................................................102 network.......................................................................114 redistribute..................................................................117 redistribution ...............................................................119 reflector......................................................................120 reject-default-route ....................................................122 retry-time ....................................................................123 rib-in ...........................................................................124 router-id......................................................................125 synchronization ..........................................................126
New, Modified and Deleted Commands ..................xii

New Commands......................................................... xii Modified Commands.................................................. xii Deleted Commands ................................................... xii
Juniper Networks NetScreen Publications................. xiii
active-user through common-criteria.......................1

active-user ...................................................................2 address ........................................................................3 admin ..........................................................................5 alarm .........................................................................18 alg..............................................................................24 alias............................................................................27 all ...............................................................................28 arp .............................................................................29 attack.........................................................................32 attack-db ...................................................................41 audible-alarm ............................................................42 auth ...........................................................................45 auth-server .................................................................52
chassis ..................................................................... 127 clock........................................................................ 129 common-criteria ..................................................... 131
Contents
config through interface ......................................133

config...................................................................... 134 console ................................................................... 139 counter ................................................................... 142 delete ..................................................................... 145 di............................................................................. 148 dip........................................................................... 174 dns .......................................................................... 176 domain ................................................................... 185 downgrade ............................................................. 186 envar....................................................................... 188 event....................................................................... 190 exit .......................................................................... 195 failover .................................................................... 196 file ........................................................................... 199 firewall ..................................................................... 201 flow ......................................................................... 204 gate ........................................................................ 214 group ...................................................................... 215 group-expression..................................................... 219 hostname................................................................ 222 igmp ....................................................................... 223 ike ........................................................................... 227 ike-cookie................................................................ 253 interface.................................................................. 255
led ........................................................................... 311 lcd ........................................................................... 312 license-key............................................................... 314 log ........................................................................... 318 mac ........................................................................ 328 mac-learn ............................................................... 329 memory................................................................... 331 mirror ....................................................................... 335 modem ................................................................... 336 multicast-group-policy............................................. 343 nrtp .......................................................................... 348 nsgp ........................................................................ 350 nsmgmt ................................................................... 353 nsrp.......................................................................... 360 ntp ........................................................................... 380 os............................................................................. 385 OSPF Commands .................................................... 387 advertise-def-route ............................................ 392 area ................................................................... 394 authentication ................................................... 397 auto-vlink ........................................................... 398 config ................................................................ 399 database........................................................... 400 enable ......................................................................404
hello-threshold............................................................405 interface.....................................................................406 lsa-threshold ...............................................................407 neighbor ....................................................................409 redistribute..................................................................410 reject-default-route ....................................................412 retransmit ...................................................................413 rfc-1583 .....................................................................415
ip through port-mode...........................................297
ip............................................................................. 298 ip-classification ....................................................... 300 ippool...................................................................... 301 l2tp.......................................................................... 303
ii
Contents routes-redistribute .......................................................416 rules-redistribute..........................................................417 statistics ......................................................................418 stub ............................................................................419 summary-import.........................................................420 vlink ............................................................................422 vneighbor ...................................................................426
RIP Commands ....................................................... 516

advertise-def-route.....................................................520 alt-route......................................................................522 config.........................................................................523 database ...................................................................524 default-metric ............................................................525 enable .......................................................................526 flush-timer...................................................................527 garbage-list................................................................528 hold-timer...................................................................529 interface.....................................................................530 invalid-timer ...............................................................531 max-neighbor-count ..................................................532 neighbors ...................................................................533 no-source-validation ..................................................534 poll-timer ....................................................................535 redistribute..................................................................537 reject-default-route ....................................................539 retransmit-timer ..........................................................540 route-map..................................................................542 routes-redistribute .......................................................544 rules-redistribute .........................................................545 summary ....................................................................546 summary-ip ................................................................547 threshold-update .......................................................548 timer...........................................................................549 trusted-neighbors .......................................................550 update-timer..............................................................551 update-threshold .......................................................552 version........................................................................553
performance........................................................... 427 PIM Commands ...................................................... 429

accept-group ............................................................432 bsr ..............................................................................433 config.........................................................................434 enable .......................................................................435 igmp-members ..........................................................436 interface.....................................................................437 join-prune ...................................................................438 mgroup ......................................................................439 mroute .......................................................................441 neighbor.....................................................................443 rp................................................................................444 rpf...............................................................................446 spt-threshold...............................................................447 zone ...........................................................................448
ping......................................................................... 452 pki ........................................................................... 454 policy ...................................................................... 471 port-mode .............................................................. 493
pppoa through zone ............................................497

pppoa..................................................................... 498 pppoe..................................................................... 504 proxy-id ................................................................... 513 reset ........................................................................ 515
route ........................................................................ 554 sa............................................................................. 557 sa-statistics............................................................... 559
iii
Contents
save ........................................................................ 560 scheduler ................................................................ 566 scp .......................................................................... 569 service..................................................................... 570 session..................................................................... 575 sip ........................................................................... 580 snmp....................................................................... 583 socket ..................................................................... 589 ssh ........................................................................... 590 ssl ............................................................................ 598 sys-clock.................................................................. 601 syslog ...................................................................... 602 system ..................................................................... 606 tech-support ........................................................... 607 temperature-threshold ............................................ 608 tftp .......................................................................... 609 timer........................................................................ 610 trace-route .............................................................. 612
traffic-shaping.......................................................... 614 url............................................................................. 617 user.......................................................................... 625 user-group ............................................................... 631 vip............................................................................ 636 vpn .......................................................................... 638 vpn-group................................................................ 648 vpnmonitor .............................................................. 650 vrouter ..................................................................... 652 vsys .......................................................................... 673 webauth .................................................................. 676 webtrends................................................................ 678 xauth........................................................................ 680 zone ........................................................................ 683
Interface Names ..........................................................A-I Zone Names ................................................................ B-I Command Availability ................................................ C-I
iv
Preface
The Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide describes the commands used to configure and manage a NetScreen device from a console interface. This manual is an ongoing publication, published with each Juniper Networks NetScreen OS release.
ORGANIZATION
This guide consists of the following items: A Table of Contents, which lists the contents of all sections and appendices in this guide. Four command sections, each an alphabetized compendium of CLI command descriptions. The command sections are as follows: Section 1 describes CLI commands active-user through common-criteria. Section 2 describes CLI commands config through interface. Section 3 describes CLI commands ip through port-mode. Section 4 describes CLI commands pppoa through zone. Interface Names, an appendix that lists and briefly describes NetScreen device interfaces. Zone Names, an appendix that lists and briefly describes zones. Command Availability, an appendix that lists the CLI commands and indicates which platforms support them.
Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide
Preface
CLI Syntax
CLI SYNTAX
Each CLI command description in this manual reveals some aspect of command syntax. This syntax may include options, switches, parameters, and other features. To illustrate syntax rules, some command descriptions use dependency delimiters. Such delimiters indicate which command features are mandatory, and in which contexts.
Dependency Delimiters
Each syntax description shows the dependencies between command features by using special characters. The { and } symbols denote a mandatory feature. Features enclosed by these symbols are essential for execution of the command. The [ and ] symbols denote an optional feature. Features enclosed by these symbols are not essential for execution of the command, although omitting such features might adversely affect the outcome. The | symbol denotes an or relationship between two features. When this symbol appears between two features on the same line, you can use either feature (but not both). When this symbol appears at the end of a line, you can use the feature on that line, or the one below it.
Nested Dependencies
Many CLI commands have nested dependencies, which make features optional in some contexts, and mandatory in others. The three hypothetical features shown below demonstrate this principle. [ feature_1 { feature_2 | feature_3 } ] The delimiters [ and ] surround the entire clause. Consequently, you can omit feature_1, feature_2, and feature_3, and still execute the command successfully. However, because the { and } delimiters surround feature_2 and feature_3, you must include either feature_2 or feature_3 if you include feature_1. Otherwise, you cannot successfully execute the command. The following example shows some of the feature dependencies of the set interface command. set interface vlan1 broadcast { flood | arp [ trace-route ] }
vi
Preface
CLI Syntax
The { and } brackets indicate that specifyng either flood or arp is mandatory. By contrast, the [ and ] brackets indicate that the trace-route option for arp is not mandatory. Thus, the command might take any of the following forms: ns-> set interface vlan1 broadcast flood ns-> set interface vlan1 broadcast arp ns-> set interface vlan1 broadcast arp trace-route
Availability of CLI Commands and Features

As you execute CLI commands using the syntax descriptions in this manual, you may find that certain commands and command features are unavailable for your NetScreen device model. Because NetScreen devices treat unavailable command features as improper syntax, attempting to use such a feature usually generates the unknown keyword error message. When this message appears, confirm the features availability using the ? switch. For example, the following commands list available options for the set vpn command: ns-> set vpn ? ns-> set vpn vpn_name ? ns-> set vpn gateway gate_name ?
vii
Preface
Object Name Conventions
OBJECT NAME CONVENTIONS

ScreenOS employs the following conventions regarding the names of objectssuch as addresses, admin users, auth servers, IKE gateways, virtual systems, VPN tunnels, and zonesdefined in ScreenOS configurations. If a name string includes one or more spaces, the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes ( ); for example, set address trust local LAN 10.1.1.0/24. NetScreen trims any spaces leading or trailing text within a set of double quotes; for example, local LAN becomes local LAN. NetScreen treats multiple consecutive spaces as a single space. Name strings are case sensitive, although many CLI key words are case insensitive. For example, local LAN is different from local lan.
ScreenOS supports the following character types: Single-byte character sets (SBCS) and multiple-byte character sets (MBCS). Examples of SBCS are ASCII, European, and Hebrew. Examples of MBCSalso referred to as double-byte character sets (DBCS)are Chinese, Korean, and Japanese. Note: A console connection only supports SBCS. The WebUI supports both SBCS and MBCS, depending on the character sets that your Web browser supports. ASCII characters from 32 (0x20 in hexidecimals) to 255 (0xff), except double quotes ( ), which have special significance as an indicator of the beginning or end of a name string that includes spaces.
viii
Preface
CLI Variables
CLI VARIABLES
Most Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI commands have changeable parameters that affect the outcome of command execution. Juniper Networks NetScreen documention represents these parameters as variables. Such variables may include names, identification numbers, IP addresses, subnet masks, numbers, dates, and other values.
Variable Notation
The variable notation used in this manual consists of italicized parameter identifiers. For example, the set arp command uses four identifiers, as shown here: set arp { ip_addr mac_addr interface age number | always-on-dest | no-cache } where ip_addr represents an IP address. mac_addr represents a MAC address. interface represents a physical or logical interface. number represents a numerical value.
Thus, the command might take the following form: ns-> set arp 172.16.10.11 00e02c000080 ethernet2 where 172.16.10.11 is an IP address, 00e02c000080 is a MAC address, and ethernet2 is a physical interface.
ix
Preface
CLI Variables
Common CLI Variable Names

The following is a list of CLI variable names used in NetScreen technical documentation.
comm_name date dev_name dom_name dst_addr filename fqdn grp_name interface id_num ip_addr key_str key_hex loc_str mac_addr mbr_name mask mcst_addr name_str n number The community name of a host or other device. A date value. A device name, as with flash card memory. A domain name, such as acme in www.acme.com. A destination address. The name of a file. Fully-qualified domain name, such as www.acme.com. The name of a group, such as an address group or service group. A physical or logical interface. An identification number. An IPv4 address or IPv6 address. A key, such as a session key, a private key, or a public key. A key expressed as a hexadecimal number. A location of a file or other resource. A MAC address. The name of a member in a group, such as an address group or a service group. A subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.224 or /24. A multicast address. The name of an item, such as Marketing for an address book entry. A subnet mask (for an IPv4 subnet) or a prefix length (for an IPv6 subnet). A numeric value, usually an integer, such as a threshold or a maximum.
Preface
CLI Variables
pol_num port_num pref_len pswd_str ptcl_num serv_name shar_secret spi_num src_addr string svc_name svc_num time tunn_str url_str usr_str vrouter vsys zone
An integer that identifies a policy. A number identifying a logical port. A number identifying the prefix length for an IPv6 address. A password. A number uniquely identifying a protocol, such as TCP, IP, or UDP. The name of a server. A shared secret value. A Security Parameters Index (SPI) number. A source address. A character string, such as a comment. The name of a service, such as HTTP or MAIL. The ID number of a service, such as HTTP or MAIL. A time value. The name of a tunnel, such as an L2TP tunnel. A URL, such as www.acme.com. A user name, usually an external entity such as a dialup user. A virtual router, such as trust-vr or untrust-vr. The name of a vsys (virtual system). The name of a security zone.
Some commands contain multiple variables of the same type. The names of such variables might be numbered to identify each individually. For example, the set dip command contains two id_num variables, each numbered for easy identification: set dip group id_num1 [ member id_num2 ]
xi
Preface
New, Modified and Deleted Commands
NEW, MODIFIED AND DELETED COMMANDS

This release of the CLI contains commands that are new and modified. For some releases, certain commands may no longer exist.
New Commands
The following commands are new in this release.
alg on page 24 pppoa on page 498
Modified Commands
The following commands are modified in this release.
auth on page 45 auth-server on page 52 BGP Commands on page 74 community-list on page 88 neighbor on page 102 config on page 134 firewall on page 201 flow on page 204 ippool on page 301 OSPF Commands on page 387 retransmit on page 413 policy on page 471 session on page 575 url on page 617 vrouter on page 652 zone on page 683
Deleted Commands
There are no deleted commands in this release.
xii
Preface
Juniper Networks NetScreen Publications
JUNIPER NETWORKS NETSCREEN PUBLICATIONS

To obtain technical documentation for any Juniper Networks NetScreen product, visit www.juniper.net/techpubs/. For technical support, open a support case using the Case Manager link at http://www.juniper.net/support/ or call 1-888-314-JTAC (within the United States) or 1-408-745-9500 (outside the United States). If you find any errors or omissions in the following content, please contact us at the e-mail address below: techpubs-comments@juniper.net
xiii
Preface
Juniper Networks NetScreen Publications
xiv
active-user through common-criteria
This section lists and describes Juniper Networks NetScreen Command Line Interface (CLI) commands active-user through common-criteria. Note: As you execute CLI commands using the syntax descriptions in this section, you may find that certain commands and command features are unavailable on your Juniper Networks NetScreen platform. A good example is the vsys command, which is available on a NetScreen-500 device, but not on a NetScreen-5XP device. Similarly, some command options are unavailable on certain platforms, as with the df-bit option of the vpn command. This option is available on a NetScreen-500, but not on a NetScreen-5XP.
active-user
Description: Use the active-user command to display information for all users that initiated a service request through the NetScreen device. The displayed information includes the IP address of each user, and the number of sessions (incoming and outgoing) currently active for the user. Note: The maximum number of sessions allowed for users depends upon the software license installed on the device.
Syntax
get
get active-user
Keywords and Variables

None.
address
Description: Use the address commands to define entries in the address book of a security zone. An address book is a list containing all addresses, address groups, and domain names defined for a security zone. You use address book entries to identify addressable entities in policy definitions.
Syntax
get
get address zone [ group name_str | name name_str ]
set
set address zone name_str { fqdn | ip_addr/mask } [ string ]
unset
unset address zone name_str

Variable Parameters
zone The name of the security zone. The default security zones to which you can bind an address book include Trust, Untrust, Global, DMZ, V1-Trust, V1-Untrust, and V1-DMZ. You can also assign address book entries to user-defined zones. For more information on zones, see Zone Names on page B-I. The fully-qualified domain name of the host. The address and subnet mask identifying an individual host or a subnet. A character string containing a comment line.
fqdn ip_addr/mask string
Example: The following commands create address book entries named Local_Net and Outside_Net. set address trust Local_Net 10.1.1.0/24 New_York_Subnet set address untrust Outside_Net 1.1.12.1/24 London_Subnet
group
get address zone group name_str
group The name of a group of address book entries. You can use an address group in a security policy definition to specify multiple addresses. (Create address groups using the set group address command.)
Example: The following command displays information for an address group named Sales_Group: get address trust group HTTP_Servers
name
name name_str The name of an individual address book entry. You can use an address group in a security policy definition to specify a single address.
admin
Description: Use the admin commands to configure or display administrative parameters for the NetScreen device. These parameters determine the following: Characteristics for each administrator, such as password and privilege level How the device performs administrator authentication Methods with which administrators can access the device An IP address or address range from which one or more administrators can connect to the device Which port the device uses to detect administrative traffic Whether the device automatically sends generated alerts and traffic alarms via e-mail Whether the device is enabled for reset
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] admin { all | name name_str }
get
get admin [ auth [ banner [ secondary ] | settings ] | current-user | manager-ip | ssh all | user [ login ] ]
set
set admin { access attempts number | auth { banner { console login string | secondary string | telnet login string } server name_str | timeout number | } | device-reset | format { dos | unix } | http redirect | hw-reset | mail { alert | mail-addr1 name_str | mail-addr2 name_str | server-name { ip_addr | name_str } | traffic-log } | manager-ip ip_addr [ mask ] | name name_str | password [ pswd_str | restrict length number ] | port port_num | privilege { get-external | read-write } | root access console | ssh { password { disable | enable } username name_str | port port_num
} | telnet port port_num | user name_str password pswd_str [ privilege { all | read-only } ] }
unset
unset admin { access attempts | auth { banner { console login | secondary | telnet login } server | timeout } | device-reset | format | http redirect | hw-reset | mail { alert | mail-addr1 | mail-addr2 | server-name | traffic-log } | manager-ip { ip_addr | all } | name | password [ restrict-length ] | port | privilege | root access |
ssh [ port ] | telnet { access tunnel | port } | user name_str }

access attempts
set admin access attempts number unset admin access attempts
access attempts Specifies the number (1 - 255) of unsuccessful login attempts allowed before the device closes the Telnet connection. The default is 3.
Example: The following command sets the number of allowed unsuccessful login attempts to 5: set admin access attempts 5
alert
set admin mail alert
alert Collects system alarms from the device for sending to an e-mail address.
alert
clear admin all
all Clears all admin user profiles.
auth
get admin auth [ banner [ secondary ] | settings ] set admin auth banner console login string set admin auth banner secondary string set admin auth banner telnet login string set admin auth server name_str set admin auth timeout number unset admin auth banner { console login | secondary | telnet login } unset admin auth server unset admin auth timeout
auth Configures admin authentication settings for the NetScreen device. banner Specifies the banner (string) displayed during login through the console port (console) or a Telnet or SSH session (telnet). The NetScreen device uses the banner created from the command set admin auth banner telnet login string for both Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) logins. - secondary Specifies a second banner line that is always the samefor either console or Telnetunder the first banner line, which can be different for a console login and a Telnet login. The secondary banner can be up to 4000 bytes in length. Also, you can create an unrestricted number of line breaks by inserting the special symbol \n wherever you want a line to end. server The name of the authentication server used for authenticating admin users. timeout Specifies the length of idle time (in minutes) before the NetScreen device automatically closes the web administrative session. The value can be up 999 minutes. A value of 0 specifies no timeout. (Telnet admin sessions time out after the console timeout interval expires. You set this interval using the set console timeout command.)
Example1: The following commands create two login banners: set set Hyperterminal Management Console, displayed at the start of new console admin sessions Telnet Login Here, displayed at the start of new Telnet admin sessions admin auth banner console login "Hyperterminal Management Console" admin auth banner telnet login "Telnet Login Here"
Example2: The following command creates a secondary banner line with the text string Network Empire. When an admin initiates a console or Telnet login attempt, this line will appear under the two login banners defined in the previous example: set admin auth banner secondary Network Empire
cluster
clear cluster admin user { cache | login }
cluster Propagates the clear operation to all other devices in a NSRP cluster.
Example: The following command clears remote administrative users from the cache and propagates this change to other devices in a NSRP cluster: clear cluster admin user cache
current-user
get admin current-user
current-user Displays the user for the current administrative session.
device-reset
set admin device-reset unset admin device-reset
device-reset Enables device reset for asset recovery.
10
format
set admin format { dos | unix } unset admin format
format Determines the format (dos or unix) used when the NetScreen device generates the configuration file. On some Netscreen platforms, you can download this file to a TFTP server or PCMCIA card using the CLI, or to a local directory using WebUI.
http redirect
set admin http redirect unset admin http redirect
http redirect Enables and disables the redirection of administrative traffic to the NetScreen device from HTTP (default port 80) to HTTPS (default port 443). By default, HTTP redirection is disabled.
hw-reset
set admin hw-reset unset admin hw-reset
hw-reset Enables and disables hardware reset for asset recovery.
login
clear [ cluster ] admin user login get admin user login
login Clears or displays all current administrative users.
11
mail
set admin mail { ... } unset admin mail { ... }
mail Enables e-mail for sending alerts and traffic logs.
Example: The following command configures the e-mail address john@abc.com to receive updates concerning administrative issues: set admin mail mail-addr1 john@abc.com
mail-addr1
set admin mail mail-addr1 name_str
mail-addr1 name_str Sets the first e-mail address (such as chris@acme.com) for sending alert and traffic logs.
mail-addr2
set admin mail mail-addr2 name_str
mail-addr2 name_str Sets the secondary e-mail address for sending alert and traffic logs.
Example: The following command configures the secondary e-mail address pat@acme.com to receive updates concerning administrative issues: set admin mail mail-addr2 pat@acme.com
12
manager-ip
get admin manager-ip set admin manager-ip ip_addr [ mask ssh [ port ] unset admin manager-ip { ip_addr | all }
manager-ip Restricts management to a host or a subnet. The default manager-ip address is 0.0.0.0, which allows management from any workstation. All NetScreen devices allow you to specify up to six hosts or subnets at once. Note: The manager-ip address must be unique, and different from the physical IP address of the management interface.
Example: The following command restricts management to a single host with IP address 10.1.10.100: set admin manager-ip 10.1.10.100 255.255.255.255
name
set admin name name_str unset admin name
name The login name (name_str) of the root user for the NetScreen device. The maximum length of the name is 31 characters, including all symbols except ?. The name is case-sensitive.
password
set admin password pswd_str unset admin password
password Specifies the password (pswd_str) of the root user. The maximum length of the password is 31 characters, including all symbols except the special command character ?.
13
port
set admin port port_num unset admin port
port Sets the port number (port_num) for detecting configuration changes when using the web. Use any number between 1024 and 32767, or use the default port number (80). Changing the admin port number might require resetting the device (see the reset command).
privilege
set admin privilege ( get-external | read-write }
privilege Defines the administrative privilege level: get-external Instructs the NetScreen device to obtain the admin user privileges externally from the RADIUS server. read-write Gives the RADIUS administrator read-write privileges, and ignores the privilege returned from the RADIUS server.
restrict length
set admin password restrict length number unset admin password restrict length
restrict length Sets the minimum password length of the root admin. The password length can be any number from 1 to 31.
root access console

set admin root access console unset admin root access console
root access console Restricts the root admin to logging in to the device through the console only.
14
server-name
set admin mail server-name ip_addr
server-name The IP address or name of the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server. This server receives e-mail notification of system alarms and traffic logs.
Example: The following command specifies a SMTP server at IP address 10.1.10.10: set admin mail server-name 10.1.10.10
settings
get admin auth settings
settings Displays admin authentication settings, including the current timeout setting and the admin user type (local or remote).
ssh
get admin ssh all set admin ssh password { disable | enable } username name_str set admin ssh password port port_num unset admin ssh [ port ]
ssh Provides access to the Secure Shell (SSH) utility. SSH allows you to administer NetScreen devices from an Ethernet connection or a dial-in modem, thus providing secure CLI access over unsecured channels. all Displays the SSH PKA (Public Key Authentication) information for each admin. password Sets the password for the user that establishes the SSH session. The enable | disable switch enables or disables password authentication. username name_str specifies the admin user name. port port_num Specifies the logical SSH port through which the communication occurs. The default is port 22. Unsetting the port resets the SSH port to the default.
15
telnet
set admin telnet port port_num unset admin telnet port
telnet port Provides CLI access through a Telnet connection. The acceptable range of port_num is 1024 - 32767.
traffic-log
set admin mail traffic-log unset admin mail traffic-log
traffic-log Generates a log of network traffic handled by the NetScreen device. The traffic log can contain a maximum of 4,096 entries. The NetScreen device sends a copy of the log file to each specified e-mail address (see mail-addr1 and mail-addr2). This happens when the log is full, or every 24 hours, depending upon which occurs first.
user
get admin user [ cache | login ] set admin user name_str password pswd_str [ privilege { all | read-only } ] unset admin user name_str
user Creates or displays a non-root administrator (super-administrator or sub-administrator). The maximum user name length is 31 characters, including all symbols except ?. The user name is case-sensitive. The privilege switch determines the privilege level of the user (all or read-only).
Example: The following command creates a non-root administrator named rsmith, with password swordfish: set admin user rsmith password swordfish privilege all
16
Defaults
The default admin name and password are netscreen. The default number of access attempts is 3. The default manager-ip is 0.0.0.0, and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.255. The default privilege for a super-administrator is read-only. By default, HTTP redirection is enabled on NetScreen devices that ship with ScreenOS 5.1.0 or later. The default mail alert setting is off. The default for device reset is on.
17
alarm
Description: Use the alarm commands to set or display alarm parameters. The alarm parameters determine when the device generates alarm messages, and the amount and type of information contained in the messages.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] alarm traffic [ policy pol_num1 [ -pol_num2 ] ] [ end-time string ]
get
get alarm { threshold | traffic [ policy { pol_num1 [ -pol_num2 ] } ] [ service name_str ] [ src-address ip_addr ] [ dst-address ip_addr ] [ detail [ start-time string ] [ end-time string ] [ minute | second [ threshold number [ -number ] ] [ rate number [ -number ] ] ] ] | }
18
set
set alarm threshold { cpu number | memory number | session { count number | percent number } }
unset
unset alarm threshold { CPU | memory | session }

cluster
clear cluster alarm traffic [ ... ]
Example: The following command clears the alarm table entries for policy 4 and propagates the change to other device in a NSRP cluster: clear cluster alarm traffic policy 4
detail
get alarm traffic [ ... ] detail [ ... ]
detail Displays detailed information for each policy, including all traffic alarm entries that occurred under the policy. If you omit this option, the output contains only general information and the time of the most recent alarm for each policy.
19
Example: The following command displays event alarm entries or traffic alarm entries that occur on or after January 1,
2003:
get alarm traffic detail start-time 01/01/2003
end-time | start-time
clear [ cluster ] alarm traffic policy [ ... ] end-time number get alarm traffic [ ... ] end-time number get alarm traffic [ ... ] start-time number
start-time end-time The start-time option displays event alarm entries or traffic alarm entries that occurred at or before the time specified. The end-time option displays event alarm entries or traffic alarm entries that occurred at or after the time specified. The format for string is mm/dd[/yy-hh:mm:ss] You can omit the year (the current year is the default), or express the year using the last two digits or all four digits. The hour, minute, and second are optional. The delimiter between the date and the time can be a dash or an underscore: 12/31/2002-23:59:00 12/31/2002_23:59:00
Example: The following command performs a detailed display of traffic alarm entries at (or after) 11:59pm, December 31, 2003 and at or before 12:00am, December 31, 2004: get alarm traffic detail start-time 12/31/2003-23:59:00 end-time 12/31/2004-24:00:00
policy
clear [ cluster ] alarm traffic policy pol_num1 [ -pol_num2 ] [ ... ] get alarm traffic policy pol_num
policy Displays traffic alarm entries for a policy specified by its ID number or for several policies specified by a range of ID numbers. The ID number can be any value between 0 and the total number of established policies. To define a range, enter the starting and ending ID numbers as follows: pol_num1-pol_num2
20
Example: The following command clears the entries for policy 2 in the alarm table: clear alarm traffic policy 2
second | minute
get alarm traffic [ ... ] detail
second | minute Displays traffic alarm entries for policies with threshold settings at bytes per second or bytes per minute. The rate number [ -number ] option displays traffic alarm entries for policies with a flow rate at a specified value or within a specified range. The threshold number [ -number ] option displays traffic alarm entries for policies with a threshold at a specified value or within a specified range.
Example: The following command displays traffic alarm entries for policies with threshold settings at bytes per second: get alarm traffic detail second
service
get alarm traffic [ ... ] service name_str [ ... ]
service Displays traffic alarm entries for a specified service (name_str), such as TCP, ICMP, or FTP. (To display all services, make the name_str value Any.) The name does not have to be complete; for example, both TC and CP are recognized as TCP. Although you cannot specify a Service group, note that because TP is recognized as FTP, HTTP, and TFTP, entering TP displays traffic alarm entries for all three of these Services.
Example: The following command displays traffic alarm entries for the HTTP service: get alarm traffic service http
21
src-address | dst-addr
get alarm traffic [ ... ] src-address ip_addr [ ... ] get alarm traffic [ ... ] dst-address ip_addr [ ... ]
src-address dst-address Displays traffic alarm entries originating from a specified IP address (ip_addr) or from a specified direction, such as inside_any or outside_any. Displays traffic alarm entries destined for a specified IP address (ip_addr) or for a specified direction, such as inside_any or outside_any.
Example: The following command displays traffic alarm entries originating from IP address 10.1.9.9 and destined for IP address 1.1.10.10: get alarm traffic src-address 10.1.9.9 dst-address 1.1.10.10
threshold
get alarm threshold get alarm traffic [ ... ] threshold number [ -number ] set alarm threshold { ... } unset alarm threshold { CPU | memory | session }
threshold Displays traffic alarm entries for policies with threshold settings at a specified value or within a specified range. cpu number sets the cpu threshold. memory number sets the memory threshold. session sets the session threshold. The count number option specifies how many sessions can exist before the device generates an alarm. The percent number option specifies what percentage of the session limit is allowable before the device generates an alarm.
Example: The following command sets the session limit threshold to 75,000 sessions: set alarm threshold session count 75000
22
traffic
clear [ cluster ] alarm traffic [ ... ] get alarm traffic [ ... ]
traffic Specifies traffic alarm entries.
Example: The following command performs a detailed display of traffic alarm entries originating from IP address 10.1.9.9 and destined for IP address 1.1.10.10: get alarm traffic src-address 10.1.9.9 dst-address 1.1.10.10 detail
23
alg
Description: Use the alg commands to enable or disable application layer gateways (ALG) on the NetScreen device. An ALG runs as a service and can be associated in policies with specified types of traffic. ALGs are enabled by default.
Syntax
set
set alg [ h245 | msrpc | q931 | ras | rtsp | sip | sql | sunrpc ]
unset
unset alg [ h245 | msrpc | q931 | ras | rtsp | sip | sql | sunrpc ]

h245
h245 Enables or disables the H.245 ALG on the device (the default is enabled).H.245 is a control signaling protocol used to exchange messages between H.323 endpoints.
msrpc
msrpc
Enables or disables the Microsoft Remote Procedure Call (MS-RPC) ALG on the device (the default is enabled).
24
q931
q931
Enables or disables the Q.931 ALG on the device (the default is enabled). Q.931 is a Layer 3 protocol used for Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) call establishment, maintenance, and termination between h.323 endpoints.
ras
ras
Enables or disables the Registration, Admission, and Status (RAS) ALG on the device (the default is enabled). RAS is the protocol between H.323 endpoints (terminals and gateways) and gatekeepers, and is used to perform registration, admission control, bandwidth changes, status, and disengage procedures.
rtsp
rtsp
Enables or disables the Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) ALG on the device (the default is enabled).
sip
sip
Enables or disables the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) ALG on the device (the default is enabled).
sql
sql
Enables or disables the SQL ALG on the device (the default is enabled).
25
sunrpc
sunrpc
Attaches the Sun Remote Procedure Call (Sun-RPC) ALG on the device (the default is enabled).
Note: To set or unset the H.323 ALG you must set or unset the H.245, Q.931, and RAS ALGs.
26
alias
Description: Use the alias commands to create, remove, or list aliases. An alias is a named variable containing the initial characters of a CLI command. After creating an alias, you can use it to execute the represented command.
Syntax
get
get alias
set
set alias name_str string
unset
unset alias name_str

Variable Parameters
name_str string The name of the CLI command alias. The CLI command to which you assign the alias.
Example: The following commands create an alias representing the get interface ethernet1/1 command, then execute the command using the alias: set alias int_1 "get interface ethernet1/1" int_1
27
all
Description: Use the all command to return all configuration settings to the factory default values.
Syntax
unset all

None.
Example
In the following example, you reset the device to its factory default settings and reset the device. 1. Execute the unset all command. unset all The following prompt appears: Erase all system config, are you sure y / [n]? 2. 3. Press the Y key. This action returns the system configuration to the factory default settings. Execute the reset command. reset The following prompt appears: Configuration modified, save? [y] / n 4. 5. Press the N key. This action generates the following prompt: System reset, are you sure? y / [n] n Press the Y key. This action restarts the system. The device now has its original factory default settings.
28
arp
Description: Use the arp commands to create, remove, or list interface entries in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table of the NetScreen device.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] arp [ ip_addr | all ] |
get
get arp [ all | asic id_num ]
set
set arp { ip_addr mac_addr interface | age number | always-on-dest }
unset
unset arp { ip_addr [ interface ] | age | always-on-dest }
29

Variable Parameters
set arp ip_addr mac_addr interface
ip_addr mac_addr interface The IP address of a network device to which you want to make a static entry in the ARP table. The MAC address of a network device to which you want to make a static entry in the ARP table. The name of the interface through which the NetScreen device can direct traffic to reach the network device with the specified IP address and MAC address. For more information on interfaces, see Interface Names on page A-I.
all
get arp all
all Lists all current ARP entries for every existing virtual system (vsys).
asic
get asic id_num
asic Lists all current ARP entries for each ASIC chip identified by ID number.
age
set arp age number
age Sets the age-out value (in seconds) for ARP entries. The default value is 1200 seconds (20 minutes).
30
always-on-dest
set arp always-on-dest
always-on-dest Directs the NetScreen device to send an ARP request for any incoming packet with a heading containing a MAC address not yet listed in the MAC address table. This may be necessary when packets originate from server load-balancing (SLB) switches or from devices using the Hot Standby Router Protocol/Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (HSRP/VRRP).
cluster
clear [ cluster ] arp
cluster Propagates the clear operation to all other devices in a NetScreen Redundancy Protocol (NSRP) cluster.
31
attack
Description: Use the attack commands to view and define attack objects, attack object groups, and the attack object database server settings. Note: This command is available only if advanced mode is installed on the device.
Syntax
get
get attack [ name_str | anomaly [ sort-by { id | name } ] | db | disable [ sort-by { def-type | id | name | type } ] | group [ name_str | sort-by { def-type | name } ] | id id_num | [ signature ] sort-by { def-type | id | name } | sort-by { def-type | id | name | type } ]
set
set attack { CS:name_str { aim-chat-room-desc | aim-chat-room-name | aim-get-file | aim-nick-name | aim-put-file |
32
aim-screen-name | dns-cname | ftp-command | ftp-password | ftp-pathname | ftp-username | gnutella-http-get-filename | http-authorization | http-header-user-agent | http-request | http-status | http-text-html | http-url | http-url-parsed | http-url-variable-parsed | imap-authenticate | imap-login | imap-mailbox | imap-user | msn-display-name | msn-get-file | msn-put-file | msn-sign-in-name | pop3-auth | pop3-header-from | pop3-header-line | pop3-header-subject | pop3-header-to | pop3-mime-content-filename | pop3-user | smb-account-name | smb-connect-path | smb-connect-service | smb-copy-filename |
NetScreen CLI Reference Guide 33
smb-delete-filename | smb-open-filename | smtp-from | smtp-header-from | smtp-header-line smtp-header-subject smtp-header-to | smtp-mime-content-filename | smtp-rcpt | stream256 | ymsg-alias | ymsg-chatroom-message | ymsg-chatroom-name | ymsg-nickname | ymsg-p2p-get-filename-url | ymsg-p2p-put-filename-url | ymsg-user-name } [ not ] string severity { info | low | medium | high | critical } | db { mode { notification | update } | schedule { daily hh:mm | monthly number hh:mm | weekly day hh:mm } | server url_str } | disable name_str | group name_str1 [ add name_str2 ] | }
34
unset
unset attack { name_str | db { mode | schedule | server } | disable name_str | group name_str1 [ remove name_str2 ] }

Variable Parameter
get attack name_str set attack name_str aim-chat-room-desc string severity string set attack name_str ymsg-user-name string severity string unset attack name_str
name_str Defines the attack object name. If it is a user-defined attack, it must be prefaced with CS:. Specifies one of the following contexts for Deep Inspection to search and defines the signature string for which the Deep Inspection module searches: aim-chat-room-desc string ymsg-user-name string - severity Defines the severity level of the attack. You can specify any of the following levels: info, low, medium, high, critical.
35
Note: For a complete, descriptive list of contexts that you can specify when creating your own attack objects, refer to Appendix A: Contexts for User-Defined Signatures in the NetScreen Concepts & Examples ScreenOS Reference Guide: Volume 4, Attack Detection and Defense Mechanisms. Example: The following command creates an attack object for FTP named CS:rootuser, specifies its context as ftp-username, defines its signature as root, and specifies its severity level as high: set attack CS:rootuser ftp-username root severity high
anomaly
get attack anomaly [ sort-by { id | name } ]
anomaly sort-by Displays protocol anomaly attack objects currently stored in the local database. Indicates the organization for the display of protocol anomalies in the local databaseeither numerically by id or alphabetically by name.
attack
get attack
attack Displays all attack objects currently stored in the local database, displayingin alphabetical orderfirst user-defined attacks (if any) and then predefined attacks.
db
get attack db set attack db mode { notification | update } set attack db schedule { daily hh:mm | monthly number hh:mm | weekly day hh:mm } set attack db server url_str unset attack db { mode | schedule | server url_str }
db Specifies the attack object database server. On NetScreen devices that support virtual systems, you must set this command at the root level.
36
mode Selects either notification or update as the mode for checking and updating the attack object database. The notification method automatically checks the attack object database server at user-defined times and notifies the NetScreen admin if the database on the server is more recent than the one on the NetScreen device. (If the data on the server is more recent, a notice appears on the Home page in the WebUI, and in the CLI after you log in to the NetScreen device.) The update method automatically checks the attack object database server at user-defined times and automatically updates the database on the NetScreen device if it determines that the database on the server is more recent than the one on the NetScreen device. schedule string Sets the time for automatically checking the attack object database server and updating the attack object database on the NetScreen device. You can set a daily, monthly of weekly schedule. server url_str Defines the URL of the attack object database server. Unsetting the attack object database server stops the NetScreen device from automatically checking the server or from updating the local database.
Example: The following commands define the URL of the attack object database server and set a schedule to check the server automatically and then notify the NetScreen device admin when the database on the server is more recent than that on the NetScreen device: set attack db server http://www.juniper.net/attacks set attack db schedule daily 07:00 set attack db mode notification
disable
set attack disable name_str unset attack disable name_str get attack disable
37
get attack disable sort-by [ sort-by { def-type | id | name | type } ]

disable Disables the specified predefined attack object or a list of all disabled attack objects. You can organize the display of the list by one of the following attributes: def-type: Organizes the disabled attack object display by anomaly and then by signature, and then within each of these two categories, alphabetically by protocol. id: Organizes the disabled attack object display numerically by ID number. name: Organizes the disabled attack object display alphabetically by attack name. type: Organizes the disabled attack object display alphabetically by anomaly and then by signature.
group
get attack group [ name_str | sort-by { def-type | name } ] set attack group name_str1 [ add name_str2 ] unset attack group name_str1 [ remove name_str2 ]
group sort-by Specifies an attack object group. Indicates the organization for the display of attack groups from the local database: def-type: Organizes the attack group display by the definition type of the group, displayingin alphabetical orderfirst user-defined groups (if any) and then predefined attack groups. name: Organizes the attack group display alphabetically by attack group names, regardless of whether they are user-defined or predefined. However, because all user-defined attack group names must begin with CS:, they appear together alphabetically anyway. name_str specifies a name for the creation, deletion, or modification of an attack group. The keywords add and remove indicate whether you are adding or deleting an attack from the specified group.
Example: The following command displays all the attack groups on the NetScreen device by name in alphabetical order: get attack group sort-by name
38
id
get attack id id_num
id Specifies the ID number of an attack object in the local database.
Example: The following command displays the attack object with ID number 500 in the NetScreen device: get attack id 720
not
set attack CS:name_str not string1 severity string2
not Defines as an attack object anything in the specified context except the user-defined attack pattern.
Example: The following command defines the attack object named CS:badlogin as anything except the permitted FTP username jj2345 with a medium level severity: set attack CS:badlogin ftp-username not jj2345 severity medium
signature
get attack signature [ sort-by { def-type | id | name } ]
signature Displays stateful signature attack objects currently stored in the local database. sort-by: Specifies the organizational display of signature attack objects by one of the following attributes: - def-type: Organizes the stateful signature attack object display by the definition type of the attack object, displayingin alphabetical orderfirst user-defined objects (if any) and then predefined attack objects. - id: Organizes the stateful signature attack object display numerically by ID number, first listing user-defined attack objects, which have no ID number, and then predefined attack objects. - name: Organizes the stateful signature attack object display alphabetically by attack name.
Example: The following command displays signature attack objects alphabetically by name: get attack signature sort-by name
sort-by
get attack sort-by { def-type | id | name | type }
sort-by Specifies the organizational display of attack objects in the local database by one of the following attributes: def-type: Organizes the attack object display by the definition type of the attack objectfirst anomaly and then stateful signature attack objects. id: Organizes the attack object display numerically by ID number. name: Organizes the attack object display alphabetically by attack name. type: Organizes the attack object display alphabetically by anomaly and then by signature.
Example: The following command displays all attack objects in the NetScreen device organized numerically: get attack sort-by id
40
attack-db
Description: Use the attack-db commands to perform attack object database updates and checking. Note: This command is available only if advanced mode and the Deep Inspection db key is installed on the device.
Syntax
exec
exec attack-db { check | update }

check
exec attack-db check
check Immediately checks if the attack object database on the server is more recent than the one on the NetScreen device.
update
exec attack-db update
update Updates the attack object database on the NetScreen device immediately with the database stored on the attack object database server.
41
audible-alarm
Description: Use the audible-alarm command to activate the audible alarm feature.
Syntax
get
get audible-alarm
set
set audible-alarm { all | battery | fan-failed | power-failed | temperature }
unset
unset audible-alarm { all | battery | fan-failed | power-failed | temperature }
42

all
set audible-alarm all unset audible-alarm all
all Enables or disables the audible alarm in the event of a fan failure, a interface module failure, a power supply failure, or a temperature increase above an admin-defined threshold.
battery
set audible-alarm battery unset audible-alarm battery
battery Enables or disables the audible alarm in the event of battery failure.
fan-failed
set audible-alarm fan-failed unset audible-alarm fan-failed
fan-failed Enables or disables the audible alarm in the event of a fan failure.
module-failed
set audible-alarm module-failed unset audible-alarm module-failed
module-failed Enables or disables the audible alarm in the event of an interface module failure.
43
power-failed
set audible-alarm power-failed unset audible-alarm power-failed
power-failed Enables or disables the audible alarm in the event of a power supply failure.
temperature
set audible-alarm temperature unset audible-alarm temperature
temperature Enables or disables the audible alarm if the temperature rises above an admin-defined threshold.
44
auth
Description: Use the auth commands to specify a user authentication method. The four available methods include: A built-in database A RADIUS server SecurID Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
Note: If the NetScreen device uses SecurID to authenticate users, and communication problems occur with the ACE server, clear the current SecurID shared secret from the device (and the server) by executing the delete node_secret command.
45
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] auth [ history | queue | table [ id id_num | ipaddr ip_addr ] ]
get
get auth [ banner | history [ id id_num | ip ip_addr ] | queue | settings | table [ id id_num | ip ip_addr ] ]
set
set auth { banner { ftp | http | telnet } { fail string | login string | success string } default auth server name_str | radius accounting { action cleanup-session | port port_num } }
46
unset
unset auth { banner { ftp | http | telnet } { fail | login | success } default auth server radius accounting { action cleanup-session | port } }
47
Arguments
banner
get auth banner set auth banner { ftp | http | telnet } unset auth banner { ftp | http | telnet }
banner Defines or displays firewall banners. The NetScreen device uses these banners to report success or failure of login requests. ftp Reports on the success or failure of FTP login requests. http Reports on the success or failure of HTTP login requests. telnet Reports on the success or failure of Telnet login requests. - fail string Specifies a message string to display a login attempt is unsuccessful. - login string Specifies a message string to display when a login prompt appears. - success string Specifies a message string to display when a login attempt is successful. FTP, HTTP, and Telnet login, success, and fail banners can each be up 4000 bytes long. You can include multiple line breaks in the banner by inserting the special symbol /n wherever you want a line break to be.
Example: The following command defines a banner for a failed FTP login attempt: set auth banner ftp fail "FTP login attempt failed"
cluster
clear [ cluster ] auth [ ... ]
48
default
set auth default auth server name_str unset auth default auth server
default auth server Specifies a default firewall authentication server (name_str). The NetScreen device uses this server when a security policy does not explicitly identify a particular authentication server.
Example: The following command identifies the default authentication server (Auth_Server): set auth default auth server Auth_Server
history
clear [ cluster ] auth history get auth history [ id id_num | ip ip_addr ]
history Clears or displays the history of users authenticated through the NetScreen device.
queue
clear [ cluster ] auth queue get auth queue
queue Clears or displays the internal user authentication queue.
49
radius accounting
set auth radius accounting action cleanup-session set auth radius accounting port port_num unset auth radius accounting action cleanup-session unset auth radius accounting port
radius accounting This feature allows any organization that owns or controls a RADIUS server to track RADIUS session information for billing, monitoring, or other purposes. For example, a RADIUS server might need to record information about when authorized sessions begin, when they end, the number of bytes or packets exchanged during each session, and so on. Such tracking is generally referred to as RADIUS accounting. Each RADIUS accounting session begins when the RADIUS server receives an Accounting-Start message, and ends when it receives an Accounting-Stop message. RADIUS accounting allows the device to monitor and manage authorized sessions. For example, a device might clear out zombie sessions when it receives an Accounting-Stop message from an external RADIUS client. This could prevent misuse of wireless calls if a subsequent user gets a previous users assigned IP address, and attempts to use the previous user's session. The port (port_num) setting specifies the port through which the device receives Accounting-Start and Accounting-Stop messages. In addition, the cleanup-session feature allows the device to clear out zombie sessions when it receives an Accounting-Stop message from an external RADIUS client. This feature prevents misuse of wireless calls if subsequent users get the same assigned IP address, and happen to use the previous user's session in the device. Note: This feature is not supported on the vsys level, and is for the root level only. Note: This feature is only for clearing zombie sessions. Enablement is not required for the NetScreen device to support RADIUS accounting while communicating with the RADIUS server.
settings
get auth settings
settings Displays default user authentication server settings. (This option yields the same display as the get auth command.
50
table
clear [ cluster ] auth table [ id id_num | ip ip_addr ] get auth table [ id id_num | ip ip_addr ]
table Clears entries from the user authentication table (thus forcing reauthentication), or displays such entries. Entries in the user authentication table can represent: users currently authenticated users currently undergoing authentication users denied authentication Without parameters (described below), the table option clears or displays all table entries. id id_num Clears or displays a particular entry by ID (id_num). ip ip_addr Clears or displays all entries with a common source IP address (ip_addr).
Example1: The following command clears entry 7 from the user authentication table: clear auth table id 7 Example2: The following command displays authentication details from a table entry with source IP 10.1.10.10: get auth table ip 10.1.10.10
51
auth-server
Description: Use the auth-server commands to configure the NetScreen device for user authentication with a specified authentication server. Administrators, policies, VPN tunnel specifications, and XAuth configurations use these server specifications to gain access to the appropriate resources.
Syntax
get
get auth-server { name_str | all | id id_num }
set
set auth-server name_str { account-type { [ admin ] | [ auth ] [ l2tp ] [ xauth ] } | backup1 { ip_addr | name_str } | backup2 { ip_addr | name_str } | fail-over revert-interval number | id id_num | ldap { cn name_str | dn name_str | port port_num | server-name { ip_addr | name_str } } | radius
{ attribute { acct-session-id length number | calling-station-id } | compatibility rfc-2138 | port port_num | retries number | secret shar_secret | timeout number } | securid { auth-port port_num | duress number | encr id_num | retries number | timeout number } | server-name { ip_addr | name_str } | src-interface interface | timeout number | type { ldap | radius | securid } | username { domain dom_name | separator string number number } }
53
unset
unset auth-server { name_string [ account-type { admin | [ auth ] [ ike ] [ l2tp ] [ xauth ] } backup1 | backup2 | fail-over revert-interval | radius { attribute { acct-session-id length | calling-station-id } | compatibility rfc-2138 | port port_num | retries | secret shar_secret | timeout number } | src-interface | timeout | type username { domain | separator } ] id id_num }
54

Variable Parameter
set auth-server name_str [ ... ]
name_str Identifies the object name of the authentication server.
Example: The following command creates a server object name (radius1) and specifies type RADIUS: set auth-server radius1 type radius
account-type
set auth-server name_str account-type { [ admin ] | [ auth ] [ l2tp ] [ xauth ] }
account-type Specifies the types of users authenticated by the server (name_str). admin specifies admin users. auth specifies authentication users. l2tp specifies Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) users. xauth specifies XAuth users. You can define a user as a single user typean admin user, an authentication user, an L2TP user, or an XAuth user. You can combine auth, L2TP, and XAuth user types to create an auth-L2TP user, an auth-XAuth user, an L2TP-XAuth user, or an auth-L2TP-XAuth user. You cannot combine an admin user with another user type.
all
get auth-server all
all Specifies all configured authentication servers.
55
backup1 | backup2
set auth-server name_str { backup1 { ip_addr | name_str } | backup2 { ip_addr | name_str } } unset auth-server name_str { backup1 | backup2 }
backup1 backup2 The IP address or DNS name of the primary backup authentication server for an LDAP, RADIUS, or SecurID server type. The IP address or DNS name of the secondary backup authentication server for an LDAP or RADIUS server type. SecurID does not support more than one backup server.
Example: With the following commands, you first create a RADIUS authentication server object named radius1 at IP address 10.1.1.50. It stores authentication user accounts. Then you define a primary backup server at 10.1.1.51 and a secondary backup server at 10.1.1.52: set set set set set auth-server auth-server auth-server auth-server auth-server radius1 radius1 radius1 radius1 radius1 server-name 10.1.1.50 type radius account-type auth backup1 10.1.1.51 backup2 10.1.1.52
fail-over
set auth-server name_str fail-over revert-interval number | unset auth-server name_str fail-over revert-interval
fail-over This feature specifies the interval (expressed in seconds) that must pass after an authentication attempt, before the device attempts authentication through backup authentication servers. When an authentication request sent to a primary server fails, the NetScreen device tries the backup servers. If authentication via a backup server is successful, and the revert-interval time interval has elapsed, the device sends subsequent authentication requests to the backup server. Otherwise, it resumes sending the requests to the primary server. The range is 0 seconds (disabled) to 86400 seconds. This feature applies to RADIUS and LDAP servers only.
56
id
get auth-server id id_num set auth-server name_str id id_num unset auth-server id id_num
id The user-defined identification number (id_num) of the authentication server. If you do not define an ID number explicitly, the NetScreen device creates one automatically.
Example: The following command creates an identification number (200) for the authentication server radius1: set auth-server radius1 id 200
ldap
set auth-server name_str ldap { ... }
ldap Configures the NetScreen device to use an LDAP server for authentication. cn name_str The Common Name identifier used by the LDAP server to identify the individual entered in a LDAP server. For example, an entry of uid means user ID and cn means common name. dn name_str The Distinguished Name identifier is the path used by the LDAP server before using the common name identifier to search for a specific entry (for example, c=us;o=netscreen, where c stands for country, and o for organization). port port_num Specifies the port number to use for communication with the LDAP server. The default port number for LDAP is 389. server-name name_str The IP address or DNS name of the LDAP server.
Example: For an example of this option, see Defining an LDAP Server Object on page 64.
57
radius
set auth-server name_str radius { ... } unset auth-server name_str radius { port | timeout }
radius Configures the NetScreen device to use a RADIUS server for authentication. attribute Specifies settings for RADIUS accounting. Each time an XAuth user connects to the device and the device authenticates the user, the device establishes a new acct-session-id, which identifies the accounting session. The accounting session lasts between the time the device sends the RADIUS server an Accounting-Start message, and the time it sends an Accounting-Stop message. To identify the user, each RADIUS access or request message may contain the calling-station-id (described below). - acct-session-id length number The length of the account-session-id in bytes. The acct-session-id uniquely identifies the accounting session. The default length of this value is 11 bytes. The number setting is for accommodating some RADIUS servers, which may have problems with the default length. You can set the length of acct-session-id from 6 bytes to 10 bytes, inclusive. To restore the default setting, execute the following command: unset auth-server name_str radius attribute acct-session-id length - calling-station-id Enables or disables calling-station-id transmission. The calling-station-id identifies the originator of the call. For example, this value might consist of the phone number of the user originating the call. To prevent sending this ID, disable the setting by executing the following command: unset auth-server name_str radius attribute calling-station-id compatibility rfc-2138 Makes RADIUS accounting comply with RFC 2138, as compared with RFC 2865. For operations where RFC 2865 (the most recent standard) and RFC 2138 are mutually exclusive, the command works in accordance with RFC 2138, instead of RFC 2865. In cases where the behavior is additive, the command works compatibly with both RFC 2865 and RFC 2138. port port_num The port number on a RADIUS server to which the NetScreen device sends authentication requests. The default port number is 1645. You can change the default port number to any number between 1024 and 65535, inclusive. retries number The number of retries sent to the RADIUS server before RADIUS authentication fails. The range is 1 to 20 retries.
58
secret shar_secret Specifies the RADIUS shared secret (shar_secret) that is shared between the NetScreen device and the RADIUS server. The NetScreen device uses this secret to encrypt the users password that it sends to the RADIUS server. timeout number The interval (in seconds) that the NetScreen device waits before sending another authentication request to the RADIUS server if the previous request does not elicit a response. The default is three seconds.
Example: For an example of these options, see Defining a RADIUS Server Object on page 63.
securid
set auth-server name_str securid { auth-port port_num | duress number | encr id_num | retries number | timeout number }
securid Configures the NetScreen device to use a SecurID server for authentication. auth-port port_num Specifies the port number to use for communications with the SecurID server. The default SecurID port number is 5500. duress { 0 | 1 } If the SecurID server is licensed to use duress mode, a value of 0 deactivates it and 1 activates it. When duress mode is activated, a user can enter a special duress PIN number when logging in. The NetScreen device allows the login, but sends a signal to the SecurID server, indicating that someone is forcing the user to login against his or her will. The SecurID auth server blocks further login attempts by that user until he or she contacts the SecurID server admin. encr { 0 | 1 } Specifies the encryption algorithm for SecurID network traffic. A value of 0 specifies SDI, and 1 specifies DES. NetScreen recommends the default encryption type DES.
59
retries number Specifies the number of retries between requests for authentication. timeout number Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the NetScreen device waits between authentication retry attempts.
Example: For an example of this option, see Defining a SecurID Server Object on page 63.
server-name
set auth-server name_str server-name { ip_addr | name_str }
server-name The IP address or DNS name of the authentication server.
src-interface
set auth-server name_str src_interface interface
src-interface Instructs the device to transmit authentication requests (RADIUS or SecurID) through the specified interface.
timeout
set auth-server name_str timeout number unset auth-server name_str timeout
timeout Specifies how many minutes must elapse after the termination of an authentication, L2TP, or XAuth users last session before the user needs to reauthenticate. The default timeout value is 10 minutes, and the maximum setting is 255 minutes. If the user initiates a new session before the countdown reaches the timeout threshold, the user does not have to reauthenticate and the timeout countdown resets. If the user is an admin user, this setting specifies how many minutes of inactivity must elapse before the NetScreen device times out and closes an admin session. The default is 10 minutes and the maximum is 1000 minutes.
60
Example: For an example of this option, see Defining a SecurID Server Object on page 63.
type
set auth-server name_str type { ldap | radius | securid }
type Specifies the type of authentication serverLDAP, SecurID or RADIUS. The unset command sets type to radius.
Example: For an example of this option, see Defining a RADIUS Server Object on page 63.
username
set auth-server name_str username domain dom_name set auth-server name_str username separator string number number unset auth-server name_str username domain unset auth-server name_str username separator
username Specifies a domain name for a particular auth server, or a portion of a username from which to strip characters. If you specify a domain name for the auth server, it must be present in the username during authentication. The device uses a separator character to identify where stripping occurs. Stripping removes all characters to the right of each instance of the specified character, plus the character itself. The device starts with the right most separator character. The parameters for this feature are as follows: string is the character separator. number is the number of character separator instances with which to perform the character stripping. If the specified number of separator characters (number) exceeds the actual number of separator characters in the username, the command stops stripping at the last available separator character. Note: The device performs domain-name matching before stripping.
61
Example: In the following example you strip characters to the right of two instances of a separator character in a username. set auth server name Acme_Server username bob@hello@jnpr.com separator is @ number of instances 2 auth-server Acme_Server username separator bob@hello@jnpr.com number 2
The resulting username is bob.
62
Defining a RADIUS Server Object

The following commands define an auth-server object for a RADIUS server: set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server save radius1 radius1 radius1 radius1 radius1 radius1 radius1 radius1 type radius account-type auth l2tp xauth server-name 10.1.1.50 backup1 10.1.1.51 backup2 10.1.1.52 radius port 4500 radius timeout 4 radius secret A56htYY97kl
If you are using vendor-specific attributes, you must load the netscreen.dct file on the RADIUS server.
Defining a SecurID Server Object

The following commands define an auth-server object for a RADIUS server: set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server save securid1 securid1 securid1 securid1 securid1 securid1 securid1 securid1 securid1 securid1 type securid server-name 10.1.1.100 backup1 10.1.1.110 timeout 60 account-type admin securid retries 3 securid timeout 10 securid auth-port 15000 securid encr 1 securid duress 0
63
Defining an LDAP Server Object

The following commands define an auth-server object for an LDAP server: set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server set auth-server save ldap1 ldap1 ldap1 ldap1 ldap1 ldap1 ldap1 ldap1 ldap1 type ldap account-type auth server-name 10.1.1.150 backup1 10.1.1.151 backup2 10.1.1.152 timeout 40 ldap port 15000 ldap cn cn ldap dn c=us;o=netscreen;ou=marketing
The following command lists all auth-server settings: get auth-server all
64
av
Description: On select NetScreen devices, use the av commands to configure and view an internal antivirus (AV) scanner (scan-mgr), to download or update AV pattern files, and to clear AV operation statistics. The AV scanner resides inside the NetScreen device as part of ScreenOS. To configure the device for internal AV scanning, use the scan-mgr option (described below). Note: To activate antivirus features, you must first obtain and load an AV license key.
Syntax
clear
clear av { scan-mgr scanned-bytes | statistics }
exec
exec av scan-mgr { pattern-download tftp-server ip_addr file filename version number | pattern-update }
get
get av { name_str | all | http | scan-mgr | statistics | trickling }
set
set av { name_str {
content { http [ timeout number ] | smtp [ timeout number ] } | server-name { ip_addr | dom_name } [ port port_num ] } | all { fail-mode { scanner threshold number | traffic permit } | max-connections number | resources number } | http { keep-alive | skipmime | trickling { number1 number2 number3 | default } webmail { enable | url-pattern-name name { args string | host string | path string } } } | scan-mgr { content { ftp | http | imap | pop3 | smtp } [ timeout number ] | decompress-layer number | max-content-size { drop | number } | max-msgs { drop | number } | pattern-update-url url_str interval number | queue size number } }
66
unset
unset av { all [fail-mode traffic | resources ]| http | { keep-alive | skipmime | trickling | webmail { enable | url-pattern-name string [ args | host | path ] } } scan-mgr { content { ftp | http | imap | pop3 | smtp } [ timeout ] | decompress-layer | max-content-size [ drop ] | max-msgs [ drop ] | pattern-update-url | queue-size } }

Variable Parameter
get av name_str set av name_str [ ... ]
67
unset av name_str [ ... ]

name_str Identifies the object name of an AV scanner. Note: The external antivirus feature is not supported in ScreenOS 5.1.0.
all
get av all set av all { ... } unset av all { ... }
all Enables and disables all defined AV scanners. fail-mode Sets the fail-mode parameters, which determine what the NetScreen device does when it loses connectivity with an external AV scanner or is in any way unable to scan traffic. - scanner threshold number Specifies the maximum number of times the device can attempt to connect with an external AV scanner. After passing this threshold, the device changes state to fail-mode. The default value is 150. Note: The external antivirus feature is not supported in ScreenOS 5.1.0. - traffic permit When enabled, directs the device to pass traffic after it enters fail-mode. The default setting for this parameter is disabled. Note: When traffic permit is disabled, the device blocks HTTP and SMTP traffic, even if a policy exists that permits AV checking. max-connections number Defines the maximum number of simultaneous TCP connections between the NetScreen device and an external AV scanner. Note: The external antivirus feature is not supported in ScreenOS 5.1.0. resources number The maximum percent of AV resources allowed per AV client. Possible settings range from 1 to 100, inclusive. The default setting is 70%.
Example: The following command sets the maximum number of TCP connections allowed concurrently between the NetScreen device and the AV scanner. set av all max-connections 10
68
Example: The following command instructs the NetScreen device to drop traffic if it cannot complete a scanning operation: unset av all fail-mode traffic
av statistics
clear av statistics
av statistics Clears the statistics concerning the total sessions per hour that the NetScreen device sent to the AV scanner, including the peak number sessions.
content
set av { scan-mgr | string } content { ftp | http | imap | pop3 | smtp } [ timeout number ] unset av { scan-mgr | string } content { ftp | http | imap | pop3 | smtp } [ timeout ]
content Identifies the kind of traffic that the internal Scan Manager (scan-mgr) or the specified external AV scanner (string) scans for viruses. Note: The external antivirus feature is not supported in ScreenOS 5.1.0. ftp Enables AV scanning of File Transfer Protocol (FTP) traffic. http Enables AV scanning of Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) downloads and uploads. imap Enables AV scanning of Internet Mail Access Protocol (IMAP) traffic. pop3 Enables AV scanning of Post Office Protocol, version 3 (POP3) traffic. smtp Enables AV scanning of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) traffic. - timeout number Changes the timeout value for an AV session on a per-protocol basis. By default, an AV session times out after 180 seconds of inactivity. The range is 1 to 1800 seconds.
69
Example: The following command creates an AV object, classifies it as an HTTP traffic scanner, and defines the timeout as 120 seconds: set av scanner1 content http timeout 120
http
get av http set av http keep-alive set av http skipmime set av http trickling number1 number2 number3 set av http trickling default set av http webmail { enable | url-pattern-name url_str { ... } } unset av http { ... }
http Displays or sets HTTP configuration options for AV scanning. keep-alive Directs the NetScreen device to use the HTTP keep-alive connection option. Using this option prevents the device from sending a TCP FIN message to indicate termination of data transmission. (By default, the device uses the HTTP close connection option, which automatically sends the TCP FIN message.) skipmime Disables the scanning of the following Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) content types andwhen present following a slashsubtypes of HTTP entities: - application/x-director - application/pdf - image/ - video/ - audio/ - text/css - text/html By default, the skipmime option is enabled.
70
trickling Configures the device for HTTP trickling, which automatically forwards specified amounts of unscanned HTTP traffic to the requesting HTTP client. Trickling prevents the client from timing out while the AV scanner is busy examining downloaded HTTP files. - number1 The minimum HTTP file size (in megabytes) needed to trigger the trickling action. The default value is 3 megabytes. - number2 The size (in megabytes) of each block of traffic sent to the AV scanner for scanning. The default value is 1 megabyte. - number3 The length (in bytes) of each trickle of unscanned HTTP traffic that the NetScreen device forwards to the client. The default value is 500 bytes. - default Resets the HTTP trickling parameters (number1, number2, and number3) to their default values. webmail Configures the NetScreen device for WebMail scanning. - enable Enables WebMail scanning only. Note: The device performs a full HTTP scan only if a policy exists that enables HTTP and the webmail parameter is disabled. - url-pattern-name url_str Specifies a URL pattern identifying a certain type of WebMail to examine for virus patterns. When the URL matches all of the following parameters, the AV scanner performs a virus scan. The args string parameter specifies URL arguments, which begin with ?. The host name_str parameter specifies the host name included in the URL. The path string parameter specifies the download URL path for the type of webmail.
Example: The following command configures HTTP trickling to trickle 800 bytes of content for every 2 megabytes scanned, and to initiate trickling when the HTTP file is 6 megabytes or larger: set av http trickling 6 2 800 Example: The following commands enable WebMail scanning only and create a URL pattern named URL_Acme. set set set URL host name www.acme.com path /acme/marketing av http webmail enable av http webmail url-pattern-name URL_Acme host www.acme.com av http webmail url-pattern-name URL_Acme path /acme/marketing
71
scan-mgr
exec av scan-mgr { ... } get av scan-mgr set av scan-mgr { ... } unset av scan-mgr { ... }
scan-mgr Configures, displays, or performs actions on parameters that control internal AV scanning. content { ftp | http | imap | smtp | pop3 } Specifies the type of protocols to examine for virus patterns. timeout number Specifies a time interval (expressed in seconds) during which the internal AV scanner can complete an initiated virus scan. The scan terminates if the time interval expires before completion. The default setting is 180 seconds. decompress-layer number Specifies how many layers of nested compressed files the internal AV scanner can decompress before it executes the virus scan. For example, if a message contains a compressed .zip file that contains another compressed .zip file, there are two compression layers, and decompressing both files requires a decompress-layer setting of 2. Valid settings are between 1 and 4, so the AV scanner can decompress up to 4 layers of compressed files. The default is 2. max-content-size number Specifies the maximum size (in megabytes) of content for a single message that the internal AV scanner can scan for virus patterns. If you enable the drop option for fail-mode and the total content of an incoming message exceeds the maximum, the NetScreen device drops the message content. If you unset the drop option, the NetScreen device passes unexamined traffic. The range for max-content-size is 4000 to 16,000 kilobytes, inclusive. The default maximum content size is 10,000 kilobytes. max-msgs number Specifies the maximum number of concurrent messages that the internal AV scanner can scan for virus patterns. If you enable the drop option and the number of messages exceeds the maximum, the internal AV scanner drops the latest message content. The range for max-msgs is between 1 and 16 messages, inclusive.
72
pattern-download Retrieves an updated pattern file directly from a host. This is used for manual updates only. - The tftp-host parameter specifies the host from which the NetScreen device retrieves an updated pattern file. - The file parameter specifies the name of the pattern file retrieved from a host. - The version parameter specifies the version number of the pattern file. This is required to verify that the pattern file is valid. pattern-update-url url_str Specifies the URL address of the server from which the NetScreen device retrieves updates to its pattern file. The value of the URL address should be in the format <http://<host>[:port]/server.ini]. The interval number setting specifies the time interval (in minutes) during which the NetScreen device starts an automatic update process. queue-size Determines the number of messages that each of 16 queues can support simultaneously. After the NetScreen device sends 16 data units to the internal scanner or to an external scanner, it stores subsequent data units in queues to await scanning. The size of each queue can range between 1 and 16. The default queue size is 16.
server-name
set av name_str server-name name_str [ port port_num ] unset av name_str server-name name_str [ port ]
server-name Sets the IP address or DNS name for an external antivirus (AV) scanner. port port_num specifies the port number that Content Scanning Protocol (CSP) uses for communication between the NetScreen device and a Trend Micro InterScan VirusWall server. The device performs this operation on a per-AV-object basis. The default CSP port number is 3300. Note: The external antivirus feature is not supported in ScreenOS 5.1.0.
73
BGP Commands
Description: Use the bgp context to configure the BGP routing protocol in a NetScreen virtual router.
Context Initiation
Initiating the bgp context requires two steps: 1. Enter the vrouter context by executing the set vrouter command: set vrouter vrouter where vrouter is the name of the virtual router. (For all examples that follow, assume that vrouter is the trust-vr virtual router.) 2. Enter the bgp context by executing the set protocol bgp command. ns(trust-vr)-> set protocol bgp as_num where as_num is the number of the autonomous system in which the BGP routing instance resides. Once you define an autonomous system number for the BGP routing instance, you no longer have to enter the number in the set protocol bgp command.
BGP Command List

The following commands are executable in the bgp context.
advertise-def-route Use the advertise-def-route commands to advertise or display the default route in the current virtual router to peers. Command options: set, unset Use aggregate commands to create, display, or delete aggregate addresses. Aggregation is a technique for summarizing a range of routing addresses into a single route entry, expressed as an IP address and a subnet mask. Aggregates can reduce the size of the routing table, while maintaining its level of connectivity. In addition, aggregates can reduce the number of advertised addresses, thus reducing overhead. Command options: get, set, unset
aggregate
74
always-compare-med
Use the always-compare-med commands to enable or disable the NetScreen device from comparing paths from each autonomous system (AS) using the Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED). The MED value is one of the criteria that determines the most suitable route to the neighbor device. Command options: get, set, unset Use the as-number command to display the autonomous system number configured for the BGP routing instance. When you create the BGP routing instance in a virtual router, you must specify the autonomous system (AS) in which it resides. Command options: get Use as-path-access-list commands to create, remove, or display a regular expression in an AS-Path access list. An AS-path access list serves as a packet filtering mechanism. The NetScreen device can consult such a list and permit or deny BGP packets based on the regular expressions contained in the list. The system can have up to 99 AS-path access lists. Command options: get, set, unset Use the comm-rib-in command to display the BGP internal routing information base learned from peers within a community. Command options: get Use community-list commands to enter a route in a community list, to remove a route from the list, or to display the list. Command options: get, set, unset Use the confederation commands to create a confederation, to remove a confederation, or to display confederation information. Confederation is a technique for dividing an AS into smaller sub-ASs and grouping them. Using confederations reduces the number of connections inside an AS, thus simplifying full mesh topology. Command options: get, set, unset Use the config command to display the BGP configuration. Command options: get
as-number
as-path-access-list
comm-rib-in
community-list
confederation
config
75
enable flap-damping
Use the enable commands to enable or disable the BGP routing protocol in a virtual router. Command options: set, unset Use the flap-damping commands to enable or disable the flap-damping setting. Enabling this setting blocks the advertisement of a route until the route becomes stable. Flap damping allows the NetScreen device to prevent routing instability at an AS border router, adjacent to the region where instability occurs. Command options: get, set, unset Use the hold-time commands to specify or display the maximum amount of time (in seconds) that can elapse between keepalive messages received from the BGP neighbor. Command options: get, set, unset Use the keepalive commands to specify the amount of time (in seconds) that elapses between keepalive packet transmissions. These transmissions ensure that the TCP connection between the local BGP router and a neighbor router stays up. Command options: get, set, unset Use this command to configure a LOCAL_PREF value for the BGP routing protocol. The LOCAL_PREF attribute is the metric most often used in practice to express preferences for one set of paths over another for IBGP. Command options: get, set, unset Use the med commands to specify or display the local Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED). Command options: get, set, unset Use the neighbor commands to set or display configuration parameters for communicating with BGP peers. Command options: clear, exec, get, set, unset Use the network commands to create, display, or delete network and subnet entries. The BGP virtual router advertises these entries to peer devices, without first requiring redistribution into BGP (as with static routing table entries). Command options: get, set, unset Use the redistribute commands to import routes advertised by external routers that use protocols other than BGP, or to display the current redistribution settings. Command options: set, unset
hold-time
keepalive
local-pref
med neighbor
network
redistribute
76
redistribution reflector
Use the redistribution command to display the BGP redistribution rules. Command options: get Use the reflector commands to allow the local BGP virtual router to serve as a route reflector. A route reflector is a router that passes Interior BGP (IBGP) learned routes to specified IBGP neighbors (clients), thus eliminating the need for each router in a full mesh to talk to every other router. The clients use the route reflector to readvertise routes to the entire autonomous system (AS). Command options: get, set, unset Use the reject-default-route commands to enable, disable, or display the reject-default-route setting. Enabling this setting makes the NetScreen device ignore default route advertisements from a BGP peer router. Command options: get, set, unset Use the retry-time command to specify the amount of time (in seconds) after failing to establish a BGP session with a peer that the local BGP routing instance retries to initiate the session. Command options: set, unset Use the rib-in command to display the internal routing information base learned from peers. Command options: get Use the router-id command to display the router ID for the virtual router. Command options: get Use the synchronization command to enable synchronization with Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP). Command options: set, unset
reject-default-route
retry-time
rib-in router-id synchronization
77
advertise-def-route
Description: Use the advertise-def-route commands to advertise or display the default route in the current virtual router to BGP peers. Before you can execute a advertise-def-route command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
set
set advertise-def-route
unset
unset advertise-def-route

None.
78
aggregate
Description: Use aggregate commands to create, display, or delete aggregate addresses. Aggregation is a technique for summarizing a range of routing addresses into a single route entry. Each aggregate is an address range expressed as an IP address and a subnet mask value. Aggregation can reduce the size of a routers routing table, while maintaining its level of connectivity. In addition, aggregation can reduce the number of advertised addresses, thus reducing overhead. Before you can execute an aggregate command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get aggregate [ ip_addr/mask ]
set
set aggregate [ ip_addr/mask [ as-set ] [ summary-only | suppress-map name_str ] [ advertise-map name_str ] [ attribute-map name_str ] ]
unset
unset aggregate [ ip_addr/mask ]
79

advertise-map
set aggregate ip_addr/mask advertise-map name_str
advertise-map Selects the routes that match the specified route-map for the AS-Path path attribute of the aggregate route entry.
as-set
set aggregate ip_addr/mask as-set [ ... ]
as-set Specifies that the aggregate uses an unordered set of AS numbers (the AS-Set field is set in the AS-Path path attribute) instead of an ordered sequence (the AS-Sequence field is set in the AS-Path path attribute). This option supports the aggregation of routes with different AS-Paths.
attribute-map
set aggregate ip_addr/mask attribute-map name_str
attribute-map Changes the attributes of the aggregate route to those in the specified route map.
summary-only
set aggregate ip_addr/mask [ as-set ] summary-only
summary-only Specifies that more specific routes that fall into the aggregate route prefix range are not advertised.
Example: The following command specifies that the aggregate uses an unordered set of AS numbers, while suppressing more specific routes. set aggregate 3.3.3.3/24 as-set summary-only
80
suppress-map
set aggregate ip_addr/mask suppress-map name_str
supress-map Suppresses the routes that match the specified route map.
81
always-compare-med
Description: Use the always-compare-med commands to enable or disable the NetScreen device from comparing paths from each autonomous system (AS) using the Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED). The MED is one of the criteria that determines the most suitable route to the neighbor device. Before you can execute an always-compare-med command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get always-compare-med
set
set always-compare-med
unset
unset always-compare-med

None.
82
as-number
Description: Use the as-number command to display the autonomous system number configured for the BGP routing instance. When you create the BGP routing instance in a virtual router, you must specify the autonomous system (AS) in which it resides. Before you can execute the as-number command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get as-number

None.
83
as-path-access-list
Description: Use as-path-access-list commands to create, remove, or display a regular expression in an AS-Path access list. An AS-path access list serves as a packet filtering mechanism. The NetScreen device can consult such a list and permit or deny BGP packets based on the regular expressions contained in the list. Before you can execute an as-path-access-list command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get as-path-access-list
set
set as-path-access-list id_num { deny | permit } string
unset
unset as-path-access-list id_num { deny | permit } string
84

Variable Parameters
set as-path-access-list id_num { deny | permit } string unset as-path-access-list id_num { deny | permit } string
id_num string The identification number of the access list (range 1 - 99 inclusive). The regular expression used for BGP packet filtering. You can use the following in the regular expression:
^
The start of a path
$ The end of a path { The start of an AS_SET } The end of an AS_SET ( The start of an AS_CONFED_SET or AS_CONFED_SEQ ) The end of an AS_CONFED_SET or AS_CONFED_SEQ . Matches any single character .* Matches zero or more characters .+ Matches one or more characters _ Matches zero or one instance of a punctuation character [] Specifies a set of characters - Used within brackets to specify a range of AS numbers ^ Used as the first item within brackets to exclude AS numbers
85
deny | permit
set as-path-access-list id_num { deny | permit } string unset as-path-access-list id_num { deny | permit } string
deny | permit Denies or permits BGP packets containing the regular expression (string).
Example: The following command places the regular expression 23 in an AS-Path access list with ID number 10: set as-path-access-list 10 permit 23
86
comm-rib-in
Description: Use the comm-rib-in command to display the BGP internal routing information base learned from peers within a community. Before you can execute the comm-rib-in command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get comm-rib-in

None.
87
community-list
Description: Use community-list commands to create a community list that defines community attributes of routes that are permitted or denied. A community consists of routes that are associated with the same identifier. Routers can use the community identifier when they need to treat two or more advertised routes in the same way. Before you can execute a community-list command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get community-list
set
set community-list id_num1 { default-permit | deny | permit } [ number | as id_num2 id_num3 | no-advertise | no-export | no-export-subconfed | none ]
unset
unset community-list id_num1 { default-permit | deny | permit } [ number | as id_num2 id_num3 | no-advertise | no-export | no-export-subconfed | none ]
88

Variable Parameters
set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit | default-permit} number unset community-list id_num1 { deny | permit | default-permit} number
id_num1 number The identifier of the community list (range 1 - 99 inclusive). The community number, which can be between 0-65535 inclusive.
Example: The following command defines the community list 20 that denies routes with the community value 200. set community-list 20 deny 200
as
set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } as id_num2 id_num3 unset community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } as id_num2 id_num3
as Defines a private community, in the form of an AS number (id_num2) and a community number defined within the AS (id_num3). The community number can be between 0-65535 inclusive.
Example: The following command creates a community list with an ID of 10 that permits the community 11 in AS 10000: set community-list 10 permit as 10000 11
deny | permit | default-permit

set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } [ ... ] unset community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } [ ... ]
deny | permit Denies or permits routes with the specified community value.
89
default-permit
Permits the route if it does not match any community value specified in the community list. By default, routes that do not match community values in the community list are denied.
Example: The following command defines the community list 20 that denies routes with the community value 200. set community-list 20 deny 200
no-advertise
set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } no-advertise set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } no-advertise
no-advertise Specifies that the NetScreen device does not advertise routes with this community value in the communities attribute to any peer devices.
no-export
set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } no-export set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } no-export
no-export Specifies that the NetScreen device does not advertise routes with this community value to EBGP peers, except sub-autonomous systems within the confederation.
no-export-subconfed
set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } no-export-subconfed set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } no-export-subconfed
no-export-subconfed Specifies that the NetScreen device does not advertise routes with this community value to any external peers.
90
none
set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } none set community-list id_num1 { deny | permit } none
none Specifies that the NetScreen device remove community values.
91
confederation
Description: Use the confederation commands to create a confederation, to remove a confederation, or to display confederation information. Confederation is a technique for dividing an AS into smaller sub-ASs and grouping them. Using confederations reduces the number of connections inside an AS, simplifying the routing matrices created by meshes. Before you can execute a confederation command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get confederation
set
set confederation { id id_num1 | peer id_num2 | rfc3065 }
unset
unset confederation { id | peer id_num2 | rfc3065 }
92

id
set confederation id id_num1 unset confederation id
id The identification number (id_num1) of the confederation.
Example: The following command creates a confederation with an ID of 10: set confederation id 10
peer
set confederation peer id_num2 unset confederation peer id_num2
peer id_num2 The identifier of a new peer autonomous system (AS) entry.
Example: The following command adds AS 45040 to the confederation: set confederation peer 45040
rfc3065
set confederation rfc3065 unset confederation rfc3065
rfc3065 Specifies configuration in compliance with RFC 3065. The default is compliance with RFC 1965.
93
config
Description: Use the config command to display the CLI commands used in the BGP configuration in the current virtual router. Before you can execute the config command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get config

None.
94
enable
Description: Use the enable commands to enable or disable the BGP routing protocol in a virtual router. Before you can execute an enable command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
set
set enable
unset
unset enable

None.
95
flap-damping
Description: Use the flap-damping commands to enable or disable the flap-damping setting. Enabling this setting blocks the advertisement of a route until the route becomes stable. Flap damping allows the NetScreen device to contain routing instability at an AS border router, adjacent to the region where instability occurs. Before you can execute a flap-damping command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
set
set flap-damping
unset
unset flap-damping

None.
96
hold-time
Description: Use the hold-time commands to specify or display the maximum amount of time (in seconds) that can elapse between keepalive messages received from the BGP neighbor. If the hold-time elapses before any message is received from a BGP neighbor, the session is considered down. The default is 180 seconds. Note: The default keepalive value is always one third of the current hold-time value. Before you can execute a hold-time command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get hold-time
set
set hold-time number
unset
unset hold-time

Variable Parameter
set hold-time number
number The maximum length of time (in seconds) between messages.
97
keepalive
Description: Use the keepalive commands to specify the amount of time (in seconds) that elapses between keepalive packet transmissions. These transmissions ensure that the TCP connection between the local BGP router and a neighbor router stays up. The default value is one-third of the hold-time value (for the default hold-time value of 180 seconds, the default keepalive value is 60 seconds). Before you can execute a keepalive command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get keepalive
set
set keepalive number
unset
unset keepalive

Variable Parameter
number The maximum length of time (in seconds) between keepalive messages.
98
local-pref
Description: Use the local-pref commands to configure the Local-Pref path attribute for the BGP routing protocol. The Local-Pref path attribute is a metric used to inform IBGP peers of the local routers preference for the route. The higher the value, the greater the preference. Routers advertise this attribute to internal peers (peers in the same AS) and to neighboring confederations, but never to external peers. The default value is 100. Before you can execute a local-pref command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get local-pref
set
set local-pref number
unset
unset local-pref

Variable Parameter
set local-pref number number
The preference level for the virtual router.
99
med
Description: Use the med commands to specify or display the local Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED). The MED is an attribute that notifies a neighbor in another AS of the optimal path to use when there are multiple entry points to the AS. If an EBGP update contains a MED value, the BGP routing instance sends the MED to all IBGP peers within the AS. If you assign a MED value, this value overrides any MED values received in update messages from external peers. Note that although you set the MED in the local AS, the neighbor in another AS uses the MED value to decide which entry point to use. If all other factors are equal, the path with the lowest MED value is chosen. The default MED value is 0. Before you can execute a med command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get med
set
set med id_num
unset
unset med
100

Variable Parameter
set med id_num id_num
The identification number of the MED.
Example: The following command specifies MED 100 for the virtual router trust-vr: set med 100
101
neighbor
Description: Use the neighbor commands to set or display general configuration parameters for communicating with BGP peers. Before you can execute a neighbor command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
clear
clear neighbor ip_addr1 { flap-route ip_addr2 [ add ] | soft-in | soft-out | stats }
exec
exec neighbor ip_addr { connect | disconnect | tcp-connect }
get
get neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str }
set
set neighbor { ip_addr [ advertise-def-route | ebgp-multihop number | enable | force-reconnect | hold-time number | keepalive number |
md5-authentication string | med number | nhself-enable | peer-group name_str | reflector-client | reject-default-route | remote-as number [ local-ip ip_addr/mask | outgoing-interface interface | src-interface interface ] | remove-private-as retry-time number | route-map name_str { in | out } | send-community | weight number ] | peer-group name_str [ ebgp-multihop number | force-reconnect | hold-time number | keepalive number | md5-authentication string | nhself-enable | reflector-client | remote-as number | retry-time number | route-map name_str { in | out } | send-community | weight number ] }
103
unset
unset neighbor { ip_addr [ advertise-def-route | ebgp-multihop | enable | force-reconnect | hold-time | keepalive | md5-authentication | med | nhself-enable | peer-group string | reflector-client | reject-default-route | remote-as number [ local-ip ip_addr/mask | outgoing-interface interface | src-interface interface ] | remove-private-as | retry-time | route-map name_str { in | out } | send-community | weight ] peer-group name_str [ ebgp-multihop | force-reconnect | hold-time |
104
keepalive | md5-authentication | nhself-enable | reflector-client | remote-as number | retry-time | route-map name_str { in | out } | send-community | weight ] }

Variable Parameter
clear neighbor ip_addr get neighbor ip_addr set neighbor ip_addr { ... } unset neighbor ip_addr { ... }
ip_addr The IP address of the neighboring peer device.
Example: The following command displays information about a neighbor device at IP address 1.1.100.101: get neighbor 1.1.100.101
advertise-def-route
set neighbor ip_addr advertise-def-route unset neighbor ip_addr advertise-def-route
advertise-def-route Advertises the default route in the current virtual router to the BGP peer.
105
connect
exec neighbor ip_addr connect
connect Establishes a BGP connection to the neighbor. You can use this command for troubleshooting a BGP connection.
disconnect
exec neighbor ip_addr disconnect
disconnect Terminates the BGP connection to the neighbor. You can use this command for troubleshooting a BGP connection.
ebgp-multihop
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } ebgp-multihop number unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } ebgp-multihop
ebgp-multihop The number of intervening routing nodes (number) allowed between the local BGP router and the BGP neighbor (ip_addr). A setting of zero (the default value) disables the multihop feature. The local BGP router uses the ebgp-multihop value as TTL in all IP packets transmitted to the neighbor.
Example: The following command directs the virtual router to allow three intervening route nodes between the virtual router and a neighbor device at IP address 1.1.100.101: set neighbor 1.1.100.101 ebgp-multihop 3
106
enable
set neighbor ip_addr enable unset neighbor ip_addr enable
enable Enables or disables peer communications.
force-reconnect
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } force-reconnect unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } force-reconnect
force-reconnect Causes the peer to drop the existing BGP connection and accept a new connection. You can use this option when NSRP failover occurs but the failover interval is long enough that the BGP peer still considers the connection to be active and rejects new connection attempts.
hold-time
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } hold-time number unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } hold-time
hold-time Specifies the number of seconds (number) that the current BGP speaker waits to receive a message from its neighbor. The default is 180 seconds.
Example: The following command specifies a hold-time value of 60: set neighbor 1.1.10.10 hold-time 60
107
keepalive
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } keepalive number unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } keepalive
keepalive Specifies the maximum amount of time (in seconds) that can elapse between keepalive packet transmissions before the local BGP virtual router terminates the connection to the neighbor. The default is one-third of the hold-time value (for the default hold-time value of 180 seconds, the default keepalive value is 60 seconds).
Example: The following command specifies a keepalive value of 90 seconds: ns(trust-vr/bgp)-> set neighbor 1.1.100.101 keepalive 90
md5-authentication
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } md5-authentication string unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } md5-authentication string
md5-authentication Specifies the BGP peer MD5 authentication string. The maximum length is 32 characters.
Example: The following command specifies an MD5 authentication string (5784ldk094): set neighbor 1.1.100.101 md5-authentication 5784ldk094
med
set neighbor ip_addr med id_num unset neighbor ip_addr med
med Specifies the ID number (id_num) of the local Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED). The default value is 0.
Example: The following command specifies the Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED) 20099 for a neighbor with IP address 1.1.10.10: set neighbor 1.1.10.10 med 20099
108
nhself-enable
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } nhself-enable unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } nhself-enable
nhself-enable Specifies that the Next-Hop path attribute for routes sent to this peer is set to the interface IP address of the local virtual router.
Example: The following command makes the local virtual router the next hop value for the peer 1.1.10.10: set neighbor 1.1.10.10 nhself-enable
peer-group
get neighbor peer-group name_str set neighbor ip_addr peer-group name_str [ ... ] set neighbor peer-group name_str [ ... ] unset neighbor ip_addr peer-group name_str [ ... ] unset neighbor peer-group name_str [ ... ]
peer-group The name of a group of BGP neighbors. Each BGP neighbor in a peer group shares the same update policies. This allows you to set up policies that apply to all the BGP peers instead of creating a separate policy for each peer. Use this command to both create the peer-group and configure peer-group parameters.
reflector-client
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } reflector-client unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } reflector-client
reflector-client Specifies that the neighbor is a reflector client in the route reflector cluster. The local BGP routing instance is the route reflector.
109
Example: The following command specifies that the neighbors in the peer group Acme_Peers are reflector clients: set neighbor peer-group Acme_Peers reflector-client
set neighbor ip_addr reject-default-route unset neighbor ip_addr reject-default-route
reject-default-route Specifies that the local BGP routing instance is to ignore default route advertisements from the peer. By default, default routes advertised by peers are added to the local routing table.
remote-as
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } remote-as number [ local-ip ip_addr ] set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } remote-as number ( outgoing-interface interface | src-interface interface ) unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } remote-as number [ local-ip ip_addr ]
remote-as Identifies the remote AS (number) to be the neighbor of the current BGP speaker. local-ip ip_addr specifies the local IP address for EBGP multi-hop peer. outgoing-interface interface specifies the outgoing interface to which BGP binds. src-interface interface specifies the source interface to which the BGP binds.
Example: The following command identifies AS 30 as the remote AS for the peer 1.1.10.10: set neighbor 1.1.10.10 remote-as 30
110
remove-private-as
set neighbor ip_addr remove-private-as unset neighbor ip_addr remove-private-as
remove-privateas Removes the private AS number from the AS-Path for this neighbor.
retry-time
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } retry-time number unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } retry-time number
retry-time Specifies the time (in seconds) that the BGP routing instance retries to establish a session with the peer after an unsuccessful BGP session establishment attempt. The default is 120 seconds.
route-map
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } route-map name_str { in | out } unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } route-map name_str { in | out }
route-map Specifies the route map to use for the BGP neighbor. The in | out switches determine if the route map applies to incoming or outgoing routes.
Example: The following command specifies that the route map Mkt_Map applies to incoming routes from the neighbor at IP address 1.1.10.10: set neighbor 1.1.10.10 route-map Mkt_Map in
send-community
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } send-community
111
unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } send-community

send-community Directs the BGP routing protocol to transmit the community attribute to the neighbor. By default, the community attribute is not sent to neighbors.
soft-in
clear neighbor ip_addr soft-in
soft-in Specifies that the NetScreen device send a route-refresh request to the neighbor.
soft-out
clear neighbor ip_addr soft-out
soft-out Specifies that the NetScreen device send a full routing table to the neighbor.
stats
clear neighbor ip_addr stats
stats Specifies that the NetScreen device clear the neighbors statistics.
tcp-connect
exec neighbor ip_addr tcp-connect
tcp-connect Tests the TCP connection to the neighbor. You can use this command for troubleshooting a TCP connection.
112
weight
set neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } weight number unset neighbor { ip_addr | peer-group name_str } weight
weight The preference for routes learned from this neighbor. The higher the value, the more preference given to the routes learned from this neighbor. The default value is 100.
Example: The following command assigns a weight of 200 to the path to the neighbor at IP address 1.1.10.10: set neighbor 1.1.10.10 weight 200
113
network
Description: Use the network commands to create, display, or delete static network and subnet entries that are reachable from the virtual router. BGP advertises these entries to peer devices, without first requiring redistribution into BGP (as with static routing table entries). Before you can execute a network command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get network
set
set network ip_addr1/mask1 [ weight number | route-map name_str ] [ check ip_addr2/mask2 | no-check ]
unset
unset network ip_addr1/mask1 [ weight | route-map name_str ] [ check ip_addr2/mask2 | no-check ]
114

Variable Parameters
set network ip_addr1/mask1 [ ... ] unset network ip_addr1/mask1
ip_addr1/mask1 The IP address and subnet mask of the network. The mask does not have to be the same as the subnet mask used in the network. For example, 10.0.0.0/8 is a valid network to be advertised by BGP. When the check option is used, ip_addr1/mask1 can be a MIP address range.
Example: The following command creates a network entry (10.1.0.0/16) for the virtual router trust-vr: set network 10.1.0.0/16
check
set network ip_addr1/mask1 check ip_addr2/mask2
check Directs the device to check ip_addr2/mask2 for network reachability before advertising ip_addr1/mask1 to BGP peers. If ip_addr2/mask2 is reachable, BGP advertises ip_addr1/mask1 to its peers. If ip_addr2/mask2 becomes unreachable, BGP withdraws the route ip_addr1/mask1 from its peers.
no-check
set network ip_addr1/mask1 no-check
no-check Directs the device not to check for network reachability.
route-map
set network ip_addr1/mask1 route-map name_str
route-map Sets the attributes of this route entry to those in the specified route map.
115
weight
set network ip_addr1/mask1 weight number
weight Sets the weight of this route entry to the specified value. Enter a value between 0 and 65535.
116
redistribute
Description: Use the redistribute commands to import routes advertised by external routers that use protocols other than BGP. Use the get redistribution command to display current redistribution settings. Before you can execute a redistribute command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get redistribution
set
set redistribute route-map name_str protocol { connected | imported | ospf | rip | static }
unset
unset redistribute route-map name_str protocol { connected | imported | ospf | rip | static }
117

protocol
set redistribute route-map name_str protocol [ ... ] unset redistribute route-map name_str protocol [ ... ]
protocol The protocol from which the redistributed routes were learned. This can be one of the following: connected, imported, ospf, rip, static.
route-map
set redistribute route-map name_str protocol [ ... ] unset redistribute route-map name_str protocol [ ... ]
route-map The name (name_str) of the route map to be used to filter routes.
118
redistribution
Description: Use the redistribution command to display BGP redistribution rules. Before you can execute the redistribution command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get redistribution

None.
119
reflector
Description: Use the reflector commands to allow the local virtual router to serve as a route reflector to clients in a cluster. A route reflector is a router that passes Interior BGP (IBGP) learned routes to specified IBGP neighbors (clients), thus eliminating the need for each router in a full mesh to talk to every other router. A cluster consists of multiple routers, with a single router designated as the route reflector, and the others as clients. Routers outside of the cluster treat the entire cluster as a single entity, instead of interfacing with each individual router in full mesh. This arrangement greatly reduces overhead. The clients exchange routes with the route reflector, while the route reflector reflects routes between clients. To configure clients in the cluster, use the reflector-client option of the neighbor commands. Before you can execute a reflector command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get reflector
set
set reflector [ cluster-id id_num ]
unset
unset reflector [ cluster-id id_num ]
120

cluster-id
set reflector cluster-id id_num unset reflector cluster-id id_num
cluster-id The ID number (id_num) of the cluster. The cluster ID allows the BGP routing instance to append the cluster ID to the cluster list of a route. BGP must be disabled before you can set the cluster ID.
Example: The following command allows the local BGP routing instance to serve as a route reflector, and sets the cluster ID to 20: set reflector set reflector cluster-id 20
121
Description: Use the reject-default-route commands to enable, disable, or display the reject-default-route setting. Enabling this setting makes the NetScreen device ignore default route advertisements from a BGP peer router. By default, BGP accepts default routes advertised by BGP peers. Before you can execute an reject-default-route command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get reject-default-route
set
set reject-default-route
unset
unset reject-default-route

None.
122
retry-time
Description: Use the retry-time command to specify the amount of time (in seconds) after failing to establish a BGP session with a peer that the local BGP routing instance retries to initiate the session. The default is 120 seconds. Before you can execute a retry-time command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
set
set retry-time number
unset
unset retry-time

None.
123
rib-in
Description: Use the rib-in command to display the BGP internal routing information base (RIB) learned from peers. Before you can execute the rib-in command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get rib-in [ ip_addr/mask ]

Variable Parameter
ip_addr/mask The network prefix for which you want to see RIB information.
124
router-id
Description: Use the router-id command to display the router ID for the virtual router. Before you can execute the router-id command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
get
get router-id

None.
125
synchronization
Description: Use the synchronization command to enable synchronization with an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), such as OSPF. If an EBGP router advertises a route before other routers in the AS learn the route via an IGP, traffic forwarded within the AS could be dropped if it reaches a router that has not learned the route. Synchronization prevents this from occurring by ensuring that a BGP router does not advertise a route until it has also learned the route through an IGP. Before you can execute a synchronization command, you must initiate the bgp context. (See Context Initiation on page 74.)
Syntax
set
set synchronization
unset
unset synchronization

None.
126
chassis
Description: Use the set chassis command to activate the audible alarm feature, or to set the normal and severe temperature thresholds for triggering temperature alarms.
Syntax
get
get chassis
set
set chassis { audible-alarm { all | battery | fan-failed | power-failed | temperature } | temperature-threshold { alarm | severe } { celsius number | fahrenheit number }
unset
unset chassis { audible-alarm { all | battery | fan-failed | power-failed | temperature } | temperature-threshold { alarm | severe } { celsius number | fahrenheit number }
127
Arguments
audible-alarm Enables or disables the audible alarm to announce hardware failure events. all Enables or disables the audible alarm in the event of a fan failure, a interface module failure, a power supply failure, or a temperature increase above an admin-defined threshold. battery Enables or disables the audible alarm in the event of battery failure. fan-failed Enables or disables the audible alarm in the event of a fan failure. module-failed Enables or disables the audible alarm in the event of an interface module failure. power-failed Enables or disables the audible alarm in the event of a power supply failure. temperature Enables or disables the audible alarm if the temperature rises above an admin-defined threshold. temperaturethreshold Defines the temperature (celsius or fahrenheit) required to trigger a regular alarm or a severe alarm. A severe alarm sounds a greater frequency of audible alarms and generates a greater number of event log entries.
Example: To enable the audible alarm to sound in the event that one or more of the fans in the fan assembly fails: set chassis audible-alarm fan-failed
128
clock
Description: Use the clock commands to set the system time on the NetScreen device. Note: By default, the NetScreen device automatically adjusts its system clock for daylight saving time.
Syntax
get
get clock
set
set clock { date [ time ] | dst-off | ntp | timezone number }
unset
unset clock { dst-off | ntp | timezone }

Variable Parameter
set clock date time
date time Configures the correct current date and time on the NetScreen device. Specify the date and time using the following formats: (mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm or mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss).
Example: The following command sets the clock to December 15, 2002, 11:00am: set clock 12/15/2002 11:00
129
dst-off
set clock dst-off unset clock dst-off
dst-off Turns off the automatic time adjustment for daylight saving time.
ntp
set clock ntp unset clock ntp
ntp Configures the device for Network Time Protocol (NTP), which synchronizes computer clocks in the Internet.
timezone
set clock timezone number unset clock timezone number
timezone Sets the current time zone value. This value indicates the time difference between GMT standard time and the current local time (when DST is OFF). When DST is ON and the clock is already set forward one hour, decrease the time difference by one hour and set the minutes accurately. Set the number between -12 and 12.
130
common-criteria
Description: Use the common-criteria command to disable all internal commands. Only the root admin can set this command. If someone other than the root admin tries to set this command, the NetScreen device displays an error message.
Syntax
set
set common-criteria no-internal-commands
unset
unset common-criteria no-internal-commands

no-internal-commands
set common-criteria no-internal-commands unset common-criteria no-internal-commands
no internal commands Disables all internal commands.
131
132
config through interface
This section lists and describes Juniper Networks NetScreen Command Line Interface (CLI) commands config through interface. Note: As you execute CLI commands using the syntax descriptions in this section, you may find that certain commands and command features are unavailable on your Juniper Networks NetScreen platform. A good example is the vsys command, which is available on a NetScreen-500 device, but not on a NetScreen-5XP device. Similarly, some command options are unavailable on certain platforms, as with the df-bit option of the vpn command. This option is available on a NetScreen-500, but not on a NetScreen-5XP.
133
config
Description: Use the config command to display the configuration settings for a NetScreen device or interface. You can display recent configuration settings (stored in RAM), or saved configurations (stored in flash memory).
Syntax
exec
exec config { lock { abort | end | start } | rollback [ enable | disable ] }
get
get config [ all | datafile | hash | lock | nsmgmt-dirty | rollback | saved | timestamp ]
set
set config lock timeout number
unset
unset config lock timeout
134

all
get config all
all Displays all configuration information.
datafile
get config datafile
datafile Displays the Security Manager datafile, which resides on the NetScreen device and contains current device configurations formatted according to the Security Manager syntax schema. ScreenOS generates the datafile from the current device configuration when the Security Manager management system queries the device.
hash
get config hash
hash Displays the MD5 hash of the currently running configuration.
135
lock
exec config lock start exec config lock end exec config lock abort set config lock timeout number unset config lock timeout
lock Instructs the NetScreen device to lock a configuration file in memory for a specified time interval. exec config lock Locks/unlocks the configuration file in memory. You can also abort the lockout and immediately restart the device with the configuration file that was previously locked in memory. set config lock timeout Changes the default lockout period, which is five minutes.
nsmgmt-dirty
clear config nsmgmt-dirty get config nsmgmt-dirty
nsmgmt-dirty Clears the dirty flag, which indicates that an adminstrator changed a ScreenOS setting or parameter locally, instead of through NSM (NetScreen Security Manager). ScreenOS pushes a message to NSM whenever a non-NSM entity, such as a WebUI session or a CLI-capable console session, modifies the device configuration. This message contains a flag named NSP_DEVICE_DIRECTIVE_NSMGMT_DIRTY, which informs NSM that a local change occurred. The device sends the message only once, so it does not send notice of any further locally-executed changes until NSM (or a local administrator) clears the flag. After NSM receives the message and finishes all necessary tasks in response, it issues the clear config nsmgmt-dirty command to the device, thus clearing the dirty flag.
136
rollback
exec config rollback exec config rollback enable exec config rollback disable get config rollback
rollback exec config rollback Reverts the NetScreen device to the LKG (last-known-good) configurationproviding that a LKG configuration is available. exec config rollback - enable Enables the NetScreen device to automatically rollback to the LKG configuration in case of a problem when loading a new configuration. - disable Disables the automation of the configuration rollback feature on the NetScreen device. If you disable the automation of this feature, you can still perform a configuration rollback manually using the exec config rollback command. get config rollback Indicates if a LKG configuration is available for configuration rollback and also indicates if the automatic config rollback feature is enabled. If there is a LKG configuration saved in memory, the output of the command displays: $lkg$.cfg (the name of the LKG file). The config rollback feature is enabled if the output of the command displays = yes at the end of the string. For example: ""$lkg$.cfg"" = yes If the feature is not enabled, the output displays a blank space instead of yes.
saved
get config saved
137
timestamp
get config timestamp
timestamp Displays the time of the latest local change made on the currently-running configuration.
138
console
Description: Use the console commands to define or list the CLI console parameters. The console parameters determine the following: Whether the NetScreen device displays messages in the active console window The number of lines that may appear on a console window page The maximum time that can pass before automatic logout occurs due to inactivity
If console access is currently disabled, you can enable it using the unset console disable command through a Telnet connection.
Syntax
get
get console
set
set console { aux disable | disable | page number | timeout number }
unset
unset console { aux disable | disable | page | timeout }
139

aux disable
set console aux disable unset console aux disable
aux disable Enables or disables the auxiliary modem console port. Some platforms have this auxiliary port, in addition to the standard console port. An admin can use the auxiliary modem console port to execute CLI configuration commands. Use the aux disable switch to disable the port, when you need to enforce strict security by excluding admin access through this port.
disable
set console disable unset console disable
disable Disables console access through the serial port. Two confirmations are required to disable access to the console. Executing this option saves the current NetScreen configuration and closes the current login session. Note: After you execute the console disable option, non-serial console sessions can still function (as with SSH and Telnet).
page
set console page number unset console page
page An integer value specifying how many lines appear on each page between page breaks. When you set this value to zero, there are no page breaks, and the text appears in a continual stream.
Example: To define 20 lines per page displayed on the console: set console page 20
140
timeout
set console timeout number unset console timeout
timeout Determines how many minutes the device waits before closing an inactive adminstrator session. If you set the value to zero, the console never times out.
Example: To define the console timeout value to 40 minutes: set console timeout 40
Defaults
Access to the serial console is enabled. The console displays 22 lines per page. The default inactivity timeout is 10 minutes. The NetScreen device sends console messages to the buffer by default.
141
counter
Description: Use the counter commands to clear or display the values contained in traffic counters. Traffic counters provide processing information, which you can use to monitor traffic flow. NetScreen devices maintain the following categories of counters: Screen counters, for monitoring firewall behavior for the entire zone or for a particular interface Policy counters, for reporting the amount of traffic affected by specified policies Hardware counters, for monitoring hardware performance and tracking the number of packets containing errors Flow counters, for monitoring the number of packets inspected at the flow level
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] counter { all | ha | screen [ interface interface | zone zone ] }
get
get counter { flow | statistics [ interface interface | zone zone ] | screen { interface interface | zone zone } policy pol_num { day | hour | minute | month | second } }
142

cluster
clear [ cluster ] counter [ ... ]
Example: To clear the contents of all counters and propagate the operation to all devices in the cluster: clear cluster counter all
flow
get counter flow [ ... ]
flow Specifies counters for packets inspected at the flow level. A flow-level inspection examines various aspects of a packet to gauge its nature and intent.
ha
clear [ cluster ] counter ha
ha Specifies counters for packets transmitted across a high-availability (HA) link between two NetScreen devices. An HA-level inspection keeps count of the number of packets and packet errors.
interface
clear [ cluster ] counter screen interface interface
interface The name of the interface. Specifies counters for packets inspected at the interface level. The inspection checks for packet errors and monitors the quantity of packets according to established threshold settings. For more information on interfaces, see Interface Names on page A-I.
143
policy
get counter policy pol_num { day | hour | minute | month | second }
policy Identifies a particular policy (pol_num). This allows you to monitor the amount of traffic that the policy permits. day | hour | minute | month | second Specifies the period of time for monitoring traffic permitted by a particular policy.
screen
clear [ cluster ] counter screen [ interface interface | zone zone ] get counter screen { interface interface | zone zone }
screen Clears the screen counters. The interface interface parameter specifies the name of a particular interface. For more information on interfaces, see Interface Names on page A-I.
statistics
get counter statistics [ ... ]
statistics Displays the counter statistics.
zone
get counter screen zone zone
zone Identifies the zone, and specifies counters for packets inspected at the zone level. The inspection checks for packet errors and monitors the quantity of packets according to established threshold settings. For more information on interfaces, see Interface Names on page A-I.
144
delete
Description: Use delete to delete persistent information in flash memory.
Syntax
delete
delete [ cluster ] { crypto { auth-key | file } | file dev_name:filename | node_secret ipaddr ip_addr | nsmgmt keys | pki object-id { system | id_num } | ssh device all }

crypto
delete [ cluster ] crypto auth-key delete [ cluster ] crypto file
crypto Removes encrypted items from flash memory. auth-key Removes image signature verification key. file Remove all crypto hidden files.
145
file
delete file dev_name:filename
dev_name:filename The file residing on the module named dev_name from the flash card memory. Flash is the only dev_name available. The filename is the file that you want to delete that was saved on the flash card.
Examples: The following command deletes a file named myconfig in the flash memory on the memory board: delete file flash:myconfig
node_secret ipaddr
delete node_secret ipaddr ip_addr
node_secret ipaddr Deletes the SecurID stored node secret. The node secret is a 16-byte key shared between the SecurID Ace server and its clients (which may include the NetScreen device). The server and the clients use this key to encrypt exchanged traffic. The Ace Server sends the node secret to the NetScreen device during initial authentication. The node secret must remain consistent with the ACE Server. Otherwise, there can be no communication between the NetScreen device and the ACE Server. You can detect communication problems by checking the ACE Server log for a message saying that the node secret is invalid. If you find such a message, the solution is as follows. Execute delete node_secret. On the ACE Server, change the configuration for the client (the NetScreen device) to say that the server did not send the node secret. This causes the NetScreen device to request the node secret, and authorizes the ACE Server to send a new one. This action resyncs communication. The ipaddr ip_addr parameter clears the node secret associated with the outgoing IP address of the interface that communicates with the SecurID server (ip_addr).
146
nsmgmt
delete nsmgmt keys
nsmgmt keys Deletes the public and private keys for nsmgmt. The NetScreen device uses these keys to encrypt and decrypt the Configlet file.
pki object-id
delete pki object-id { system | id_num }
pki obect-id system Deletes a particular PKI object, which is a four diget value used to identify a pki object in a NetScreen device. Deletes the system generated self-signed certificate.
ssh device all

delete ssh device all
ssh device all Clears all sessions and keys and disables SSH for all vsys on the device. The information removed includes: Active SSH sessions SSH enablement for the current vsys PKA keys Host keys
147
di
Description: Use the di commands to configure the NetScreen device to perform DI (Deep Inspection) on packets that use specified protocols. DI is a mechanism for filtering traffic permitted by the NetScreen firewall. Deep Inspection examines Layer 3 and 4 packet headers and Layer 7 application content and protocol characteristics in an effort to detect and prevent any attacks or anomalous behavior that might be present. Note: To use this command, you must install a license key to enable advanced features.
Syntax
get
get di { disable_tcp_checksum | service { aim [ max_flap_length | max_icmb_length | max_oft_frame | max_tlv_length ] | dns [ cache_size | cache_time | nxt_length | report_unexpected | report_unknowns |
udp_message_limit ] | ftp [ failed_logins | line_length | password_length | pathname_length | sitestring_length | username_length ] | gnutella [ max_line_length | max_query_size | max_ttl_hops ] | http [ alternate_ports | auth_length | brute_search | content_type_length | cookie_length | failed_logins | header_length | host_length | referer_length | request_length | user_agent_length ] | imap [ failed_logins | flag_length | line_length |
literal_length | mbox_length | pass_length | ref_length | user_length ] | msn [ max_display_name | max_group_name | max_ip_port | max_phone_number | max_url | max_user_name | max_user_state ] | msrpc [ epm_max_num_entries | epm_max_tower_len | max_frag_len | ] | nbname [ pointer_loop_limit | ] | pop3 [ apop_length | failed_logins | line_length | max_msg_num | pass_length | user_length ] | smb
[ failed_logins | regkey_length | ] | smtp [ check_headers_in_body | cmdline_length | content_filename_length | content_name_length | domain_length | multipart_depth | num_rcpt | parse_cnt_length | path_length | replyline_length | textline_length | user_length ] | ymsg [ max_activity | max_buddy_list | max_challenge | max_chatroom_msg | max_chatroom_name | max_conf_msg | max_conference_name | max_cookie_length | max_crypt | max_file_name | max_group_name | max_mail_address | max_mail_subject | max_message_size | max_url_name |
max_user_name | max_webcam_key | max_yahoo_message ] } }
set
set di { disable_tcp_checksum | service { aim [ max_flap_length number | max_icmb_length number | max_oft_frame number | max_tlv_length number ] | dns { cache_size number | cache_time number | nxt_length number | report_unexpected number | report_unknowns number | udp_message_limit number } | ftp { failed_logins number | line_length number | password_length number |
152
pathname_length number | sitestring_length number | username_length number } | gnutella { max_line_length number | max_query_size number | max_ttl_hops number } | http { alternate_ports number | auth_length number | brute_search number | content_type_length number | cookie_length number | failed_logins number | header_length number | host_length number | referer_length number | request_length number | user_agent_length number } | imap { failed_logins number | flag_length number | line_length number | literal_length number | mbox_length number | pass_length number | ref_length number | user_length number } | msn
[ max_display_name number | max_group_name number | max_ip_port number | max_phone_number number | max_url number | max_user_name number | max_user_state number ] | msrpc [ epm_max_num_entries number | epm_max_tower_len number | max_frag_len number | ] | nbname [ pointer_loop_limit number | ] | pop3 { apop_length number | failed_logins number | line_length number | max_msg_num number | pass_length number | user_length number } | smb [ failed_logins number | regkey_length number ] | smtp { check_headers_in_body number |
cmdline_length number | content_filename_length number | content_name_length number | domain_length number | multipart_depth number | num_rcpt number | parse_cnt_length number | path_length number | replyline_length number | textline_length number | user_length number } } }
unset
unset di { disable_tcp_checksum | service { aim { max_flap_length | max_icmb_length | max_oft_frame | max_tlv_length } | dns { cache_size | cache_time | nxt_length | report_unexpected |
155
report_unknowns | udp_message_limit } | ftp { failed_logins | line_length | password_length | pathname_length | sitestring_length | username_length } | gnutella { max_line_length | max_query_size | max_ttl_hops } | http { alternate_ports | auth_length | brute_search | content_type_length | cookie_length | failed_logins | header_length | host_length | referer_length | request_length | user_agent_length } | imap { failed_logins | flag_length |
line_length | literal_length | mbox_length | pass_length | ref_length | user_length } | msn { max_display_name | max_group_name | max_ip_port | max_phone_number | max_url | max_user_name | max_user_state } | msrpc { epm_max_num_entries | epm_max_tower_len | max_frag_len | } | nbname { pointer_loop_limit | } | pop3 { apop_length | failed_logins | line_length | max_msg_num | pass_length | user_length } |
smb { failed_logins | regkey_length | { | smtp { check_headers_in_body | cmdline_length | content_filename_length | content_name_length | domain_length | multipart_depth | num_rcpt | parse_cnt_length | path_length | replyline_length | textline_length | user_length } | ymsg { max_activity | max_buddy_list | max_challenge | max_chatroom_msg | max_chatroom_name | max_conf_msg | max_conference_name | max_cookie_length | max_crypt | max_file_name | max_group_name | max_mail_address | max_mail_subject | max_message_size |
max_url_name | max_user_name | max_webcam_key | max_yahoo_message } } }

disable_tcp_checksum
get disable_tcp_checksum set disable_tcp_checksum unset disable_tcp_checksum
disable_tcp_checksum Disables the TCP checksum operation. The NetScreen device uses TCP checksums in exchanged packets to detect TCP transmission errors. Because the checksum operation uses up processor resources, it may be useful to disable it. The NetScreen device performs the checksum operation by default.
Examples: The following command disables the checksum operation: set di disable_dhcp_checksum The following command enables the checksum operation: unset di disable_dhcp_checksum
159
aim
get di service aim { ... } set di service aim { ... } unset di service aim { ... }
aim Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates America Online Instant Messaging (AIM) traffic. AIM makes use of the OSCAR protocol, which in turn uses the FLAP protocol for packet structuring. max_flap_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a FLAP packet6-byte header + data. Minimum: 6 bytes; maximum 10,000 bytes; default: 10,000 bytes. max_icmb_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in an inter-client-message block (ICMB). When an instant message is transmitted, the FLAP protocol breaks it into multiple ICMBs and sends each block in a separate TLV. Minimum: 0; maximum: 10,000; default: 2000. max_oft_frame number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in an OSCAR file transfer (OFT) frame. Minimum: 0; maximum: 10,000; default: 10,000. max_tlv_length number Specifies the length of a Type, Length, and Value (TLV) unit. A TLV unit consists of a 2-byte type code + a 2-byte value for Length + the actual data in the Value field. TLVs often appear in the FLAP data field. Minimum: 0; maximum: 100,000; default: 8000.
dns
get di service dns { ... } set di service dns { ... } unset di service dns { ... }
dns Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates Domain Name System (DNS) traffic and how it caches DNS queries. cache_size number The maximum size, in bytes, of the DNS cache on the NetScreen device. Minimum: 0; maximum: 1,000,000; default: 100. cache_time number The maximum number of seconds that the NetScreen device stores a query in its cache. Minimum: 0; maximum: 3600; default: 60.
160
nxt_length number The maximum number of bytes in a nonexistent resource record (NXT RR) in a DNS response message. Minimum: 1024; maximum: 8192; default: 4096. report_unexpected { 0 | 1 } Enables or disables the reporting of unexpected DNS parameters. A value of 0 disables such reporting, and 1 enables it. The following are examples of unexpected DNS parameters: - The TYPE value is equal to or greater than 252. Values equal to and greater than 252 are reserved for QTYPE fields. (See RFC 1035, Domain Names Implementation and Specification.) - The RR TYPE code is 249 but the CLASS code is not 255 (any class). TYPE 249 is for the Transaction Key (TKEY) RR. The TKEY RR provides a mechanism with which a DNS server and resolver can establish shared secret keys to authenticate the DNS queries and responses passing between them. (See RFC 2930, Secret Key Establishment for DNS (TKEY RR).) By default, the reporting of unexpected DNS parameters is disabled. report_unknowns { 0 | 1 } Enables or disables the reporting of any unknown DNS TYPE and CLASS paramenter. A value of 0 disables such reporting, and 1 enables it. An unknown DNS TYPE or CLASS is anything not defined in one of the following DNS-related RFCs: 1035, 1183, 2535, 1712, 1876, 1886, 1995, 2053, 2065, 2538, 2671, 2672, and 2930. By default, the reporting of unknown DNS parameters is disabled. udp_message_limit number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a UDP message sent during a DNS exchange. Minimum: 512; maximum: 4096; default: 512.
ftp
get di service ftp { ... } set di service ftp { ... } unset di service ftp { ... }
ftp Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates File Transfer Protocol (FTP) traffic. The NetScreen device compares actual FTP traffic with maximum settings of what you consider to be normal FTP traffic. The NetScreen device considers any traffic exceeding such settings as anomalous. failed_logins number Specifies the maximum number of failed login attempts per minute to an FTP server from a single host. Minimum: 2; maximum: 100; default: 8. line_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in an FTP command line. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 1024.
161
password_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an FTP password. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 64. pathname_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in an FTP path name. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 512. sitestring_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in an FTP site string. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 512. username_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an FTP user name. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 32.
gnutella
get di service gnutella { ... } set di service gnutella { ... } unset di service gnutella { ... }
gnutella Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates Gnutella traffic. Gnutella is a peer-to-peer (P2P) file-sharing protocol and application that does not make use of centralized servers. max_line_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a Gnutella command line. Minimum: 1; maximum 4096; default: 2048. max_query_size number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a query sent between two Gnutella peers. Minimum: 256; maximum: 4096; default: 256. max_ttl_hops number Specifies the maximum number of network forwarding devices (hops) already passed plus the remaining Time to Live (TTL) value indicated in the Gnutella header. Minimum:1; maximum: 10; default: 8.
162
http
get di service http { ... } set di service http { ... } unset di service http { ... }
http Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) traffic. The NetScreen device compares actual HTTP traffic with maximum settings of what you consider to be normal HTTP traffic. The NetScreen device considers any traffic exceeding such settings as anomalous. alternate_ports { 0 | 1 } Enables or disables the inspection of HTTP traffic on the default HTTP port of 80 as well as on the following ports: 7001, 8000, 8001, 8100, 8200, 8080, 8888, and 9080. A value of 0 disables HTTP traffic inspection on these alternative ports, and 1 enables it. By default, this is enabled. auth_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in an HTTP header authorization line. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 512. brute_search number Specifies the maximum number of HTTP errors per minute. If the NetScreen device detects more HTTP 301 (Moved Permanently), 403 (Forbidden), 404 (Not Found), and 405 (Method Not Allowed) errors than the specified maximum, the device considers it an anomalous event. Minimum: 2; maximum: 100; default: 16. content_type_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for a HTTP header Content Type field. This field specifies the media type of the data contained in the HTTP packet. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 512. cookie_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a cookie. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 8192. Note: Cookies that exceed the cookie length setting can match the protocol anomaly HTTP-HEADEROVERFLOW and produce unnecessary log records. If the NetScreen device generates too many log records for this anomaly, increase the cookie length setting. failed_logins number Specifies the maximum number of failed login attempts per minute to an HTTP server from a single host. Minimum: 2; maximum: 100; default: 8. header_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an HTTP packet header. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 8192.
163
host_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for a HTTP header host, which can be an Internet host domain name or IP address. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 64. referer_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for the header referer field, which the client uses to specify the address URI (Uniform Resource Identifier). The URI is a formatted string that identifies a network resource by a characteristic such as a name or a location. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 8192. request_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an HTTP request, which includes information such as a network resource identifier, the method to apply to the resource, and the protocol version. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 8192. user_agent_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for a HTTP header user-agent field, which contains information about the user agent that originated the request. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 256.
imap
get di service imap { ... } set di service imap { ... } unset di service imap { ... }
imap Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) traffic. The NetScreen device compares actual IMAP traffic with maximum settings of what you consider to be normal IMAP traffic. The NetScreen device considers any traffic exceeding such settings as anomalous. failed_logins number Specifies the maximum number of failed login attempts per minute to an IMAP server from a single host. Minimum: 2; maximum: 100; default: 8. flag_length number Specifes the maximum number of bytes for an IMAP flag. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 64. line_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an IMAP line. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 2048.
164
literal_length number Specifies the maximum number of octets in a literal string. In IMAP4, a string can be in one of two forms: literal or quoted. As defined in RFC 2060 Internet Message Access Protocol Version 4rev1: A literal is a sequence of zero or more octets (including CR and LF), prefix-quoted with an octet count in the form of an open brace ("{"), the number of octets, close brace ("}"), and CRLF. Minimum: 1; maximum: 16,777,215; default: 65,535. mbox_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an IMAP mailbox. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 64. pass_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an IMAP password. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 64. ref_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an IMAP reference. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 64. user_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an IMAP user name. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 64.
165
msn
get di service msn { ... } set di service msn { ... } unset di service msn { ... }
msn Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates Microsoft Network (MSN) Instant Messaging traffic. The NetScreen device compares actual MSN traffic with maximum settings of what you consider to be normal MSN traffic. The NetScreen device considers any traffic exceeding such settings as anomalous. max_display_name number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in an MSN display name, which is the name that you use to identify yourself to other MSN principals. A display name is also known as a friendly name, custom name or custom user name. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 128. max_group_name number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an MSN group. Every group has a name and an ID number, and every principal belongs to at least one group: the default group named ~ (tilde) with ID 0. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 84. max_ip_port number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for the IP address:port number of an MSN server (notification server or switchboard server) for a switchboard session. Minimum: 30; maximum: 40; default: 30. Note: All MSN notification and switchboard servers use port 1863. max_phone_number number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for a phone number in an MSN Forward List (FL). The FL is essentially a contact list of other MSN principals. Minimum: 20; maximum: 50; default: 20. max_url number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for a URL address in an MSN message. Minimum: 1; maximum: 2000; default: 1024.
166
max_user_name number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in any MSN users name. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 84. max_user_state number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in an MSN user state. A user state is a 3-letter code that indicates the status of a users connection. Some examples: NLN (online), FLN (offline), HDN (hidden/invisible). There are other states that are substates of NLN. Some examples of those: BSY (Busy), IDL (Idle), and BRB (Be Right Back). Minimum: 3; maximum: 15; default: 3.
msrpc
get di service msrpc { ... } set di service msrpc { ... } unset di service msrpc { ... }
msrpc Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates Microsoft Remote Procedure Call (MSRPC) traffic. The NetScreen device compares actual MSRPC traffic with maximum settings of what you consider to be normal MSRPC traffic. The NetScreen device considers any traffic exceeding such settings as anomalous. epm_max_num_entries number Specifies the maximum number of entries in an MSRPC endpoint mapper (EPM) message. Minimum: 100; maximum: 8192; default: 100. epm_max_tower_len number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a protocol tower representation in an MSRPC EPM message. A protocol tower consists of an interface identifier and binding information between a client and server that permits the client to make a remote procedure call to the server. Minimum: 8192; maximum: 268,435,456; default: 8192. max_frag_len number Specifies the maximum length, in bytes, of an MSRPC fragment. Minimum: 4096; maximum: 65,535; default: 8192.
167
nbname
get di service nbname { ... } set di service nbname { ... } unset di service nbname { ... }
nbname Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates NetBIOS name (Nbname) traffic. The NetScreen device compares actual NBname traffic with maximum settings of what you consider to be normal Nbname traffic. The NetScreen device considers any traffic exceeding such settings as anomalous. pointer_loop_limit number Specifies the maximum number of pointer loop levels for NetBIOS names. Minimum: 0; maximum: 24; default: 8.
pop3
get di service pop3 { ... } set di service pop3 { ... } unset di service pop3 { ... }
pop3 Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) traffic. The NetScreen device compares actual POP3 traffic with maximum settings of what you consider to be normal POP3 traffic. The NetScreen device considers any traffic exceeding such settings as anomalous. apop_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for an Authenticated Post Office Protocol (APOP) command, which a POP3 user issues when authenticating himself to a POP3 mail server. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 100. failed_logins number Specifies the maximum number of failed login attempts per minute to a POP3 server from a single host. Minimum: 2; maximum: 100; default: 4. line_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for any POP3 line. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 512. max_msg_num number Specifies the maximum number of messages in a single mailbox on a POP3 server. Minimum:100; maximum: 10,000,000; default: 10,000,000.
168
pass_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a POP3 password. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 64. user_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in an POP3 user name. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 64.
smb
get di service smb { ... } set di service smb { ... } unset di service smb { ... }
smb Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates Server Message Block (SMB) traffic. The NetScreen device compares actual SMB traffic with maximum settings of what you consider to be normal SMB traffic. The NetScreen device considers any traffic exceeding such settings as anomalous. failed_logins number Specifies the maximum number of failed login attempts per minute to an SMB server from a single host. Minimum: 2; maximum: 100; default: 8. regkey_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in an SMB registry key. Minimum: 32; maximum: 64,535; default: 8192.
169
smtp
get di service smtp { ... } set di service smtp { ... } unset di service smtp { ... }
smtp Use the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) threshold parameters to control how the NetScreen device handles SMTP packets. The threshold parameters define the boundaries of normal SMTP traffic. Traffic that exceeds these boundaries is considered abnormal, and might contain protocol anomalies. The default SMTP thresholds are below: check_headers_in_body { 0 | 1 } Enables or disables the inspection of SMTP traffic for e-mail headers in the body of an e-mail message, which can occur when a bounced message contains an attachment. A value of 0 disables checking for SMTP headers in the body of an e-mail message, and 1 enables it. By default, this is disabled. cmdline_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in any command line sent from an SMTP client within an SMTP message envelope. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 1024. content_filename_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes for the name of a file in a content-disposition filename parameter in an SMTP header. For information about the content-disposition header field, see RFC 2183, Communicating Presentation Information in Internet Messages: The Content-Disposition Header Field. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 128. content_name_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in the content-type name attribute in an SMTP header. Two examples of content-type names are text/plain; name=CLI.pdf, and application/zip; name=nsremote.zip. For information about various content types, see RFC 2046 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) Part Two: Media Types. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 128. domain_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in the domain name component of the forward-path field in a RCPT command or reverse-path field in a MAIL command in an SMTP message envelope. The forward-path field indicates the destination mailbox. The reverse-path field indicates the senders mailbox. The mailbox names consist of two parts: usr_name@domain_name Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 64.
170
multipart_depth number Specifies the number of nested elements in a multipart content-type. For an example, see Appendix A A Complex Multipart Example in RFC 2049, Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) Part Five: Conformance Criteria and Examples. Minimum: 1; maximum: 16; default: 4. num_rcpt number Specifies the maximum number of recipients for an SMTP message. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1000; default: 100. parse_cnt_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes of encoded MIME data that the NetScreen device must decode. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 128. path_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes that can appear in the forward-path field in a RCPT command or in the reverse-path field in a MAIL command in an SMTP message envelope. The forward-path typically consists of the destination mailbox. The reverse-path consists of the senders mailbox. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 256. replyline_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a reply line sent from an SMTP server. The total length includes the three-digit reply code and the <CRLF>. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 512. textline_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a single SMTP text line, including the <CRLF>. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 512. user_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a user name component of the forward-path field in a RCPT command or reverse-path field in a MAIL command in an SMTP message envelope. The forward-path field indicates the destination mailbox. The reverse-path field indicates the senders mailbox. The mailbox names consist of two parts: usr_name@domain_name Minimum: 1; maximum: 8192; default: 256.
171
ymsg
get di service ymsg { ... } set di service ymsg { ... } unset di service ymsg { ... } ymsg
Determines how the NetScreen device evaluates Yahoo! Messenger (YMSG) traffic. The NetScreen device compares actual YMSG traffic with maximum settings of what you consider to be normal YMSG traffic. The NetScreen device considers any traffic exceeding such settings as anomalous. max_activity number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in the length of a data type activity value. Data type activities can be such activities as PEERTOPEER, FILEXFER, and TYPING. Minimum: 1; maximum: 20; default: 15. max_buddy_list number Specifies the maximum length in bytes of the buddy list that a YMSG server sends. Minimum: 20; maximum: 8000; default: 8000. max_challenge number Specifies the maximum length in bytes of the challenge string that a YMSG server sends during the authentication process. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 84. max_chatroom_msg number Specifies the maximum length in bytes of a message sent in a chatroom. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8000; default: 2000. max_chatroom_name number Specifies the maximum length in bytes of a YMSG chatroom name. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8000; default: 1024. max_conf_msg number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in a YMSG conference join message. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8000; default: 1024. max_conference_name number Specifies the maximum length in bytes of a YMSG conference session name. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8000; default: 1024. max_cookie_length number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in the cookie that a YMSG server sends to a client. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1000; default: 400. max_crypt number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in the encrypted password sent during the YMSG authorization process. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8000; default: 1024.
172
max_file_name number Specifies the maximum length in bytes of the name of a file that YMSG peers can transfer to each other. Minimum: 1; maximum: 8000; default: 1000. max_group_name number Specifies the maximum length in bytes for a name of a group of buddies. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 84. max_mail_address number Specifies the maximum length in bytes of the address in an e-mail message that a YMSG server sends as part of a new e-mail alert. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 84. max_mail_subject number Specifies the length in bytes of the subject line in an e-mail message that a YMSG server sends as part of a new e-mail alert. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 128. max_message_size number Specifies the maximum length in bytes of a YMSG instant message. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 128. max_url_name number Specifies the maximum length in bytes of a uniform resource locator (URL). Minimum: 1; maximum: 8000; default: 1024. max_user_name number Specifies the maximum length in bytes of a YMSG username. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 84. max_webcam_key number Specifies the maximum number of bytes in the webcam key that YMSG uses to support webcam transmissions. Minimum: 1; maximum: 1024; default: 124. max_yahoo_message number Specifies the maximum total length in bytes of a YMSG instant message. Minimum: 200; maximum: 8192; default: 8192.
173
dip
Description: Use dip commands to set up a Dynamic IP (DIP) group, display DIP group information, or assign the same IP address from a port-translating DIP pool to a host that originates multiple concurrent sessions (sticky dip). A DIP group contains one or more DIP pools, each pool consisting of a range of IP addresses defined on a Layer 3 security zone interface, Layer 3 security zone extended interface, or numbered tunnel interface. When multiple NetScreen devices are in a high availability cluster, a policy requiring source address translation and referencing a DIP pool defined on one virtual security interface (VSI) can result in dropped traffic. When that traffic arrives at a physical NetScreen device on which the DIP pool specified in the policy belongs to a VSI in an inactive virtual security device (VSD), the device drops the traffic because it cannot find the specified DIP pool to use for address translation. If, instead, the policy references a DIP group that contains DIP pools on different egress VSIs, the NetScreen device receiving the traffic can use the DIP pool belonging to the VSI for its active VSD. Note: If the range of addresses in a DIP pool is in the same subnet as the interface IP address, the pool must exclude the interface IP address, router IP addresses, and any mapped IP or virtual IP addresses (MIPs and VIPs) that might also be in that subnet. If the range of addresses is in the subnet of an extended interface, the pool must exclude the extended interface IP address.
Syntax
get
get dip [ all ]
set
set dip { group { id_num1 [ member id_num2 ] } | sticky }
174
unset
unset dip { group { id_num1 [ member id_num2 ] } | sticky }

group
set dip group id_num1 [ member id_num2 ] unset dip group id_num1 [ member id_num2 ]
group Creates a DIP group or adds a DIP pool to a group. id_num1 is the identification number you assign to the new DIP group. member id_num2 specifies the identification number of a DIP pool.
Example: The following commands create DIP pools and a DIP group. set set set set set DIP pool with ID 5 for interface ethernet3, which has IP address 1.1.1.1/24 DIP pool with ID 6 for interface ethernet3:1, which has IP address 1.1.1.2/24 DIP group with ID number 7. Both DIP pools added to the DIP group interface ethernet3 dip 5 1.1.1.10 1.1.1.10 interface ethernet3:1 dip 6 1.1.1.11 1.1.1.11 dip group 7 dip group 7 member 5 dip group 7 member 6
sticky
set dip sticky unset dip sticky
sticky Specifies that the NetScreen device assigns the same IP address to a host for multiple concurrent sessions.
175
dns
Description: Use dns commands to configure Domain Name System (DNS) or to display DNS configuration information. DNS allows network devices to identify each other using domain names instead of IP addresses. Support for DNS is provided by a DNS server, which keeps a table of domain names with associated IP addresses. For example, using DNS makes it possible to reference locations by domain name (such as www.netscreen.com) in addition to using the routable IP address (which for www.netscreen.com is 209.125.148.135). DNS translation is supported in all the following applications: Address Book Syslog E-mail WebTrends Websense LDAP SecurID RADIUS NetScreen-Global PRO
Before you can use DNS for domain name/address resolution, you must enter the addresses for DNS servers (the primary and secondary DNS servers) in the NetScreen device.
176
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] dns [ ddns [ id id_num ] | proxy | server-select [ domain dom_name ] ]
exec
exec dns { ddns [ id id_num ] | refresh }
get
get dns { ddns [ id id_num ] | host { cache | report | settings } | name dom_name | proxy | server-select }
177
set
set dns { ddns [ enable id id_num } [ server name_str ] server-type { ddo | dyndns } [ refresh-interval number ] [ minimum-update-interval number ] [ clear-text ] src-interface interface [ host-name name_str ] | username name_str password pswd_str [ agent name_str ] } ] | host { dns1 ip_addr | dns2 ip_addr | schedule time [ interval number ] } | proxy [ enable ] | server-select domain [ [ outgoing-interface interface ] failover | primary-server ip_addr [ failover | secondary-server ip_addr [ failover | tertiary-server ip_addr
178
[ failover ] ] ] ] }
unset
unset dns host { dns1 | dns2 | schedule }

cluster
clear [ cluster ] dns
ddns
get dns ddns [ id id_num ] [ ... ] set dns ddns enable set dns ddns [ id id_num ] [ ... ] unset dns ddns
ddns Initiates or deletes the DDNS (Dynamic DNS) entry in the DDNS Entries table. Each entry represents a module that allocates all resources needed for DDNS. Deleting an entry frees the resources allocated for the module.
179
Dynamic DNS (DDNS) is a mechanism that allows clients to dynamically update IP addresses for registered domain names. This is useful when an ISP uses PPP, DHCP, or XAuth to dynamically change the IP address for a CPE router (such as a NetScreen device) that protects a web server. Thus, any clients from the internet can access the web server using a domain name, even if the IP address of the CPE router previously changed dynamically. This is made possible by a DDNS server such as dyndns.org or ddo.jp, which contains the dynamically-changed addresses and their associated domain names. The CPE updates these DDNS servers with this information, periodically or in response to IP address changes. enable Enables the DDNS module. id id_num Identifies a DDNS entry in the DDNS Entries table. If an entry already exists with this ID number, the set dns ddns id id_num command updates the server information for that entry. If not, the command creates a new entry. - server name_str The FQDN (Fully-Qualified Domain Name) of the DDNS server. The maximum length is 63 characters. - server-type { ddo | dyndns } The type (DDO or DYNDNS) of DDNS server. - clear-text Disables HTTPS. The default is to use HTTPS encryption, for both servers. - refresh-interval number The time interval (expressed in hours) between refreshing of the DDNS entry. The default is 168 hours, and the allowable range is 1-8760 hours. - minimum-update-interval number The minimum period (expressed in minutes) between updates. The default is 10 minutes, and the allowable range is 1-1440 minutes. - src-interface interface The interface through which the device communicates with the DDNS server. The optional host-name name_str parameter identifies a host name for the Netscree device. Note: This value is necessary only if the DDNS server is of type DYNDNS, not DDO.
180
- username name_str password pswd_str [ agent name_str ] Identifies the username and password for the DDNS account. The maximum length for each of these settings is 63 characters. - agent name_str Specifies the name of the agent. The default value is: string1-string2-id_num, where: - string1 the company name - string2 the software version - id_num the serial number The maximum length of the total agent string is 63 characters.
host
get dns host { ... } set dns host { ... } unset dns host { ... }
host cache Displays the DNS cache table. dns1 ip_addr Specifies the primary DNS server. dns2 ip_addr Specifies the backup DNS server. name The domain name of the host, listed in the DNS table. - Using the name option with get directs the NetScreen device to look up an IP address for the given domain name. - Using the name option with set places an entry in the DNS table, representing a host device with a host name and IP address. This allows you to reach the host from the NetScreen device using the host name. For example, executing set dns host name acme 2.2.2.25 creates a DNS table entry for a host at address 2.2.2.25, with a host name of acme. This allows you to reach the host from the NetScreen device, as with the command ping acme. Note: The DNS table is local to the NetScreen device, and functions only as a proxy for the actual DNS server. Consequently, other network nodes cannot query the listed names using the NetScreen device. The main purpose of the table is to let you create an alias for an external host and to access that host from the NetScreen device.
181
report Displays the DNS lookup table. schedule time Specifies the time of day to refresh DNS entries. The format of this parameter is hh:mm. The interval number parameter specifies a 4-, 6-, 8-, or 12-hour interval between DNS table refresh operations. The default interval is 24 hours; that is, once a day at the scheduled DNS lookup time. Use this option to refresh the DNS table more frequently. settings Displays DNS settings, including IP addresses, refresh setting, and the number of UDP sessions.
Example1: The following command sets up a host as the primary DNS server at IP address 1.2.2.45: set dns host dns1 1.2.2.45 Example2: The following command schedules a refresh time at 23:59 each day, and a DNS table refresh interval of 12 hours: set dns host schedule 23:59 interval 12
proxy
get dns proxy set dns proxy [ enable ] unset dns proxy [ enable ]
proxy Initializes or deletes the DNS proxy. Initialization allocates all resources needed for the proxy. The enable switch enables or disables the DNS proxy itself. The DNS proxy feature provides a transparent mechanism that allows clients to make split DNS queries. The proxy redirects the DNS queries selectively to specific DNS servers, according to partial or complete domain specifications. This is useful when VPN tunnels or PPPoE virtual links provide multiple network connectivity, and it is necessary to direct some DNS queries to one network, and other queries to another network.
182
The most important advantages of a DNS proxy are as follows. Domain lookups are usually more efficient. For example, DNS queries meant for the corporate domain (such as marketing.acme.com) could go to the corporate DNS server, while all others go to the ISP DNS server, thus reducing the load on the corporate server. DNS proxy can prevent domain information from leaking into the internet, thus preventing malicious users from learning about internal network configuration.
refresh
exec dns refresh
refresh Refreshes all DNS entries. Using the option directs the NetScreen device to perform a manual DNS lookup.
server-select
clear [ cluster ] dns server-select domain dom_name get dns server-select set dns server-select domain dom_name [ outgoing-interface interface { ... } ]
server-select Identifies external DNS servers according to all or part of the FQDN (Fully-Qualified Domain Name) contained in each DNS query. This process is called proxy DNS. primary-server ip_addr secondary-server ip_addr tertiary-server ip_addr The failover switch directs the DNS to fail over to another server if the currently active server fails. Use the set dns server-select commands to create a partially-filled or fully-filled entry for a DNS proxy domain lookup. Such entries allow the NetScreen device to selectively direct DNS queries to different DNS servers. For example, you can direct all DNS queries with FQDNs containing a particular domain name to a corporate server, and direct all other DNS queries to an ISP server. To denote these other, unspecified queries, use the asterisk symbol (see example below).
183
The optional outgoing-interface parameter specifies the interface through which the NetScreen device transmits the DNS query. (Note: You can make such queries secure by specifying a tunnel interface.) Before you can use the server-select options, you must enable DNS proxy using the set dns proxy and set dns proxy enable commands. For more information on proxy DNS, see proxy on page 182.
Example: The following commands create two proxy-DNS entries that selectively forward DNS queries to different servers. All DNS queries for FQDNs containing the domain name acme.com go through interface tunnel.1, to the DNS server at IPv6 address 3aff:7483:ad33::33ff:fe34. For example, the DNS proxy could query this server for the FQDN intranet.acme.com. All other DNS queries go out through interface ethernet3 to the DNS server at IPv4 address 1.1.1.23. dns proxy dns proxy enable dns server-select domain .acme.com outgoing-interface tunnel.1 primary-server 2.2.2.2 dns server-select domain * outgoing-interface ethernet3 primary-server 1.1.1.23
set set set set
184
domain
Description: Use the domain commands to set or display the domain name of the NetScreen device. A domain name is a character string that identifies the NetSceen device. This name allows other devices to access the NetScreen device through a DNS server, thus identifying the device without using an explicit IP address.
Syntax
get
get domain
set
set domain name_str
unset
unset domain

Variable Parameter
name_str Defines the domain name of the NetScreen device.
Example: The following command sets the domain of the NetScreen device to acme: set domain acme
185
downgrade
Description: Use the downgrade command to downgrade the ScreenOS firmware from ScreenOS 5.0.X to ScreenOS 4.0.X. To use this command to perform a downgrade, you must have the following. Root or Read-Write privileges to the NetScreen device A console connection to the NetScreen device A TFTP server application running on your computer An Ethernet connection from your computer to the NetScreen device (to transfer data from the TFTP server on your computer) A ScreenOS 4.0.X image file saved to the TFTP server folder on your computer A configuration file that was saved in ScreenOS 4.0.X (configurations saved in ScreenOS 5.0.0 are not supported by ScreenOS 4.0.X)
For information on the downgrade process, refer to the NetScreen ScreenOS Migration Guide for ScreenOS 5.0.0. Warning: Execute this command with extreme caution. Before execution, refer to the NetScreen ScreenOS Migration Guide for further details.
Syntax
exec
exec downgrade

None.
186
Downgrades and NSM

Before downgrading ScreenOS from 5.x to 4.x on a device that uses NSM (NetScreen-Security Manager), execute the following commands: unset nsmgmt enable unset nsmgmt init otp unset nsmgmt init id unset nsmgmt server primary del nsmgmt keys save
187
envar
Description: Use the envar commands to define environment variables. The NetScreen device uses environment variables to make special configurations at startup.
Syntax
get
get envar [ resource ]
set
set envar string
unset
unset envar string

Variable Parameter
set envar string unset envar string
string The location of the environment variables files.
Example: The following command defines the location of the system configuration as file2.cfg in slot2: set envar config=slot2:file2.cfg
188
resource
get envar resource
resource Displays the following information: (max-session) Maximum number of sessions (max-sa) Maximum number of security associations (SAs) (max-l2tp-tunnel) Maximun number of L2TP tunnels
189
event
Description: Use the event commands to display or clear event log messages. The event log monitors and records system events and network traffic. The NetScreen device categorizes logged system events by the following severity levels: Alert: Messages for multiple user authentication failures and other firewall attacks not included in the emergency category. Critical: Messages for URL blocks, traffic alarms, high availability (HA) status changes, and global communications. Debugging: All messages. Emergency: Messages concerning SYN attacks, Tear Drop attacks, and Ping of Death attacks. Error: Messages for admin log on failures. Information: Any kind of message not specified in other categories. Notification: Messages concerning link status changes, traffic logs, and configuration changes. Warning: Messages for admin logins and logouts, failures to log on and log out, and user authentication failures, successes, and timeouts.
The event log displays the date, time, level and description of each system event.
190
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] event [ end-time time ]
get
get event [ module name_str ] [ level { alert | critical | debug | emergency | error | information | notification | warning } ] [ type id_num1 ] [ -id_num2 ] [ start-date date [ time ] ] [ end-date date [ time ] ] [ start-time time ] [ end-time time ] [ include string ] [ exclude string ] [src-ip ip_addr1 [ -ip_addr2 | src_netmask mask ] ] [dst-ip ip_addr1 [ -ip_addr2 | dst_netmask mask ] ] sort-by { date [ start-date date [ time ] ]
191
[ end-date date [ time ] ] dst-ip [ ip_addr [ -ip_addr | dst-netmask mask ] ] src-ip [ ip_addr [ -ip_addr | src-netmask mask ] ] time [ start-time time ] [ end-time time ] } ]

cluster
clear cluster event [ ... ]
dst-ip
get event dst-ip ip_addr [ -ip_addr | dst-netmask mask ] get event sort by dst-ip [ ip_addr [ -ip_addr | dst-netmask mask ] ]
dst-ip Directs the device to display event logs with the specified destination IP address or address range. The device can also sort event logs by destination IP address.
include | exclude
get event [ ... ] [ include string ] [ exclude string ] [ ... ]
include exclude Directs the device to exclude or include events containing a specifies string of characters (string).
192
level
get event module name_str level { ... }
level Specifies the priority level of the event message. The priority levels are as follows: emergency (Level 0) The system is unusable. alert (Level 1) Immediate action is necessary. critical (Level 2) The event affects functionality. error (Level 3) Error condition exists. warning (Level 4) The event might affect functionality. notification (Level 5) The event is a normal occurrence. information (Level 6) The event generates general information about normal operation. debug (Level 7) The event generates detailed information for troubleshooting purposes.
module
get event module name_str [ ... ]
module Specifies the name of the system module that generated the event.
src-ip
get event src-ip ip_addr1 [ -ip_addr2 | src-netmask mask ] get event sort by src-ip ip_addr1 [ -ip_addr2 | src-netmask mask ]
src-ip Directs the device to sort event logs by source IP address. The device can also display event logs with the specified source IP address or address range.
193
start-time | end-time
clear [ cluster ] event end-time time get event [ ... ] [ start-time time ] [ end-time time ] [ ... ]
end-time time start-time time Specifies the lower and upper ends of a range of times for an event. When you specify a start-time and/or end-time, the device sorts or filters the event logs based on the specified times, regardless of the date. The format is: hh:mm:ss. When you use the end-time option with the clear event command, you specify the date and optionally the time in the following format: mm/dd/yy-hh:mm:ss.
Example: The following command clears all events generated before May 1, 2002 at 11:30am: get event end-time 05/01/02-11:30:00
start-date | end-date
get event [ start-date date [ time ] ] [end-date date [ time ] ] get event sort-by date [ start-date date [ time ] ] [ end-date date [ time ] ]
start-date end-date Specifies the lower and upper ends of a range of times for an event. The format is: mm/dd/yy-hh:mm:ss You can omit the year (the current year is the default), or express the year using the last two digits or all four digits. The hour, minute, and second are optional. The delimiter between the date and the time can be a dash or an underscore: 12/31/2001-23:59:00 12/31/2001_23:59:00
type
get event module name_str level { ... } type id_num1 [ ... ]
type Specifies a priority level or a range of priority levels.
194
exit
Description: Use the exit command to exit a command context, a virtual system, or to terminate and log out from a CLI session.
Syntax
exit

None. Example: The following exit command exits the context of policy ID 1 and returns the command context to the top command level: ns-> set policy id 1 ns(policy:1)-> set dst-addr 2.2.2.5/32 ns(policy:1)-> exit ns->
Notes
When issuing the exit command at the top command level (that is, not from within a command context), you must log back in to the console to configure a NetScreen device.
195
failover
Description: Use the failover commands to configure failover settings on the NetScreen device.
Syntax
set
set failover { auto | enable | holddown number | type { track-ip | tunnel-if } }
unset
unset failover { auto | enable | holddown }
exec
exec failover { force | revert }
196

auto
set failover auto unset failover auto
auto Directs the NetScreen device to automatically fail over from the primary interface to the backup and from the backup interface to the primary. By default, failover is manual (the administrator must use the CLI or WebUI to switch from the primary interface to the backup and from the backup interface to the primary).
enable
set failover enable unset failover enable
enable Enables failover mode on the NetScreen device.
force
exec failover force
force Forces traffic to be switched to the backup interface.
197
holddown
set failover holddown number unset failover holddown
holddown Specifies the time interval (number), in seconds, the NetScreen device delays failover actions. This value has an effect in the following situations: The NetScreen device switches traffic to the backup interface. The NetScreen device switches traffic from the backup interface to the primary interface, when the primary interface becomes available again. The default holddown interval is 30 seconds. The range is 1-32767 seconds.
Example: The following command sets a failover delay of 45 seconds: set failover holddown 45
revert
exec failover revert
revert Forces traffic to be switched from the backup interface to the primary interface.
type
set failover type { track-ip | tunnel-if }
type Specifies the type of event that determines interface failover. You can specify the following types: track-ip instructs ScreenOS to use IP tracking to determine failover. tunnel-if instructs ScreenOS to use VPN tunnel status to determine failover.
198
file
Description: Use the file commands to clear or display information for files stored in the flash memory.
Syntax
get
get file [ filename | info ]

Variable Parameters
clear [ ... ] file dev_name:filename get file filename
dev_name:filename Deletes the file with the name filename from the flash card memory. filename Defines the file name stored in the flash card memory.
Example: The following command displays information for the file named corpnet from the flash card memory: get file corpnet
cluster
clear cluster file dev_name:filename
199
info
get file info
info Displays the base sector and address.
200
firewall
Description: Use the firewall commands to enable or disable logging of dropped packets targeting an interface address on the NetScreen device, or to specify thresholds for packets sent to the CPU by a Packet Process Unit (PPU). Note: NetScreen devices perform most firewall services at the security zone level. You configure individual zones to perform these services. For more information, see the zone on page 683.
Syntax
get
get firewall
set
set firewall { log-self [ exclude ] [ icmp | ike | multicast | snmp ] | ppu-threshold packet-drop { { non-ip | other-ip | system-critical } number1 number2 } }
unset
unset firewall { log-self [ exclude ] [ icmp | ike | multicast | snmp ] | ppu-threshold packet-drop { { non-ip | other-ip | system-critical } }
201

firewall
get firewall
firewall Displays the settings for logging dropped ICMP, IKE, multicast, and SNMP packets destined for the NetScreen device. Log entries appear in the self log.
log-self
set firewall log-self [ exclude ] [ icmp | ike | multicast | snmp ] unset firewall log-self [ exclude ] [ icmp | ike | multicast | snmp ]
log-self Directs the NetScreen device to log or not log dropped packets and pings in the self log. Using the exclude switch directs the device not to perform logging at all or for specified traffic types. icmp Enables or disables logging of ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) packets. ike Enables or disables logging of dropped IKE (Internet Key Exchange) packets. multicast Enables or disables logging of multicast packets. snmp Enables or disables logging of dropped Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) packets. Entering the set firewall log-self command without any other keywords enables logging to the self log. (By default, logging to the self log is enabled.) Entering the unset firewall log-self command without any other keywords disables it.
202
ppu-threshold
set firewall ppu-threshold packet-drop { ... } unset firewall ppu-threshold packet-drop { ... }
ppu-threshold Defines protection thresholds for the Packet Process Units (PPU), which forward packets to the flow CPU. PPU protection thresholds determine how many packets of a particular type the PPU can send to the CPU, before the device drops subsequent packets of that type. CPU protection thresholds prevent excessive traffic to the flow CPU, thus preventing CPU overload. This feature adds another layer of protection to the device, similar to the SYN-cookie and SYN-proxy screens. If effect, PPU protection prevents DoS attacks from overwhelming the flow CPU, and keeps the CPU responsive to critical tasks even under heavy traffic. PPU protection processes three categories of traffic: non-ip number1 number2 Packets that do not use IP protocol. other-ip number1 number2 IP packets carrying contents other than TCP or UDP. system-critical number1 number2 System-critical IP packets, which includes BGP, OSPF, RIP, SNMP, system management, SIP, and H323 traffic. When the packet arrival rate for a specified category exceeds threshold number1, the device drops subsequent packets randomly. The probability of packet-dropping grows linearly with the subsequent packet arrival rate for that category. When the packet arrival rate exceeds threshold number2, the device drops all subsequent packets that exceed the threshold.
203
flow
Description: Use the flow commands to determine how the NetScreen device manages packet flow. The device can regulate packet flow in the following ways: Enable or disable DNS replies when there is no matching DNS request. Pass or block packets containing destination MAC addresses that are not in the MAC learning table. Set or display the initial session timeout values. Control or prevent packet fragmentation.
Syntax
get
get flow [ perf | tcpmss ]
set
set flow { aging { early-ageout number | high-watermark number | low-watermark number } all-tcp-mss [ number ] | allow-dns-reply | check tcp-rst-sequence | gre-in-tcp-mss | gre-out-tcp-mss | hub-n-spoke-mip | initial-timeout number | mac-cache mgt | mac-flooding | max-frag-pkt-size number | no-tcp-seq-check | path-mtu |
syn-proxy syn-cookie | tcp-mss [ number ] | tcp-rst-invalid-session | tcp-syn-check | tcp-syn-check-in-tunnel }
unset
unset flow { aging { early-ageout | high-watermark | low-watermark } allow-dns-reply | check tcp-rst-sequence | gre-in-tcp-mss | gre-out-tcp-mss | hub-n-spoke-mip | initial-timeout | mac-cache mgt | mac-flooding | max-frag-pkt-size | no-tcp-seq-check | path-mtu | syn-proxy syn-cookie | tcp-mss | tcp-rst-invalid-session | tcp-syn-check | tcp-syn-check-in-tunnel }
205

aging
set flow aging early-ageout number set flow aging { high-watermark number | low-watermark number } unset flow aging { early-ageout | high-watermark | low-watermark }
aging Directs the NetScreen device to begin aggressively aging out sessions when the number of entries in the session table exceeds the high-watermark setting, and then stop when the number of sessions falls below the low-watermark setting. When the session table is in any other state, the normal session timeout value is appliedfor TCP, session timeout is 30 minutes; for HTTP, it is 5 minutes; and for UDP, it is 1 minute. During the time when the aggressive aging out process is in effect, the NetScreen device ages out sessionsbeginning with the oldest sessions firstat the rate you specify. early-ageout number Defines the the ageout value before the NetScreen device aggressively ages out a session from its session table. The value you enter can be from 2 to 10 units, each unit representing a 10-second interval. The default early-ageout value is 2, or 20 seconds. high-watermark number Sets the point at which the aggressive aging out process begins. The number you enter can be from 1 to 100 and indicates a percent of the session table capacity in 1% units. The default is 100, or 100%. low-watermark number Sets the point at which the aggressive aging out process ends. The number you enter can be from 1 to 10 and indicates a percent of the session table capacity in 10% units. The default is 10, or 100%.
Example: The following commands activate the aggressive aging-out process when the session table reaches 70% capacity and deactivate the process when it drops below 60%, and set the aggressive ageout value at 30 seconds: set flow aging low-watermark 60 set flow aging high-watermark 70 set flow aging early-ageout 3
206
allow-dns-reply
set flow allow-dns-reply unset flow allow-dns-reply
allow-dns-reply Allows an incoming DNS reply packet without a matched request. If allow-dns-reply is disabled and an incoming UDP first-packet has dst-port 53, the device checks the DNS message packet header to verify that the query (QR) bit is 0which denotes a query message. If the QR bit is 1which denotes a response messagethe device drops the packet, does not create a session, and increments the illegal pak flow counter for the interface. By default, allow-dns-reply is disabled. Enabling allow-dns-reply directs the NetScreen device to skip the check.
all-tcp-mss
set flow all-tcp-mss number unset flow all-tcp-mss
all-tcp-mss Sets the TCP-MSS (TCP-Maximum Segment Size) value for all TCP packets for network traffic. This also sets the TCP-MSS for IPSec VPN traffic if the tcp-mss option (described below) is not set. If you enter the set flow tcp-mss command, that setting overrides the all-tcp-mss option for VPN traffic. The TCP-MSS range can be from 0 to 65,535 bytes. By default, the all-tcp-mss option is unset.
207
check tcp-rst-sequence
set flow check tcp-rst-sequence unset flow check tcp-rst-sequence
check tcp-rstsequence Checks that the TCP sequence number in a TCP segment with the RST bit enabled matches the previous sequence number for a packet in that session or is the next higher number incrementally. If the sequence number does not match either of these expected numbers, the NetScreen device drops the packet and sends the host a TCP ACK segment with the correct sequence number. By default, this check is disabled. (Note: The NetScreen-5000 series does not support this option.)
gre-in-tcp-mss
set flow gre-in-tcp-mss [ number ] unset flow gre-in-tcp-mss
gre-in-tcp-mss Enables and specifies the TCP-MSS (TCP-Maximum Segment Size) for Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) packets that are about to go into an IPSec VPN tunnel. If the NetScreen device receives a GRE-encapsulated TCP packet with the SYN bit and TCP-MSS option set and the TCP-MSS option specified in the packet exceeds the TCP-MSS specified by the NetScreen device, then the NetScreen device modifies the TCP-MSS value accordingly. By default, a TCP-MSS for GRE packets is not set. When it is enabled, the default TCP-MSS is 1320 bytes. The TCP-MSS can be between 64 and 1420 bytes inclusive.
208
gre-out-tcp-mss
set flow gre-out-tcp-mss [ number ] unset flow gre-out-tcp-mss
gre-out-tcp-mss Enables and specifies the TCP-MSS (TCP-Maximum Segment Size) for Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) packets that are leaving an IPSec VPN tunnel. If the NetScreen device receives a GRE-encapsulated TCP packet with the SYN bit and TCP-MSS option set and the TCP-MSS option specified in the packet exceeds the TCP-MSS specified by the NetScreen device, then the NetScreen device modifies the TCP-MSS value accordingly. By default, a TCP-MSS for GRE packets is not set. When it is enabled, the default TCP-MSS is 1320 bytes. The TCP-MSS can be between 64 and 1420 bytes inclusive.
hub-n-spoke-mip
set flow hub-n-spoke-mip unset flow hub-n-spoke-mip hub-n-spoke-mip
Permits the NetScreen device to forward traffic arriving through a VPN tunnel to a mapped IP (MIP) address on one tunnel interface to the MIP host at the end of another VPN tunnel. The two tunnels form a hub-and-spoke configuration, with the traffic looping back on the same outgoing interface. This option only has an effect when the outgoing interface is bound to the Untrust zone.
initial-timeout
set flow initial-timeout number unset flow initial-timeout
initial-timeout Defines the length of time in seconds (number, expressed in 10-second intervals) that the NetScreen device keeps an initial TCP session in the session table before dropping it, or until the device receives a FIN or RST packet. The range of time is from 20 seconds (setting of 2) to 300 seconds (setting of 30).
209
Example: The following command sets the initial timeout value to one minute (60 seconds): set flow initial-timeout 6
mac-cache
set flow mac-cache mgt unset flow mac-cache mgt
mac-cache mgt Caches the source MAC address from incoming administrative traffic for use when replying. This option might be necessary when the NetScreen device uses source-based routing. By default, this option is unset.
mac-flooding
set flow mac-flooding unset flow mac-flooding
mac-flooding Enables the NetScreen device to pass a packet across the firewall even if its destination MAC address is not in the MAC learning table. By default, this option is enabled.
210
max-frag-pkt-size
set flow max-frag-pkt-size number unset flow max-frag-pkt-size
max-frag-pkt-size The maximum allowable size for a packet fragment generated by the NetScreen device. You can set the number value between 1024 and 1500 bytes inclusive. For example, if a received packet is 1500 bytes and max-frag-pkt-size is 1460 bytes, the device generates two fragment packets. The first is 1460 bytes and the second is 40 bytes. If you reset max-frag-pkt-size to 1024, the first fragment packet is 1024 bytes and the second is 476 bytes.
Example: The following command sets the maximum size of a packet generated by the NetScreen device to 1024 bytes: set flow max-frag-pkt-size 1024
no-tcp-seq-check
set flow no-tcp-seq-check unset flow no-tcp-seq-check
no-tcp-seq-check When this command is set, the NetScreen device does not check sequence numbers in TCP segments during stateful inspection. When unset, TCP sequence number checking is enabled. The NetScreen device detects the window scale specified by both source and destination hosts in a session and adjusts a window for an acceptable range of sequence numbers according to their specified parameters. The NetScreen device then monitors the sequence numbers in packets sent between these hosts. If the NetScreen device detects a sequence number outside this range, it drops the packet. Starting with ScreenOS 5.1.0, the default behavior of NetScreen devices is to monitor sequence numbers in TCP segments. However, when upgrading from an earlier ScreenOS release, the NetScreen device maintains the existing setting for TCP sequence number checking. Therefore, if it was disabled before upgrading, it remains disabled after upgrading.
211
path-mtu
set flow path-mtu unset flow path-mtu
path-mtu Determines whether the NetScreen device sends the source host an ICMP message that a packet size is too large (ICMP type 3, code 4 Fragmentation needed and DF set) when it receives a packet meeting the following conditions: The Dont Fragment (DF) bit is set in the IP header. The packet is intended for IPSec encapsulation. The size of the packet after encapsulation exceeds the maximum transfer unit (MTU) of the egress interface, which is 1500 bytes. When you enable (set) the path-mtu option, the NetScreen device sends the source host the above ICMP message. When you disable (unset) this option, the NetScreen device ignores the DF bit, encapsulates the packet, fragments the packet so that none of the fragmented packets exceeds the MTU of the egress interface, and forwards them through the appropriate VPN tunnel. By default, this option is disabled.
perf
get flow perf
perf Displays performance information.
tcp-mss
get flow tcp-mss set flow tcp-mss [ number ]
212
unset flow tcp-mss

tcp-mss Sets the TCP-MSS (TCP-Maximum Segment Size) value for all TCP SYN packets for IPSec VPN traffic. The NetScreen device modifies the MSS value in the TCP packet to avoid fragmentation caused by the IPSec operation.
tcp-rst-invalid-session
set flow tcp-rst-invalid-session unset flow tcp-rst-invalid-session
tcp-rst-invalid-session Marks a session for immediate termination when it receives a TCP reset (RST) segment. By default, this command is unset. When unset, the NetScreen device applies the normal session timeout intervalfor TCP, session timeout is 30 minutes; for HTTP, it is 5 minutes; and for UDP, it is 1 minute.
tcp-syn-check
set flow tcp-syn-check unset flow tcp-syn-check
tcp-syn-check Checks the TCP SYN bit before creating a session. By default, the NetScreen device checks that the SYN bit is set in the first packet of a session. If it is not set, the NetScreen device drops it.
tcp-syn-check-in-tunnel
set flow tcp-syn-check-in-tunnel unset flow tcp-syn-check-in-tunnel
tcp-syn-check-in-tunnel Checks the TCP SYN bit before creating a session for tunneled packets. By default, the NetScreen device checks that the SYN bit is set in the first packet of a VPN session. If it is not set, the NetScreen device drops it.
213
gate
Description: Use the gate command to check the number of gates on the NetScreen device, how many are in use, and how many are still available. Gates are logical access points in the firewall for FTP and similar applications. The NetScreen device creates the gates, then converts a gate for each new session when data traffic occurs.
Syntax
get
get gate

None.
Defaults
The default number of gates on NetScreen devices are:
NetScreen-5000 Series NetScreen-500 NetScreen-200 Series NetScreen-100 NetScreen-25/50 NetScreen-5XT NetScreen-5GT 8192 4096 1024 1024 256 256 256
214
group
Description: Use the group commands to group several addresses or several services under a single name. A group allows you to reference a group of addresses or services by a single name in a policy. This eliminates the need for a separate policy for each address or service. For example, you can create a service group that includes FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS services, and then reference that group in a policy. Note: Although a single policy might reference a service group with three members, the NetScreen device generates multiple internal rules from that policy. Overusing address and service groups with high member counts can unexpectedly consume internal resources.
Syntax
get
get group { address zone [ grp_name ] | service [ grp_name ] }
set
set group { address zone grp_name [ add name_str ] [ comment string ] | service grp_name [ add name_str ] [ comment string ] }
unset
unset group { address zone grp_name [ remove mbr_name | clear ] | service grp_name [ remove mbr_name | clear ] }
215

add
set group address zone grp_name [ add mbr_name ] [ comment string ] set group service grp_name [ add mbr_name [ comment string ] ]
add name_str Adds an address or service named mbr_name.
Examples: The following command creates an address group named engineering for the Trust zone and adds the address hw-eng to the group: set group address trust engineering add hw-eng The following command creates a service group named inside-sales and adds the service AOL to the group: set group service inside-sales add AOL
address
get group address zone [ ... ] set group address zone grp_name [ ... ] unset group address zone grp_name [ ... ]
address Performs the operation on an address group. The zone value specifies the zone to which the address group is bound. This zone is either a default security zone or a user-defined zone. For more information on zones, see Zone Names on page B-I.
Example: The following command creates an empty address group (named headquarters) for the Trust zone: set group address trust headquarters
216
clear
unset group address zone grp_name clear unset group service grp_name clear
clear Removes all the members of an address or service group.
Example: The following command removes all members from an address group (engineering) bound to the Trust zone: unset group address trust engineering clear
comment
set group address zone grp_name [ ... ] [ comment string ] set group service grp_name [ ... ] [ comment string ]
comment Adds a comment string to the service group or address group entry.
Example: The following command creates an address group named engineering for the Trust zone, adds the address hw-eng to the group, and includes a comment about the group: set group address trust engineering add hw-eng comment Engineering Group
remove
unset group address zone grp_name remove name_str unset group service grp_name remove name_str
remove Removes the address (or service) named name_str. If you do not specify an address (or service) group member, the unset group { address | service } command deletes the entire address group or service group.
217
Example: The following command removes the address admin-pc from the engineering address group: unset group address trust engineering remove admin-pc
service
get group service grp_name set group service grp_name [ ... ] unset group service grp_name [ ... ]
service grp_name Performs the operation on a service group.
Example: The following command creates an empty service group and names it web_browsing: set group service web_browsing
Notes
Each address group and service group you create must have a unique name. You cannot use the same address group name as a service group name. You cannot add the predefined address or service named any to a group. While a policy references a group, you cannot remove the group, although you can modify it. From the console, you can add only one member to a group at a time.
218
group-expression
Description: Use the group-expression commands to set up or display group expressions for use in security policies. A group expression allows you to include or exclude users or user groups, according to NOT, AND, or OR operators. Such expressions are only usable for external users and user groups.
Syntax
get
get group-expression { name_str | all | id number }
set
set group-expression name_str { not name_str | name_str { and | or } name_str | id number | }
unset
unset group-expression { name_str | id number }
219

Variable Parameters
get group-expression name_str set group-expression name_str unset group-expression name_str
name_str The name of the group expression.
all
get group-expression all
all Specifies all group expressions.
and | or
set group-expression name_str name_str and name_str set group-expression name_str name_str or name_str
and | or Specifies AND or OR relationship between users, user groups, or group expressions.
Example: The following commands create group expressions SalesM and SM_Group, place them in an OR relationship, and then place SM_Group and Office_1 in an AND relationship: set set set set user-group Sales_Group location external user-group Marketing_Group location external group-expression SalesM Sales_Group or Marketing_Group group-expression SM_Group Office_1 and SalesM
220
id
get group-expression id number set group-expression name_str id number unset group-expression id number
id number Specifies an identification number for the group expression.
not
set group-expression name_str not name_str
not Specifies negation.
Example: The following command creates a NOT group expression that does not allow the Office_1 user: set group-expression Total_Users not Office_1
221
hostname
Description: Use the hostname commands to define the NetScreen device name. This name always appears in the console command prompt. The host name is a character string that identifies the NetScreen device. If you define a host name for the device (such as ns500gate) and a domain name for the device (such as netscreen, using the domain command), you can use the host name and domain name (ns500gate.netscreen) as a gateway for a VPN tunnel.
Syntax
get
get hostname
set
set hostname string
unset
unset hostname

Variable Parameters
string Sets the name of the NetScreen device.
Example: The following command changes the NetScreen device hostname to acme: set hostname acme
222
igmp
Description: Use the igmp command to send IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) messages, display IGMP settings and monitor IGMP states on a NetScreen device, or to clear IGMP information.
Syntax
exec
exec igmp interface interface { query [ mcst_addr [ s_bit ] [ ip_addr ] ] | report mcst_addr | leave mcst_addr }
get
get igmp { config group [ ip_addr [ source ] ] [ all ] | interface [ all ] | source ip_addr [ all ] | statistic [ all ] }
clear
clear igmp interface interface { statistic | group mcast_addr | all }
223

config
get igmp config
config Displays the configuration settings for IGMP.
group
get igmp group [ mcast_addr | all ]
group Displays information for the multicast group specified. Specify all to display information for all multicast groups.
interface
exec igmp interface interface { . . . } get igmp interface [ all ] clear igmp interface interface statistic clear igmp interface interface group mcast_addr | all
interface Displays and clears statistics or multicast groups. You can also send IGMP messages for the specified interface.
224
leave
exec igmp interface interface leave mcst_addr
leave Sends a leave message for the specified multicast group. You can execute this command if the interface is in host mode only.
query
exec igmp interface interface query [ mcst_addr [ s_bit ] [ ip_addr ] ]
query Sends an IGMP query message. If you specify a multicast group address, the interface sends a group-specific query to the specified multicast group. If you do not specify a multicast group address, then the interface sends a general query to the all hosts group (224.0.0.1). For IGMPv3, you can specify the following: s_bit: Specify this keyword to indicate to other multicast routers that they are to suppress the normal
timer updates they perform when they hear a query.

ip_addr: You can specify a source address. Enter this command only if the interface is in router mode.
Example: The following command sends a general query to the all hosts group from interface ethernet4: exec igmp interface ethernet4 query
report
exec igmp interface interface report mcst_addr
report Sends an IGMP membership report to the specified group. Enter this command if the interface is in host mode.
Example: The following command sends a membership report to the specified multicast group:
225
exec igmp interface ethernet4 report 224.2.1.1
source
get igmp source ip_addr [ all ]
source Displays <$$$ description TBD $$$>
statistic
get igmp statistic [ all ] clear igmp interface interface statistic
statistic Displays or clears IGMP statistics. Enter this command if the interface is in router mode.
226
ike
Definition: Use the ike commands to define the Phase 1 and Phase 2 proposals and the gateway for an AutoKey IKE (Internet Key Exchange) VPN tunnel, and to specify other IKE parameters. To establish an AutoKey IKE IPSec tunnel between peer devices, two phases of negotiation are required: In Phase 1, the peer devices establish a secure channel in which to negotiate the IPSec SAs. In Phase 2, the peer devices negotiate the IPSec SAs for encrypting and authenticating the ensuing exchanges of user data.
The gateway definition identifies the devices or remote users with which the NetScreen device establishes the VPN tunnel.
Syntax
exec
exec ike preshare-gen name_str usr_str
get
get ike { accept-all-proposal | ca-and-type | cert | conn-entry | cookies | gateway [ name_str ] | heartbeat | id-mode | initial-contact [ all-peers | single-gateway [ name_str ] ] | initiator-set-commit | member-sa-hold-time |
p1-max-dialgrp-sessions | p1-proposal name_str | p1-sec-level | p2-proposal name_str | p2-sec-level | policy-checking | respond-bad-spi | responder-set-commit | soft-lifetime-buffer }
set
Phase 1 Proposal
set ike p1-proposal name_str [ dsa-sig | rsa-sig | preshare ] [ group1 | group2 | group5 ] { esp { 3des | des | aes128 | aes192 | aes256 { md5 | sha-1 [ days number | hours number | minutes number | seconds number ] } } }
228
Phase 2 Proposal
set ike p2-proposal name_str [ group1 | group2 | group5 | no-pfs ] { esp [ 3des | des | aes128 | aes196 | aes256 | null ] | ah } [ md5 | null | sha-1 [ days number | hours number | minutes number | seconds number ] ] [ kbyte number ] ] }
Gateway Tunnel
set ike gateway name_str { address { ip_addr | hostname[.dom_name ] [ id ] } dialup { usr_str | grp_name } | dynamic { string | asn1-dn { [ container string ] [ wildcard string ] | fqdn string | ip-addr string | u-fqdn string } | } [ aggressive | main ] [ local-id id_str ] [ outgoing-interface interface
229
[ outgoing-zone zone ] ] [ preshare key_str | seed-preshare key_str ] { sec-level { basic | compatible | standard } | proposal name_str1 [ name_str2 ] [ name_str3 ] [ name_str4 ] }
IKE Heartbeat
set ike gateway name_str heartbeat { hello number | threshold number | reconnect number }
Certificates
set ike gateway name_str cert { my-cert id_num | peer-ca [ id_num | all ] | peer-cert-type { pkcs7 | x509-sig } }
NAT-Traversal
set ike gateway name_str nat-traversal [ udp-checksum | keepalive-frequency number ]
230
XAuth
set ike gateway name_str xauth [ client { any | chap | securid } username name_str password name_str | server name_str [ chap ] [ query-config ] [ user name_str | user-group name_str ] | bypass-auth ]
Other IKE Command Switches

set ike { accept-all-proposal | id-mode { ip | subnet } | initial-contact [ all-peers | single-gateway name_str ] | initiator-set-commit | member-sa-hold-time number | p1-max-dialgrp-sessions { count number | percentage number } | policy-checking | respond-bad-spi spi_num | responder-set-commit | single-ike-tunnel name_str | soft-lifetime-buffer number }
231
unset
unset ike { accept-all-proposal | gateway name_str [ heartbeat { hello | reconnect | threshold } | my-cert | nat-traversal [ udp-checksum ] | peer-ca | peer-cert-type | xauth ] | heartbeat { hello | reconnect | threshold } | initial-contact | initiator-set-commit | member-hold-sa | p1-max-dialgrp-sessions | p1-proposal name_str | p2-proposal name_str | policy-checking | respond-bad-spi | responder-set-commit | single-ike-tunnel name_str }
232

accept-all-proposal
get ike accept-all-proposal set ike accept-all-proposal unset ike accept-all-proposal
accept-all-proposal Directs the NetScreen device to accept all incoming proposals. By default, the device accepts only those proposals matching predefined or user-defined proposals. This command is primarily useful when troubleshooting AutoKey IKE tunnels.
address
set ike gateway address { ip_addr | name_str } { ... }
address Defines the remote IKE gateway address either as an IP address, or as a hostname, or a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN, which is a hostname + domain name). Use this option to set up a site-to-site VPN. Note: If you specify a hostname or FQDN that the NetScreen device cannot resolve to an IP address, the IKE gateway is classified as disabled.
Example: The following command specifies www.netscreen.com as the address of a remote IKE gateway named ns1, define the preshared key as 7a850wq, and specify the Phase 1 security level as compatible1: set ike gateway ns1 address www.netscreen.com preshare 7a850wq sec-level compatible
1.
The compatible security level for Phase 1 negotiations includes the following four proposals: pre-g2-3des-sha, pre-g2-3des-md5, pre-g2-des-sha, and pre-g2-des-md5.
233
aggressive | main
set ike gateway name_str { ... } aggressive [ ... ] set ike gateway name_str { ... } main [ ... ]
aggressive | main Defines the mode used for Phase 1 negotiations. Use Aggressive mode only when you need to initiate an IKE key exchange without ID protection, as when a peer unit has a dynamically assigned IP address. Main mode is the recommended key-exchange method because it conceals the identities of the parties during the key exchange.
ca-and-type
get ike ca-and-type
ca-and-type Displays the supported certificate authorities (CAs) and certificate types.
cert
get set set set
cert gateway name_str cert
ike ike ike ike
cert gateway name_str cert my-cert id_num gateway name_str cert peer-ca [ id_num | all ] gateway name_str cert peer-cert-type { pkcs7 | 509-sig
Uses a digital certificate to authenticate the VPN initiator and recipient. Specifies which certificates to use. my-cert name_str Specifies a particular certificate when the local NetScreen device has multiple loaded certificates. peer-ca name_str Specifies a preferred CA (certificate authority). peer-cert-type { pkcs7 | x509 } Specifies a preferred type of certificate (PKCS7 or X509). If you set the peer-ca and peer-cert-type values, the device inserts them in any certificate request it sends to the peer. If the peer has multiple local certificates, these values help the peer select a certificate.
234
Note: The NetScreen device does not use the peer-ca or peer-cert-type settings to check certificates received from the peer. If possible, the peer should send a certificate issued by the peer-ca CA. However, if the peer sends a certificate issued by a different CA, the NetScreen device searches local memory for the certificate of the issuing CA; if the search is successful, the device accepts the peer certificate. If the search is unsuccessful, the device uses a certificate issued by a different CA.
conn-entry
get ike conn-entry
conn-entry Displays the Connection Entry Table.
cookies
get ike cookies
cookies Displays the cookie table, and the total number of dead and active cookies.
dialup
set ike gateway name_str dialup { usr_str | grp_name } [ ... ]
dialup Identifies an IKE dialup user (usr_str) or dialup group (grp_name). Use this option to set up a dialup VPN. To specify a users attributes, use the set user command. (To specify dialup group attributes, use the set user-group command.)
235
dynamic
set ike gateway name_str dynamic { ... } [ ... ]
dynamic Specifies the identifier for the remote gateway with a dynamic IP address. Use this option to set up a VPN with a gateway that has an unspecified IP address. string A string you can use as a peer ID. asn1-dn [ container ] [ wildcard ] string The ASN1 domain name. The container switch treats string as a container. The wildcard switch treats string as a wild card. fqdn The fully-qualified domain name (such as www.acme.com). ip_addr string The IP address of the remote gateway interface. u-fqdn string The user fully-qualified domain name (such as admin@acme.com).
gateway
get ike gateway set ike gateway name_str { ... } [ ... ] unset ike gateway { ... }
gateway Configures or displays settings for a remote tunnel gateway.
heartbeat
get ike heartbeat set ike gateway name_str heartbeat { ... } unset ike gateway heartbeat { ... }
heartbeat Specifies the IKE heartbeat protocol parameters. hello number Sets the IKE heartbeat protocol interval (in seconds). reconnect number Sets the quiet interval (in seconds) that elapses before the NetScreen device reconnects a failed tunnel. threshold number Sets the number of retries before the NetScreen device considers the connection lost and removes all Phase 1 and Phase 2 keys related to this gateway.
236
id-mode
get ike id-mode set ike id-mode ip set ike id-mode subnet
id-mode Defines the IKE ID mode in the Phase 2 exchange as either a host (IP) address or a gateway (subnet). If you use the ip switch, the device sends no Phase 2 ID. If you choose the subnet switch, the device sends proxy Phase 2 IDs. (Use the ip switch when setting up a VPN tunnel between a NetScreen device and a CheckPoint 4.0 device. Otherwise, use the subnet switch.)
initial-contact
get ike initial-contact set ike initial-contact [ all-peers | single-gateway name_str ] unset ike initial-contact
initial-contact Determines how the NetScreen device performs initial contact with an IKE peer. Specifying all-peers instructs the NetScreen device to delete all SAs, then send an initial contact notification to each IKE peer. Specifying single-gateway name_str instructs the NetScreen device to delete all SAs associated with the specified IKE gateway, then send an initial contact notification. If you specify none of the above options, the NetScreen device sends an initial contact notification to all peers during the first IKE single-user session after a system reset.
initiator-set-commit
get ike initiator-set-commit set ike initiator-set-commit unset ike initiator-set-commit
initiator-set-commit When the NetScreen device performs as an IKE initiator, sets the commit bit in the ISAKMP header. The party who sends the last message in the exchange does not use the new IPSec SA until it receives confirmation from the other party.
237
local-id
set ike gateway name_str { ... } local-id id_str [ ... ] { ... }
local-id Defines the IKE NetScreen identity of the local device. The device sends this ID to the remote gateway during IKE negotiation. To instruct the NetScreen device to derive the IKE identity from the distinguished name in the local certificate, specify the following for local-id (including square brackets): [DinstinguishedName] If there is more than one certificate on your NetScreen device, you may need to specify which certificate to use (for more information, see cert on page 234).
member-sa-hold-time
get ike member-sa-hold-time set ike member-sa-hold-time number unset ike member-hold-sa
member-sa-hold-time The length of time (in minutes) the device keeps an unused SA allocated for a dialup user.
nat-traversal
set ike gateway name_str nat-traversal udp-checksum set ike gateway name_str nat-traversal keepalive-frequency number unset ike gateway name_str nat-traversal [ ... ]
nat-traversal Enables or disables IPsec NAT Traversal, a feature that allows transmission of encrypted traffic through a NetScreen device configured for NAT. The NAT Traversal feature encapsulates ESP packets into UDP packets. This prevents the NAT device from altering ESP packet headers in transit, thus preventing authentication failure on the peer NetScreen device. udp-checksum enables the NAT-Traversal UDP checksum operation (used for UDP packet authentication). keepalive-frequency specifies the frequency (in seconds) with which the NetScreen device sends NAT-traversal keepalive messages.
238
Examples: The following command enables NAT traversal for a gateway named mktg: set ike gateway mktg nat-traversal The following command sets the Keepalive setting to 25 seconds: set ike gateway mktg nat-traversal keepalive-frequency 25
outgoing-interface
set ike gateway name_str { ... } outgoing-interface interface [ ... ]
outgoing-interface Defines the interface through which the NetScreen device sends IKE traffic for this gateway.
Example: The following command specifies ethernet3 as the outgoing interface for an IKE gateway named Paris_Gateway at IP address 2.2.2.2. (Authentication uses a preshared key based on the word scramble, and the Phase 1 proposals are those for the compatible security level for Phase 1 negotiations.) set ike gateway Paris_Gateway ip 2.2.2.2 outgoing-interface ethernet3 preshare scramble sec-level compatible
p1-max-dialgrp-sessions
get ike p1-max-dialgrp-sessions set ike p1-max-dialgrp-sessions count number set ike p1-max-dialgrp-sessions percentage number unset ike p1-max-dialgrp-sessions
p1-max-dialgrp-sessions Displays the allowed concurrent Phase 1 negotiations for dialup groups.
239
p1-proposal
get ike p1-proposal name_str set ike p1-proposal name_str [ ... ] { ... } unset ike p1-proposal name_str
p1-proposal Names the IKE Phase 1 proposal, which contains parameters for creating and exchanging session keys and establishing Phase 1 security associations. dsa-sig | rsa-sig | preshare Specifies the method to authenticate the source of IKE messages. preshare refers to a preshared key, which is a key for encryption and decryption that both participants have before beginning tunnel negotiations. rsa-sig and dsa-sig refer to two kinds of digital signatures, which are certificates that confirm the identity of the certificate holder. (The default method is preshare.) group1 | group2 | group5 Identifies the Diffie-Hellman group, a technique that allows two parties to negotiate encryption keys over an insecure medium; such as, the Internet. Group2 is the default group. esp Specifies Encapsulating Security Payload protocol, which provides encryption and authentication. des | 3des | aes128 | aes192 | aes256 Specifies the encryption algorithm. md5 | sha-1 Specifies the authentication (hashing) algorithm used in ESP protocol. The default algorithm is SHA-1, the stronger of the two algorithms. The following parameters define the elapsed time between each attempt to renegotiate a Phase 1 security association. The minimum allowable lifetime is 180 seconds. The default lifetime is 28800 seconds. - days number - hours number - minutes number - seconds number
240
Example: The following command defines a Phase 1 proposal named sf1. set Preshared key and a group 1 Diffie-Hellman exchange Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) protocol using the 3DES and MD5 algorithms Lifetime of 3 minutes ike p1-proposal sf1 preshare group1 esp 3des md5 minutes 3
p1-sec-level
get ike p1-sec-level
p1-sec-level Displays the predefined IKE Phase 1 proposals in descending order of security level.
p2-sec-level
get ike p2-sec-level
p2-sec-level Displays the predefined IKE Phase 2 proposals in descending order of security level.
p2-proposal
get ike p2-proposal name_str set ike p2-proposal name_str [ ... ] { ... } set ike p2-proposal name_str
p2-proposal Names the IKE Phase 2 proposal. This proposal defines parameters for creating and exchanging a session key to establish a security association (SA). group1 | group2 | group5 | no-pfs Defines how the NetScreen device generates the encryption key. Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) is a method for generating each new encryption key independently from the previous key. Selecting no-pfs turns this feature off, so IKE generates the Phase 2 key from the key generated in the Phase 1 exchange. If you specify one of the Diffie-Hellman groups, IKE automatically uses PFS when generating the encryption key. The default is Group 2.
241
ah | esp In a Phase 2 proposal, identifies the IPSec protocol. - esp [ des | 3des | aes128 | aes192 | aes256 ] Specifies Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) protocol, which provides both encryption and authentication. Specifies the encryption algorithm used in ESP protocol. (The default protocol is des.) - ah Specifies Authentication Header (AH) protocol, which provides authentication only. md5 | null | sha-1 Specifies the authentication (hashing) algorithm used in ESP or AH protocol. The default algorithm is MD5 for non-FIPS mode, and SHA is the default for FIPS mode. The null switch specifies no authentication. The following parameters define the elapsed time between each attempt to renegotiate a security association. The minimum allowable lifetime is 180 seconds. The default lifetime is 28800 seconds. - days number - hours number - minutes number - seconds number kbytes number Indicates the maximum allowable data flow in kilobytes before NetScreen renegotiates another security association. The default value is 0 (infinity).
Example: The following command specifies Phase 2 proposal g2-esp-3des-null. set Group 2 Diffie-Hellman exchange ESP using 3DES without authentication Lifetime of 15 minutes ike p2-proposal g2-esp-3des-null group2 esp 3des null minutes 15
242
policy-checking
get ike policy-checking set ike policy-checking unset ike policy-checking
policy-checking Checks to see if the policies of the two peers match before establishing a connection. Use policy checking when configuration on the peer gateways support multiple tunnels. Otherwise, the IKE session fails. You can disable policy checking when only one policy is configured between two peers.
preshare
set ike p1-proposal name_str preshare [ ... ]
preshare Directs the device to use preshared kay authentication for IKE Phase 1 negotiation. In this mode, both peer devices use a shared password to generate a encryption and decryption key.
set ike gateway name_str { ... } [ ... ] preshare key_str

preshare Specifies the Preshared key (key_str) used in the Phase 1 proposal. (If you use an RSA- or DSA-signature in the Phase 1 proposal, do not use this option).
Example: For an example of this option, see Setting Up a Policy-Based VPN Tunnel on page 251.
243
preshare-gen
exec ike preshare-gen name_str usr_str
preshare-gen Generates an individual preshared key for a remote dialup user associated with a Group IKE ID user. The NetScreen device generates each preshared key from a seed value (specified in the command set ike gateway). After the device generates the preshared key, you can use it to set up a configuration for the remote user. (Remove any spaces.) name_str is the IKE gateway name. To create such a gateway, use the set ike gateway name_str command. usr_str is the full IKE ID of an individual user, which belongs to a Group IKE ID user. To create such a user, use the set user name_str ike-id command. The Group IKE ID user must be associated with a dialup user group to support a group of users.
Example: The following commands create a single group IKE ID user and assign the user to a dialup user group. Then they create VPNs and policies that allow dialup users with matching partial IKE ID values to establish secure communication through the NetScreen device. The name of the group IKE ID user is User1, with partial IKE identity of acme.com. The number of dialup users that can share this users IKE identity is 10. The dialup user group is Office_1. The seed value for creating the preshared key is jk930k. The Phase 1 IKE gateway defined for the server side is Corp_GW. The Phase 2 VPN defined for the server side is Corp_VPN. The Phase 1 IKE gateway defined for the client side is Office_GW. The Phase 2 VPN defined for the client side is Office_VPN. The individual users full IKE identity is chris@acme.com. The trusted server that dialup users access from the outside is a Web server with IP address 1.1.110.200.
244
set user User1 ike-id u-fqdn acme.com share-limit 10 set user-group Office_1 user User1 set ike gateway Corp_GW dialup Office_1 aggressive seed-preshare jk930k proposal pre-g2-3des-md5 set vpn Corp_VPN gateway Corp_GW tunnel proposal g2-esp-3des-md5 set address trust http_server 1.1.110.200 255.255.255.255 set policy incoming dial-up vpn http_server any tunnel vpn Corp_VPN
To generate the preshared key for chris@acme.com:

exec ike preshare-gen Corp_GW chris@acme.com Note: For this example, assume that this command generates c5d7f7c1806567bc57d3d30d7bf9b93baa2adcc6.
On the client side:

set ike gateway Office_GW address 10.1.10.10 aggressive local-id chris@acme.com preshare c5d7f7c1806567bc57d3d30d7bf9b93baa2adcc6 proposal pre-g2-3des-md5 set vpn Office_VPN gateway Office_GW tunnel proposal g2-esp-3des-md5 set address untrust http_server 1.1.110.200 set policy outgoing inside any http_server any tunnel vpn Office_VPN
proposal
set ike gateway name_str { ... } [ ... ] proposal name_str1 [ name_str2 ] [ name_str3 ] [ name_str4 ]
proposal Specifies the name (name_str) of a proposal. You can specify up to four Phase 1 proposals.
Example: For an example of this option, see Setting Up a Policy-Based VPN Tunnel on page 251.
245
respond-bad-spi
get ike respond-bad-spi set ike respond-bad-spi [ number ] unset ike respond-bad-spi
respond-bad-spi Responds to packets with bad security parameter index (SPI) values. The specified number value is the number of times to respond to bad SPIs per gateway.
responder-set-commit
get ike responder-set-commit set ike responder-set-commit unset ike responder-set-commit
responder-set-commit Directs the NetScreen device to set the commit bit in the ISAKMP header when the device acts as an IKE responder. The peer that sends the last message in the exchange does not use the new IPSec SA until it receives information from the other peer.
sec-level
set ike gateway name_str { ... } [ ... ] sec-level { ... }
sec-level Specifies which pre-defined security proposal to use for IKE. The basic proposal provides basic-level security settings. The compatible proposal provides the most widely-used settings. The standard proposal provides settings recommended by NetScreen.
Example: The following command specifies the pre-defined security proposal compatible: set vpn Corp_VPN gateway Corp_GW sec-level compatible
246
seed-preshare
set ike gateway name_str { ... } [ ... ] seed-preshare key_str
seed-preshare Specifies a seed value (key_str) for a user group with Preshared Key configurations. Such a configuration performs IKE authentication for multiple dialup users, each with an individual preshared key, without having a separate configuration for each user. Instead, use the seed to generate the preshared key with the exec ike preshare-gen command.
Example: The following commands configure IKE authentication for multiple dialup users in a user group: set set set set set set set set Interface ethernet1 bound to the Trust zone and interface ethernet3 bound to the Untrust zone Dialup user named User2, placed in a user group named office_2 Gateway configuration for office_2, with a preshared key seed value of jk930k Security policy for all dialup users with the partial IKE identity specified for User2 interface ethernet1 zone trust interface ethernet1 ip 10.1.1.1/24 interface ethernet3 zone untrust interface ethernet3 ip 1.1.1.1/24 address trust web1 10.1.1.5/32 user User2 ike-id u-fqdn netscreen.com share-limit 10 user-group office_2 user User2 ike gateway Corp_GW dialup office_2 aggressive seed-preshare jk930k sec-level compatible set vpn Corp_VPN gateway Corp_GW sec-level compatible set policy top from untrust to trust Dial-Up VPN web1 http tunnel vpn Corp_VPN save
247
single-ike-tunnel
set ike single-ike-tunnel name_str unset ike single-ike-tunnel name_str
single-ike-tunnel Specifies a single Phase 2 SA for all policies to a particular remote peer gateway.
Example: The following command specifies a Phase 2 SA for all policies to the peer gateway gw1: set ike single-ike-tunnel gw1
soft-lifetime-buffer
get ike soft-lifetime-buffer set ike soft-lifetime-buffer number
soft-lifetime-buffer Sets a time interval (in seconds) before the current IPSec SA key lifetime expires. When this interval is reached, the device initiates the rekeying operation.
xauth
set ike gateway name_str xauth unset ike gateway xauth
xauth Enables XAuth authentication for the specified IKE gateway configuration.
xauth bypass-auth
set ike gateway name_str xauth bypass-auth
bypass-auth Instructs the NetScreen device, acting as an XAuth server, to perform only XAuth mode-config, which assigns the XAuth client with an IP address, and DNS and WINS server settings.The XAuth client is not required to authenticate him or herself.
248
xauth client
set ike gateway name_str xauth client { any | chap | securid } username name_str password string
client Specifies that the NetScreen device is an XAuth client. You can specify the following authentication types: any Instructs the device to allow any authentication type. chap Instructs the device to allow Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) only. securid Instructs the device to allow authentication via SecurID only. username password Specifies the username for the XAuth client to use on the XAuth server. Specifies the password for the XAuth client to use on the XAuth server.
Example: The following example configures an XAuth client. set Gateway kg1 Any authentication type allowed Username kgreen and password pubs123 ike gateway kg1 xauth client any username kgreen password pubs123
xauth server
set ike gateway name_str xauth server name_str set ike gateway name_str xauth server name_str [ chap ] [ query-config ] [ user name_str | user-group name_str ] unset ike gateway xauth
server Specifies the object name of the external server that performs the XAuth authentication. chap Instructs the device to use Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). query-config Instructs the device to query the client configuration from the server.
249
user name_str Enables XAuth authentication for an individual user. user-group name_str Enables XAuth authentication for the users in a XAuth user group.
Defaults
Main mode is the default method for Phase 1 negotiations. The default time intervals before the NetScreen mechanism renegotiates another security association are 28,800 seconds in a Phase 1 proposal, and 3600 seconds in a Phase 2 proposal. The default ID mode is subnet. (Changing the ID mode to IP is only necessary if the data traffic is between two security gateways, one of which is a CheckPoint 4.0 device.) The default soft-lifetime-buffer size is 10 seconds. By default, the single-ike-tunnel flag is not set. By default, the commit bit is not set when initiating or responding to a Phase 2 proposal.
250
Setting Up a Policy-Based VPN Tunnel

Creating a policy-based VPN tunnel for a remote gateway with a static IP address requires up to seven steps. To set up NetScreen-A at one end of a VPN tunnel for bidirectional traffic, follow the steps below.
host1 10.1.1.5/32 ethernet1 10.1.1.1/24 ethernet3 1.1.1.1/24 Remote Gateway gw1, 2.2.2.2 host2 10.2.2.5/32
NetScreen-A
vpn1
NetScreen-B
Trust Zone
Untrust Zone
1.
2.
3. 4.
5.
Bind interfaces to zones and assign them IP addresses: set interface ethernet1 zone trust set interface ethernet1 ip 10.1.1.1/24 set interface ethernet3 zone untrust set interface ethernet3 ip 1.1.1.1/24 Set the addresses for the end entities beyond the two ends of the VPN tunnel: set address trust host1 10.1.1.5/32 set address untrust host2 10.2.2.5/32 Define the IKE Phase 1 proposal and Phase 2 proposal. If you use the default proposals, you do not need to define Phase 1 and Phase 2 proposals. Define the remote gateway: set ike gateway gw1 address 2.2.2.2 main outgoing-interface ethernet3 preshare netscreen proposal pre-g2-3des-sha Define the VPN tunnel as AutoKey IKE: set vpn vpn1 gateway gw1 proposal g2-esp-des-md5
251
6. 7.
Set a default route (both the Trust and Untrust zones are in the trust-vr routing domain): set vrouter trust-vr route 0.0.0.0/0 interface ethernet3 gateway 1.1.1.250 Set outbound and inbound policies: set policy from trust to untrust host1 host2 any tunnel vpn vpn1 set policy from untrust to trust host2 host1 any tunnel vpn vpn1
The procedure for setting up a VPN tunnel for a dialup user with IKE also constitutes up to seven steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Bind interfaces to zones and assign them IP addresses. Define the protected address that you want the dialup user to be able to access through the tunnel. (See the set address command.) Define the user as an IKE user. (See the set user command.) Define the IKE Phase 1 proposal, Phase 2 proposal, and remote gateway. (Note: If you use the default proposals, you do not need to define a Phase 1 or Phase 2 proposal.) Define the VPN tunnel as AutoKey IKE. (See the set vpn command.) Set a default route (both the Trust and Untrust zones are in the trust-vr routing domain). Define an incoming policy, with Dial-Up VPN as the source address and the VPN tunnel you configured in step 5.
252
ike-cookie
Description: Use the ike-cookie command to remove IKE-related cookies from the NetScreen device.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] ike-cookie { all | ip_addr }

Variable Parameter
clear cluster ike-cookie ip_addr clear ike-cookie ip_addr
ip_addr Directs the NetScreen device to remove cookies based on a IP address (ip_addr).
Example: The following command removes all cookies based on the IP address 10.1.10.10: clear ike-cookie 10.1.10.10
all
clear cluster ike-cookie all clear ike-cookie all
all Directs the NetScreen device to remove all cookies.
253
cluster
clear cluster ike-cookie all clear cluster ike-cookie ip_addr
254
interface
Description: Use the interface commands to define or display interface settings for a NetScreen device. Interfaces are physical or logical connections that handle network, virtual private network (VPN), High Availability (HA), and administrative traffic. For a description of the interfaces you can configure on a NetScreen device, see Interface Names on page A-I.
Syntax
get
get interface interface [ dhcp { client | relay | server { ip { allocate | idle } | option } } | dip | mip | protocol { ospf | rip [ neighbor ip_addr ] | igmp [ config | group [ ip_addr [ source ] ] [ all ] ] |
255
source | statistic [ all ] | ] pim [ statistics ] } screen | secondary [ ip_addr ] | track-ip [ ip ] ]
set (Layer-3 Interfaces)

set interface interface { bandwidth number | dip { interface-ip incoming | id_num { ip_addr1 [ ip_addr2 ] | shift-from ip_addr3 [ to ip_addr4 [ ip_addr5 ] ] } [ fix-port | incoming ] | [ ext ip ip_addr/mask ] dip id_num { ip_addr1 | shift-from ip_addr2 to ip_addr3 } [ ip_addr4 ] [ fix-port | incoming ] | gateway ip_addr [ no-default-route ] | group | ip { ip_addr/mask | manageable } | manage { ident-reset | nsmgmt| mtrace | ping | snmp | ssh | ssl | telnet | web } | manage-ip ip_addr |
256
mip ip_addr host ip_addr [ netmask mask ] [ vrouter name_str ] | mtu number | nat | phy { auto | full { 10mb | 100mb } | half { 10mb | 100mb } | holddown number | link-down } | route | route-deny | tag id_num zone zone | vip ip_addr [ + ] port_num [ name_str ip_addr [ manual ] ] | webauth [ ssl-only ] | webauth-ip ip_addr | zone zone }
set (Layer-2 Interfaces)

set interface interface { manage { ident-reset | nsmgmt ping | nmp | ssh | ssl | telnet | web } | phy { auto | full { 10mb | 100mb } | half { 10mb | 100mb } | holddown number | link-down } | webauth }
257
set (Sub-Interfaces)
set interface interface.id_num { encap pppoe | tag number zone zone }
set (DHCP Relay/Server)

set interface interface dhcp { relay { server-name { name_str | ip_addr } | service | vpn } | server { enable | auto | disable | ip ip_addr { mac mac_addr | to ip_addr } | option { custom id_num { integer number | ip ip_addr | string string } | dns1 | dns2 | dns3 | gateway | news | nis1 | nis2 | pop3 | smtp { ip_addr } | domainname name_str | lease number | netmask mask | nistag name_str | wins1 ip_addr | wins2 ip_addr | } | service } }
258
set (DHCP Client)

set interface interface dhcp client { enable | settings { autoconfig | lease number | server ip_addr | update-dhcpserver | vendor id_str } }
set (High Availability)

set interface { bandwidth phy { auto | full { half { { ha | ha1 | ha2 } number |
10mb | 100mb } | 10mb | 100mb } |
259
holddown number | link-down } | }
set (IP Tracking)

set interface interface track-ip [ dynamic | ip ip_addr [ interval number | threshold number | weight number ] | threshold number ]
set (Loopback Interface)

set interface interface loopback-group interface
set (BGP)
set interface interface protocol bgp
set (OSPF)
set interface interface protocol ospf { area { ip_addr | number } | authentication { active-md5-key-id id_num |
md5 key_str [ key-id id_num ] | password pswd_str } | cost number | dead-interval number | enable | hello-interval number | ignore-mtu | link-type { p2mp | p2p } | neighbor-list number | passive | priority number | reduce-flooding | retransmit-interval number | transit-delay number }
set (RIP)
set interface interface protocol rip [ authentication { active-md5-key-id id_num | md5 key_str [ key-id id_num ] | password pswd_str } | enable | metric number | neighbor { ip_addr } | passive-mode | receive-version { v1 | v1v2 | v2 } | route-map name_str |
261
send-version { v1 | v1v2 | v2 } | split-horizon [ poison-reverse ] summary-enable ]
set (IGMP Host)

set interface interface protocol igmp host set interface interface protocol igmp { enable | host | join-group ip_addr | no-check-router-alert | no-check-subnet | router | static-group ip_addr }
set (IGMP Router)

set interface interface protocol igmp router set interface interface protocol igmp { accept { hosts id_num | groups id_num | routers id_num } | enable | join-group ip_addr | last-member-query-interval number | leave-interval number | no-check-router-alert | no-check-subnet | proxy [ always ] | query-interval number |
262
query-max-response-time number | static-group ip_addr | version { 1 | 2 } }
set (PIM)
set interface interface protocol pim [ boot-strap-border | dr-priority number | enable | hello-interval number | join-prune-interval number | neighbor-policy number ]
set (Tunnel)
set interface tunnel.number { dip id_num { ip_addr1 [ ip_addr2 ] [ fix-port ] | shift-from ip_addr3 } | [ ext ip ip_addr/mask ] dip id_num { ip_addr1 [ ip_addr2 ] [ fix-port ] | shift-from ip_addr3 } |
263
ip { ip_addr/mask | unnumbered interface interface } |2 loopback-group | manage-ip ip_addr | mip ip_addr host ip_addr [ netmask mask [ vrouter name_str ] ] | mtrace | mtu number | nhtb ip_addr vpn tunn_str | protocol { bgp | ospf [ demand-circuit ] | rip [ demand-circuit ] | igmp | pim } | proxy dns | route-deny | tunnel { encap gre [ key ] | keep-alive [ interval number | threshold number ] | local-if interface dst-ip ip_addr } | zone name_str }
2.
Use the IP option only after adding the tunnel to a specific zone.
264
unset (vlan1 interface)

unset interface interface { broadcast [ arp [ trace-route ] ] | bypass-non-ip | | bypass-non-ip-all | bypass-others-ipsec }
unset (DHCP Relay/Server)

unset interface interface dhcp { relay { server-name { name_str | ip_addr } | server { ip { ip_addr | all } | option { dns1 | dns2 | dns3 | gateway | news | nis1 | nis2 | pop3 | smtp | domainname | lease | netmask | nistag | wins1 | wins2 } service } }
265
unset (DHCP Client)

unset interface interface dhcp client { enable | settings { autoconfig | lease | server | update-dhcpserver | vendor } }
unset
unset interface interface { bandwidth | [ ext ip ip_addr mask ] dip number | group | ip [ ip_addr ] | loopback-group interface | manage { ident-reset | nsmgmt | mtrace | ping | snmp | ssh | ssl | telnet | web } | manage-ip | mip ip_addr1 host ip_addr2 [ netmask mask ] | mtrace | mtu | mtu | nhtb ip_addr | phy { auto |
266
full { 10mb | 100mb } | half { 10mb | 100mb } | holddown | link-down } protocol ospf { area | authentication { active-md5-key-id | md5 [ key-id id_num ] } | cost | dead-interval | demand-circuit | enable | hello-interval | ignore-mtu | link-type [ p2mp | p2p ] | neighbor-list | passive | priority | reduce-flooding | retransmit-interval | transit-delay } | protocol rip { authentication { active-md5-key-id | md5 [ key-id id_num ] } | demand-circuit | enable | metric | neighbor | passive-mode | receive-version | route-map | send-version | split-horizon [ poison-reverse ] |
267
summary-enable } | route-deny | track-ip [ dynamic | ip ip_addr [ interval | threshold | weight ] | threshold ] vlan trunk | webauth | webauth-ip | zone }
unset (DHCP)
unset interface interface dhcp { relay { server-name { name_str | ip_addr } | service | vpn } server { ip ip_addr option { dns1 | dns2 | dns3 | domainname | gateway } lease | news | netmask | nis1 | nis2 nistag | pop3 | smtp |
268
wins1 | wins2 } service } }

Variable Parameter
get interface interface [ ... ] set interface interface { ... } [ ... ]
interface The name of the interface. For more information on interface names, see Interface Names on page A-I.
Example: The following command specifies the IP address of a remote gateway peer (1.1.1.25) for the ethernet4 interface: set interface ethernet4 gateway 1.1.1.25
bandwidth
set interface interface bandwidth number unset interface interface bandwidth
bandwidth The guaranteed maximum bandwidth in kilobits per second for all traffic traversing the specified interface.
Example: The following command specifies bandwidth of 10,000 kilobits per second for interface ethernet4: set interface ethernet4 bandwidth 10000
269
broadcast
set interface interface broadcast { flood | arp [ trace-route ] } unset interface interface broadcast [ arp [ trace-route ] ]
broadcast (vlan1 interface only.) Controls how the NetScreen device determines reachability of other devices while the device is in transparent (L2) mode. flood Instructs the NetScreen device to flood frames received from an unknown host out to all interfaces that are in transparent mode. In the process, the device might attempt to copy frames out of ports that cannot access the destination address, thus consuming network bandwidth. arp [ trace-route ] Instructs the NetScreen device to generate an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) broadcast. If the broadcast finds the unknown destination IP address, the device loads its ARP table with the appropriate MAC address and interface. The device uses this entry to reach the destination device directly, and only sends frames through the correct port, thus saving bandwidth. Generating the initial ARP can cause delay, but only for the first frame.
Example: The following command instructs the NetScreen device to generate an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) broadcast: set interface vlan1 broadcast arp
bypass-non-ip
set interface interface bypass-non-ip unset interface interface bypass-non-ip
bypass-non-ip (vlan1 interface only.) Allows non-IP traffic (such as IPX) with a unicast MAC destination address to pass through a NetScreen device running in Transparent mode. (ARP is a special case for non-IP traffic. It is always passed, even if when this feature is disabled.) Executing the unset interface interface bypass-non-ip command drops all the non-IP packet with unicast MAC destination address. but non-ip with multicast mac address will still pass through.
270
bypass-non-ip-all
set interface interface bypass-non-ip-all unset interface interface bypass-non-ip-all
bypass-non-ip-all (vlan1 interface only.) Allows non-broadcast, non-multicast, and non-IP traffic to pass through a NetScreen device running in Transparent mode. (ARP is a special case for non-IP traffic. It is always passed, even if when this feature is disabled.) Executing the unset interface interface bypass-non-ip-all drops all non-IP packets, regardless of the MAC destination address.
bypass-others-ipsec
set interface interface bypass-others-ipsec unset interface interface bypass-others-ipsec
bypass-others-ipsec (vlan1 interface only.) Openly passes all IPSec traffic through a NetScreen device in Transparent mode. The NetScreen device does not act as a VPN tunnel gateway but passes the IPSec packets onward to other gateways.
dhcp client
set interface interface dhcp client { enable | settings { autoconfig | lease number | server ip_addr | update-dhcpserver | vendor id_str } }
271
dhcp client
Configures an interface for DHCP client services. enable Enables DHCP client services for the interface. settings Configures DHCP parameters for the interface. - autoconfig Enables automatic configuration after device power-up. - lease number Sets the default lease time (in minutes). - server ip_addr Specifies the IP address of the DHCP server. - update-dhcpserver Forwards TCP/IP settings from the DHCP client module on the specified interface to the DHCP server module on the default interface in the Trust zone. Note: On devices that can have multiple interfaces bound to the Trust zone, the default interface is the first interface bound to that zone and assigned an IP address. - vendor id_str Specifies the DHCP vendor by ID.
Examples: The following command configures interface ethernet3 to perform automatic DHCP configuration after device power-up: set interface ethernet3 dhcp client settings autoconfig The following command enables (the forwarding of TCP/IP settings from the DHCP client module on the Untrust interface to the DHCP server module on the Trust zone interface): set interface untrust dhcp client settings update-dhcpserver
272
dhcp relay
get interface interface dhcp relay set interface interface dhcp relay { server-name name_str | service | vpn } unset interface interface dhcp relay { server-name { name_str | ip_addr } | service | vpn }
dhcp relay Configures the NetScreen interface such that the NetScreen device can serve as a DHCP relay agent. server-name name_str Defines the domain name of the external DHCP server from which the NetScreen device receives the IP addresses and TCP/IP settings that it relays to hosts on the LAN. service Enables the NetScreen device to act as a DHCP server agent through the interface. vpn Allows the DHCP communications to pass through a VPN tunnel. You must first set up a VPN tunnel between the NetScreen device and the external DHCP server.
The relay does not coexist with the DHCP server (OK with the client). Example: The following configures interface ethernet4 to use an external DHCP server at IP address 1.1.1.10: set interface ethernet4 dhcp relay server-name 1.1.1.10
dhcp server
set interface interface dhcp server { ... } unset interface interface dhcp server { ... }
dhcp server Makes the NetScreen interface work as a DHCP server. auto Instructs the NetScreen device to check to see if there is a DHCP server already running on the network. If there is such a server, the DHCP server on the NetScreen device is disabled. If there is no DHCP server running on the network, the DHCP server on the NetScreen device is enabled. This is the default mode. disable Causes the DHCP server to always be off.
273
enable Causes the DHCP server to always be on. The DHCP server on the NetScreen device always starts when the device is powered on. ip ip_addr { mac mac_addr | to ip_addr } Specifies either a specific IP address that is assigned to a host or the lower end of a range of IP addresses to use when the DHCP server is filling client requests. - mac This option allows you to statically assign an IP address to the host that is identified by the specified MAC address. The host is always assigned the specified IP address. - to Defines the upper end of a range of IP addresses to use when the DHCP server is filling client requests. The IP pool can support up to 255 IP addresses. The IP address must be in the same subnet as the interface IP or the DHCP gateway. option Specifies the DHCP server options for which you can define settings. - custom id_num Creates a user-defined value for configurations where the predefined server options (listed below) do not suffice, and you need to define custom DHCP server options. For example, certain VoIP (Voice-over IP) configurations require transmission of extra configuration information, which is not currently supported by predefined server options. In such cases, you must define suitable custom options. - string string Specifies a character string. - ip ip_addr Specifies an IP address. - integer number Specifies an integer value. - dns1 ip_addr | dns2 ip_addr | dns3 ip_addr Defines the IP addresses of the primary, secondary, and tertiary Domain Name Service (DNS) servers. - gateway ip_addr Defines the IP address of the gateway to be used by the clients. The IP address must be in the same subnet as the interface IP or the DHCP gateway. - news ip_addr Specifies the IP address of a news server to be used for receiving and storing postings for news groups. - nis1 ip_addr | nis2 ip_addr Defines the IP addresses of the primary and secondary NetInfo servers, which provide the distribution of administrative data within a LAN.
- pop3 ip_addr Specifies the IP address of a Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) mail server. - smtp ip_addr Defines the IP address of a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) mail server.
274
- domainname name_str Defines the registered domain name of the network. - lease number Defines the length of time, in minutes, for which an IP address supplied by the DHCP server is leased. For an unlimited lease, enter 0. - netmask ip_addr Defines the netmask of the gateway. The IP address must be in the same subnet as the interface IP or the DHCP gateway. - nistag string Defines the identifying tag used by the Apple NetInfo database. - wins1 ip_addr | wins2 ip_addr Specifies the IP address of the primary and secondary Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) servers. service Enables the NetScreen device to act as a DHCP server agent through the interface.
The server does not coexist with the DHCP relay (OK with the client). Example: The following command configures the NetScreen device to act as a DHCP server agent through the interface ethernet4: set interface ethernet4 dhcp server service
dip
set interface interface dip id_num ip_addr1 [ ip_addr2 ] [ fix-port | incoming ] set interface interface dip id_num shift-from ip_addr3 unset interface interface dip id_num
dip Sets a Dynamic IP (DIP) pool. Each DIP pool consists of a range of addresses. The NetScreen device can use the pool to dynamically or deterministicaly allocate source addresses when the device applies source address translation (NAT-src) to packets traversing the specified interface. This is useful when you need to translate non-routable local IP source addresses into routable addresses for outgoing packet. The keywords and variables for the dip option are as follows: id_num Identifies the DIP pool. The first IP address ip_addr1 represents the start of the IP address range. (A DIP pool can consist of a single IP address, or a range of addresses.) The second IP address ip_addr2 represents the end of the IP address range.
275
shift-from ip_addr3 Defines a one-to-one mapping from an original source IP address to a translated source IP address for a range of IP addresses starting from ip_addr3. Such a mapping ensures that the NetScreen device always translates a particular source IP address from within that range to the same translated address within a DIP pool. incoming Creates a DIP address pool for dynamically allocating destination addresses. The name of the DIP pool can be DIP(id_num) for a user-defined DIP, or DIP(interface) for an interface DIP. The DIP address pool resides in the Global security zone. You can use such address entries as destination addresses in policies, together with the services H.323, SIP, or VoIP (Voice-over IP), to support incoming calls. Be sure to exclude the following IP addresses from a DIP pool: The WebUI management IP address The interface and gateway IP addresses Any Virtual IP (VIP) and Mapped IP (MIP) addresses interface-ip incoming Designates addresses derived from the interface IP address range for dynamically allocating destination addresses to incoming packets.
Example1: The following commands allow local hosts in a non-routable subnet to communicate over a public WAN infrastructure. The NetScreen device uses a DIP pool to dynamically allocate routable source addresses to packets sent from the local hosts to remote hosts. Local unroutable subnet 10.1.23.1/24 Remote unroutable subnet 10.100.2.75/24 DIP ID number 10, with address range from 2.1.10.2 through 2.1.10.36 unset interface ethernet2 ip unset interface ethernet2 zone unset interface ethernet3 ip unset interface ethernet3 zone set interface ethernet2 zone trust set interface ethernet2 ip 10.1.23.1/24
276
set interface ethernet3 zone untrust set interface ethernet3 ip 2.1.10.1/24 set interface ethernet3 dip 10 2.1.10.2 2.1.10.36 set address trust Local_Hosts 10.1.23.1/24 set address untrust Remote_Hosts 10.100.2.75/24 set policy from trust to untrust Local_Hosts Remote_Hosts http nat dip 10 permit Example2: The following commands use DIP in an H.323 VoIP configuration. Creates a pool of DIP addresses (identified by ID 5) containing addresses 1.1.1.12 through 1.1.1.150 inclusive. The device can use addresses in this DIP pool as incoming destination addresses (or as outgoing source addresses). Creates a policy that allows outgoing H.323 requests, using DIP addresses for source addresses.
Creates a policy that allows incoming H.323 requests, using DIP addresses for destination addresses. set interface ethernet7 ip 1.1.1.1/24 set interface ethernet7 dip 5 1.1.1.12 1.1.1.150 incoming set policy from trust to untrust any any h.323 nat src dip 5 permit set policy from untrust to trust any dip(5) h.323 permit
encap
set interface interface.id_num encap pppoe
encap Specifies the type of encapsulation to perform, when the sub-interface is untagged. An untagged interface does not use a VLAN tag to identify a VLAN for an sub-interface. Instead, it binds the sub-interface to a particular defined PPPoE instance. Thus, by hosting multiple sub-interfaces, a single physical interface can host multiple PPPoE instances. You can configure each instance to go to a specified AC (Access Concentrator), thus allowing separate entities such as ISPs to manage the PPPoE sessions.
277
ext ip
set interface interface ext ip ip_addr/mask dip number { ... } unset interface interface ext ip ip_addr/mask dip number
ext ip The ext ip ip_addr option configures a DIP in a different subnet from the interfaces subnet. For example, an interface could have IP address 1.2.10.1/24, and the extended DIP could be 2.2.3.1/24. dip id_num Sets a Dynamic IP (DIP) pool. See dip on page 275. fix-port Keeps the original source port number in the packet header. Does not apply the Port Address Translation (PAT).
Example: The following command creates an address (1.1.100.110) in a DIP (ID 10) for interface ethernet3 (IP address 10.1.10.10): set interface ethernet3 ext ip 10.1.10.10/24 dip 10 1.1.100.110
gateway
set interface interface gateway ip_addr [ no-default-route ] unset interface interface gateway
gateway The IP address for the default gateway to which the NetScreen device forwards packets that are destined for networks beyond the immediate subnet of the specified interface. The no-default-route switch specifies that there is no default route for this gateway.
Example: The following command specifies the IP address of a remote gateway peer (1.1.10.10) for the ethernet4 interface: set interface ethernet4 gateway 1.1.10.10
278
ip
set interface interface ip ip_addr/mask [ secondary ] set interface interface ip unnumbered interface interface2 unset interface interface ip ip_addr
ip The IP address ip_addr and netmask mask for the specified interface or subinterface. The secondary switch specifies that the IP address is a secondary address. Use the unnumbered option if the tunnel interface does not need to support policy-based NAT, and if your configuration does not require the tunnel interface to be bound to a tunnel zone. The unnumbered option specifies that the tunnel interface is unnumbered. It does not have an IP address, but intstead borrows the IP address from another interface (interface2). The other interface is bound to the same security zone.
Example: The following commands create logical interface ethernet3/1.2, bind it to the Trust zone, and assign it IP address 10.1.40.3/24: set interface ethernet3/1.2 zone trust set interface ethernet3/1.2 ip 10.1.40.3/24
loopback-group
set interface interface1 loopback-group loopback.n unset interface interface1 loopback-group loopback.n
loopback-group Adds a specified interface (interface1) to the loopback group for a designated loopback interface (loopback.n). All members in the loopback group can share the MIP (Mapped IP) and DIP (Dynamic IP) definitions assigned to the loopback interface itself.
Example: The following commands add interfaces ethernet1 and ethernet2 to the loopback group for loopback.1, and then assign a MIP to loopback.1. This allows both ethernet1 and ethernet2 to use the assigned MIP. set interface ethernet1 loopback-group loopback.1 set interface ethernet2 loopback-group loopback.1 set int loopback.1 mip 1.1.1.1 host 10.1.1.8 netmask 255.255.255.0
manage
set interface interface manage { ident-reset | nsmgmt | ping | snmp | ssh | ssl | telnet | web } unset interface interface manage { ident-reset | nsmgmt | ping | snmp | ssh | ssl | telnet | web }
manage Enables or disables monitoring and management capability through the interface. ident-reset Directs the NetScreen device to send a TCP Reset announcement, in response to an IDENT request, to port 113. nsmgmt Enables or disables NSM (NetScreen-Security Manager) on the interface. NSM is an enterprise-level management application that configures NetScreen devices from remote hosts. For more information, see nsmgmt on page 353. mtrace Enables (or disables) mtrace manageability on the interface. (Mtrace traces a route to the source device using a multicast address.) ping Enables (or disables) pinging through the interface. snmp Enables (or disables) SNMP management through the interface. ssh Enables (or disables) SSH management through the interface. ssl Enables (or disables) SSL management through the interface. telnet Enables (or disables) telnet management through the interface. web Enables (or disables) web management through the interface.
Example: The following command enables management of SSH through interface ethernet3: set interface ethernet3 manage ssh
280
manage-ip
set interface interface manage-ip ip_addr unset interface interface manage-ip
manage-ip Defines the Manage IP address for the specified physical interface. External applications such as Telnet or WebUI can use this address to configure and monitor the NetScreen device. (This address must be in the same subnet as the interface IP address.)
Example: The following commands bind interface ethernet4/1 to the Trust zone, then set the Manage IP address to 10.1.10.10: set interface ethernet4/1 zone trust set interface ethernet4/1 manage-ip 10.1.10.10
mip
set interface interface mip ip_addr1 host ip_addr2 [ vrouter vrouter ] [ netmask mask ] unset interface interface mip ip_addr1 [ netmask mask ]
mip Defines a Mapped IP (MIP) address for the NetScreen interface. The device directs traffic sent to the MIP (ip_addr1) to the host with the IP address ip_addr2. Setting a MIP for an interface in any zone generates a book entry for the MIP in the Global zone address book. The Global zone address book keeps all the MIPs of all interfaces, regardless of the zone to which the interfaces belong. You can use these MIP addresses as the destination addresses in policies between any two zones, and as the source addresses when defining a policy from the Global zone to any other zone. host ip_addr2 Specifies the IP address of a host device that uses IPv4 addressing. The netmask value specifies either a single one-to-one mapping or a mapping of one IP address range to another. (Note: Be careful to exclude the interface and gateway IP addresses, and any Virtual IP addresses in the subnet from the MIP address range.) vrouter vrouter Identifies the virtual router containing a route to the host device. netmask Specifies the range of host IP addresses.
281
Example: The following commands use a MIP to allow remote hosts to request HTTP services from a local HTTP server, located in a non-routable subnet, over a public WAN infrastructure. The MIP directly translates all outgoing source IP addresses into public addresses. 1. Set up ethernet interfaces. unset interface ethernet2 unset interface ethernet2 unset interface ethernet3 unset interface ethernet3 ip zone ip zone
2. 3.
set interface ethernet2 zone trust set interface ethernet2 ip 10.100.2.1/24 set interface ethernet3 zone untrust set interface ethernet3 ip 1.1.12.1/24 Create a MIP definition for the interface bound to the Untrust zone. set interface ethernet3 mip 2.2.22.5 host 10.100.2.5 vrouter trust-vr Create a policy definition that invokes the MIP. set policy from untrust to trust any mip(2.2.22.5) http nat permit save
mtrace
set interface interface mtrace unset interface interface mtrace
mtrace Allows you to do packet tracing from a multicast receiver to a source.
282
mtu
set interface interface mtu number unset interface interface mtu
mtu Sets the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) for the interface. The MTU is the largest physical packet size (in octets), that the device can transmit on the interface. The NetScreen device must fragment any messages larger than the MTU before sending them. The default MTU size is 1500 octets. Enter a value between 800 and 1500.
nat
set interface interface nat
nat Directs the device to perform Network Address Translation (NAT) on outbound traffic from the trusted LAN. This option is only available when the device is in Route Mode, in which the interfaces have assigned IP addresses.
nhtb
set interface interface.number nhtb ip_addr vpn tunn_str unset interface interface.number nhtb ip_addr
nhtb Binds the specified VPN tunnel (vpn tunn_str) to the tunnel interface and manually maps the specified VPN tunnel to the IP address of a remote peers tunnel interface (ip_addr) in the NHTB (next-hop tunnel binding) table. After that, you can enter a static route in the route table that uses that tunnel interface IP address as the gateway.
283
Example: With the following commands you first bind vpn1 to tunnel.1 and map vpn1 to 10.2.3.1, which is the IP address of the remote peers tunnel interface. Then you define a static route to 10.2.2.0/24, which is the address of the remote peers internal LAN, through tunnel.1 in the trust-vr routing domain, using the remote peers tunnel interface IP address (10.2.3.1) as the next-hop gateway: set interface tunnel.1 nhtb 10.2.3.1 vpn vpn1 set vrouter trust-vr route 10.2.2.0/24 interface tunnel.1 gateway 10.2.3.1
phy
set interface interface phy { ... } unset interface interface phy { ... }
phy Defines the physical connection mode on the specified interface. auto The NetScreen unit automatically decides whether to operate at full or half duplex (as required by the network device connected to NetScreen unit). full Forces the NetScreen device to operate at full duplex. Specify either 100Mbps or 10Mbps. half Forces the NetScreen device to operate at half duplex. Specify either 100Mbps or 10Mbps. holddown number Sets the holddown time for the link, in increments of 100 milliseconds. link-down Forces the physical link down. manual Specifies manual mode for a gigabit interface. Setting the gigabit interface to manual disables auto negotiation. Note: You must configure both sides in the same negotiation mode, or the link does not initiate.
protocol
set set set set set set interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface protocol protocol protocol protocol protocol protocol igmp igmp igmp ospf ospf pim host router { host { ... } | router { ... } } { ... }
284
set interface interface protocol pim set interface interface protocol rip set interface interface protocol rip { ... } unset interface interface protocol bgp unset interface interface protocol bgp { ... } unset interface interface protocol ospf unset interface interface protocol ospf { ... } unset interface interface protocol rip unset interface interface protocol rip { ... } unset interface interface protocol igmp unset interface interface protocol igmp { ... } unset interface interface protocol pim unset interface interface protocol pim { ... }
protocol rip Sets, unsets, or displays the current RIP settings for the interface. authentication { password pswd_str | md5 key_str key-id id_num } Specifies the authentication method used to verify RIP neighbors. - password specifies a clear-text password used for verification. If you specify password authentication, you must also specify an 8-byte password. - md5 directs the Netscreen device to use the Message Digest version 5 (MD5) authentication algorithm for verification. If you specify MD5 authentication, you must also specify a 16-byte key and, optionally, a key identifier (the default identifier is 0). You can specify more than one MD5 key with different key identifier numbers (between 0-255). If there are multiple MD5 keys configured, you can use the active-md5-key-id option to select the key identifier of the key to be used for authentication. demand-circuit (For tunnel interfaces only) Enables the demand circuit feature (RFC 2091) on the specified interface. enable Enables RIP on the specified interface. metric number Configures the RIP metric for the specified interface. The default metric is 1. neighbor ip_addr Configures a static RIP neighbor on the specified interface. This can be used when configuring point-to-multipoint RIP interfaces.
285
passive-mode Specifies that the interface is to receive but not transmit RIP packets. receive-version v1 | v1v2 | v2 Specifies the RIP protocol version for updates that the specified interface receives. The default version is the version that is configured for the virtual router. route-map name_str Specifies the route-map on which to filter incoming routes (routes learned by RIP) or outgoing routes (routes advertised by RIP). - in Specifies the route map is to be used for incoming routes. - out Specifies the route map is to be used for outgoing routes. send-version v1 | v1v2 | v2 Specifies the RIP protocol version for updates that the specified interface sends. The default version is the version that is configured for the virtual router. split-horizon Enables the split-horizon function on the specified interface. If split-horizon is enabled, RIP does not advertise routes learned from a neighbor back to the same neighbor. This avoids the routing-loop problem that occurs in some routing situations. If split-horizon is disabled, RIP advertises routes learned from a neighbor as they exist in the RIP database. By default, split-horizon is enabled. When you enable the poison-reverse switch, RIP still advertises routes learned from a neighbor back to the same neighbor, but defines the metric for those routes as infinity (16). This causes the neighbor to immediately remove the route, thus breaking a potential routing loop faster than with split-horizon alone. When you disable this switch, RIP advertises routes learned from a neighbor back to the same neighbor with the correct metric. summary-enable Enables route summarization in routing updates sent on the specified interface. You configure RIP summary routes at the virtual router level. protocol ospf Sets, unsets or displays the current routing protocol settings for the interface. area { ip_addr | number } Assigns the interface to the specified OSPF area. OSPF areas divide the internetwork into smaller, more manageable constituent pieces. This technique reduces the amount of information that each router must store and maintain about all the other routers. authentication { md5 key_str [ key-id id_num ] | password pswd_str } Specifies the authentication method, including MD5 key string, the key identifier number (the default is 0), and password. You can specify more than one MD5 key with different key identifier numbers (between 0-255). If there are multiple MD5 keys configured, you can use the active-md5-key-id option to select the key identifier of the key to be used for authentication.
286
cost number Specifies the desirability of the path associated with the interface. The lower the value of this metric, the more desirable the interface path. dead-interval number Specifies the maximum amount of time that the NetScreen device waits, after it stops receiving packets from the neighbor, before classifying the neighbor as offline. demand-circuit (For tunnel interfaces only) Enables the demand circuit feature (RFC 1793) on the specified interface. disable Disables OSPF on the interface, thus preventing transmission or receipt of OSPF packets through the interface. hello-interval number Specifies the amount of time in seconds that elapse between instances of the interface sending Hello packets to the network announcing the presence of the interface. ignore-mtu Specifies that any mismatches in maximum transmission unit (MTU) values between the local and remote interfaces that are found during OSPF database negotiations are ignored. This option should only be used when the MTU on the local interface is lower than the MTU on the remote interface. link-type Configures the interface link type. By default, an ethernet interfaces is treated as an interface to a broadcast network with multiple attached routers. For broadcast networks, the Hello protocol elects a Designated Router and Backup Designated Router for the network. - p2p Configures the interface as a point-to-point link. - p2mp (For tunnel interfaces only) Configures the interface as a point-to-multipoint link. neighbor-list number Specifies the number of an access list from which the local virtual router accepts valid neighbors to form adjacencies. The access list must be in the virtual router to which the interface is bound. passive Specifies that the IP address of the interface is advertised into the OSPF domain as an OSPF route and not as an external route, but the interface does not transmit or receive OSPF packets. This option is useful when BGP is also enabled on the interface. priority number Specifies the router election priority. reduce-flooding Specifies that periodic LSA updates are not flooded on the specified interface. Other OSPF routers in the area must support the demand circuit feature.
287
retransmit-interval number Specifies the amount of time (in seconds) that elapses before the interface resends a packet to a neighbor that did not acknowledge a previous transmission attempt for the same packet. transit-delay number Specifies the amount of time (in seconds) that elapses before the NetScreen device advertises a packet received on the interface. protocol igmp Sets, unsets or displays the current IGMP settings for the interface. accept groups Specifies the access list that identifies the multicast groups the hosts on the specified interface can join. Enter this command only if the interface is in router mode. accept hosts Specifies the access list that identifies from which hosts the interface can receive join and leave messages. After you have set this command, the interface accepts join and leave messages only from the hosts in the access list. Enter this command only if the interface is in router mode. accept routers Specifies the access list that identifies the routers that are eligible for Querier selection. Only the routers in this list can be elected as Querier. Enter this command only if the interface is in router mode. always Enables the interface to forward IGMP messages even if it is a non-Querier. Enter this command only if the interface is in router mode and IGMP proxy is enabled. enable Enables or disables the IGMP protocol on the interface. host Creates an IGMP host instance on the specified interface. join-group Enables the interface to join the specified multicast group. Enter this command only if the interface is in router mode. last-member-query-interval Sets the interval (in seconds) the Querier waits for a response to a group-specific query before it stops sending multicast traffic for that particular group on the specified interface (range 1-25 inclusive). Enter this command if the interface is in router mode and it is running IGMP version 2. leave-interval Sets the interval (in seconds) between group specific-queries (range 1 - 255 inclusive). Enter this command if the interface is in router mode. no-check-router-alert IGMP packets contain a router-alert IP option. By default, an IGMP-enabled device checks IGMP packets for this option and drops packets that do not have this option. Enter this command to accept all IGMP packets without checking for the router-alert option.
288
no-check-subnet By default, an IGMP interface accepts IGMP packets from its own subnet only. Enter this command to allow the interface to accept IGMP packets (queries, membership reports, and leave messages) from any subnet. proxy When the interface is in router mode, enables IGMP proxy mode. query-interval Specifies the interval (in seconds) between General Queries (range 1 to 255, inclusive). Enter this command if the interface is set to router mode and it is the Querier for a multicast group. query-max-response-time Sets the maximum number of seconds that elapses between the time a Querier sends a General Query and the time a host responds to it (range1 to 25, inclusive). Enter this command if the interface is in router mode. router Sets the specified interface to router mode. static-group Manually adds the multicast group to the specified interface. Enter this command only if the interface is in router mode. version Specifies the IGMP version. When an interface is in host mode, the device automatically sets the IGMP version. When an interface is in router mode, it runs IGMP version 2 by default. Enter this command to change the IGMP version of a router interface. NetScreen devices support IGMP versions 1, 2, and 3. protocol pim Sets, unsets or displays the current PIM settings for the interface. boot-strap border Configures the interface as a border for bootstrap (BSR) messages. The interface receives and processes BSR messages, but does not forward these messages to other interfaces even if there is a multicast group policy that allows BSR messages between zones. dr-priority Configures the priority of the interface during the designated router election. enable Enables or disables the PIM-SM protocol on the interface. hello-interval Specifies the interval (expressed in seconds) at which the interface sends hello messages to its neighbors. join-prune-interval Sets the interval (expressed in seconds) at which the interface sends join-prune messages. neighbor-policy Identifies the access list that allows or disallows certain neighbor adjacencies.
289
proxy dns
set interface interface proxy dns
proxy dns Directs the device to use proxy DNS feature. The proxy DNS feature provides a transparent mechanism that allows clients to make split DNS queries. Using this technique, the proxy selectively redirects the DNS queries to specific DNS servers, according to partial or complete domain names. This is useful when VPN tunnels or PPPoE virtual links provide multiple network connectivity, and it is necessary to direct some DNS queries to one network, and other queries to another network. The most important advantages of a DNS proxy are as follows. Domain lookups are usually more efficient. For example, DNS queries meant for the corporate domain (such as acme.com) could go to the corporate DNS server exclusively, while all others go to the ISP DNS server, thus reducing the load on the corporate server. In addition, this can prevent corporate domain information from leaking into the internet. DNS proxy allows you to transmit selected DNS queries through a tunnel interface, thus preventing malicious users from learning about internal network configuration. For example, DNS queries bound for the corporate server can pass through a tunnel interface, and use security features such as authentication, encryption, and anti-replay.
route
set interface interface route
route Directs the device to run in Route Mode, in which the interfaces have assigned IP addresses.
route-deny
set interface interface route-deny unset interface interface route-deny
route-deny Enabling this flag blocks all traffic in or out of the same interface. This includes traffic between the primary subnet and any secondary subnet, and one secondary subnet to another secondary subnet.
290
screen
get interface interface screen
screen Displays the current firewall (screen) counters.
secondary
set interface interface ip ip_addr/mask secondary get interface interface secondary [ ip_addr ]
secondary Sets or displays the secondary address configured for the interface.
tag
set interface interface.n tag id_num zone zone
tag Specifies a VLAN tag (id_num) for a virtual (logical) subinterface. The interface name is interface.n, where n is an ID number that identifies the subinterface. For information on interface names, see Interface Names on page A-I.
Example: The following command creates a subinterface for physical interface ethernet3/1, assigns it VLAN tag 300, and binds it to the Untrust zone: set interface ethernet3/1.2 tag 300 zone untrust
track-ip
get interface interface track-ip set interface interface track-ip [ dynamic | threshold number | ip ip_addr
291
[ interval number | threshold number | weight number ] ] unset interface interface track-ip [ dynamic | ip ip_addr [ interval | threshold | weight ] | threshold ]
track-ip Sets, unsets, or displays the tracking of IP addresses for the specified interface. dynamic Configures tracking of the IP address of the default gateway for the interface. threshold number Specifies the failure threshold for IP tracking on the interface. If the weighted sum of all tracked IP failures on the interface is equal to or greater than the threshold, IP tracking on the interface is considered to be failed and the routes associated with the interface are deactivated on the NetScreen device. On some NetScreen devices, failover to the backup interface occurs. Unsetting the tracked IP threshold on the interface sets the threshold to the default value of 1. ip ip_addr Configures tracking for the specified IP address. You can specify the following options: - interval number Specifies the interval, in seconds, that ping requests are sent to the tracked IP address. If you are unsetting the interval for the tracked IP address, the interval is changed to the default value of 1. - threshold number Specifies the failure threshold for the tracked IP address. If the number of consecutive ping failures to the tracked IP address is equal to or greater than the threshold, the tracked IP address is considered failed. If you are unsetting the threshold for the tracked IP address, the device changes the threshold to the default value (3). - weight number Specifies the weight associated with the failure of the tracked IP address. If a tracked IP address fails, its weight is used to calculated the weighted sum of all tracked IP failures on the interface. If you are unsetting the weight for the tracked IP address, the weight is changed to the default value of 1.
292
Examples: The following command defines IP tracking for an interface. set IP address 1.1.1.1 on the ethernet3 interface Ping interval of 10 seconds Tracked IP address failure threshold of 5 interface ethernet3 track-ip ip 1.1.1.1 interval 10 threshold 5
The following command sets the tracking threshold for the ethernet3 interface to 3: set interface ethernet3 track-ip threshold 3
tunnel
set interface tunnel.n { zone name_str | protocol { bgp | ospf [ demand-circuit ] | rip [ demand-circuit ] } { ... } } set interface tunnel.number tunnel encap gre [ key ] set interface tunnel.number tunnel keep-alive interval number set interface tunnel.number tunnel keep-alive threshold number set interface tunnel.number tunnel local-if interface dst-ip ip_addr unset interface tunnel.number tunnel unset interface tunnel.number tunnel [ keep-alive ] unset interface tunnel.number
tunnel.n tunnel encap gre keep-alive Specifies a tunnel interface. The n parameter is an ID number that identifies the tunnel interface. Speicifes parameters for the tunnel interface. Specifies that all traffic in the tunnel is encapsulated using the GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) protocol. The tunnel interface sends keep-alive messages to monitor the status of the connection. You can specify the interval (in seconds) between keep-alive messages, and the number of times the local tunnel interface sends keep-live messages without receiving a reply before it terminates the connection. Specifies the local interface and the destination IP address of a GRE tunnel.
local-if
293
Example: The following commands create a tunnel interface named tunnel.2 with IP address 172.10.10.5/24: set interface tunnel.2 zone untrust set interface tunnel.2 ip 172.10.10.5/24
protocol
set interface tunnel.n protocol { bgp | ospf [ demand-circuit ] | rip [ demand-circuit ] } { ... } } unset set interface tunnel.n protocol { bgp | ospf [ demand-circuit ] | rip [ demand-circuit ] } { ... } }
protocol Specifies the routing protocol that the device uses on a specified tunnel interface. NetScreen devices support BGP, OSPF, RIP, IGMP, and PIM. These commands set or unset protocol parameters.
Example: The following command enables the RIP-specific route summary feature for the tunnel.1 interface: set interface tunnel.1 protocol rip summary-enable
vip
set interface interface vip ip_addr [ + ] port_num [ name_str ip_addr [ manual ] ]
vip Defines a Virtual IP (VIP) address (ip_addr) for the interface so you can map routable IP addresses to internal servers and access their services. The port_num parameter is the port number, which specifies which service to access. The name_str and ip_addr parameters specify the service name and the IP address of the server providing the service, respectively. The manual switch turns off server auto detection. Using the + operator adds another service to the VIP.
Example: The following command creates a VIP for interface ethernet3, specifying the MAIL service (ID 25): set interface ethernet3 vip 1.1.14.15 25 MAIL 10.1.10.10
294
vlan trunk
set interface vlan1 vlan trunk unset interface vlan1 vlan trunk
vlan trunk (vlan1 interface only.) Determines whether the NetScreen device accepts or drops Layer-2 frames. The device makes this decision only when the following conditions apply: The NetScreen device is in transparent mode. The device receives VLAN tagged frames on an interface. The device then performs one of two actions. Drop the frames because they have tags. Ignore the tags and forward the frames according to MAC addresses. The vlan trunk interface switch determines which action the device performs. For example, the command set interface vlan1 vlan trunk instructs the NetScreen device to ignore the tags and forward the frames. This action closely follows that of a Layer-2 switch trunk port.
webauth
set interface interface webauth [ ssl-only ]
webauth Enables WebAuth user authentication. Enabling the ssl-only switch allows only SSL-based (HTTPS) user authentication.
webauth-ip
set interface interface webauth-ip ip_addr
webauth-ip Specifies the WebAuth server IP address for user authentication. Before sending service requests (such as MAIL) through the interface, the user must first browse to the WebAuth address with a web browser. The NetScreen device presents a login screen, prompting for user name and password. After successfully entering the user name and password, the user can send service requests through the interface.
295
To protect an interface with the WebAuth feature, you must create a security policy with the set policy command, specifying the webauth switch. To specify the WebAuth server, use the set webauth command.
zone
set interface interface zone zone unset interface interface zone
zone Binds the interface to a security zone.
Example: To bind interface ethernet2/2 to the Trust zone: set interface ethernet2/2 zone trust
296
ip through port-mode
This section lists and describes Juniper Networks NetScreen Command Line Interface (CLI) commands ip through port-mode. Note: As you execute CLI commands using the syntax descriptions in this section, you may find that certain commands and command features are unavailable on your NetScreen platform. A good example is the vsys command, which is available on a NetScreen-500 device, but not on a NetScreen-5XP device. Similarly, some command options are unavailable on certain platforms, as with the df-bit option of the vpn command. This option is available on a NetScreen-500, but not on a NetScreen-5XP.
297
ip
Description: Use the ip commands to set or display IP parameters for communication with a TFTP server. A NetScreen device can use TFTP servers to save or import external files. These files can contain configuration settings, software versions, public keys, error messages, certificates, and other items.
Syntax
get
get ip tftp
set
set ip tftp { retry number | timeout number }

retry
set ip tftp retry number
retry The number of times to retry a TFTP communication before the NetScreen device ends the attempt and generates an error message.
Example: The following command sets the number of retries to 7: set ip tftp retry 7
298
timeout
set ip tftp timeout number
timeout Determines how the long (in seconds) the NetScreen device waits before terminating an inactive TFTP connection.
Example: The following command sets the timeout period to 15 seconds: set ip tftp timeout 15
299
ip-classification
Description: Use the ip-classification command to display the current IP-based traffic classification. IP-based traffic classification allows you to use virtual systems without VLANs. Instead of VLAN tags, the NetScreen device uses IP addresses to sort traffic, associating a subnet or range of IP addresses with a particular system (root or vsys). Using IP-based traffic classification exclusively to sort traffic, all systems share the following: The untrust-vr and a user-defined internal-vr The Untrust zone and a user-defined internal zone An Untrust zone interface and a user-defined internal zone interface
To designate a subnet or range of IP addresses to the root system or to a previously created virtual system, you must issue one of the following CLI commands at the root level: set zone zone ip-classification net ip_addr/mask { root | vsys name_str } set zone zone ip-classification range ip_addr1-ip_addr2 { root | vsys name_str } For more information, see the zone command.
Syntax
get
get ip-classification [ zone zone ]

zone
get ip-classification zone zone [ ip ip_addr ]
zone The name of the security zone. The ip ip_addr option specifies a particular address in a specific zone.
300
ippool
Definition: Use the ippool commands to associate the name of an IP pool with a range of IP addresses. The NetScreen device uses IP pools when it assigns addresses to dialup users using Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP).
Syntax
get
get ippool name_str
set
set ippool string ip_addr1 ip_addr2 set ippool string ip_addr3 ip_addr4
unset
unset ippool string

Variable Parameters
get ippool name_str set ippool string ip_addr1 ip_addr2 set ippool string ip_addr3 ip_addr4 unset ippool string
string ip_addr1 ip_addr2 Defines the name of the IP pool. Starting and ending IP addresses in the IP pool.
301
p_addr3 ip_addr4
A second set of starting and ending IP addresses in the same IP pool.
Example: To configure the IP pool named office with the IP addresses 172.16.10.100 through 172.16.10.200: set ippool office 172.16.10.100 172.16.10.200
302
l2tp
Description: Use the l2tp commands to configure or remove L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol) tunnels and L2TP settings from the NetScreen device. L2TP is an extension to PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) that allows ISPs to operate VPNs. L2TP allows dial-up users to make virtual Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) connections to an L2TP network server (LNS). The NetScreen device can operate as such a server.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] l2tp { all | ip ip_addr }
get
get l2tp { all [ active ] | tunn_str [ active ] | default }
set (default)
set l2tp default { auth server name_str [ query-config ] | ippool string | dns1 ip_addr | dns2 ip_addr | wins1 ip_addr | wins2 ip_addr | ppp-auth { any | chap | pap } | }
303
set (tunn_str)
set l2tp tunn_str [ auth server name_str [ query-config ] [ user usr_name | user-group grp_name ] | [ peer-ip ip_addr ] [ host name_str ] [ outgoing-interface interface ] [ secret string ] [ keepalive number ] | remote-setting { [ ippool string ] [ dns1 ip_addr ] [ dns2 ip_addr ] [ wins1 ip_addr ] [ wins2 ip_addr ] } ]
unset
unset l2tp { default { dns1 | dns2 | ippool | radius-port | wins1 | wins2 } | tunn_str { auth | host | keepalive | outgoing-interface interface { keepalive | secret } | peer-ip | remote-setting [ ippool ] [ dns1 ] [ dns2 ] [ wins1 ] [ wins2 ] | secret }
304

Variable Parameter
get l2tp tunn_str get l2tp tunn_str [ ... ] set l2tp tunn_str [ ... ] unset l2tp tunn_str { ... }
tunn_str The name or IP address of the L2TP tunnel.
Example: The following command identifies the RADIUS authentication server (Rad_Serv) for an L2TP tunnel (Mkt_Tun). set l2tp Mkt_Tun auth server Rad_Serv
active
get l2tp all active get l2tp tunn_str active
active Displays the currently active L2TP connections for tunnels.
Example: The following command displays the current active/inactive status of the L2TP connection for a tunnel (home2work): get l2tp home2work active
305
all
clear cluster l2tp all clear l2tp all get l2tp all
all Displays or clears the ID number, tunnel name, user, peer IP address, peer host name, L2TP tunnel shared secret, and keepalive value for every L2TP tunnel (all) or a specified L2TP tunnel (string).
auth server
set l2tp tunn_str auth server name_str [ ... ] set l2tp default auth server name_str [ ... ] unset l2tp tunn_str auth
auth server Specifies the object name (name_str) of the authentication server containing the authentication database. query-config Directs the NetScreen device to query the authentication server for IP, DNS, and WINS information. user usr_name Restricts the L2TP tunnel to a specified user (usr_name). user-group grp_name Restricts the L2TP tunnel to a specified user group (grp_name).
Example: The following command directs the device to query the RADIUS authentication server (Rad_Serv) for IP, DNS, and WINS information: set l2tp Mkt_Tun auth server Rad_Serv query-config
cluster
clear cluster l2tp { ... }
306
default
get l2tp default set l2tp default { ... } unset l2tp tunn_str [ ... ] unset l2tp default { ... }
default Defines or displays the default L2TP settings. auth server name_str The object name of the authentication server. dns1 ip_addr The IP address of the primary DNS server. dns2 ip_addr The IP address of the secondary DNS server. ippool string The name of the L2TP IP pool, from which IP addresses are drawn to be assigned to L2TP users. ppp-auth { any [ chap | pap ] } Specifies the authentication type in response to a dialup users request to make a Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) link. (The any switch instructs the NetScreen device to negotiate CHAP and then, if that attempt fails, PAP.) - chap specifies Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP), which does not transmit the password across the network. - pap specifies Password Authentication Protocol (PAP), which does not use encryption. radius-port port_num Defines the port number of the default L2TP server. The number can be between 1024 and 65,535. wins1 ip_addr The IP address of the primary WINS server. wins2 ip_addr The IP address of the secondary WINS server.
307
Example: The following commands create a set of default L2TP settings. set set set set set set set IP pool (chiba). Use of the local database. CHAP for PPP authentication. Primary and secondary DNS servers at 192.168.2.1 and 192.168.4.71 respectively. Primary and secondary WINS servers at 10.20.1.16 and 10.20.5.101 respectively. l2tp default ippool chiba l2tp default auth local l2tp default ppp-auth chap l2tp default dns1 192.168.2.1 l2tp default dns2 192.168.4.71 l2tp default wins1 10.20.1.16 l2tp default wins2 10.20.5.101
host
set l2tp tunn_str [ ... ] host name_str [ ... ] unset l2tp tunn_str host
host Adds a restriction that allows only a client with the specified client host name (name_str) to establish the L2TP tunnel.
keepalive
set l2tp tunn_str [ ... ] keepalive number
keepalive Defines how many seconds of inactivity, the NetScreen device (LNS) waits before sending a hello message to the dialup client (LAC).
Example: The following command specifies a keepalive value of 120 for an L2TP tunnel (west_coast): set l2tp west_coast keepalive 120
308
outgoing-interface
set l2tp tunn_str [ ... ] outgoing-interface interface
outgoing-interface Specifies the outgoing interface for the L2TP tunnel. Note: This setting may be mandatory on your NetScreen device.
Example: The following command specifies interface ethernet4 as the outgoing interface for L2TP tunnel (east_coast): set l2tp east_coast outgoing-interface ethernet4
peer-ip
set l2tp tunn_str [ ... ] peer-ip ip_addr [ ... ]
peer-ip Adds a restriction that allows only a client host with the specified IP address (ip_addr) to establish the L2TP tunnel.
Example: The following command specifies the IP address of the LAC (172.16.100.19): set l2tp east_coast peer-ip 172.16.100.19
secret
set l2tp tunn_str [ ... ] secret string [ ... ]
secret Defines a shared secret used for authentication between the NetScreen device (which acts as the L2TP Network Server, or LNS) and the L2TP access concentrator (LAC).
Example: The following command specifies a shared secret (94j9387): set l2tp east_coast secret 94j9387
309
user
set l2tp tunn_str auth server name_str [ ... ] user usr_name
user Restricts the L2TP tunnel to a L2TP user (usr_name). (Not specifying name_str enables any L2TP user.)
Example: The following command adds a restriction that allows only a specified L2TP user (jking) to establish a L2TP tunnel (west_coast). set l2tp west_coast auth server Our_Auth user jking
Defaults
The default L2TP UDP port number is 1701. By default, the NetScreen device uses no L2TP tunnel secret to authenticate the LAC-LNS pair. This is not a problem, because the device performs IKE authentication when it uses L2TP over IPSec. The default interval for sending a keepalive message is 60 seconds. PPP-auth type is any.
310
led
Description: When either an event alarm or a firewall attack occurs, the LED glows red to signal the attack. Use the clear led command to return an ALARM or FW (firewall) LED to green after such an attack occurs.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] led { alarm | firewall }

alarm
clear [ cluster ] led alarm
alarm Specifies the ALARM LED.
cluster
clear cluster led alarm clear cluster led firewall
firewall
clear [ cluster ] led firewall
firewall Specifies the firewall (FW) LED.
311
lcd
Description: Use the lcd commands to activate or inactivate the LCD on the front panel of a NetScreen device, or to display the current lcd setting.
Syntax
get
get lcd
set
set lcd { display | key-in }
unset
unset lcd { display | key-in }
312

display
set lcd display unset lcd display
display Turns the LCD off or on and locks the control keys.
key-in
set lcd key-in unset lcd key-in
key-in Locks and unlocks the control keys, but does not affect the LCD display.
313
license-key
Description: Use the license-key command to upgrade or display the current software license. The license key feature allows you to expand the capabilities of your NetScreen device without having to upgrade to a different device or system image. You can purchase a key that unlocks specified features already loaded in the software, such as the following: User capacity Virtual systems Virtual Private Networks Zones Virtual routers HA
Note: Not all keys are available for all products.
Syntax
exec
exec license-key key_str key_str { capacity key_str | ensure keister | update | virtualization key_str | vpn key_str | vrouter key_str | vsys key_str | zone key_str }
314
get
get license-key
set
set license-key update-url url_str
unset
unset license-key update-url
Keywords
capacity
exec license-key capacity key_str
capacity Allows you to expand the user capacity of the NetScreen device with your given license-key (key_str).
nsrp
exec license-key nsrp key_str
nsrp Specifies a NetScreen Redundancy Protocol (NSRP) license key (key_str).
315
update
exec license-key update
update Before your NetScreen device can receive regular update service for Deep Inspection (DI) signatures, you must purchase a subscription to the service, register your device, and then retrieve the subscription. You retrieve the subscription and activate it on your device by executing the command exec license-key update. For more information, refer to the NetScreen Concepts and Examples Reference Guide.
update-url
set license-key update-url url_str
update-url Specifies the URL of the license key server from which the NetScreen device loads license key updates.
virtualization
exec license-key virtualization key_str
virtualization Specifies a virtualization license key (key_str).
vpn
exec license-key vpn key_str
vpn Specifies a NetScreen Virtual Private Network (VPN) license key (key_str).
316
vrouter
exec license-key vrouter key_str
vrouter Specifies a virtual router license key (key_str).
vsys
exec license-key vsys key_str
vsys Specifies a virtual system (vsys) license key (key_str).
zone
exec license-key zone key_str
zone Specifies a security zone license key (key_str).
317
log
Description: Use the log commands to configure the NetScreen device for message logging. The the log commands allow you to perform the following: Display the current log status according to severity level, policy, service, ScreenOS module, source, destination, or duration. Determine which log information to display or omit. Display asset recovery information. Configure logging to mitigate message loss due to memory limitations.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] log { self [ end-time string ] | system [ saved ] | traffic [ policy id_num [ -id_num ] ] [ end-time string ] ] }
get
get log { asset-recovery | audit-loss-mitigation | self | traffic [ policy pol_num [ -pol_num ] ] [ start-date date [ time ] ] [ end-date date ] [ time ] ] [ start-time string ] [ end-time string ] [ min-duration string ] [ max-duration string ]
318
[ service name_str ] [ src-ip ip_addr [ -ip_addr ] [ src-netmask mask ] [ src-port port_num [-port_num ] ] ] ] [ dst-ip ip_addr [ -ip_addr ] [ dst-netmask mask ] ] [ dst-port port_num [-port_num ] ] ] [ no-rule-displayed ] | sort-by { date [ [ start-date date [ time ] ] [ end-date date [ time ] ] ] dst-ip [ ip_addr [ -ip_addr | dst-netmask mask ] ] src-ip [ ip_addr [ -ip_addr | src-netmask mask ] ] time [ start-time time ] [ end-time time ] } setting [ module { system | all } ] }
set
set log { audit-loss-mitigation | module name_str level string destination string }
unset
unset log { audit-loss-mitigation | module name_str level string destination string }
319

audit-loss-mitigation
get log audit-loss-mitigation set log audit-loss-mitigation unset log audit-loss-mitigation
audit-loss-mitigation Stops generation of auditable events when the number of such events exceeds the capacity of the NetScreen device. Enabling this feature reduces the loss of event logs due to log overloads. On some NetScreen devices, you must connect the syslog server to the management interface on the Management Module. This ensures that the syslog server is available if the audit trail fills up and network traffic stops.
cluster
clear cluster log { ... }
destination
set log module name_str level string destination string unset log module name_str level string destination string
destination Specifies the destination of the generated log messages. The permissible destinations are console, internal, email, snmp, syslog, webtrends, onesecure, and pcmcia.
Example: The following command instructs the NetScreen device to direct all system module messages at the alert level (or higher) to the console port. set log module system level alert destination console
320
dst-port
get log traffic dst-port number
dst-port Filters the output of the get log command by a range of destination port numbers or by a specific destination port number.
Example: The following command filters the get traffic log output to display only traffic destined for port 80 (that is, HTTP traffic): get log traffic dst-port 80
level
set log module name_str level string destination string unset log module name_str level string destination string
level Specifies the minimum urgency level of the generated log messages. Starting with the most urgent, these levels are emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notification, information, and debugging. For the get log command, the all-levels option displays all security levels.
Example: The following command instructs the NetScreen device to direct all system module messages at the critical level (or higher) to the e-mail server: set log module system level critical destination email
321
min-duration | max-duration
get log event { ... } [ ... ] min-duration string [ ... ] get log event { ... } [ ... ] max-duration string [ ... ]
min-duration max-duration Displays traffic log entries for traffic whose duration was longer than or equal to the minimum duration specified. Displays traffic log entries for traffic whose duration was shorter than or equal to the maximum duration specified.
Example: The following command displays traffic log entries for traffic that lasted 5 minutes to 1 hour: get log traffic min-duration 00:05:00 max-duration 01:00:00
module
get log event module { ... } [ ... ] set log module name_str { ... } unset log module name_str { ... }
module Specifies the name of the ScreenOS module that generates the log message.
Example: The following command instructs the NetScreen device to direct all system module messages at the critical level (or higher) to the webtrends server: set log module system level critical destination webtrends
no-rule-displayed
get log { ... } [ ... ] no-rule-displayed
no-rule-displayed Displays traffic log entries, but does not display policy information.
Example: The following command displays traffic log entries without displaying policy information: get log traffic no-rule-displayed
policy
clear [ cluster ] log traffic policy pol_num [ -pol_num ]
policy Displays traffic log entries for a policy (specified by its ID number) or for several policies (specified by a range of ID numbers). The ID number can be any value between 0 and the total number of established policies. To define a range, enter the starting and ending ID numbers using this syntax: pol_num [- pol_num ]
Example: The following command displays traffic log table entries for any policy with ID 3 to 9 (inclusive): get log traffic policy 3-9
self
clear [ cluster ] log self [ ... ] get log self [ ... ]
self Clears or displays self-log entries from the log.
Example: The following command displays traffic log table entries for any policy with a source IP address of 172.16.10.1 and a destination address of 172.16.10.100: get log self src-ip 172.16.10.1 dst-ip 172.16.10.100
service
get log { ... } [ ... ] service name_str [ ... ]
service Displays traffic log entries for a specified Service, such as TCP, ICMP, FTP, or Any. The name does not have to be complete; for example, both TC and CP are recognized as TCP. Although you cannot specify a Service group, note that because TP is recognized as FTP, HTTP, and TFTP, entering TP displays log entries for all three Services.
Example: The following command displays traffic log table entries for TCP: get log self service tcp
setting
get log setting [ ... ]
setting Displays log setting information. The module string value specifies the name of the module for which the log settings apply.
Example: The following command displays traffic log settings for the system module: get log setting module system
sort-by
get get get get log log log log { { { { ... ... ... ... } } } } sort-by sort-by sort-by sort-by date [ dst-ip src-ip time [ [ start-date date ] [ end-date date ] ] [ time ] [ ip_addr [ -ip_addr | dst-netmask mask ] ] [ ip_addr [ -ip_addr | src-netmask mask ] ] start-time time ] [ end-time time ]
sort-by
Sorts the log information by any of the following criterion. date | time Sorts the logs by date, time, or both. The start-date option displays logs that occurred at or before the time specified. The end-date option displays logs that occurred at or after the time specified. The format for start-date and end-date date is mm/dd[/yy-hh:mm:ss]. The format for start-time and end-time is hh:mm:ss. You can omit the year (the current year is the default), or express the year using the last two digits or all four digits. The hour, minute, and second are optional. The delimiter between the date and the time can be a dash or an underscore: 12/31/2002-23:59:00 12/31/2002_23:59:00 dst-ip Sorts the traffic logs by destination IP address. src-ip Sorts the traffic logs by source IP address.
324
Example: The following command displays traffic log settings sorted by date and time: get log traffic sort-by date start-date 11/21/2003-22:24:00
src-ip | dst-ip
get get get get log log log log { { { { ... ... ... ... } } } } [ [ [ [ ... ... ... ... ] ] ] ] src-ip ip_addr sort-by src-ip dst-ip ip_addr sort-by dst-ip [ -ip_addr ] [ ... ip_addr [ -ip_addr [ -ip_addr ] [ ... ip_addr [ -ip_addr ] ] [ ... ] ] ] [ ... ]
src-ip
Displays traffic log entries for a specified source IP address or range of source IP addresses. Include the subnet mask for a source IP address to display traffic entries for all IP addresses in the same subnet as the specified source IP address. You cannot specify a source IP range and a source subnet mask simultaneously. You can also direct the device to sort event logs by source IP address. Displays traffic log entries for a specified destination IP address or range of destination IP addresses. You can specify the subnet mask for a destination IP address, but you cannot specify a destination IP range and destination subnet mask simultaneously. You can also direct the device to sort event logs by destination IP address.
dst-ip
Example: The following command displays traffic log entries for the range of destination IP addresses 172.16.20.5172.16.20.200: get log traffic dst-ip 172.16.20.5-172.16.20.200
src-port
get log { ... } [ ... ] src-port port_num [ ... ]
src-port Displays traffic log entries for a specified port number or range of source port numbers.
Example: The following command displays traffic log entries from the source port 8081: get log traffic src-port 8081
325
start-date | end-date
get log { ... } [ start-date date [ time ] ] [ end-date date [ time ] ] get log { ... } sort-by date [start-date date [ time ] ] [end-date date [ time ] ]
start-date date [ time ] Specifies the lower and upper ends of a range of dates for traffic or self logs. You can omit end-date date [ time ] the year (the current year is the default), or express the year using the last two digits or all four digits. The hour, minute, and second are optional. The delimiter between the date and the time can be a dash or an underscore: 12/31/2001-23:59:00 12/31/2001_23:59:00
start-time | end-time
get log { ... } [ start-time time ] [ end-time time ] get log { ... } sort-by [ start-time time ] [ end-time time ]
start-time time end-time time Specifies the lower and upper ends of a range of times for traffic or self logs. When you specify a start-time and/or end-time, the device sorts or filters the logs based on the specified times, regardless of the date. Specify the time in the following format: hh:mm:ss.
Example: The following command displays event log entries from 3:00 P.M. on March 4, 2001 to 2:59:59 P.M. on March 6: get log event start-time 03/04/01_15:00 end-time 03/06_14:59:59
326
system
clear [ cluster ] log system [ ... ] get log system [ reversely | saved ]
system Displays current system log information. The saved switch displays saved system log information. The reversely switch displays information in reverse order.
Example: The following command generates log messages generated from module system, and to generate only messages that are critical or greater: set log module system level critical destination console
traffic
clear [ cluster ] log traffic [ ... ] get log traffic [ ... ]
traffic Specifies traffic log entries.
Example: The following command displays traffic log entries from the source port 8081: get log traffic src-port 8081
327
mac
Description: Use the mac commands to configure a static Media Access Control (MAC) address for a NetScreen interface, or to display information on the current MAC configurations. Note: You can only execute the mac commands when the device is configured in transparent mode.
Syntax
get
get mac [ interface ]
set
set mac mac_addr interface
unset
unset mac mac_addr

Variable Parameters
mac_addr interface Specifies the MAC address. Specifies the name of the interface, as with ethernet1.
Example: The following command sets the MAC address on an NetScreen device to 111144446666 for the ethernet7 interface: set mac 111144446666 ethernet7
mac-learn
Description: Use the mac-learn commands to clear the entries in the Media Access Control (MAC) learning table, or to display information on the current MAC configurations. This command functions only when an interface is in Transparent mode. When interfaces are in Transparent mode, the NetScreen device operates at Layer 2. The security zone interfaces do not have IP addresses, and the NetScreen device forwards traffic like a Layer 2 switch.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] mac-learn [ stats ]
get
get mac-learn [ interface ]
set
set mac-learn

Variable Parameter
get mac-learn interface
interface Identifies the interface.
329
cluster
clear cluster mac-learn [ ... ]
stats
clear [ cluster ] mac-learn stats
stats Clears the MAC learning table statistics.
330
memory
Description: Use the memory commands to set or display the memory allocation conditions.
Syntax
get
get memory [ [ di | ipc | kernel | id_num | module [ all | bin | error | free | used [ address id_num size | chunk [ debug ] | pool [ name_str ] ]
id_num | protected ] ] [name_str] [ debug ] ]

Variable Parameters
get memory id_num
id_num The task ID number.
address
get memory address id_num size
address Displays the address memory fragments of the task ID number (id_num) and the size (size).
331
all
get memory all
all Displays memory fragments.
bin
get memory bin
bin Displays the task memory bin.
chunk
get memory chunk [ name_str ]
chunk Displays the object pool (name_str) memory.
di
get memory di [ ... ]
di Displays the statistics about the memory used by the deep inspection module.
error
get memory error
error Displays erroneous memory fragments.
332
free
get memory free
free Displays free memory.
ipc
get memory ipc [ ... ]
ipc Displays memory statistics about the memory used by the inter-process communication (IPC).
kernel
get memory kernel [ ... ]
kernel Displays memory statistics about the kernel heap.
module
get memory module id_num
module Displays a single memory module (id_num).
pool
get memory pool [ name_str ] [ debug ]
pool Displays pooled memory.
333
protected
get memory protected
protected Displays protected memory.
used
get memory used
used Displays used memory.
334
mirror
Description: Use the mirror commands to mirror all traffic for at least one source interface to a destination interface. This command is useful for debugging and monitoring network traffic. For example, you can connect a sniffer to a destination interface to monitor traffic passing through multiple source interfaces. Note: When a destination interface mirrors multiple source interfaces, the device may drop some frames due to a bandwidth mismatch.
Syntax
get
get mirror port
set
set mirror port source interface1 destination interface2
unset
unset mirror port source interface

destination | source
set mirror port source interface1 destination interface2
destination Specifies the source and destination interfaces.
335
modem
Description: Use the modem commands to configure modem and dial-up settings for the serial link.
Syntax
get
get modem [ config | queue { rcv-q | xmt-q } | settings | state | stats ]
set
set modem { idle-time number | interval number | isp name_str { account login string password pswd_str | primary-number string [ alternative-number string ] | priority number } retry number | settings name_str { active | init-strings string } | speed number }
336
unset
unset modem { idle-time number | interval number | isp name_str [ alternative-number ] | retry number | settings name_str | speed }
exec
exec modem command string

account
set modem isp name_str account login string password pswd_str
account Specifies the user login and password for the ISP account.
Example: The following command configures the login kgreen and the password bodie45 for the ISP account isp1: set modem isp isp1 account login kgreen password bodie45
337
active
set modem settings name_str active unset modem settings name_str
active Activates the specified modem settings and deactivates any other configured settings.
Example: The following command activates settings for the modem usr14400: set modem settings usr14400 active
alternative-number
set modem isp name_str primary-number string alternative-number string
alternative-number Specifies an alternate phone number to access the ISP.
Example: The following command configures primary and alternate phone numbers to access the ISP isp1: set modem isp isp1 primary-number 4085551212 alternative-number 4085551313
command
exec modem command string
command Sends Hayes AT commands to the modem.
config
get modem config
config Displays HDLC/PPP configuration.
338
idle-time
set modem idle-time number unset modem idle-time number
idle-time Specifies the number of minutes that elapse with no traffic on the dial-up connection before the Netscreen device disconnects the modem. The default is 10 minutes. A value of 0 means the modem never disconnects, even if there is no traffic on the dial-up connection.
Example: The following command sets an idle time of 12 minutes: set modem idle-time 12
init-strings
set modem settings name_str init-strings string unset modem settings name_str
init-strings Specifies the initialization string for the specified modem. AT string command that is recognized by the modem.
Example: The following command sets an initialization string for the modem usr14400: set modem settings usr14400 init-strings AT&FX4&A3&B1&D2&H1&I0&K1&M4&R2S7=60
interval
set modem interval number unset modem interval number
interval Specifies the number of seconds between dial-up retries. The default is 60 seconds. Range is 3-60 seconds.
339
Example: The following command sets a dial-up interval of 45 seconds: set modem interval 45
isp
set modem isp name_str { ... } unset modem isp name_str
isp Specifies the ISP.
Example: The following command configures the login kgreen and the password bodie45 for the ISP isp1: set modem isp isp1 account login kgreen password bodie45
primary-number
set modem isp name_str primary-number string
primary-number Specifies the primary phone number to access the ISP. If your modem uses tone dial by default, but you want to use pulse dial, precede the phone number with a P . If your modem uses pulse dial by default, but you want to use tone dial, precede the phone number with a T.
Example: The following command configures the primary phone number to access the ISP isp1 and specifies tone dial: set modem isp isp1 primary-number T4085551212
priority
set modem isp name_str priority number
priority Specifies the priority of this ISP for dial-up backup, relative to other ISPs that may be configured. A value of 1 is the highest priority. The number can be 0 or 1-4.
340
Example: The following command configures the ISP isp1 as the highest priority for dial-up backup: set modem isp isp1 priority 1
queue
set modem queue {...} get modem queue {...}
rcv-q xmt-q Displays contents for the HDLC rcv queue. Used for debugging only. Displays contents for the HDLC xmt queue. Used for debugging only.
Example: The following command displays the content of the HDLC rcv queue: set modem queue rcv-q
retry
set modem retry number unset modem retry number
retry Specifies the number of times ScreenOS dials the primary number, and then the alternative-number, if the line is busy or there is no answer from the ISP. The default is 3 times. The range is 0-10 times.
Example: The following command sets the number of dial-up retries to 4: set modem retry 4
settings
set modem settings name_str active | init-strings string unset modem settings name_str get modem settings
settings Configures settings for the specified modem.
341
Example: The following command activates settings for the modem usr14400: set modem settings usr14400 active
speed
set modem speed number unset modem speed
speed Specifies the maximum baud rate for the serial link between the device and the modem. The baud rate can be 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps. The default is 115200 bps.
Example: The following command sets a maximum baud rate of 56Kbps for the serial link: set modem speed 57600
state
get modem state
state Shows modem state information. Displays failover and call and global states.
stats
get modem stats
stats Shows modem status. Displays modem and HDLC layer statistics and the IN table and OUT table statistics.
342
multicast-group-policy
Description: Use the multicast-group-policy command to define a policy that allows multicast control traffic to cross the NetScreen device.
Syntax
get
get multicast-group-policy between zone1 zone2
set
set multicast-group-policy from zone1 { mgroup { mcst_addr1/mask | any } to zone2 [ mgroup ] [ igmp-message | pim-message { bsr-static-rp [ join-prune ] | join-prune } [ bi-directional ] ] | mgroup-list id_num to zone2 { igmp-message | pim-message
343
{ bsr-static-rp [ join-prune ] | join-prune } [ bi-directional ] ] }
unset
unset multicast-group-policy from zone1 { mgroup { mcst_addr1/mask | any } to zone2 [ mgroup ] [ igmp-message | pim-message { bsr-static-rp [ join-prune ] | join-prune } [ bi-directional ] ] | mgroup-list id_num to zone2 { igmp-message | pim-message { bsr-static-rp [ join-prune ] | join-prune } [ bi-directional ] ]
344

between
get multicast-group policy between zone1 zone2
between Displays the multicast policy configured between the specified zones.
bi-directional
set multicast-group policy from { ... } to { ... } bi-directional unset multicast-group policy from { ... } to { ... } bi-directional
bi-directional Specifies that the policy applies to both directions of multicast traffic.
Example: The following command defines a bi-directional multicast group policy that allows PIM messages between the trust and untrust zones: set multicast-group-policy from trust mgroup any to untrust pim-message bsr-static-rp join-prune bi-directional
from ... to
set multicast-group policy from zone1 mgroup mcst_addr1 to zone2 mgroup mcst_addr2 { ... } set multicast-group policy from zone1 mgroup any to zone2 { ... } set multicast-group policy from zone1 mgroup-list id_num to zone2 unset multicast-group policy from zone1 mgroup mcst_addr1 to zone2 { ... } unset multicast-group policy from zone1 mgroup any to zone2 unset multicast-group policy from zone1 mgroup-list id_num to zone2
345
from { ... } to
Specifies the two zones between which the policy applies. zone1 is the name of the source security zone. zone2 is the name of the destination security zone. mcst_addr1 is the multicast IP address of the multicast group from which the zone accepts multicast packets mcst_addr2 is the translated multicast group address, if you are translating a multicast group address from one zone to another id_num is the ID number of the access list that specifies the multicast groups from which the zone accepts multicast packets
Example: The following command creates a multicast policy allowing IGMP messages from the Trust zone to the Untrust zone: set multicast-group-policy from trust mgroup-list 12 to untrust igmp-message
igmp-message
set multicast-group policy from { ... } to { ... } igmp-message unset multicast-group policy from { ... } to { ... } igmp-message
igmp-message Specifies a multicast group policy that allows IGMP messages between the specified zones.
346
pim-message
set multicast-group policy from { ... } to { ... } pim-message { bsr-static-rp | join-prune } unset multicast-group policy from { ... } to { ... } pim-message { bsr-static-rp | join-prune }
pim-message Specifies a multicast group policy that allows PIM BSR and/or join-prune messages between the specified zones.
347
nrtp
Description: Use the nrtp command to clear all NRTP (NetScreen Reliable Transfer Protocol) packet queues. NRTP is for multicasting NSRP control messages to multiple receivers when NetScreen devices are in a redundancy cluster (interconnected through the High Availability ports). NRTP ensures that the primary NetScreen device always forwards configuration and policy messages to the backup devices.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] nrtp queues
get
get nrtp { counters ( all | receive number | send } | group | xmtq }

cluster
clear cluster nrtp queues
348
counters
get nrtp counters ( all | receive number | send }
counters Displays statistical information tracked by counters. all Displays all counter statistics. receive [ number ] Displays only counter statistics for information that the device receives from other devices in the cluster. The optional number parameter is an ID number that identifies a particular device in the cluster. send Displays only counter statistics for information that the device sends to other devices.
groups
get nrtp group
group Displays the ID numbers of devices belonging to the group, and a count of the devices in the group.
queues
clear [ cluster ] nrtp queues
queues Clears the NRTP packet queues.
xmtq
get nrtp xmtq
xmtq Displays the length of the queue containing packets awaiting ACK responses from other devices.
349
nsgp
Description: Use the nsgp command to configure the GPRS Overbilling Attack notification feature on the Gi firewall (the server). An Overbilling attack can occur in various ways. Namely, it can occur when a legitimate subscriber returns his IP address to the IP pool, at which point an attacker can hijack the IP address, which is vulnerable because the session is still open. When the attacker takes control of the IP address, without being detected and reported, the attacker can download data for free (or more accurately, at the expense of the legitimate subscriber) or send data to other subscribers. An Overbilling attack can also occur when an IP address becomes available and gets reassigned to another MS. Traffic initiated by the previous MS might be forwarded to the new MS, therefore causing the new MS to be billed for unsolicited traffic.
Syntax
clear
clear nsgp { ip_addr | all }
get
get nsgp [ detail ]
set
set nsgp { context id_num type session zone zone | md5-authentication password | port port_num }
350
unset
unset nsgp [ context id_num | md5-authentication | port ]

all
clear nsgp all
all Closes all active connections on the NetScreen device. You can also close active connections on a per IP address basis by entering a specific IP address instead of the keyword all.
context
set nsgp context id_num type string zone zone unset nsgp context id_num
context Creates or deletes a context of a specific type for the specified zone. type string Identifies the type of context. Currently NetScreen devices only supports the session type. zone name Identifies the zone for which you are creating the context. Note that the same context must exist on both the client and the server.
detail
get nsgp [ detail ]
detail Displays NSGP settings and status of contexts within the current root or virtual system. At the root level, this command also displays information for all virtual systems.
351
md5-authentication
set nsgp md5-authentication password unset nsgp md5-authentication
md5-authentication Directs the Gi firewall to enforce the MD5 auth option specified in the TCP header. You can only specify one MD5 authentication password per NetScreen device. Note: This command is only available at the root level and not at the vsys level.
port
set nsgp port port_num unset nsgp port
port Identifies the port number used by the Gi firewall to receive Overbilling Attack notifications. The default port number is 12521. Note: This command is only available at the root level and not at the vsys level.
352
nsmgmt
Description: Use the nsmgmt commands to set up a NetScreen device for configuration and monitoring by NetScreen-Security Manager 2004, an enterprise-level management application that configures multiple NetScreen devices from remote hosts. The nsmgmt command can modify settings for the NetScreen-Security Manager Agent which resides on the NetScreen device. The Agent receives configuration parameters from the management system and pushes it to ScreenOS. The Agent also monitors the device and transmits reports back to the management system. For more information, refer to Adding Devices in NetScreen-Security Manager 2004 Administrators Guide.
Syntax
get
get nsmgmt [ proto-dist { table { bytes | packets } | user-service } ]
set
set nsmgmt { enable | bulkcli reboot-timeout { number | disable }
353
init { id string | installer name name_str password pswd_str | otp string } | report { alarm { attack | di | other | traffic } enable | log { config | info | self | traffic } enable | proto-dist { enable | user-service svc_name { ah | esp | gre | icmp | ospf | tcp | udp } { port_num1-port_num2 } } | statistics { attack | ethernet | flow | policy } enable } server primary | secondary { name_str | ip_addr } [ port number ] [ src-interface interface ] | }
unset
unset nsmgmt { all | enable | bulkcli reboot-timeout { number | disable } init { id | installer | otp } | report { alarm { attack | di | other | traffic } enable | log { config | info | self | traffic } enable |
354
proto-dist { enable | user-service svc_name } | statistics { attack | ethernet | flow | policy } enable } server { primary | secondary { name_str | ip_addr } } }

all
unset nsmgmt all
all Unsets all NetScreen-Security Manager management configurations.
bulkcli
set nsmgmt bulkcli reboot-timeout { number | disable } unset nsmgmt bulkcli reboot-timeout { number | disable }
bulkcli Enables, disables or sets the bulk-CLI reboot timeout value (expressed in seconds). This setting determines how the device performs rollback when a NSM connection drops during an update session. When this happens, the Agent iterates through all the configured NSM servers once to see if it can establish another connection. If not, the agent waits for the specified time period before it reboots the device to roll back the configuration. The range for the reboot-timeout value is 60 through 86400.
355
enable
get nsmgmt enable set nsmgmt enable unset nsmgmt enable
enable Enables remote management by initiating contact with the management server.
init
get nsmgmt init set nsmgmt init id string set nsmgmt init installer name name_str password pswd_str set nsmgmt init otp string unset nsmgmt init {...}
init Sets initialization parameters for interaction with the management server. id string An ID used (only once) during initiation of the connection between the NetScreen device and the management server. The NetScreen device passes the ID to the Management System to look up the One-Time Password in the management database. installer name name_str password pswd_str Specifies an installer name and password, used (only once) during initiation of the connection between the NetScreen device and the management server. otp string Sets the One-Time Password (OTP). The NetScreen device uses this password one time to contact the Security Management system. After initiation of contact between the device and the management database, the device executes an unset command to erase the OTP.
356
report
set nsmgmt report { alarm | log | proto-dist | statistics } { ... } unset nsmgmt report { alarm | log | proto-dist | statistics } { ... }
report Specifies which event messages the NetScreen device transmits to the server. alarm Enables the transmission of alarm events. The categories of alarms are as follows: attack Transmits attack alarms such as syn-flag or syn-flood. For more information on such attacks, see zone on page 683. di Transmits attack alarms generated during Deep Inspection. traffic Transmits traffic alarms. other Transmits alarms other than attack, Deep Inspection, or traffic alarms. The enable switch enables messaging for the specified alarm message. log Enables the transmission of log events. The categories of logs are as follows: config Transmits log messages for events triggered by changes in device configuration. info Transmits low-level notification log messages about non-severe changes that occur on the device, as when an authentication procedure fails. self Transmits log messages concerning dropped packets (such as those denied by a policy) and traffic that terminates at the NetScreen device (such as administrative traffic). The self log displays the date, time, source address/port, destination address/port, duration, and service for each dropped packet or session terminating at the NetScreen device. user-service svc_name Specifies messages generated by the following services: - ah AH (Authentication Header) service. - esp ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) service.
357
- gre GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation). - icmp ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol). - ospf OSPF (Open Shortest Path First). - tcp TCP (Transmission Control Protocol). - udp UDP (User Datagram Protocol). The port_num1-port_num2 setting specifies a range of port numbers. traffic Transmits alarms generated while the device monitors and records the traffic permitted by policies. A traffic log notes the following elements for each session: - Date and time that the connection started - Source address and port number - Translated source address and port number - Destination address and port number - The duration of the session - The service used in the session The enable switch enables messaging for the specified log message. statistics Enables the NetScreen device for reporting statistical information to the server: attack Enables transmission of messages containing attack statistics. ethernet Enables transmission of messages containing ethernet statistics. flow Enables transmission of messages containing traffic flow statistics. policy Enables transmission of messages containing policy statistics. The enable switch enables messaging for the specified statistical message.
358
proto-dist
get nsmgmt proto-dist
proto-dist Sets or displays parameters for transmission of messages concerning protocol distribution parameters. The categories of protocol distribution are as follows: enable Enables transmission of protocol distribution messages to the server. table Displays the number of bytes or packets transmitted to the protocol distribution table.
server
set nsmgmt server { primary | secondary } { name_str | ip_addr } [ port number | src-interface ]
server Identifies the Security Management system server.
359
nsrp
Description: Use the nsrp commands to assign a NetScreen security device to a failover cluster, and to create and configure a Virtual Security Device (VSD) group for the cluster. The purpose of a VSD group is to allow failover between two or more NetScreen security devices within a defined cluster. Each VSD group represents a group of devices in a cluster, elects a primary device from the cluster, and provides a virtual security interface (VSI) that external devices use to reference the devices in the cluster. A group may contain every device in the cluster. For example, if you give three devices the same cluster id, you can create a VSD group containing all three devices. A device can be in more than one VSD group at a time. For example, a device can be the primary in one VSD group, while serving as a backup in another. The basic steps needed to set up failover VSD groups are as follows. 1. 2. 3. Set up a cluster of devices using the set nsrp cluster command. This command assigns an identical cluster id to each device. Set up a VSD group for the cluster using the set nsrp vsd-group command. Set up a virtual security interface (VSI) for the VSD group using the set interface command.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] nsrp counter [ packet-fwd | protocol | rto ]
360
exec
exec nsrp { probe interface [ mac_addr ] [ count number ] | sync { file [ name filename ] from peer | global-config [ check-sum | save ] | rto { all | arp | attack-db | auth-table | dhcp | dip-in | dns | h323 | l2tp | phase1-SA | pki | rm | rpc | session | vpn | } { from peer } } | vsd-group grp_num mode { backup | ineligible | init | pb } }
361
get
get nsrp [ cluster | counter [ packet-fwd | protocol | rto ] | group | ha-link | monitor [ all | interface | track-ip | zone ] | rto-mirror | track-ip [ ip ip_addr ] | vsd-group [ id id_num | all ] ]
set
set nsrp { arp number | auth password pswd_str | cluster [ id number | name name_str ] | config sync | data-forwarding | encrypt password pswd_str | ha-link probe [ interval number ] [ threshold number ] interface interface | link-hold-time number | link-up-on-backup | monitor { interface interface [ weight number ] | threshold number | track-ip { ip
362
[ ip_addr [ interface interface | interval number | method { arp | ping } | threshold number | weight number ] ] threshold number | weight number | } | zone zone [ weight number ] } | rto-mirror { hb-interval number | hb-threshold number | id id_num { direction { in | out } } | session [ ageout-ack | non-vsi | off ] | sync } secondary-path interface | track-ip [ ip [ ip_addr [ interface interface | interval number | method { arp | ping } | threshold number | weight number ] ] threshold number
] | vsd-group { id id_num [ mode ineligible | preempt [ hold-down number ] | priority number ] | hb-interval number | hb-threshold number | init-hold number | master-always-exist } }
unset
unset nsrp { arp number | auth | cluster id | config sync | data-forwarding | encrypt | ha-link probe [ interval ] [ threshold ] | link-hold-time | link-up-on-backup | monitor [ interface interface [ weight ] | threshold | track-ip weight | zone zone [ weight ]
364
] [ all ] | rto-mirror { hb-interval number | hb-threshold number | id id_num { direction { in | out } } | session [ ageout-ack | non-vsi | off ] | sync master-always-exist } secondary-path | track-ip { ip [ ip_addr ] [ interface | interval number | method { arp | ping } | threshold number | weight number ] | threshold | weight } vsd-group [ all | id number [ mode | preempt | priority ] | hb-interval number | hb-threshold number | init-hold number | master-always-exist ]
365

arp
set nsrp arp number unset nsrp arp number
arp Sets the number of gratuitous ARP requests that a newly elected primary unit sends out, notifying other network devices of its presence. The default is 4.
Example: The following command instructs the NetScreen device to send out seven ARP requests: set nsrp arp 7
auth
set nsrp auth password pswd_str unset nsrp auth
auth Instructs the NetScreen device to authenticate NSRP communications using the specified password. Valid passwords contain from 1 to 15 characters.
Example: The following command sets the NSRP authentication password to swordfish: set nsrp auth password swordfish
cluster
get nsrp cluster set nsrp cluster id number
cluster id Assigns the NetScreen device to a cluster, expressed as an integer (from 1 to 7, inclusive) to identify the cluster.
366
Example: The following command assigns the NetScreen device to cluster 2: set nsrp cluster id 2
cluster (clear)
clear cluster nsrp counter [ ... ]
config sync
set nsrp config sync unset nsrp config sync
config sync Enables or disables synchronization of device configuration between members of the NSRP cluster. After you enable this setting, any configuration change automatically propagates to the other devices in the cluster.
counter
clear [ cluster ] nsrp counter [ packet-fwd | protocol | rto ] get nsrp counter [ packet-fwd | protocol | rto ]
counter Clears or displays the NSRP counter values. packet-fwd Clears or displays packet-forwarding counters only. protocol Clears or displays NSRP protocol counters only. rto Clears or displays RTO message counters only.
367
data-forwarding
set nsrp data-forwarding unset nsrp data-forwarding
data-forwarding Enables of disables packet forwarding. The default setting is enabled.
encrypt password
set nsrp encrypt password pswd_str unset nsrp encrypt
encrypt password Specifies that NSRP communications be encrypted using the specified password. Valid passwords contain from 1 to 15 characters.
Example: The following command sets the NSRP encryption password to manta: set nsrp encrypt password manta
group
get nsrp group
group Displays information on the VSD group.
368
ha-link probe
set nsrp ha-link probe [ interval number ] [ threshold number ] unset nsrp ha-link probe [ interval ] [ threshold ]
ha-link probe Specifies the automatic sending of NSRP probe requests on all interfaces that are bound to the HA zone. If a reply is received from the peer within the threshold, the HA link is considered to be up. If the number of consecutive probe requests sent without receiving a reply from the peer reaches or exceeds the threshold, the HA link is considered to be down. You can specify the following optional parameters: interval number Specifies the interval, in seconds, at which probe requests are sent. Enter a number between 0 and 255. If you do not specify an interval, probe requests are sent every second. threshold number Specifies the failure threshold for the HA link. If the number of consecutive probe requests sent without receiving a reply from the peer reaches or exceeds the threshold, the HA link is considered to be down. Enter a value between 0 and 255. The default threshold is 5.
interface
set nsrp interface interface
interface The name of the interface to serve as the high-availability port. For information on interfaces, see Interface Names on page A-I.
Example: The following command specifies that the NSRP interface is ethernet4: set nsrp interface ethernet4
link
get nsrp link
link Displays HA link information
369
link-hold-time
set nsrp link-hold-time number unset nsrp link-hold-time
link-hold-time The delay time (in seconds) before the NetScreen device brings up the link with the peer device.
link-up-on-backup
set nsrp link-up-on-backup unset nsrp link-up-on-backup
link-up-on-backup Specifies that the link is always up on the backup device.
monitor
get nsrp monitor [ zone | interface | track-ip ] [ all ] set nsrp [ vsd-group id id_num ] monitor { ... } unset nsrp [ vsd-group id id_num ] monitor { ... }
monitor Specifies monitoring of NSRP objects (a physical interface, a zone, or tracked IP addresses) to determine VSD or device failure. You can specify the following parameters: vsd-group id id-num Identifies the Virtual Security Device (VSD) to which the threshold or monitored objects you configure applies. If you do not specify a VSD, the threshold or monitored objects you configure apply to the entire device. all Displays monitoring information for the device and all VSDs. If you specify vsd-group id, only monitoring information for the VSD is displayed. interface interface [ weight number ] Identifies the interface to be monitored and the weight that failure of the interface contributes to the failover threshold. The default weight is 255.
370
threshold number Specifies a failover threshold which determines the failure of a specific VSD (if a VSD is specified) or failure of the device (if no VSD is specified). If the cumulative weight of the failure of all monitored objects (a physical interface, a zone, or tracked IP addresses) exceeds the threshold, the VSD or the device fails. The default threshold value is 255. track-ip weight number [ threshold number ] [ ip ip_addr ] Enables tracked IP object monitoring and the weight that failure of the tracked IP object (all tracked IP addresses) contributes to the device or VSD failover threshold. The default weight value is 255. The threshold value is the total weight of failed tracked IP addresses that determines failure of the tracked IP object. The default threshold value is 255. Specifies monitoring of tracked IP addresses to determine VSD or device failure. For each ip ip_addr, you can configure the following: - interface interface Specifies the outgoing interface through which the NetScreen device performs tracking. for the specified IP address. If you do not specify an interface, ping tries to find an outgoing interface from routing table entries and ARP tries to find an outgoing interface within the same subnet. If an interface is not found, the tracking attempt fails. - interval number Specifies the interval, in seconds, between ping or ARP attempts to the specified IP address. Enter a value between 1 and 200. The default is 1. - method { arp | ping } Specifies the method used for tracking the specified IP address. The default is ping. - threshold number Defines the number of failed tracking attempts that can occur before the tracking of the specified IP address is considered failed. The default is 3. - weight number Defines the weight of the failed tracking of the specified IP address. The default is 1. zone zone [ weight number ] Identifies the zone to be monitored and the weight that failure of all physical interfaces in the zone contributes to the failover threshold. The default weight is 255.
371
probe
exec nsrp probe interface [ mac_addr ] [ count number ]
probe Directs the device to immediately begin sending an NSRP probe request every second on an HA zone interface, for the number of times specified by count. If the peer receives a reply, the HA link is considered to be up. (If the request times out before the peer receives a reply, the HA link is considered to be down.) The device takes no action if there is no reply. (See ha-link probe on page 369.) interface Identifies the HA zone interface on which probe requests are sent. You must specify an interface that is bound to the HA zone. mac_addr Identifies the destination MAC address of an HA interface on a peer device. If you do not specify a destination MAC address, the device uses the default NSRP MAC address to send the probe request. count number Specifies the number of times that the device sends the probe request. Enter a number greater than or equal to 1. (The default is 1.)
rto-mirror
get nsrp rto-mirror set nsrp rto-mirror { ... } unset nsrp rto-mirror { ... }
rto-mirror Creates an optional RTO mirror between two devices in a VSD group to back up runtime objects (RTOs). In most cases, using this option is not necessary. Normally, RTO objects synchronize after execution of the set nsrp rto sync command. A NetScreen device can belong to only one RTO mirror group at a time. id id_num Identifies the VSD group using its identification number id_num, an integer value between 1 and 127 inclusive. The direction setting determines whether the RTO mirror group direction is inbound or outbound. hb-interval number Specifies the heartbeat interval in seconds.
372
hb-threshold number Specifies the heartbeat-lost threshold. The minimum threshold value is 16 heartbeats. session ageout-ack Specifies a time value based on which the backup device sends an ack message to the primary device to refresh its sessions or time them out. The session age-out value of a backup device is eight times that of the primary device. session non-vsi Enables the synchronization of non-vsi sessions. session off Disables the RTO session. sync Enables RTO object synchronization.
Example: The following command specifies that the RTO mirror group (10) direction is inbound: set nsrp rto-mirror id 10 direction in
secondary-path
set nsrp secondary-path interface unset nsrp secondary-path
secondary-path Specifies a secondary NSRP link interface.
Example: The following command specifies that the secondary NSRP link interface is ethernet5: set nsrp secondary-path ethernet5
sync
exec nsrp sync { ... }
sync Specifies the name of a particular configuration, file, or RTO to copy from one unit to the other. file Specifies synchronization of the files in flash memory. - name filename specifies a particular file in flash memory. (Executing the file option without specifying a file name copies all the files.) - from peer specifies all files from the peer device.
373
global-config Specifies synchronization of the current device configurations. The check-sum switch compares the check-sum after synchronization. The save switch synchronizes the PKI configuration and saves the synchronization configuration to flash memory. rto Specifies synchronization of the current runtime objects (RTOs) in the RTO mirror. - all Specifies all possible realtime objects. - arp Specifies the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) information. - attack-db Specifies the Deep Inspection attack database table information. - auth-table Specifies the authentication table information. - dhcp Specifies DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) information. - dip-in Specifies information on the incoming dynamic IP addresses table. - dns Specifies the DNS (Domain Name Service) information. - h323 Specifies H.323 information. - pki Specifies certificate information. - phase1-sa Specifies information on IKE Phase-1 SAs (Security Associations) - rm Specifies Resource Manager information. - rpc Specifies information on RPC mapping. - session Specifies the session information. - vpn Specifies all VPN (Virtual Private Network) information.
Example: The following command instructs the NetScreen device to synchronize all runtime objects: exec nsrp sync rto all from peer
374
track-ip
get nsrp track-ip [ ip ip_addr ] set nsrp track-ip [ ... ] unset nsrp track-ip [ ... ]
track-ip Enables path tracking, which is a means for checking the network connection between a NetScreen interface and that of another device. The IP address ip_addr identifies the other network device to check. Executing unset nsrp track ip resets the track options to their default values. ip ip_addr - interface interface Specifies the interface through which the NetScreen device performs the path tracking. If you do not specify an interface, the device automatically chooses the interface for IP tracking using either the ping or ARP method. If ping is used, the device tries to find an outgoing interface from entries in the routing table. If ARP is used, the device tries to find an outgoing interface within the same subnet. If an interface is not found, the tracking attempt fails. - interval number Specifies the interval in seconds between path tracking attempts. Required value is between 1 and 200. The default is 1. - method { arp | ping } Specifies the method used for path tracking. The default is ping. - threshold number Defines the number of failed tracking attempts that can occur before the tracking of the IP address is considered failed. The default is 3. - weight number Defines the path weight. Valid weights are between 1 and 255 inclusive. The default weight is 1. threshold number Defines the number of failed tracking attempts that can occur before the device fails over. The default is 255. Weight number Defines the sum of the weights of the tracked IP addresses that determine failover. The default is 255.
Example: The following command enables path tracking through interface ethernet4 to a device at IP address 172.16.10.10: set nsrp track-ip ip 172.16.10.10 interface ethernet4
375
vsd-group
get nsrp vsd-group [ id id_num | all ] set nsrp vsd-group [ ... ] unset nsrp vsd-group [ ... ]
vsd-group Configures a VSD group for a cluster. id id_num Creates a VSD group, identified by id_num (from 1 to 8, inclusive), that contains all members belonging to a single cluster of devices. Once created, a VSD group elects a primary unit from the cluster it contains. Other devices reference the device cluster in the VSD group through the groups virtual security identification (VSI). mode ineligible Determines the running mode of the security device. The ineligible switch specifies that the local device is not intended for failover, even after system restart. (This may be necessary for administrative reasons.) Executing unset nsrp vsd-group id number mode ineligible specifies that the device is eligible again. preempt [ hold-down number ] Determines if the primary unit keeps its primary status until the unit itself relinquishes that status. To prevent rapid failovers, the primary device waits for the specified hold-down interval, expressed as a number between 0 to 600 seconds inclusive. The default is 3. priority number The priority level of the device, expressed as an integer from 1 to 254, inclusive. The priority level determines the failover order for the device. The failover order determines which unit is the primary unit when two NetScreen devices in a redundant group power up simultaneously, and which backup unit becomes the next primary during a failover. (The unit with the number closest to 1 becomes the primary unit.) init-hold The number of heartbeats that occur before the system exits the initial state (init mode). This value can be an integer from 5 to 255. The default is 5. hb-interval number Specifies the heartbeat interval, expressed in milliseconds. This value can be an integer from 200 to 1000. The default is 1000.
376
hb-threshold number Specifies the heartbeat-lost threshold, the number of lost heartbeats allowed before failure. This value can be an integer from 3 to 255. The default is 3. master-always-exist Directs the system to elect a primary unit and keep it operative even if all units in the NSRP cluster fail (by monitoring result). For example, if you disable master-always-exist, and two units tracking an IP later fail due to monitoring results, both units become inoperable and traffic cannot go through. If you enable master-always-exist, and both units fail, the cluster still elects a primary unit, which remains operable, thus allowing traffic through.
Examples: The following command disables the local device for failover: set nsrp vsd-group id 2 mode ineligible The following command specifies that ten heartbeats must occur before the device exits the initial state: set nsrp vsd-group init-hold 10
vsd-group (exec)
exec nsrp vsd-group grp_num mode { ... }
vsd-group grp_num mode Specifies a VSD group and the NetScreen devices new mode. In backup mode, the device works for the primary device when the primary device fails. In ineligible mode, the device is unavailable as a backup for the primary device. In init mode, the device is in the transient state that occurs when it joins the VSD group. (At the end of this initial hold up time, the device transitions to another state, such as primary, backup, or primary backup.) In pb (primary backup) mode, the unit is the first to take over when the primary unit fails.
Example: The following command instructs the NetScreen device to take over when the primary unit fails: exec nsrp vsd-group 2 mode pb
377
Defaults
The default value of preempt [ hold-down number ] is zero. The default value of vsd-group id id_num priority number is 100. The default value of vsd-group id id_num hb-interval number is 1000 (1,000 milliseconds, or one second).
Creating an NSRP Cluster

The following commands set up an NSRP cluster consisting of two NetScreen devices Two VSD groups for the cluster VSI for the VSD group RTO object synchronization enabled, including session synchronization
On Device A
Trust Zone Redundant Interface and Manage IP
set set set set interface interface interface interface redundant2 zone trust ethernet2/1 group redundant2 ethernet2/2 group redundant2 redundant2 manage-ip 10.1.1.3
Cluster and VSD Groups

set nsrp set nsrp set nsrp set nsrp set nsrp set nsrp set nsrp save cluster id 1 vsd-group id 0 preempt hold-down 10 vsd-group id 0 preempt vsd-group id 0 priority 1 vsd-group id 1 monitor interface redundant2 rto-mirror sync
378
On Device B
Trust Zone Redundant Interface and Manage IP
set set set set set set set set set set set set interface interface interface interface redundant2 zone trust ethernet2/1 group redundant2 ethernet2/2 group redundant2 redundant2 manage-ip 10.1.1.4
Cluster and VSD Groups

nsrp cluster id 1 nsrp rto-mirror sync nsrp vsd-group id 1 priority 1 nsrp vsd-group id 1 preempt hold-down 10 nsrp vsd-group id 1 preempt nsrp monitor interface redundant2 nsrp arp 4 arp always-on-dest
Untrust Zone Redundant Interface

set interface redundant1 zone untrust set interface ethernet1/1 group redundant1 set interface ethernet1/2 group redundant1
Virtual Security Interfaces

set set set set interface interface interface interface redundant1 ip 210.1.1.1/24 redundant2 ip 10.1.1.1/24 redundant1:1 ip 210.1.1.2/24 redundant2:1 ip 10.1.1.2/24
Routes
set vrouter untrust-vr route 0.0.0.0/0 interface redundant1 gateway 210.1.1.250 set vrouter untrust-vr route 0.0.0.0/0 interface redundant1:1 gateway 210.1.1.250 save
379
ntp
Description: Use the ntp commands to configure the NetScreen device for Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). SNTP is a simplified version of NTP, which is a protocol used for synchronizing computer clocks in the Internet. This version is adequate for devices that do not require a high level of synchronization and accuracy. To enable the SNTP feature, use the set clock ntp command.
Syntax
exec
exec ntp [ server { backup1 | backup2 | primary } ] update
get
get ntp
set
set ntp { auth { preferred | required } | interval number | max-adjustment number | no-ha-sync | server { ip_addr | dom_name | backup1 { ip_addr | dom_name } | backup2 { ip_addr | dom_name } | key-id number preshare-key string |
380
src-interface interface } timezone number1 number2 }
unset
unset ntp { auth | interval | max-adjustment | no-ha-sync | server { backup1 | backup2 | key-id | src-interface } | interval | timezone }
381

auth
set ntp auth { preferred | required }
auth Configures an authentication mode to secure NTP traffic between the NetScreen device and the NTP server. required The Required mode specifies that the NetScreen device must authenticate all NTP packets using the key id and preshared key information that the NetScreen device and the NTP server previously exchanged out of band (the device does not exchange the preshared key over the network). preferred The Preferred mode specifies that the NetScreen device first must try to authenticate all NTP packets by sending out an update request that includes authentication informationkey id and checksumsame as for the Required mode. If authentication fails, the NetScreen device then sends out another update request without the authentication information. Note: Before you can set an authentication mode, you must assign a key id and preshared key to at least one of the NTP servers configured on the NetScreen device.
interval
set ntp interval number unset ntp interval
interval Defines in minutes how often the NetScreen device updates its clock time by synchronizing with the NTP server. The range for the synchronization interval is from 1 to 1440 minutes (24 hours).
Example: The following command configures the NetScreen device to synchronize its clock time every 20 minutes: set ntp interval 20
382
max-adjustment
set ntp max-adjustment number unset ntp max-adjustment
max-adjustment Configures a maximum time adjustment value. This value represents the maximum acceptable time difference between the NetScreen device system clock and the time received from a NTP server. When receiving a reply from a NTP server, the NetScreen device calculates the time difference between its system clock and the NTP server and updates its clock only if the time difference between the two is within the maximum time adjustment value that you set.
no-ha-sync
set ntp no-ha-sync unset ntp no-ha-sync
no-ha-sync In a high-availability configuration, instructs the NetScreen device not to synchronize its peer device with the NTP time update.
server
set ntp server { ip_addr | dom_name } set ntp server key-id number preshare-key string set ntp server { backup1 | backup2 } { ip_addr | dom_name } set ntp server { backup1 | backup2 } key-id number preshare-key string unset ntp server { ... }
server ip_addr The IP address of the primary NTP server with which the NetScreen device can synchronize its system clock time. dom_name The domain name of the primary NTP server with which the NetScreen device can synchronize its system clock time.
383
backup1 | backup2 - ip_addr The IP address of the first (or second) backup NTP server with which the NetScreen device can synchronize its system clock time in case the primary server is not available. - dom_name The domain name of the first (or second) backup NTP server with which the NetScreen device can synchronize its system clock time in case the primary server is not available. - key-id number Assigns a key id to the current server for authentication purposes. - preshare key Assigns a preshared key to the current server for authentication purposes. key-id number Assigns a key id to the current server for authentication purposes. - preshare key Assigns a preshared key to the current server for authentication purposes. src-interface interface Indicates the source interface the devices uses to send NTP requests.
timezone
set ntp timezone number1 number2 unset ntp timezone
timezone Defines the Time Zone, expressed as an integer number1 between -12 and 12 inclusive. A value of zero denotes GMT (Greenwich Mean Time). number2 expresses minutes.
Example: The following command sets the Time Zone to Greenwich Mean time: set ntp timezone 0
update
exec ntp update
update Instructs Updates the time setting on a NetScreen device to synchronize it with the time setting on an NTP server.
384
os
Description: Use the os commands to display kernel and task information for the operating system of the NetScreen device.
Syntax
get
get os { cost | flow | kernel | misc | task name_str }

cost
get os cost
cost Displays the amount of processor time used by elements of the operating system.
flow
get os flow
flow Displays flow statistics.
kernel
get os kernel
kernel Displays kernel statistics.
385
misc
get os misc
misc Displays miscellaneous information.
task
get os task name_str
task Displays information on a specified task (name_str).
386
OSPF Commands
Description: Use the ospf context to begin configuring OSPF routing protocol for a NetScreen virtual router.
Context Initiation
Initiating the ospf context can take up to four steps. 1. Enter the vrouter context by executing the set vrouter command. set vrouter vrouter For example: 2. set vrouter trust-vr Set the router ID for this virtual routing instance. set router-id { id_num | ip_addr } For example: 3. 4. ns(trust-vr)-> set router-id 172.16.10.10 Enter the ospf context by executing the set protocol ospf command. ns(trust-vr)-> set protocol ospf Enable OSPF protocol (it is disabled by default). ns(trust-vr/ospf)-> set enable
387
OSPF Command List

The following commands are executable in the ospf context.
advertise-def-route Use the advertise-def-route commands to advertise or display the default route of the current virtual routing instance (0.0.0.0/0) in all areas. Every router has a default route entry, which matches every destination. (Any entry with a more specific prefix overrides the default route entry.) Command options: get, set, unset Use the area commands to configure an area for an OSPF virtual routing instance. An OSPF area is a region that contains a collection of routers or virtual routing instances. Command options: get, set, unset Use the authentication command to display authentication for the OSPF virtual routing instance. Command options: get Use the auto-vlink commands to direct the local virtual router to automatically create virtual links. Using automatic virtual links replaces the more time-consuming process of creating each virtual link manually. A virtual link is a conveyance that enables two unconnected segments that cannot reach a backbone router to connect with each other. Command options: get, set, unset Use the config command to display all commands executed to configure the OSPF local virtual routing instance. Command options: get Use the database command to display details about the current OSPF link state database. Command options: get Use the enable commands to enable or disable OSPF from the current routing instance. Command options: set, unset
area
authentication auto-vlink
config
database enable
388
hello-threshold
Use the hello-threshold commands to set or display the hello threshold. When a neighbor device exceeds this threshold by flooding the virtual router with hello packets, the virtual router drops the extra packets. A Hello packet is a broadcast message that announces the presence of a routing instance on the network. Command options: get, set, unset Use this command to display all OSPF interfaces on the virtual router. Command options: get Use the lsa-threshold commands to set or display the Link State Advertisement (LSA) threshold. When a neighbor device exceeds this threshold by flooding the virtual router with LSA packets, the virtual router drops the extra packets. Link State Advertisements (LSAs) enable OSPF routers to make device, network, and routing information available for the link state database. Command options: get, set, unset Use the neighbor command to display details about neighbor devices. Command options: get Use the redistribute commands to import routes from a different protocol than the one used by the current virtual routing instance. The types of routing protocols from which to import routes include: manually-created routes (static) routes from BGP (bgp) routes that have at least one interface with an IP address assigned to it (connected) routes from RIP (rip) routes that have already been imported (imported). Command options: set, unset
interface lsa-threshold
neighbor redistribute
389
Use the reject-default-route commands to reject or restore the default route learned from OSPF (0.0.0.0/0) in the current routing instance. Every router has a default route entry in its routing table. This default route matches every destination. (Any entry with a more specific prefix overrides the default route entry.) Command options: get, set, unset Use the retransmit commands to retransmit packets before adjacency ends. Command options: set, unset Use the rfc-1583 commands to use routing table calculation methods consistent with standards specified in the Request For Comments 1583 document. Command options: get, set, unset Use the routes-redistribute command to display details about routes imported from a protocol other than OSPF. Command options: get Use the rules-redistribute command to display conditions set for routes imported from a protocol other than OSPF. Command options: get Use the statistics command to display information about Hello packets, link state packets, database descriptions, Shortest Path First (SPF) packets, packets dropped, errors, and other traffic statistics related to the current OSPF virtual routing instance. Command options: get Use the stub command to display details about a stub area created in the current OSPF virtual routing instance. Command options: get Use the summary-import commands to summarize a route redistribution. After importing a series of routes to the current OSPF routing instance from a router running a different protocol, you can bundle the routes into one generalized (or summarized) address that uses the same network stem of the prefix address. By summarizing multiple addresses, you allow the OSPF routing instance to treat a series of routes as one route, thus simplifying the process. Command options: get, set, unset
retransmit rfc-1583
routes-redistribute
rules-redistribute
statistics
stub
summary-import
390
vlink
Use the vlink commands to create a virtual link for the current routing instance. A virtual link is a conveyance that allows two segments to connect when the backbone router bridging them cannot reach either segment. Command options: get, set, unset Use the vneighbor command to display information about a virtual routing instance neighbor. Command options: get
vneighbor
391
advertise-def-route
Description: Use the advertise-def-route commands to advertise or display the default route of the current virtual routing instance (0.0.0.0/0) in all areas. Every router has a default route entry, which matches every destination. Any route entry with a more specific prefix than the default route entry overrides the default entry. Before you can execute the advertise-def-route commands, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get advertise-def-route
set
set advertise-def-route { always metric number [ preserve-metric ] | metric number | preserve-metric } metric-type { 1 | 2 }
unset
392

always
set advertise-def-route always { ... }
always Directs the routing instance to advertise the default route under all conditions, even if there is no default route in the routing table. If you specify always, you must also specify the metric parameter; you can optionally specify the preserve-metric parameter. If you do not specify always, only a non-OSPF active default route is advertised. If you do not specify always, you must specify either the metric or preserve-metric option.
metric
set advertise-def-route always metric number metric-type { 1 | 2 }
metric Specifies the metric (cost), which indicates the overhead associated with the default route. Enter a number between 1-15. You must specify this parameter if you specify the always option.
metric-type
set advertise-def-route [ always ] metric number metric-type { 1 | 2 }
metric-type Specifies the external route type to determine path preference. 1 Directs the routing instance to use a Type 1 route to evaluate the default route. A type 1 route is a comparable route, with a lower cost than a type 2 route. 2 Directs the routing instance to use a Type 2 route to evaluate the default route. A type 2 route is a non-comparable route, with a higher cost than a type 1 route.
preserve-metric
set advertise-def-route [ always ] preserve-metric metric-type { 1 | 2 }
preserve-metric Instructs the NetScreen device to use the original (source) route metric when the route is redistributed.
393
area
Description: Use the area commands to configure an area for an OSPF virtual routing instance. An OSPF area is a region that contains a collection of routers or virtual routing instances. Before you can execute the area commands, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get area [ id_num | ip_addr ]
set
set area { id_num | ip_addr } [ metric-default-route number | no-summary | nssa | range ip_addr/mask { advertise | no-advertise } | stub | type-default-route { 1 | 2 } ]
unset
unset area { id_num | ip_addr } [ metric-default-route number | no-summary | nssa |
394
range ip_addr/mask | stub type-default-route { 1 | 2 } ]

Variable Parameters
get area [ id_num | ip_addr ] set area { id_num | ip_addr } unset area { id_num | ip_addr }
ip_addr id_num The IP address that identifies the area. The OSPF area ID that identifies the area.
metric-default-route
set area id_num metric-default-route number unset area id_num metric-default-route number
metric-defaultroute (NSSA and stub areas only) Specifies the metric for the advertised default route. The default metric is 1. Enter a number between 1-65535.
no-summary
set area id_num no-summary unset area id_num no-summary
no-summary (NSSA and stub areas only) Prevents summary LSAs from being advertised into the area. By default, summary LSAs are advertised into the area.
395
nssa
set area id_num nssa unset area id_num nssa
nssa Specifies that the area is a not so stubby area.
range
set area id_num range ip_addr/mask { advertise | no-advertise } unset area id_num range ip_addr/mask
range (All areas) Summarizes a specified range of IP addresses in summary LSAs. You can specify multiple ranges for the area. You can specify whether the summarized addresses are advertised inside the area or not with the advertise and no-advertise keywords.
stub
set area id_num stub unset area id_num stub
stub Specifies the area is a stub area.
type-default-route
set area id_num type-default-route { 1 | 2 } unset area id_num type-default-route { 1 | 2 }
type-defaultroute (NSSA area only) Specifies the external metric type for the default route. The default metric type is 1. Specify either 1 or 2.
396
authentication
Description: Use the authentication command to display authentication information for the OSPF virtual routing instance. Before you can execute the authentication command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get authentication

None.
397
auto-vlink
Description: Use the auto-vlink commands to automatically create or display details about virtual links. Using automatic virtual links replaces the more time-consuming process of creating each virtual link manually. A virtual link is a conveyance that enables two unconnected segments that cannot reach a backbone router to connect with each other. Before you can execute the auto-vlink commands, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get auto-vlink
set
set auto-vlink
unset
unset auto-vlink

None.
398
config
Description: Use the config command to display all commands executed to configure the OSPF local virtual routing instance. Before you can execute the config command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get config

None.
399
database
Description: Use the database command to display details about the current OSPF database. Before you can execute the database command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get database [ detail ] [ area [ number | ip_addr ] ] [ asbr-summary | external | network | nssa-external | router | summary [ adv-router ip_addr | self-originate ] [ link-state-id ip_addr ] ]

adv-router
get database [ ... ] adv-router ip_addr [ ... ]
adv-router Displays the LSAs (Link State Advertisements) from the specified advertising router (ip_addr).
Example: The following command displays the LSAs from a router with router ID 172.16.10.10: get database adv-router 172.16.10.10
400
area
get database [ ... ] area [ number | ip_addr ] [ ... ]
area Displays the LSAs in the current area.
Example: The following command displays the LSAs from an area (4): get database area 4
detail
get database detail [ ... ]
detail Displays detailed information.
Example: The following command generates a detailed display of LSAs from an area (4): get database detail area 4
external
get database [ ... ] external [ ... ]
external Displays external LSAs.
Example: The following command displays external LSAs: get database external
link-state-id
get database { ... } link-state-id ip_addr
link-state-id Displays the LSA with a specified link-state ID (ip_addr).
401
Example: The following command generates a detailed display of external LSAs with link-state ID 172.16.1.1: get database detail external link-state-id 172.16.1.1
network
get database [ ... ] network [ ... ]
network Displays the network LSAs.
Example: The following command displays network LSAs: get database network
nssa-external
get database [ ... ] nssa-external [ ... ]
nssa-external Displays the not-so-stubby areas (NSSAs) external LSAs.
Example: The following command displays external LSAs for not-so-stubby areas: get database nssa-external
router
get database [ ... ] router [ ... ]
router Displays router LSAs.
Example: The following command displays router LSAs: get database router
402
self-originate
get database [ ... ] self-originate [ ... ]
self-originate Displays self-originated LSAs.
Example: The following command displays self-originated LSAs: get database self-originate
summary
get database [ ... ] summary [ ... ]
summary Displays summary LSAs.
Example: The following command displays summary LSAs: get database summary
403
enable
Description: Use the enable commands to enable or disable OSPF from the current routing instance. Before you can execute the set enable command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
set
set enable
unset
unset enable

None.
404
hello-threshold
Description: Use the hello-threshold commands to set or display the hello threshold. When a neighbor device exceeds this threshold by flooding the virtual router with hello packets, the virtual router drops the extra packets. A hello packet is a broadcast message that announces the presence of a routing instance on the network. Before you can execute the hello-threshold commands, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get hello-threshold
set
set hello-threshold number
unset
unset hello-threshold

Variable Parameter
set hello-threshold number
number The maximum number of hello packets the virtual router accepts from a neighbor in the hello interval.
Example: The following command sets the maximum number of packets to allow in the hello interval to 1000: ns(trust-vr/ospf)-> set hello-threshold 1000
interface
Description: Use this command to display all OSPF interfaces on the virtual router. Before you can execute the interface command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get interface

None.
406
lsa-threshold
Description: Use the lsa-threshold commands to set or display the Link State Advertisement (LSA) threshold. When a neighbor device exceeds this threshold by flooding the virtual router with LSA packets, the virtual router drops the extra packets. Link State Advertisements (LSAs) enable OSPF routers to make device, network, and routing information available for the link state database. Before you can execute the lsa-threshold commands, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get lsa-threshold
set
set lsa-threshold number1 number2
unset
unset lsa-threshold
407

Variable Parameters
set lsa-threshold number1 number2
number1 number2 The LSA time interval (in seconds). The maximum number of LSAs that the virtual router accepts within the time interval expressed by number1.
Example: The following command creates an OSPF LSA threshold: set lsa-threshold 10 30
408
neighbor
Description: Use the neighbor command to display details about neighbor devices. Before you can execute the neighbor command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get neighbor

None.
409
redistribute
Description: Use the redistribute commands to import known routes from a router running a different protocol than the current virtual routing instance. The types of routers from which to import routes include: routers with manually created routes (static) routers running BGP (bgp) routers that have at least one interface with an IP address assigned to it (connected) routers with routes that have already been imported (imported) routers running RIP (rip)
Before you can execute the redistribute commands, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get routes-redistribute [ summary ] get rules-redistribute
set
set redistribute route-map string protocol { bgp | connected | imported | rip | static }
unset
unset redistribute route-map name_str protocol { bgp | connected | imported | rip | static }
410

protocol
set redistribute route-map string protocol { ... }
protocol Specifies routing protocol. The route map can use the protocol type to determine whether to forward or deny an incoming packet. bgp specifies that the route map performs an action only on BGP routes in the subnetwork. connected specifies that the route map performs an action only on routes sent from a router that has at least one interface with an IP address assigned to it. imported specifies that the route map performs an action only on imported routes in the subnetwork. rip specifies that the route map performs an action only on RIP routes in the subnetwork. static specifies that the route map performs an action only on static routes in the subnetwork.
Example: The following command redistributes a route that originated on a router that has at least one interface with an IP address assigned to it: ns(trust-vr/ospf)-> set redistribute route-map map1 protocol connected
route-map
set redistribute route-map string protocol { ... }
route-map Identifies the route map that indicates the path for which the route should be imported.
Example: The following command redistributes a route that originated from a BGP routing domain into the current OSPF routing domain: ns(trust-vr/ospf)-> set redistribute route-map map1 protocol bgp
411
Description: Use the reject-default-route commands to reject or restore the default route learned from OSPF (0.0.0.0/0). Every router has a default route entry in its routing table. This default route matches every destination. (Any entry with a more specific prefix overrides the default route entry.) Before you can execute the reject-default-route commands, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
set
unset

None.
412
retransmit
Description: Use the retransmit command to set the number of packets to resend before adjacency ends. Before you can execute the retransmit command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
set
set retransmit { dc number | non-dc number }
unset
unset retransmit { dc | non-dc }

Variable Parameters
set retransmit dc number
number Sets the number of packets to resend before adjacency ends. The retransmit range is between 2 and 240 packets.
Example: The following command shows setting a demand circuit to resend 10 packets prior to the end of the adjacency: ns(trust-vr/ospf)-> set retransmit dc 10
413
dc
set retransmit dc number unset retransmit dc
dc Indicates that the type of connection is a demand circuit.
non-dc
set retransmit non-dc number unset retransmit non-dc
non-dc Indicates that the type of connection is not a demand circuit.
414
rfc-1583
Description: Use the rfc-1583 commands to use routing table calculation methods consistent with standards specified in the Request For Comments 1583 document. Before you can execute the rfc-1583 commands, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get rfc-1583
set
set rfc-1583
unset
unset rfc-1583

None.
415
routes-redistribute
Description: Use the routes-redistribute command to display details about routes imported from a protocol other than OSPF. Before you can execute the routes-redistribute command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get routes-redistribute

None.
416
rules-redistribute
Description: Use the rules-redistribute command to display conditions set for routes imported from a protocol other than OSPF. Before you can execute the rules-redistribute command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get rules-redistribute

None.
417
statistics
Description: Use the statistics command to display information about the following objects associated with an OSPF virtual routing instance: Hello Packets Link State Requests Link State Acknowledgments Link State Updates Database Descriptions Areas Created Shorted Path First Runs Packets Dropped Errors Received Bad Link State Requests
Before you can execute the statistics command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get statistics

None.
418
stub
Description: Use the stub command to display details about a stub area created for the current OSPF virtual routing instance. Before you can execute the stub command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get stub [ ip_addr ]

Variable Parameters
get stub ip_addr
ip_addr Identifies the stub area.
Example: The following command displays details about a stub area created on the current OSPF virtual routing instance: ns(trust-vr/ospf)-> get stub 192.168.20.20
419
summary-import
Description: Use the summary-import commands to summarize a route redistribution. After importing a series of routes to the current OSPF routing instance from a router running a different protocol, you can bundle the routes into one generalized (or summarized) address that uses the same network stem of the prefix address. By summarizing multiple addresses, you allow the OSPF routing instance to treat a series of routes as one route, thus simplifying the process. Before you can execute the summary-import commands, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get summary-import
set
set summary-import ip ip_addr/mask [ tag { ip_addr | id_num } ]
unset
unset summary-import ip ip_addr/mask
420

ip
set summary-import ip ip_addr/mask [ ... ] unset summary-import ip ip_addr/mask
ip The summarized prefix, consisting of an address (ip_addr) and network mask (mask) encompassing all the imported routes.
tag
set summary-import ip ip_addr/mask tag { ip_addr | id_num }
tag A value that acts as an identifier for the summarized prefix. The virtual router uses this identifier when advertising a new external LSA.
Example: The following command summarizes a set of imported routes under one route (20): ns(trust-vr/ospf)-> set summary-import ip 2.1.1.0/24 tag 20
421
vlink
Description: Use the vlink commands to create a virtual link for the current routing instance. A virtual link is a conveyance that allows two segments to connect when the backbone router bridging them cannot reach either segment. Before you can execute the vlink command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get vlink
set
set vlink area-id { id_num1 | ip_addr } router-id { id_num2 | ip_addr } [ authentication { active-md5-key-id id_num | md5 key_str [ key-id id_num ] | password pswd_str } | dead-interval number | hello-interval number | retransmit-interval number | transit-delay number ]
422
unset
unset vlink area-id { id_num1 | ip_addr } router-id { id_num2 | ip_addr } [ authentication [ active-md5-key-id | md5 [ key-id id_num ] ] ] | dead-interval number | hello-interval number | retransmit-interval number | transit-delay number ]

area-id
set vlink area-id id_num1 { ... } unset vlink area-id id_num1 { ... }
area-id Specifies the ID or IP address of the area through which the virtual link is connected.
authentication
set vlink { ... } authentication { active-md5-key-id | md5 key_str [ key-id id_num ] | password pswd_str } unset vlink { ... } authentication [ active-md5-key-id | md5 [ key-id id_num ]
authentication Specifies the authentication method, including MD5 key string, the key identifier number (the default is 0), and password. You can specify more than one MD5 key with different key identifier numbers (between 0-255). If there are multiple MD5 keys configured, you can use the active-md5-key-id option to select the key identifier of the key to be used for authentication.
423
dead-interval
set vlink { ... } dead-interval number unset vlink { ... } dead-interval number
dead-interval Specifies the maximum amount of time that the NetScreen device waits, after it stops receiving packets from the neighbor, before classifying the neighbor as offline.
hello-interval
set vlink { ... } hello-interval number unset vlink { ... } hello-interval number
hello-interval Specifies the amount of time in seconds that elapse between instances of the interface sending Hello packets to the network announcing the presence of the interface.
retransmit-interval
set vlink { ... } retransmit-interval number unset vlink { ... } retransmit-interval number
retransmitinterval Specifies the amount of time (in seconds) that elapses before the interface resends a packet to a neighbor that did not acknowledge a previous transmission attempt for the same packet.
router-id
set vlink area-id id_num1 router-id id_num2 unset vlink area-id id_num1 router-id id_num2
router-id Specifies the ID or IP address of the router at the other end of the virtual link.
424
Example: The following command creates a virtual link using an area of 0.0.0.1 for router with an ID of 10.10.10.20: ns(trust-vr/ospf)-> set vlink area-id 0.0.0.1 router-id 10.10.10.20
transit-delay
set vlink { ... } transit-delay number unset vlink { ... } transit-delay number
transit-delay Specifies the amount of time (in seconds) that elapses before the NetScreen device advertises a packet received on the interface.
425
vneighbor
Description: Use the vneighbor command to display information about a neighbor on the virtual link. Before you can execute the vneighbor command, you must initiate the ospf context. (See Context Initiation on page 387.)
Syntax
get
get vneighbor
Keywords and Parameters

None.
426
performance
Description: Use the performance command to retrieve performance information for the NetScreen device. You can display information for the following: CPU utilization The session ramp-up rate
Syntax
get
get performance { cpu | session } [ detail ]

cpu
get performance cpu [ detail ]
cpu Displays the current CPU utilization rate for the last minute, the last 5 minutes, and the last fifteen
minutes.
detail
get performance { cpu | session } detail
detail Displays the CPU utilization or session ramp-up rate for last 60 seconds, the last 60 minutes, and the last 24 hours.
427
session
get performance session [ detail ]
session Displays the number of sessions added (ramp-up rate) for the last minute, the last 5 minutes,
and the last fifteen minutes. It does not display the total number of sessions or the number of deleted sessions.
428
PIM Commands
Description: Use the pim context to begin configuring either Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) or Protocol Independent Multicast-Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) for a NetScreen virtual router.
Context Initiation
Initiating the pim context can take up to four steps. 1. Enter the vrouter context by executing the set vrouter command. set vrouter vrouter For example: 2. 3. set vrouter trust-vr Enter the pim context by executing the set protocol pim command. ns(trust-vr)-> set protocol pim Enable PIM (it is disabled by default). ns(trust-vr/pim)-> set enable
To exit out of each context, enter exit.
PIM Command List

The following commands are executable in the pim context.
accept-group Use the accept-group command to specify the access list that identifies the multicast group(s) for which the virtual router processes PIM messages. Command options: set, unset Use the bsr command to display information about the bootstrap router. Command options: get
bsr
429
config enable igmp-members interface join-prune mgroup
Use the config command to display all commands executed to configure the PIM routing instance. Command options: get Use the enable command to enable or disable the PIM-SM instance on the virtual router. Command options: set, unset Use the igmp-members command to display IGMP membership reports. Command options: get Use the interface command to display all interfaces running PIM-SM. Command options: get Use the join-prune command to display join-prune messages sent to each neighbor. Command options: get Use the mgroup command to specify from which source(s) and/or RP the multicast group accepts traffic. Command options: set, unset Use the mroute commands to display PIM multicast route table entries. Command options: get Use the neighbor command to display information about all neighbors discovered for each interface. Command options: get Use the rp command to display the status of the RP (rendezvous point). Command options: get Use the rpf command to display RPF information for a particular source or RP. Command options: get Use the spt-threshold command to specify the data rate in bytes per second that triggers the device to switch from the shared distribution tree to the source-specific distribution tree. Command options: set, unset Use the statistics command to display PIM statics for the virtual router.
mroute neighbor
rp rpf spt-threshold
statistics
430
zone
Configures the following: an RP candidate in the specified zone a static RP for the specified multicast groups in the named zone Command options: get, set, unset
431
accept-group
Description: Use the accept-group command to specify the access list that identifies the multicast group(s) for which the virtual router processes PIM messages. Before you can execute the accept-group command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
set
set accept-group number
unset
unset accept-group

Variable Parameter
set accept-group number
number
Specifies the access list that identifies the multicast group(s) for which the virtual router accepts PIM messages.
432
bsr
Description: Use the bsr command to display information about the elected bootstrap router. Before you can execute the bsr command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
get
get bsr

None.
433
config
Description: Use the config command to display all commands executed to configure the PIM routing instance. Before you can execute the config command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
get
get config

None.
434
enable
Description: Use the enable command to enable or disable the PIM-SM instance on the virtual router. Before you can execute the enable command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
set
set enable
unset
unset enable

None.
435
igmp-members
Description: Use the igmp-members command to display local membership information sent by IGMP. Before you can execute the igmp-members command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
get
get igmp-members

None.
436
interface
Description: Use the interface command to display all interfaces running PIM-SM. Before you can execute the interface command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
get
get interface

None.
437
join-prune
Description: Use the join-prune command to display join-prune messages sent to each neighbor. Before you can execute the join-prune command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
get
get join-prune

None.
438
mgroup
Description: Use the mgroup command to specify from which source(s) and/or RP the multicast group accepts traffic. Before you can execute the mgroup command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
set
set mgroup mcst_addr { accept-rp number | accept-source number }
unset
unset mgroup mcst_addr { accept-rp | accept-source }

Variable Parameter
set mgroup mcst_addr
ip_addr Specifies the IP address of the multicast group.
439
accept-rp
set mgroup mcst_addr accept-rp number
accept-rp Specifies the access list that identifies the RP(s) from which the device forwards traffic to the multicast group. The device drops traffic for the multicast group if the traffic is from an RP that is not on the specified access list.
accept-source
set mgroup mcst_addr accept-source number
accept-source Specifies the access list that identifies the source(s) from which the device forwards traffic to the multicast group.The device drops traffic for the multicast group if the traffic is from a source that is not on the specified access list.
440
mroute
Description: Use the mroute commands to display PIM route table entries. Before you can execute the mroute command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
get
get mroute [ brief | mgroup mcst_addr [ detail ] [ brief ] [ source ip_addr [ detail ] [ brief ] ] ]

brief
get mroute brief get mroute mgroup mcst_addr brief get mroute mgroup mcst_addr source ip_addr brief
brief Displays summary information about the multicast routes. Displays the source address, multicast group address, and the list of incoming and outgoing interfaces.
441
detail
get mroute mgroup mcst_addr detail get mroute mgroup mcst_addr source ip_addr detail
brief Displays information about the multicast route, including the RPF and type of route. It also provides details on the input and output interfaces.
mgroup
get mroute mgroup mcst_addr brief get mroute mgroup mcst_addr detail get mroute mgroup mcst_addr source ip_addr [ brief | detail ]
mgroup
Displays multicast route table entries for the specified multicast group or defines a multicast route for a particular multicast group.
source
get mroute mgroup ip_addr source ip_addr
source Specifies the IP address of the source of the multicast traffic.
442
neighbor
Description: Use the neighbor command to display information about all neighbors discovered for each interface. Before you can execute the neighbor command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
get
get neighbor

None.
443
rp
Description: Use the rp command to display the status of the RP (rendezvous point). Before you can execute the rp command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
get
get rp { active | all | candidate | mgroup ip_addr [ active ] | proxy }

active
get rp active
active Displays the RP that is actively sending multicast traffic to the multicast groups.
444
all
get rp all
all Displays information about all candidate and static RPs. It displays the (*, G) and (S, G) mappings for each RP.
candidate
get rp candidate
candidate Displays the status of the RP candidates that you configured for each zone on the virtual router.
mgroup
get rp mgroup ip_addr [ active ]
mgroup Displays information about the group-RP set for the specified multicast group. Specify active to display the RP for the specified multicast group.
proxy
get rp proxy
proxy Displays the proxy-RP status for each zone in the PIM instance of the virtual router.
445
rpf
Description: Use the rpf command to display RPF (reverse path forwarding) information for a particular source or RP. Before you can execute the rpf command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
get
get rpf

None.
446
spt-threshold
Description: Use the spt-threshold command to specify the threshold that triggers the virtual router to switch from the shared distribution tree to the source-based tree. Before you can execute the spt-threshold command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
set
set spt-threshold { number | infinity }
unset
unset spt-threshold

Variable Parameter
set spt-threshold number
number Specifies the data rate in bytes per second that triggers the device to switch from the shared distribution tree to the source-specific distribution tree. If you specify infinity, the device never switches to a source-specific distribution tree.
447
zone
Description: Use the zone command to configure the following for the specified zone: an RP candidate a static RP for the specified multicast groups in the named zone a proxy-RP
Before you can execute the zone command, you must initiate the pim context. (See Context Initiation on page 429.)
Syntax
get
get zone [ zone [ bsr | rp { active | all | candidate | mgroup ip_addr [ active ] | proxy } ] ]
set
set zone zone rp { address ip_addr mgroup-list number [ always ] | candidate interface interface [ mgroup-list number [ holdtime number | priority number ] ] | proxy
448
unset
unset zone zone rp address { ip_addr | candidate | proxy }

address
set zone zone rp address ip_addr mgroup-list number [ always ] unset zone zone rp address ip_addr
address Configures a static RP for the multicast groups specified in the access list. If no group is specified, then this RP is used for any multicast group that has no RP. zone zone Specifies the zone of the RP. address ip_addr Specifies the IP address of the RP. This IP address can also be the IP address an interfaces on the device. mgroup-list number Specifies the access list that identifies the multicast group(s) mapped to the RP. always Specifies that this RP should always be used for the specified multicast group even if there is a dynamic group-RP mapping for the same group.
449
bsr
get zone zone bsr
bsr Displays information about the bootstrap router in the zone.
candidate
set zone zone rp candidate interface interface set zone zone rp candidate interface interface mgroup-list number holdtime number set zone zone rp candidate interface interface mgroup-list number priority number unset zone zone rp candidate
candidate Configures an RP candidate in the specified zone. zone zone Specifies the zone of the RP. interface interface Specifies the interface that is advertised as the RP candidate. mgroup-list number Specifies the access list which identifies the multicast group(s) for which the interface is the RP candidate. holdtime number Specifies the holdtime advertised to the bootstrap router. priority number Specifies the priority of the interface as the RP candidate. When you configure proxy RP, you must configure an RP candidate without a multicast group.
proxy
set zone zone rp proxy
450
rp
proxy Enables proxy RP in the specified zone.
get zone zone rp {...}

rp Displays information about the RP in the specified zone. active Displays information about the RP that is sending multicast traffic to the multicast group in the specified zone. all Displays all RPs, including candidate RPs, in the specified zone. candidate Displays the configured RP in the zone. mgroup ip_addr Displays the RP for the specifies multicast group. proxy Displays the proxy-RP for the specified zone.
451
ping
Description: Use the ping command to check the network connection to another system. Note: An extended ping (using the from option) pings a host on the Untrusted network from any existing MIP, or from the Trusted interface IP address. The syntax for specifying a MIP is mip ip_addr (see example in from keyword description).
Syntax
ping [ ip_addr | name_str ] [ count number [ size number [ time-out number ] ] ] [ from interface ]

Variable Parameters
ping [ ip_addr | name_str ] [ ... ]
ip_addr | name_str Pings the host at address (ip_addr) or with name (name_str).
Example: The following command pings a host with IP address 172.16.11.2: ping 172.16.11.2
count
ping [ ip_addr | name_str ] count number [ ... ]
count The ping count (number).
Example: The following command pings a device at 10.100.2.171 with a ping count of 3: ping 10.100.2.171 count 3
from
ping [ ip_addr | name_str ] [ ... ] from interface
from The source interface (interface) for an extended ping. For more information on interfaces, see Interface Names on page A-I. Defines the source IP to which the ping will reply. Because this destination is on the untrusted side, the source IP can only be the Mapped IP address or an untrusted interface IP address.
Examples: The following command pings a device at 10.100.2.11 with a ping count of 4 from the ethernet1 interface: ping 10.100.2.11 count 4 from ethernet1 The following command pings a host with IP address 192.168.11.2 and sends the results to IP address 10.1.1.3: ping 192.168.11.2 from mip 10.1.1.3
size
ping [ ip_addr | name_str ] count number size number [ ... ]
size The packet size (number) for each ping.
time-out
ping [ ip_addr | name_str ] count number size number time-out number
time-out The ping timeout in seconds (number).
Example: The following command pings a device at 10.100.2.11. Ping count of 4 Packet size 1000
Ping timeout of three seconds: ping 10.100.2.11 count 4 size 1000 time-out 3
pki
Definition: Use the pki commands to manage public-key infrastructure (PKI). The term Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) refers to the hierarchical structure of trust required for public key cryptography. Using PKI, the NetScreen device verifies the trustworthiness of a certificate by tracking a path of certificate authorities (CAs) from the one issuing your local certificate back to a root authority of a CA domain. The pki commands perform the following tasks: Manage PKI objects. Create new RSA key pairs and acquire a certificate. Verify the certificate received from the communication peer. Acquire CRLs. Configure PKI-related operations, such as verification of certificate revocation.
Syntax
exec
exec pki { convert-cert | dsa new-key number [ & ] | rsa new-key number [ & ] | x509 { install-factory-certs name_str | pkcs10 | scep { cert id_num | key { id_num | last-key } | renew id_num |
} | self-signed-cert key-pair id_num | tftp ip_addr { cert-name name_str | crl-name name_str } } }
get
get pki { authority { id_num | default } { cert-path | cert-status | scep } | ldap | pre-prime | src-interface | x509 { cert { id_num | system } | cert-fqdn | cert-path | crl-refresh | dn | list { ca-cert | cert | crl | key-pair | local-cert | pending-cert } | pkcs10 | raw-cn | send-to } }
455
set (authority)
set pki authority { id_num | default } { cert-path { full | partial } | cert-status { crl { refresh { daily | default | monthly | weekly } | server-name { ip_addr | dom_name } | url url_str } ocsp { cert-verify id id_num | not-verify-revoke | url url_str } | revocation-check { crl [ best-effort ] | ocsp [ best-effort ] | none } } scep { authentication { failed | passed } | ca-cgi string | ca-id name_str | challenge pswd_str | current | mode { auto | manual } | polling-int number | ra-cgi string | renew-start number } }
456
set (ldap)
set pki ldap { crl-url url_str | server-name { name_str | ip_addr } }
set (pre-prime)
set pki pre-prime number
set (src-interface)
set pki src-interface interface
set (x509)
set pki x509 { cert-fqdn string | default { cert-path { full | partial } crl-refresh { daily | default | monthly | weekly } | send-to string } | dn { country-name name_str | email string | ip ip_addr | local-name name_str | name name_str | org-name name_str |
org-unit-name name_str | phone string | state-name name_str } | friendly-name string | raw-cn enable | renew id_num }
unset
unset pki { authority { id_num | default } { cert-path | cert-status { crl { refresh | server-name | url } | cert-verify revocation-check } | scep { ca-cgi | ca-id | challenge | current | mode | polling-int | ra-cgi | renew-start } } | ldap
458
{ crl-url | server-name } | pre-prime | src-interface | x509 { cert-fqdn | default { cert-path | crl-refresh | send-to } | dn { country-name | email | ip | local-name | name | org-name | org-unit-name | phone | state-name } friendly-name id_num | raw-cn } }
459

authentication
set pki authority { ... } scep authentication { failed | passed } [ id_num ]
authentication Sets the result of the CA certificate authentication, failed or passed. The id_num value identifies a pending certificate created during a SCEP operation.
Example: The following command sets the result of a CA certificate authentication to passed: set pki authority default scep authentication passed
authority
get pki authority { id_num | default } { ... } set pki authority { id_num | default } { ... } unset pki authority { id_num | default } { ... }
authority Defines how the NetScreen device uses the CAs authorization services. The id_num parameter is the identification number of the CA certificate. The default switch directs the device to use the authority configuration (used when the CA certificate does not reside locally).
Example: The following command instructs the NetScreen device to check for certificate revocation on a daily basis: set pki authority default cert-status crl refresh daily
460
cert-path
get pki authority { id_num | default } cert-path set pki authority { id_num | default } cert-path { full | partial } unset pki authority id_num cert-path
cert-path Defines the X509 certificate path validation level. When the device verifies a certificate, it builds a certificate chain from certificates received from the peer and the certificate stored locally. Certificates loaded locally are considered "trusted". full Directs the NetScreen device to validate the certificate chain to the root. (The last certificate in the certificate chain must be a self-signed CA certificate.) partial Specifies partial path validation. (The last certificate in the certificate chain may be any locally-stored certificate.) In either case, the last certificate in the chain must come from local storage. You can set this certificate path validation level for a CA.
Example: The following command defines the certificate path validation level as full: set pki authority default cert-path full
cert-status
get pki authority { id_num | default } cert-status set pki authority { id_num | default } cert-status { ... } unset pki authority { id_num | default } cert-status { ... }
cert-status Defines how the NetScreen device verifies the revocation status of a certificate. crl Configures Certificate Revocation List (CRL) parameters. - refresh Determines how often (daily, monthly, or weekly) the NetScreen device updates the CRL before the CRL expires. The default option uses the validation date decided by the CRL. - server-name { ip_addr:port_num | dom_name } Specifies the server by IP address and port number, or by domain name. - url url_str Specifies the URL for accessing the CRL.
461
ocsp Configures Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) parameters. - cert-verify id number Identifies the certificate to use when verifying the OCSP response. - not-verify-revoke Disables verification of revocation status on the OCSP signing certificate. - url url_str Specifies the URL for accessing the OCSP responder. revocation-check Specifies how the NetScreen device checks certificates to see if they are currently revoked. - crl Specifies that the device uses CRL to check certificate status. - none Specifies that the device does not perform a check of certificate status. - ocsp Specifies that the device uses OCSP to check certificate status. - best-effort Specifies that the device can use a certificate for which there is no revocation information. This option is useful when CRL retrieval is not practical. For example, in some environments the CRL server is only accessible through a tunnel; however, the CRL information is necessary to build the tunnel originally. When you use the best-effort setting, it is advisable to check the event log periodically. The device should accept a certificate without revocation information only when no revocation information is available. Repeatedly failing to get revocation information for a certificate usually indicates improper configuration.
Example: The following command directs the NetScreen device to use the CRL to check certificate status: set pki authority default cert-status revocation-check crl
cert-verify id
set pki authority id_num1 cert-status ocsp cert-verify id id_num2 unset pki authority id_num cert-status ocsp cert-verify
cert-verify id Identifies a locally-stored certificate the NetScreen device uses to verify the signature on an OCSP responder. id_num1 Identifies the CA certificate that issued the certificate being verified. id_num2 Identifies the locally stored certificate the device uses to verify the signature on the OCSP response.
462
convert-cert
exec pki convert-cert
convert-cert Converts a virtual system (vsys) certificate (for versions prior to ScreenOS 3.0.0) to use the internal vsys identifier in ScreenOS 3.0.0 and above.
dsa new-key
exec pki dsa new-key number [ & ]
dsa new-key Generates a new DSA public/private key pair with a specified bit length (number). Key length is 512, 786, 1024, or 2048. The & option directs the device to perform key generation in the background, without waiting for the result. Without this option, the device can wait up to 100 seconds.
ldap
get pki ldap set pki ldap { ... } unset pki ldap { ... }
ldap Specifies settings for the LDAP server, when the CA certificate associated with the server is not in the device. crl-url url_str Sets the default LDAP URL for retrieving the certificate revocation list (CRL). server-name { name_str | ip_addr:port_num } Defines the fully-qualified domain name or IP address and port number of the server.
Example: The following command assigns 162.128.20.12 as the servers IP address: set pki ldap server-name 162.128.20.12
463
pre-prime
get pki pre-prime set pki pre-prime number unset pki pre-prime
pre-prime The get command displays: - The number of pre-calculated primes for every key type and key length combination. The key type can be DSA or RSA and the key length can be 1024 or 2048 bits depending on the NetScreen * platform . - The number of currently available pairs of prime numbers for every key type and key length combination. - Ongoing prime calculation for a key type and key length combination and the number of attempts already made. The set command instructs the NetScreen device to generate a specific number of pre-calculated primes to store in memory. The unset command reverts the NetScreen device to the default number of pre-calculated primes. The default number of pre-calculated primes is platform specific. For more information, refer to the Specification Sheet for your NetScreen product.
*
NetScreen appliances generate 1024-bit primes. NetScreen systems generate 1024- and 2048-bit primes. For more information, refer to the Specification Sheet for your NetScreen product.
rsa new-key
exec pki rsa new-key number [ & ]
rsa new-key Generates a new RSA public/private key pair with a specified bit length (number). Key length is 512, 786, 1024, or 2048. The & option directs the device to perform key generation in the background, without waiting for the result. Without this option, the device can wait up to 100 seconds.
464
scep
exec pki x509 scep { cert id_num | key get pki authority { id_num | default } set pki authority { id_num | default } unset pki authority { id_num | default
scep
{ id_num | last-key } | renew } scep scep { ... } } scep { ... }
Defines Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) parameters. authentication { passed | failed } [ id_num ] sets the result of the CA authentication, failed or passed. The id_num value identifies a defined key pair. ca-cgi url_str Specifies the path to the CA's SCEP server. ca-id string Specifies the identity of the CA's SCEP server. cert-id id_num Directs the NetScreen device to retrieve the final certificate for a pending certification. challenge pswd_str Specifies the Challenge password. current Directs the NetScreen device to use the SCEP associated with a CA as default. key id_num Directs the device to acquire a certificate for the specified key pair. The id_num parameter specifies the ID of a specific key pair. The last_key parameter specifies the most recently-created key pair. mode { auto | manual } Specifies the authentication mode to authenticate the certificate. polling-int number Determines the retrieval polling interval (in minutes). The default value is 0 (none). ra-cgi url_str Specifies the CGI path to the RA's SCEP server. renew id_num Directs the device to renew the specified certificate (id_num). renew-start Set the number of days before the certificate expiration date when you want the NetScreen device to request the renewal of the certificate.
Example: The following command sets the SCEP Challenge password to swordfish: set pki authority default scep challenge swordfish
465
Example: The following command uses the SCEP setting for CA 123 as the default: set pki authority 123 scep current
self-signed-cert
exec pki x509 self-signed-cert key-pair id_num
self-signed-cert Generates a self-signed certificate using the specified (previously generated) key pair. To learn the ID number for a key pair to use when generating the self-signed certificate, enter the following command: get pki x509 list key-pair. Then note the ID number in the column of output under ID num (not the ID number under IDX).
Example: The following command generates a self-signed certificate using the key pair with ID number 70320131: exec pki x509 self-signed-cert key-pair 70320131
send-to
get pki x509 send-to set pki x509 default send-to string unset pki x509 default send-to
send-to Specifies or displays the e-mail destination (string) to send the x509 certificate request file.
src-interface
get pki src-interface set pki src-interface unset pki src-interface
src-interface Displays, configures or removes the source interface the NetScreen device uses to send PKI traffic.
466
x509
exec pki x509 { ... } get pki x509 { ... } set pki x509 { ... } unset pki x509 { ... }
x509 Specifies settings for x509 certificates, displays certificate information, and performs various operations related to x509 PKI object. cert { id_num | system } Displays information on the specified certificate. The keyword system refers to the self-signed certificate that the NetScreen device automatically generates during bootup. cert-fqdn string Configures the Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN). PKI uses this value in the certificate subject alt name extension. default Specifies settings for the CA whose certificate is not locally configured. - crl-refresh Sets or displays the refreshment frequency (daily, monthly, or weekly) of the X.509 CRL. The default option uses the expiration date in each CRL. - send-to string Assigns the e-mail address to which the NetScreen device sends the PKCS10 certificate request file. dn Specifies or displays the name that uniquely identifies a requesting certificate. - country-name name_str Sets the country name. - email string Sets the e-mail address. - ip ip_addr Sets the IP address. - local-name string Sets the locality. - name string Sets the name in a common name field. - org-name string Sets the organization name. - org-unit-name string Sets the organization unit name. - phone string Sets a contact phone number as the X.509 certificate subject name of the NetScreen device. - state-name string Sets the state name as the X.509 certificate subject name.
467
friendly-name name_str id_num A friendly name (name_str) for the certificate (id_num). install-factory-certs name_str Loads a specified factory pre-defined certificate. list Displays the X.509 object list. - ca-cert Displays all CA certificates. - cert Displays all X.509 certificates. - key-pair Displays all key pairs for which there is no certificate. - crl Displays all Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs). - local-cert Displays all local certificates. - pending-cert Displays all pending certificates. pkcs10 Displays a PKCS10 file (an X.509 certificate request) for a key pair. raw-cn enable Enables the raw common name (CN) or displays its current status. scep - cert id_num Initiates Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) operation to retrieve certificates from a certificate authority server. The id_num parameter is the identification number of the pending certificate. - key { id_num | last-key } Initiates SCEP operation to obtain a certificate for a key pair. The variable id_num identifies the key pair and last-key specifies to obtain a certificate for the most recently created key pair. - renew id_num Initiates SCEP operation to renew an existing certificate. The variable id_num identifies the existing certificate to renew. tftp ip_addr Uploads the specified certificate (cert-name name_str) or CRL file (crl-name name_str) for the specified TFTP server at IP address ip_addr.
Examples: The following command specifies the destination e-mail address where the NetScreen device sends the PKCS10 certificate request: set pki x509 default send-to caServer@somewhere.com
468
The following command refreshes the certificate revocation list on a daily basis: set pki x509 default crl-refresh daily The following command defines a distinguished name for Ed Jones, who works in marketing at Juniper Networks in Sunnyvale, California: set set set set set set pki pki pki pki pki pki x509 x509 x509 x509 x509 x509 dn dn dn dn dn dn country-name US state-name CA local-name sunnyvale org-name juniper networks org-unit-name marketing name ed jones
Defaults
The RSA key length is set to 1024 bits.
Requesting a CA Certificate
You use the set pki, get pki, and exec pki commands to request an x509 CA certificate from a certificate authority. The following commands provide a typical example: 1. Specify a certificate authority CA CGI path. set pki auth default scep ca-cgi http://pilotonsiteipsec.verisign.com/cgi-bin/ pkiclient.exe Note: The Common Gateway Interface (CGI) is a standard way for a web server to pass a user request to an application program, and to receive data back. CGI is part of the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP). 2. Specify a registration authority RA CGI path set pki auth default scep ra-cgi http://pilotonsiteipsec.verisign.com/cgi-bin/ pkiclient.exe Note: You must specify an RA CGI path even if the RA does not exist. If the RA does not exist, use the value specified for the CA CGI.
469
3. 4. 5.
Generate an RSA key pair, specifying a key length of 1024 bits. exec pki rsa new 1024 Initiate the SCEP operation to request a local certificate. exec pki x509 scep key last-key If this is the first attempt to apply for a certificate from this certificate authority, a prompt appears presenting a fingerprint value for the CA certificate. (Otherwise, go on to Step 6.) After verification of the fingerprint, allow the operation to continue by executing the following command: set pki auth default scep auth passed You must specify an RA CGI path even if the RA does not exist. If the RA does not exist, use the value specified for the CA CGI.
6. 7.
8.
If the device does not approve the certificate automatically, contact your certificate authority administrator to approve the local certificate request. (Optional) Display a list of pending certificates. This allows you to see and record the ID number identifying the pending certificate. get pki x509 list pending-cert (Optional) Obtain the local certificate from the CA (using the ID number obtained in Step 7) to identify the certificate. In this example, the certificate number is 1001. exec pki x509 scep cert 1001
470
policy
Description: Use the policy commands to define policies to control network and VPN traffic. A policy is a set of rules that determines how traffic passes between security zones (interzone policy), between interfaces bound to the same zone (intrazone policy), and between addresses in the Global zone (global policy). When a NetScreen device attempts to pass a packet from one zone to another, between two interfaces bound to the same zone, or between two addresses in the Global zone, the NetScreen device checks its policy lists for a policy to permit such traffic. For example, to allow traffic to pass from one security zone to another, you must configure a policy that permits zone A to send traffic to zone B. To allow traffic originating in zone B to flow to zone A, you must configure another policy permitting traffic from zone B to zone A. Executing the set policy id pol_num command without specifying further options places the CLI within the context of an existing policy. For example, the following commands define a policy with ID number 1 and then enter the policy:1 context to add a second service: ns-> set policy id 1 from trust to untrust host1 host2 HTTP permit ns-> set policy id 1 ns(policy:1)-> set service FTP After you enter a policy context, all subsequent command executions modify the specified policy (policy:1 in this example). To save your changes, you must first exit the policy context, and then enter the save command: ns(policy:1)-> exit ns-> save You can also use the set policy id pol_num command with additional options to modify an existing policy. For example, the following commands add a Deep Inspection extension to policy 1: ns-> set policy id 1 from trust to untrust host1 host2 HTTP permit ns-> set policy id 1 attack HIGH:HTTP:SIGS action close Note: The above example adds a Deep Inspection extension that was not present in the original policy. After you enter a policy context, you cannot add a Deep Inspection extension if one does not already exist in the original policy.
471
Syntax
exec
exec policy verify [ from zone [ to zone ] | global | to zone ]
get
get policy [ all | from zone1 to zone2 | [ global ] id pol_num ]
get (within a policy context)

get configuration
set
set policy [ global ] [ id pol_num1 ] [ top | before pol_num2 ] [ name name_str ] [ from zone1 to zone2 ] src_addr dst_addr svc_name [ nat [ src [ dip-id id_num ] ] [ dst ip addr1 [ addr2 | port port_num ] ] ] { deny |
permit | reject | tunnel { l2tp tunn_str | vpn-group id_num } | tunnel vpn tunn_str [ l2tp tunn_str | pair-policy pol_num ] } [ auth [ server name_str ] | webauth ] [ group-expression string | user name_str | user-group name_str ] ] | [ schedule name_str ] [ log [ alert ] ] [ count [ alarm id_num1 id_num2 ] ] [ no-session-backup ] [ url-filter ] [ traffic { gbw number } { priority number } { mbw [ number ] dscp { disable | enable } } ] [ attack string { action { close | close-client | close-server | drop | drop-packet | ignore | none } | logging } [ ip-action { block | close | notify } [ target { dst-ip | serv | src-ip | zone | zone-serv } ] [ timeout value ] ] ] | av name_str ] } set policy move pol_num1 { before pol_num2 | after pol_num3 } set policy default-permit-all
set policy id number

set set set set policy policy policy policy [ [ [ [ global global global global ] ] ] ] id id id id pol_num pol_num pol_num pol_num disable application svc_name attack string action string av name_str
set (within a policy context)

set { attack string { action { close | close-client | close-server | drop | drop-packet | ignore | none } | logging } [ ip-action { block | close | notify } [ target { dst-ip | serv | src-ip | zone | zone-serv } ] [ timeout value ] ] | av name_str | count [ alarm number1 number2 ] | di-alert-disable | di-severity { info | low | medium | high | critical } | dst-address | src-address { name_str | negate } | log [ alert | session-init ] | name name_str | service svc_name | src-address { name_str | negate } url protocol sc-cpa profile { name_str | ns-profile } }
474
unset
unset policy { pol_num | id pol_num } [ application | attack | av name_str | disable ] unset policy default-permit-all
unset (within a policy context)

unset unset unset unset unset unset unset unset unset attack string [ logging ] av name_str count { dst-address | src-address } { name_str | negate } { ims-alert | ims-log } log [ session-init ] name service svc_name severity

all
get policy all
all Displays information about all security policies.
475
application
set policy [ global ] id pol_num application svc_name
application Defines the type of Layer 7 application associated with a Layer 3 service and Layer 4 port number. This is particularly important for defining the Layer 7 application for custom services so that the NetScreen device can properly inspect such traffic for attack signatures and anomalies. The ignore option, which appears near the end of the list of application choices, instructs the NetScreen device to ignore the application type typically associated with a predefined service and port number. Using the ignore option instructs the NetScreen device not to scan the packet payload and can prevent the NetScreen device from attempting to parse one type of traffic when it is actually another typesuch as the case with LDAP and H.323 traffic, both of which use TCP port 389. The none option, which also appears near the end of the list of application choices, instructs the NetScreen device to use the default setting. Choosing none is the equivalent to entering the CLI command: unset policy id id_num application.
Example: The following command identifies the Layer 7 application for policy ID 1 as FTP: set policy id 1 application FTP
476
attack
set policy { } attack string action { close | close-client | close-server | drop | drop-packet | ignore | none } set policy { } attack string logging set attack string unset policy { pol_num | id pol_num } attack unset attack string
attack string Inspects traffic to which the policy applies for attack objects in the specified attack object group. Attack objects can be stateful signatures or protocol anomalies. If the NetScreen device detects an attack object, it then performs one of the following specified actions: action - close The NetScreen device logs the event, severs the connection, and sends TCP RST packets to both the client and server. - close client The NetScreen device logs the event, severs the connection, and sends a TCP RST packet to the client. - close server The NetScreen device logs the event, severs the connection, and sends a TCP RST to the server. - drop The NetScreen device logs the event and severs the connection without sending either the client or the server TCP RST packets. - drop packet The NetScreen device logs the event and drops the packet containing the attack object, but it does not sever the connection. - ignore The NetScreen device logs the event and stops checkingor ignoresthe remainder of the connection. - none The NetScreen device logs the event but takes no action. logging By default, the NetScreen device logs attacks that it detects through Deep Inspection. To disable logging, enter the policy context and use the command ns(policy:number)-> unset attack string logging.
477
Example: The following commands define a policy to check for attack objects in the CRITICAL:HTTP:ANOM, CRITICAL:HTTP:SIGS, HIGH:HTTP:ANOM, and HIGH:HTTP:SIGS attack object groups in HTTP traffic from any host in the Untrust zone to webserver1 in the DMZ zone. If the NetScreen device detects any attack objects, it then severs the connection and sends webserver1 a TCP RST to webserver1 server so it can clear its resources: ns-> set policy id 1 from untrust to dmz any webserver1 http permit attack CRITICAL:HTTP:ANOM action close-server ns-> set policy id 1 ns(policy:1)-> set attack CRITICAL:HTTP:SIGS action close-server ns(policy:1)-> set attack HIGH:HTTP:ANOM action close-server ns(policy:1)-> set attack HIGH:HTTP:SIGS action close-server
auth
set policy { ... } auth [ ... ]
auth Requires the user to provide a login name and password to authenticate his or her identity before accessing the device and crossing the firewall. server name_str Identifies the authentication server (name_str). group-expression string Identifies users according to an expression (string). user name_str Identifies a user (name_str). user-group name_str Identifies a user group (name_str).
Example: The following command invokes user authentication. Permits any kind of traffic from any address in the Trust zone to any address in the Untrust zone Uses an authentication server named wc-server set policy from trust to untrust any any any permit auth server wc-server
av
set policy { } av name_str set av name_str
478
unset policy { pol_num | id pol_num } av name_str unset av name_str

av name_str Sends FTP, HTTP, POP3, or SMTP traffic to which the policy applies to the specified antivirus (AV) scanner (the internal AV scanner is called scan-mgr), which examines the data for viruses. If it finds a virus, the NetScreen device drops the data and sends a virus notification message to the client. Note: The external antivirus feature is not supported in ScreenOS 5.1.0.
Example: The following command instructs the NetScreen device to forward SMTP traffic originating from the remote mail server r-mail1 in the Untrust zone and destined for the local mail server mail1 in the DMZ zone to the internal AV scanner scan-mgr: set policy id 1 from untrust to dmz r-mail1 mail1 smtp permit av scan-mgr
before
set policy before pol_num1 { ... }
before Specifies the position of the policy before another policy (pol_num) in the access control list (ACL).
Example: The following command creates a new policy with ID number 3 and positions it before the policy with ID number 2: set policy id 3 before 2 from trust to untrust any any any permit
configuration
get configuration
configuration Displays the configuration details for the policy in whose context you issue the get configuration command.
479
count
set policy { ... } [ count [ alarm { id_num1 id_num2 } ] ] { ... }
count Maintains a count, in bytes, of all the network traffic the policy allows to pass through the NetScreen device. The alarm number1 number2 parameter enables the alarm feature so that you can view alarms. You must enter the number of bytes per second (number1) and the number of bytes per minute (number2) required to trigger an alarm.
Example: The following command permits any kind of traffic from any address in the Trust zone to any address in the Untrust zone and maintains a count of all network traffic to which the policy applies: set policy from trust to untrust any any any permit count
default-permit-all
set policy default-permit-all
default-permit-all Allows access without checking the access control list (ACL) for a matching policy.
deny | permit | reject

set policy [ global ] { ... } permit | deny | reject [ ... ]
deny | permit | reject deny blocks the service at the firewall. The NetScreen device simply drops the packet. permit allows the specified service to pass from the source address across the firewall to the destination address. reject blocks the service at the firewall. The NetScreen device drops the packet and sends a TCP reset (RST) segment to the source host for TCP traffic and an ICMP destination unreachable, port unreachable message (type 3, code 3) for UDP traffic. For types of traffic other than TCP and UDP, the NetScreen device drops the packet without notifying the source host, which is also what occurs when the action is deny.
480
Example: The following command: set Defines a policy from the Trust zone to the Untrust zone Uses any source or destination IP address Permits any kind of service policy from trust to untrust any any any permit
di-severity (within a policy context)

set di-severity
disable Specifies the severity of events that generate error messages. The possible event levels are info, low, medium, high, and critical.
disable
set policy [ global ] id pol_num disable
disable Disables the policy without removing it from the configuration.
from ... to
set policy { ... } from zone1 to zone2 src_addr dst_addr svc_name { ... } [ ... ]
from zone1 to zone2 src_addr dst_addr svc_name Specifies two zones between which a policy controls traffic. zone1 is the name of the source security zone. zone2 is the name of the destination security zone. src_addr is the name of the source address. Specifying any allows all source IP addresses. dst_addr is the name of the destination address. Specifying any allows all destination IP addresses.
481
svc_name is the name of the service. Specifying any identifies all available services. For more information on zones, see Zone Names on page B-I.
Example: The following command permits HTTP traffic from any address in the Trust zone to any address in the Untrust zone: set policy from trust to untrust any any HTTP permit
global
set set set set set policy policy policy policy policy global global global global global before { ... } id pol_num disable move pol_num1 { before pol_num2 | after pol_num3 } name name_str { ... } top
global
Creates or displays policies that use the Global zone. The Global zone address book keeps all the VIPs of all interfaces, regardless of the zone to which the interface belongs. You can use these VIP addresses as destination addresses in policies between any two security zones.
id
get policy [ global ] id pol_num set policy [ global ] id pol_num1 { ... } unset policy id pol_num [ disable ]
id pol_num Specifies a policy ID number. (The disable switch disables the policy.)
Example: The following command assigns the policy an ID value of 10 and permits FTP-GET traffic from any address in the Trust zone to any address in the Untrust zone: set policy id 10 from trust to untrust any any ftp-get permit
482
ip-action
set policy { ... } permit attack string action string ip-action string [ target string [ timeout number ] ]
ip-action string Activates additional brute force attack defenses to DI detection. A brute force attack occurs when an attacker barrages a target with every possible combination until one works. Attackers might use brute force attacks when attempting to log in, discover protected resources, or break encryption keys. If the NetScreen device detects a brute force attack, it then applies the specified IP action for a certain period of time to other packets with a set of elements that match a defined target. ip-action Specifies one of the following actions that the NetScreen device performs when it detects a brute force attack: - block The NetScreen device logs the event and drops all further traffic matching the target definition for the period of time specified in the timeout setting. - close The NetScreen device logs the event and drops all further traffic matching the target definition for the period of time specified in the timeout setting, and sends a Reset (RST) for TCP traffic to the source and destination addresses. - notify The NetScreen device logs the event but does not take any action against further traffic matching the target definition for the period of time specified in the timeout setting. target Specifies a set of elements that must match for the NetScreen device to consider a packet part of a brute force attack. The specified set of elements in an IP packet arriving during a specified timeout period must match that in the packet that the NetScreen detected as part of a brute force attack for the subsequent packet to be considered part of the same attack. The default is serv. - dst-ip The destination IP address - serv The source and destination IP addresses, destination port number, and protocol - src-ip The source IP address - zone The security zone to which the ingress interface is bound; that is, the source security zone from which the attacking packets originate - zone-serv The source security zone, source and destination IP addresses, destination port number, and protocol timeout A period of time following brute force attack detection during which the NetScreen device performs an IP action on packets matching specified target parameters. The default is 60 seconds.
483
Example: The following command applies Deep Inspection to HTTP traffic from any host in the Untrust zone to an HTTP server (hpp1) in the DMZ. It searches for attacks in the attack group HIGH:HTTP:ANOM, which contains two brute force attack objects. If the NetScreen detects any attack included in that group, it drops the traffic and sends a TCP RST to the Web server. If the NetScreen device detects either of the two brute force attacks, it also drops further HTTP traffic (using TCP to port 80) to that server from any host in the Untrust zone for the next 30 seconds: set policy from untrust to dmz any http1 http permit attack HIGH:HTTP:ANOM action close ip-action close target zone-serv timeout 30
l2tp
set policy [ global ] { ... } tunnel l2tp tunn_str { ... } set policy [ global ] { ... } tunnel vpn tunn_str l2tp tunn_str Example: The following command defines an inbound policy for an L2TP tunnel. set VPN tunnel named home2office L2TP tunnel named home-office Dialup VPN group named home_office policy from untrust to trust dialup_vpn our_side any tunnel vpn home2office l2tp home_office
Specifies a Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) tunnel.
l2tp
log
set policy [ global ] { ... } log [ alert ] [ session-init ] { ... }
log alert session-init Enables logging when a session ends. Enables the syslog alert feature. Enables logging when a starts.
484
Example: The following command creates a policy and directs the NetScreen device to log the traffic to which the policy applies. Permits HTTP traffic from any address in the Trust zone to any address in the Untrust zone Directs the NetScreen device to log the traffic to which the policy applies. The NetScreen device generates logs when sessions end. Enables the syslog alert feature set policy from trust to untrust any any HTTP permit log alert
move
set policy [ global ] move pol_num1 { before pol_num2 | after pol_num3 }
move Repositions a policy (pol_num1) before another policy (pol_num2) or after a policy (pol_num3) in the access control list (ACL). When one policy comes before another policy in the ACL, it has higher precedence.
Example: The following command positions a global policy with ID number 4 before the policy with ID number 2: set policy global move 4 before 2
name
set policy [ global ] [ ... ] name name_str {... }
name name_str Identifies the policy by name. (Assigning a name to an policy is optional.)
Example: The following command creates a new policy named outbound: set policy name outbound from trust to untrust any any any permit
nat
set policy [ global ] { ... } nat src [ dip-id id_num ] { ... }
485
set policy [ global ] { ... } nat dst ip addr1 [ addr2 | port port_num ] { ... }
nat Enables or disables source and destination Network Address Translation (NAT-src and NAT-dst). This feature translates the original source or destination IP address in an IP packet header to another address. src Performs NAT-src on traffic to which the policy applies. The NetScreen device can perform NAT-src using the egress interface IP address (in which case, you do not specify a DIP pool) or with addresses from a Dynamic IP (DIP) pool: - dip-id id_num Specifies the ID number of a DIP pool. This number can be between 4 and 255. dst Performs NAT-dst on traffic to which the policy applies. NetScreen supports the following three options for NAT-dst: - ip addr1 Translates the original destination address to the address specified in the policy. The NetScreen device does not translate the original port number. - ip addr1 addr2 Translates the original destination IP address from one range of addresses to an address in another range of addresses. The NetScreen device maintains a consistent mapping of an original destination address to a translated address within the specified range using a technique called address shifting. - ip addr1 port port_num Translates the original destination address and port number to the address and port number specified in the policy.
Example: The following command creates a policy that applies NAT-src on all traffic from any address in the Trust zone to any address in the Untrust zone and specifies DIP pool 8: set policy from trust to untrust any any any nat src dip-id 8 permit Example: The following commands create an address (1.1.1.5/32) named v-addr1 in the DMZ zone and a policy that applies NAT-dst on HTTP traffic from any address in the Untrust zone to the virtual destination address v-addr1 in the DMZ zone. The NetScreen device translates the destination address from 1.1.1.5 to 10.2.2.5: set address dmz v-addr1 1.1.1.5/32 set policy from untrust to dmz any v-addr1 http nat dst ip 10.2.2.5 permit Example: The following command combines NAT src (source) and dst (destination):
486
set policy from trust to untrust any any any nat src dip-id 8 dst ip 10.2.2.5 permit
negate
set { dst-address | src-address } negate
negate Applies the policy in whose context you issue this command to all addresses except those specified as either the destination (dst-address) or source (src-address). The negate option takes effect at the policy component level, applying to all items in the negated component
Example: The following commands permit HTTP traffic to the Untrust zone from all addresses in the Trust zone except from addr1: ns-> set policy id ns-> set policy id ns-> set policy id ns(policy:2)-> set 1 from trust to untrust any any http permit 2 from trust to untrust addr1 any http permit 2 src-address negate
no-session-backup
set policy [ global ] { ... } no-session-backup { ... }
no-session-backup Disables backing up the sessions to which the policy applies when the NetScreen device is in a high availability (HA) configuration. By default, a NetScreen device operating in HA backs up sessions.
487
pair-policy
set policy [ global ] { ... } pair-policy pol_num [ ... ]
pair-policy pol_num Links the policy that you are configuring with another policy that references the same VPN tunnel so that both policies share one proxy ID and one security association (SA). This is useful when you want to allow bidirectional traffic over a policy-based VPN and there is source destination address translation using a DIP pool or destination address translation using a MIP or VIP. Without policy pairing, the NetScreen device derives a different proxy ID from both the outbound and inbound policies. This causes a problem for the remote peer if it has only a single proxy ID for the VPN tunnel. By pairing both policies together, they share a single proxy ID (derived from the policy that you configured last), which solves the proxy ID problem for the remote peer, and they share a single SA, which conserves SA resources.
Example: The following commands create two policies sharing the same VPN tunnel and then bind them into a policy pair. (You have previously created on the tunnel interface subnet a DIP pool with ID 4 and addresses 1.1.1.10 1.1.1.20, and a MIP from 1.1.1.5 to host 10.1.1.5 .): set policy id 1 from trust to untrust addr1 addr2 any nat src dip-id 4 tunnel vpn vpn1 set policy id 2 from untrust to trust addr2 mip(1.1.1.5) MAIL tunnel vpn vpn1 pair-policy 1 The proxy ID for both of these policies is as follows: local 1.1.1.5/255.255.255.255, remote 10.2.2.0/255.255.255.0, proto 6, port 25 Because the local address in the above proxy ID does not include the addresses in the DIP pool or any service other than SMTP (or MAIL), you must also set a proxy ID with an address range that encompasses both the MIP (1.1.1.5) and DIP pool (1.1.1.101.1.1.20) and change the service to ANY: set vpn vpn1 proxy-id local-ip 1.1.1.0/24 remote-ip 10.2.2.0/24 ANY
488
schedule
set policy [ global ] { ... } schedule name_str [ ... ]
schedule Applies the policy only at times defined in the specified schedule.
Example: With following commands, you first create a schedule named Mkt_Sched and then reference it in a policy permitting any kind of traffic from any address in the Trust zone to any address in the Untrust zone: set schedule Mkt_Sched recurrent monday start 09:00 stop 12:00 set policy from trust to untrust any any any permit schedule Mkt_Sched
top
set policy [ global ] [ ... ] top
top Places the policy at the top of the access control list (ACL). The policy at the top of the ACL has the highest precedence.
Example: The following command: set Permits any kind of service from any address in the Trust zone to any address in the Untrust zone Assigns to the policy an ID value of 30 Places the policy at the top of the ACL policy id 30 top from trust to untrust any any any permit
489
traffic gbw
set policy [ global ] [ ... ] traffic gbw number priority number mbw [ number ] dscp { disable | enable }
traffic gbw Defines the guaranteed bandwidth (GBW) in kilobits per second. The NetScreen device passes traffic below this threshold with the highest priority, without performing traffic shaping. priority number Specifies one of the eight traffic priority levels. When traffic falls between the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth settings, the NetScreen device passes traffic with higher priority first. Lower priority traffic is passed only if there is no higher priority traffic. mbw number Defines the maximum bandwidth (MBW) in kilobits per second. Traffic beyond this limit is throttled and dropped. dscp { enable | disable } Enables or disables a mapping of the eight NetScreen priority levels to the Differentiated ServicesDiffServCodepoint (DSCP) marking system. In the NetScreen system, 0 is the highest priority and seven is the lowest.
Example: The following command: set Permits HTTP traffic from any address in the Trust zone to any address in the Untrust zone Guarantees bandwidth of 3,000 kilobits per second Assigns a priority value of 2 Sets the maximum bandwidth to 10,000 kilobits per second Enables mapping of the eight NetScreen priority levels to the DiffServ Codepoint (DSCP) marking system policy from trust to untrust any any HTTP permit traffic gbw 3000 priority 2 mbw 10000 dscp enable
490
tunnel
set policy [ global { l2tp tunn_str set policy [ global [ l2tp tunn_str
tunnel
] | ] |
{ ... } tunnel vpn-group id_num } { ... } tunnel vpn tunn_str pair-policy pol_num ]
Encrypts outgoing IP packets, and decrypts incoming IP packets. vpn [ l2tp tunn_str ] Identifies a VPN tunnel. For an IPSec VPN tunnel, specify vpn and the name of the VPN tunnel. For L2TP, specify vpn (with the name of the VPN tunnel) and l2tp (with the name of the L2TP tunnel). vpn [ pair-policy id_num ] Links this policy with an existing policy also referencing the same VPN. The VPN uses the proxy-id derived from the policy whose configuration includes the pair-policy keyword. vpn-group id_num Identifies a VPN group (id_num). A VPN group consist of multiple VPNs, which you can specify in a single policy. vpn-tunnel Identifies an active tunnel.
Example: The following command defines a policy that uses a defined VPN tunnel. Encrypts traffic exchanged with the corporate headquarters (denoted by address book entry Headquarters) Uses a VPN named To_HQ: set policy from trust to untrust any Headquarters any tunnel vpn To_HQ
url
set url protocol sc-cpa profile { <name_str> | ns-profile }
profile Specifies the URL filtering profile that you are binding to the specified policy. Only one URL profile can be linked to a policy. Use this command when configuring the integrated URL filtering feature. For information about this feature, refer to the Juniper Networks NetScreen Concepts & Examples ScreenOS Reference Guide.
491
url filter
set policy { ... } url-filter
url-filter Enables URL filtering on the NetScreen device.
verify
exec policy verify [ from zone [ to zone ] | global | to zone ]
verify Verifies that the order of policies in a policy list is valid so that a policy higher in the list does not eclipse, or shadow, another policy lower in the list. If the verification check discovers policy shadowing, the command output explains which policies are shadowing which. You can define the scope of the verification as follows: Not setting any further options instructs the NetScreen device to verify the ordering of policies in all policy sets. from zone Checks the ordering of policies from the specified zone to any zone. from zone to zone Checks the ordering of policies between the specified zones. global Checks the ordering of policies in the global policy set. to zone Checks the ordering of policies from any zone to the specified zone.
Example: The following command verifies the ordering of policies from the Trust zone to the Untrust zone: exec policy verify from trust to untrust
492
port-mode
Description: Use the port-mode commands to set the port, interface, and zone bindings for the NetScreen-5XT and NetScreen-5GT devices. (Use the get system command to see the current port mode setting.) Warning: Setting the port mode removes any existing configurations on the device and requires a system reset.
Syntax
exec
exec port-mode { combined | dmz-dual-untrust | dual-untrust | extended | home_work | trust-untrust }

combined Defines the following port, interface, and zone bindings: Binds the Untrusted Ethernet port to the ethernet4 interface, which is bound to the Untrust zone. Binds the Trusted4 Ethernet port to the ethernet3 interface, which is bound as a backup interface to the Untrust zone. Binds the Trusted3 and Trusted2 Ethernet ports to the ethernet2 interface, which is bound to the Home zone. Binds the Trusted1 Ethernet port to the ethernet1 interface, which is bound to the Work zone. The combined port mode is supported only on the NetScreen-5XT Elite (unrestricted users) platform.
493
dmz-dual-untrust
Defines the following port, interface, and zone bindings: Binds the Ethernet ports 1 and 2 to the ethernet1 interface, which is bound to the Trust security zone. Binds the Ethernet port 3 to the ethernet2 interface, which is bound to the DMZ security zone. Binds the Ethernet port 4 to the ethernet3 interface, which is bound to the Untrust security zone. Binds the Untrust Ethernet port to the ethernet4 interface, which is bound to the Untrust security zone.
dual-untrust
Defines the following port, interface, and zone bindings: Binds the Untrusted port to the ethernet3 interface, which is bound to the Untrust zone. Binds the Trusted4 Ethernet port to the ethernet2 interface, which is bound as a backup interface to the Untrust zone. Binds the Trusted1 through Trusted3 Ethernet ports to the ethernet1 interface, which is bound to the Trust zone.
extended
Defines the following port, interface, and zone bindings: Binds the Ethernet ports 1 and 2 to the ethernet1 interface, which is bound to the Trust security zone. Binds the Ethernet ports 3 and 4 to the ethernet2 interface, which is bound to the DMZ security zone. Binds the Untrusted Ethernet port to the ethernet3 interface, which is bound to the Untrust security zone. Binds the Modem port to the serial interface, which you can bind as a backup interface to the Untrust security zone.
home-work
Defines the following port, interface, and zone bindings: Binds the Untrusted Ethernet port to the ethernet3 interface, which is bound to the Untrust zone. Binds the Trusted4 and Trusted3 Ethernet ports to the ethernet2 interface, which is bound to the Home zone.
494
Binds the Trusted2 and Trusted1 Ethernet ports to the ethernet1 interface, which is bound to the Work zone. Binds the Modem port to the serial interface, which you can bind as a backup interface to the Untrust zone. trust-untrust Defines the following port, interface, and zone bindings: Binds the Untrusted Ethernet port to the untrust interface, which is bound to the Untrust zone. Binds the Trusted1 through Trusted4 Ethernet ports to the trust interface, which is bound to the Trust zone. Binds the Modem port to the serial interface, which you can bind as a backup interface to the Untrust zone. This is the default port mode.
Warning: Setting the port mode removes any existing configurations on the device and requires a system reset.
495
496
pppoa through zone
This section lists and describes Juniper Networks NetScreen Command Line Interface (CLI) commands pppoa through zone. Note: As you execute CLI commands using the syntax descriptions in this section, you may find that certain commands and command features are unavailable on your NetScreen platform. A good example is the vsys command, which is available on a NetScreen-500 device, but not on a NetScreen-5XP device. Similarly, some command options are unavailable on certain platforms, as with the df-bit option of the vpn command. This option is available on a NetScreen-500, but not on a NetScreen-5XP.
497
pppoa through zone
pppoa
Description: Use the pppoa commands to configure PPPoA or to display current PPPoA configuration parameters. Point-to-Point Protocol over ATM (PPPoA) is usually used for PPP sessions that are to be terminated on a NetScreen device with an ADSL interface. PPPoA is primarily used for business class services as it does not require a desktop client (which is required for PPPoE termination).
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] pppoa [ name name_str ]
exec
exec pppoa [ name name_str ] { connect | disconnect }
get
get pppoa { all | name name_str }
set
set pppoa [ name name_str ] { authentication { CHAP | PAP | any } | auto-connect number | clear-on-disconnect | idle-interval number | interface [ interface ] | netmask [ mask ] | ppp {
pppoa through zone
lcp-echo-retries number | lcp-echo-timeout number } | static-ip | update-dhcpserver | username name_str password pswd_str }
unset
unset pppoa [ name name_str ] { authentication { CHAP | PAP } | auto-connect | clear-on-disconnect | idle-interval | interface | netmask | ppp { lcp-echo-retries | lcp-echo-timeout } | static-ip | update-dhcpserver | username }
499
pppoa through zone

all
get pppoa all
all Displays information for all PPPoA instances.
authentication
set pppoa authentication { CHAP | PAP | any } unset pppoa authentication { CHAP | PAP }
authentication Sets the authentication methods to CHAP, PAP, or any. (The any option gives preference to CHAP.) The default authentication is any (both CHAP and PAP). To set authentication to CHAP only, first execute unset pppoa authentication PAP.
auto-connect
set pppoa auto-connect number unset pppoa auto-connect
auto-connect Specifies the number of seconds that elapse before automatic re-initiation of a previously-closed connection occurs. Valid range is 0-10000. (0 to disable.) This is disabled by default.
clear-on-disconnect
set pppoa [ name name_str ] clear-on-disconnect
500
pppoa through zone
unset pppoa clear-on-disconnect

clear-on-disconnect Directs the NetScreen device to clear the IP address and the gateway for the interface once PPPoA disconnects. By default, this is disabled; that is, the IP address and gateway for the interface remain when PPPoA disconnects. If you do not specify name, ScreenOS sets the parameter for the default instance untrust.
connect | disconnect
exec pppoa [ name name_str ] { connect | disconnect }
connect disconnect Starts a PPPoA connection for an instance. (Each instance can be bound to an interface.) Takes down a PPPoA connection.
idle-interval
set pppoa idle-interval number unset pppoa idle-interval
idle-interval Sets the idle timeout, which is time elapsed (in minutes) before the NetScreen device terminates a PPPoA connection due to inactivity. Valid range is 0-10000 minutes. Specifying 0 turns off the idle timeout and the device never terminates the connection. The default is 30 minutes.
interface
set pppoa interface [ name_str ] unset pppoa interface
interface Specifies the ADSL interface for PPPoA encapsulation.
501
pppoa through zone
name
exec pppoa [ name name_str ] { connect | disconnect } get pppoa [ name name_str | all ] set pppoa [ name name_str ] ... unset pppoa [ name name_str ]
name Specifies or defines the name for a specific PPPoA instance. You can assign a username and password, interface, and other PPP/PPPoA parameters to the instance. If you do not specify name , ScreenOS automatically configures the parameters for the default instance untrust.
Example: The following commands define a name for a PPPoA instance. set set User name user1 and password 123456 PPPoA instance pppoa-user-1 bound to the ethernet2 interface pppoa name pppoa-user-1 username user1 password 123456 pppoa name pppoa-user-1 interface ethernet2
netmask
set pppoa netmask mask unset pppoa netmask
netmask Specifies a PPPoa subnet mask that the device assigns to the interface bound to the PPPoA instance (after establishment of the connection). The default netmask is 255.255.255.0. When it is necessary for two or more interfaces to have overlapping subnets, use the following command: set vrouter vrouter ignore-subnet-conflict
502
pppoa through zone
ppp
set pppoa ppp { ... } unset pppoa ppp { ... }
ppp Specifies PPP parameters. lcp-echo-retries the number of unacknowledged LCP Echo requests before connection is terminated. Valid range is 1-30. The default is 10. lcp-echo-timeout the time that elapses between transmission of two LCP Echo requests. Valid range is 1-1000 seconds. The default is 180 seconds.
static-ip
set pppoa static-ip unset pppoa static-ip
static-ip Specifies that your connection uses the static IP address assigned to your devices interface. This is disabled by default.
update-dhcpserver
set pppoa update-dhcpserver unset pppoa update-dhcpserver
update-dhcpserver Specifies that the DHCP server (on the device) automatically updates DNS parameters received through the PPPoA connection. This is enabled by default.
username
set pppoa username name_str password pswd_str
username Sets the user name and password for authentication.
503
pppoa through zone
pppoe
Description: Use the pppoe commands to configure PPPoE or to display current PPPoE configuration parameters. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) is a protocol that allows the members of an Ethernet LAN to make individual PPP connections with their ISP by encapsulating the IP packet within the PPP payload, which is encapsulated inside the PPPoE payload. Some NetScreen devices support PPPoE, which allows them to operate compatibly on DSL, Ethernet Direct, and cable networks run by ISPs that use PPPoE to give their clients Internet access.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] pppoe [ name name_str ]
exec
exec pppoe [ name name_str ] { connect | disconnect }
get
get pppoe [ all | name name_str | id id_num [ configuration | statistics ] ]
504
pppoa through zone
set
set pppoe [ name name_str ] { ac name_str | authentication { CHAP | PAP | any } | auto-connect number | clear-on-disconnect | default-route-metric number | enable | idle-interval number | interface [ name_str ] | netmask mask | ppp { lcp-echo-retries number | lcp-echo-timeout number } | service name_str | static-ip | update-dhcpserver | username name_str password pswd_str }
unset
unset pppoe [ name name_str ] { ac | authentication { CHAP | PAP } | auto-connect | clear-on-disconnect | default-route-metric | enable | idle-interval |
505
pppoa through zone
interface | netmask | ppp { lcp-echo-retries | lcp-echo-timeout } | service | static-ip | update-dhcpserver | username }

ac
set pppoe ac name_str unset pppoe ac
ac Allows the interface to connect only to the specified AC (access concentrator).
all
get pppoe all
all Displays information for all PPPoE instances.
506
pppoa through zone
authentication
set pppoe authentication { CHAP | PAP | any } unset pppoe authentication { CHAP | PAP }
authentication Sets the authentication methods to CHAP, PAP, or any. (The any option gives preference to CHAP.) The default of authentication is any (both CHAP and PAP). To set authentication to CHAP only, first execute unset pppoe authentication PAP.
auto-connect
set pppoe auto-connect number unset pppoe auto-connect
auto-connect Specifies the number of seconds that elapse before automatic re-initiation of a previously-closed connection occurs. Valid range is 0-10000. (0 to disable.)
clear-on-disconnect
set pppoe [ name name_str ] clear-on-disconnect unset pppoe clear-on-disconnect
clear-on-disconnect Directs the NetScreen device to clear the IP address and the gateway for the interface once PPPoE disconnects. By default, this is disabled; that is, the IP address and gateway for the interface remain when PPPoE disconnects. If you do not specify name, ScreenOS sets the parameter for the default instance untrust.
cluster
clear cluster pppoe
507
pppoa through zone
configuration
get pppoe [ name name_str ] configuration
configuration Displays the configuration options. If you do not specify name, ScreenOS displays the parameters for the default instance untrust.
connect | disconnect
exec pppoe [ name name_str ] { connect | disconnect }
connect disconnect Starts a PPPoE connection for an instance. (Each instance can be bound to an interface.) Takes down a PPPoE connection.
default-route-metric
set pppoe default-route-metric number unset pppoe default-route-metric
default-route-metric Sets the metric for the default route for the current instance.
enable
set pppoe [ name name_str ] enable unset pppoe [ name name_str ] enable
enable Enables or disables a PPPoE instance, without removing the object that defines the instance. This allows you to temporarily disable the instance, and enable it later without redefining it.
508
pppoa through zone
idle-interval
set pppoe idle-interval number unset pppoe idle-interval
idle-interval Sets the idle timeout, which is time elapsed (in minutes) before the NetScreen device terminates a PPPoE connection due to inactivity. Specifying 0 turns off the idle timeout and the device never terminates the connection.
id
get pppoe id id_num
id Specifies a PPPoE instance by ID number.
interface
set pppoe interface [ name_str ] unset pppoe interface
interface Specifies the interface for PPPoE encapsulation.
name
exec pppoe [ name name_str ] { connect | disconnect } get pppoe [ name name_str | all ] set pppoe [ name name_str ] ... unset pppoe [ name name_str ]
name Specifies or defines the name for a specific PPPoE instance. You can assign a username and password, interface, and other PPP/PPPoE parameters to the instance. If you do not specify name , ScreenOS automatically configures the parameters for the default instance untrust.
509
pppoa through zone
Example: The following commands define a name for a PPPoE instance. set set User name user1 and password 123456 PPPoE instance pppoe-user-1 bound to the ethernet2 interface pppoe name pppoe-user-1 username user1 password 123456 pppoe name pppoe-user-1 interface ethernet2
netmask
set pppoe netmask mask unset pppoe netmask
netmask Specifies a PPPoE subnet mask that the device assigns to the interface bound to the PPPoE instance (after establishment of the connection). When it is necessary for two or more interfaces to have overlapping subnets, use the following command: set vrouter vrouter ignore-subnet-conflict
ppp
set pppoe ppp { ... } unset pppoe ppp { ... }
ppp Specifies PPP parameters. lcp-echo-retries the number of unacknowledged Lcp Echo requests before connection is terminated. Valid range is 1-30. lcp-echo-timeout the time that elapses between transmission of two Lcp Echo requests. Valid range is 1-1000 seconds.
510
pppoa through zone
service
set pppoe service name_str unset pppoe service
service Allows only the specified service (name_str). This feature uses service tags to enable a PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) server to offer PPPoE clients a selection of services during call setup. The user can choose an offered service, and the NetScreen device provides the service when the PPPoE session becomes active. This allows service providers to offer services and to charge customers according to the service chosen.
static-ip
set pppoe static-ip unset pppoe static-ip
static-ip Specifies that your connection uses the IP address assigned to your devices interface.
statistics
get pppoe statistics
statistics Specifies the statistics information.
update-dhcpserver
set pppoe update-dhcpserver unset pppoe update-dhcpserver
update-dhcpserver Specifies that the DHCP server (on the device) automatically updates DNS parameters received through the PPPoE connection.
511
pppoa through zone
user-name
set pppoe username name_str password pswd_str
username Sets the user name and password.
Example: The following command sets the username to Phred, and Phreds password to !@%)&&: set pppoe username Phred password !@%)&&
Defaults
The defaults for this command are as follows. Disabled Authentication method any Timeout 30 minutes auto-connect setting disabled lcp-echo-timeout value 180 seconds retries value 10 netmask value 255.255.255.255 update-dhcpserver setting enabled static-ip setting disabled clear-on-disconnect setting disabled
512
pppoa through zone
proxy-id
Description: Use the proxy-id commands to set device behavior for processing proxy ID updates. A proxy ID is a three-part tuple consisting of local IP address, remote IP address, and service. The proxy ID for both peers must match, which means that the service specified in the proxy ID for both peers must be the same, and the local IP address specified for one peer must be the same as the remote IP address specified for the other peer. The peers exchange proxy IDs during IKE Phase 2 negotiations. During the startup process, the NetScreen device loads its configuration file. While loading this file, the NetScreen device reads the policies before the routes. Because of this, routing information that involves MIPs or VIPs can result in the NetScreen device deriving incorrect proxy-IDs from the policy information in the file. To resolve this problem, you can use the unset proxy-id manual-update command to change the default behavior of the device to update proxy IDs after the configuration file finishes loading. However, if you have a large number of policies, the update procedure can take a very long time to complete. By default, the device behavior does not update proxy IDs automatically during startup. Instead, you must manually update proxy IDs by entering the exec proxy-id update command. For VPN traffic that uses source or destination address translation, NetScreen recommends either of the following approaches: Use routing-based VPNs and separate the VPN and its manually defined proxy ID from the policy that enforces address translation. Use policy-based VPNs and assign proxy IDs to the VPN tunnels referenced by the policies rather than allow the NetScreen device to automatically derive the proxy IDs from the policies.
Syntax
exec
exec proxy-id update
get
get proxy-id
513
pppoa through zone
set
set proxy-id manual-update
unset
unset proxy-id manual-update

update
exec proxy-id update
update Instructs the NetScreen device to update all VPN proxy IDs.
manual-update
set proxy-id manual-update unset proxy-id manual-update
manual-update When set, instructs the NetScreen device to update all VPN proxy IDs only in response to the exec proxy-id update command. When unset, instructs the NetScreen device to update the proxy IDs automatically during route change.
Defaults
By default, the NetScreen device does not update proxy IDs automatically.
514
pppoa through zone
reset
Description: Use the reset command to restart the NetScreen device.
Syntax
reset [ no-prompt | save-config { no | yes } [ no-prompt ] ]

no-prompt
reset no-prompt
no-prompt Indicates no confirmation.
save-config
reset save-config [ no | yes ] [ no-prompt ]
save-config no Directs the NetScreen device to not save the current configuration before resetting. yes Directs the NetScreen device to save the current configuration before resetting. no-prompt Does not display a confirmation prompt.
515
pppoa through zone
RIP Commands
Description: Use the rip context to begin configuring Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for a NetScreen virtual router.
Context Initiation
Initiating the rip context can take up to four steps. 1. Enter the vrouter context by executing the set vrouter command. set vrouter vrouter For example: 2. 3. set vrouter trust-vr Enter the rip context by executing the set protocol rip command. ns(trust-vr)-> set protocol rip Enable RIP (it is disabled by default). ns(trust-vr/rip)-> set enable
RIP Command List

The following commands are executable in the rip context.
advertise-def-route Use the advertise-def-route commands to advertise the default route (0.0.0.0/0) of the current virtual router in the RIP routing domain. Every virtual router may have a default route entry, which matches every destination. (Any entry with a more specific prefix overrides the default route entry.) Command options: get, set, unset Use the alt-route commands to set the maximum number of alternate routes in the RIP database for a network prefix. Command options: set, unset
alt-route
516
pppoa through zone
config database default-metric
Use the config command to display all commands executed to configure the RIP routing instance. Command options: get Use the database command to display the RIP database in the virtual router. Command options: get Use the default-metric commands to set the RIP metric for redistributed routes. The default value is 10. Command options: set, unset Use the enable commands to enable or disable RIP in the virtual router. Command options: set, unset Use the flush-timer commands to configure the number of seconds that elapse before the virtual router automatically removes an invalidated route. The default is 120 seconds. Command options: set, unset Displays all routes currently contained in the RIP garbage list. This list contains routes automatically removed from the routing table because the device did not obtain the routes in the time interval specified by the Invalid Timer setting. When the Flush Timer interval elapses for an entry, the device purges the entry from the garbage list. Command options: get Use the hold-timer commands to configure the number of seconds that elapse before the virtual router updates the routing table when RIP detects a route with a high metric. Command options: set, unset Use the interface command to display all RIP interfaces in the virtual router. Command options: get Use the invalid-timer commands to configure the number of seconds that elapse after a neighbor stops advertising a route before the route becomes invalid. The default is 180 seconds. Command options: set, unset Use the max-neighbor-count commands to set the maximum number of RIP neighbors allowed. The default is 16. Command options: set, unset
enable flush-timer
garbage-list
hold-timer
interface invalid-timer
max-neighbor-count
517
pppoa through zone
neighbors no-source-validation
Use the neighbors command to display the status of RIP neighbors. Command options: get Use the no-source-validation commands to accept responses from RIP neighbors in other subnets or to reject such responses. The default action is to reject the responses. Command options: set, unset Use the poll-timer commands to set the interval and number of times that triggered requests are sent over the demand circuit to check if the other end of the demand circuit has come up. Command options: set, unset Use the redistribute commands to import known routes from a router running a different protocol into the current routing instance. You can import the following types of routes: Manually created (static) routes BGP routes OSPF routes Routes created by an external router, due to an interface with an IP address becoming available Routes imported from other virtual routes Command options: set, unset
poll-timer
redistribute
Use the reject-default-route commands to cause RIP to reject a default route learned from a neighbor. Command options: get, set, unset Use the retransmit-timer commands to set the interval and number of times that triggered messages waiting for acknowledgement or a response are retransmitted over the demand circuit. Command options: set, unset Use the route-map commands to filter routes and offset the metric to a RIP route matrix. Command options: get, set, unset Use the routes-redistribute command to display redistributed routes. Command options: get
retransmit-timer
route-map routes-redistribute
518
pppoa through zone
rules-redistribute summary summary-ip threshold-update
Use the rules-redistribute command to display redistribution rules. Command options: get Use the summary command to display summary routes. Command options: get Use the summary-ip command to create a summary route that corresponds to a summary range. Command options: set, unset Use the threshold-update commands to set the maximum number of routing packets allowed per update interval. Command options: set, unset Use the timer command to display RIP timers. Command options: get Use the trusted-neighbors commands to set an access list that defines RIP neighbors. Command options: get, set, unset Use the update-timer commands to set the interval, in seconds, when route updates are issued to RIP neighbors. Command options: set, unset Use the update-threshold command to display the number of routing packets per update interval. Command options: get Use the version command to set the RIP protocol version for the virtual router. Command options: set, unset
timer trusted-neighbors update-timer
update-threshold version
519
pppoa through zone
advertise-def-route
Description: Use the advertise-def-route commands to advertise the default route (0.0.0.0/0) of the current virtual router. Every router might have a default route entry, which matches every destination. (Any entry with a more specific prefix overrides the default route entry.) Before you can execute the advertise-def-route commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get advertise-def-route
set
set advertise-def-route [ always ] { metric number | preserve-metric }
unset
520
pppoa through zone

always
set advertise-def-route always ...
always Directs the routing instance to advertise the default route under all conditions, even if there is no default route in the routing table. If you specify always, you must also specify the metric parameter; you can optionally specify the preserve-metric parameter. If you do not specify always, you must specify either the metric or preserve-metric option.
metric
set advertise-def-route always metric number
metric Specifies the metric (cost), which indicates the overhead associated with the default route. Enter a number between 1 and 15. You must specify this parameter if you specify the always option.
preserve-metric
set advertise-def-route ... [ preserve-metric ]
preserve-metric Instructs the virtual router to use the original (source) routes metric for advertisement when the route is redistributed. When you execute a preserve-metric command, in conjunction with a value specified by the metric command, the preserve-metric parameter takes precedence over the metric value when a route is redistributed.
521
pppoa through zone
alt-route
Description: Use the alt-route commands to set the maximum number of alternate routes that the NetScreen device maintains in the RIP database for a network prefix. Before you can execute the alt-route commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set alt-route number
unset
unset alt-route

number
set alt-route number
number Sets the maximum number of alternate routes in the RIP database for a network prefix. Enter a value between 0 and 3. The default value is 0, which means that there are no alternate routes in the database for a network prefix.
522
pppoa through zone
config
Description: Use the config command to display all commands executed to configure the RIP local virtual router. Before you can execute the config command, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get config

None.
523
pppoa through zone
database
Description: Use the database command to display the RIP database in the local virtual router. Before you can execute the database command, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get database [ prefix ip_addr/mask ]

prefix
get database prefix ip_addr/mask
prefix Shows specific RIP entries in detail.
524
pppoa through zone
default-metric
Description: Use the default-metric commands to set the RIP metric for redistributed routes. Before you can execute the default-metric commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set default-metric number
unset
unset default-metric

Variable Parameter
set default-metric number
number The metric for the routes redistributed into RIP. This metric value can be from 1 to 15.
525
pppoa through zone
enable
Description: Use the enable commands to enable or disable RIP from the current virtual router. Before you can execute the enable commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set enable
unset
unset enable

None.
526
pppoa through zone
flush-timer
Description: Use the flush-timer commands to configure the time that elapses before an invalid route is removed. Before you can execute the flush-timer commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set flush-timer number
unset
unset flush-timer

Variable Parameter
set flush-timer number
number The number of seconds that elapses before an invalid route is removed. This value must be greater than the current update-timer value. The default value is 120 seconds.
527
pppoa through zone
garbage-list
Description: Use the garbage-list commands to display all routes currently contained in the RIP garbage list. The garbage list contains routes automatically removed from the routing table because the device did not obtain the routes in the time interval specified by the Invalid Timer setting. When the Flush Timer interval elapses for an entry, the device automatically purges the entry from the garbage list. Before you can execute the garbage-list commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get garbage-list

None.
528
pppoa through zone
hold-timer
Description: Use the hold-timer commands to configure the time that elapses before the virtual router makes any updates into the routing table whenever RIP detects unreachable routes and higher metric routes. This minimizes the effects of route flapping to the routing table. Before you can execute the hold-timer commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set hold-timer number
unset
unset hold-timer

Variable Parameter
set hold-timer number
number The number of seconds that elapses before the virtual router updates the routing table when RIP detects a route with a high metric. The minimum value should be three times the update-timer value. The sum of the update-timer and the hold-timer values should not exceed the flush-timer value. The default value is 90 seconds.
529
pppoa through zone
interface
Description: Use the interface command to display all RIP interfaces on the current virtual router. Before you can execute the interface command, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get interface

None.
530
pppoa through zone
invalid-timer
Description: Use the invalid-timer commands to configure the time that elapses after a neighbor stops advertising a route before the route becomes invalid. Before you can execute the invalid-timer commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set invalid-timer number
unset
unset invalid-timer

Variable Parameter
set invalid-timer number
number The number of seconds after a neighbor stops advertising a route that the route becomes invalid. This value must be greater than the current update-timer value. The default value is 180 seconds.
531
pppoa through zone
max-neighbor-count
Description: Use the max-neighbor-count commands to set the maximum number of RIP neighbors, which belong to the specified virtual router, allowed on an interface. Before you can execute the max-neighbor-count commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set max-neighbor-count number
unset
unset max-neighbor-count

Variable Parameter
set max-neighbor-count number
number The maximum number of RIP neighbors allowed. This value can be from one to the maximum value possible for your NetScreen device. The default is platform dependent. Refer to the datasheet for the maximum limit for a particular device.
532
pppoa through zone
neighbors
Description: Use the neighbors command to display the status of all RIP neighbors. Before you can execute the neighbors command, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get neighbors

None.
533
pppoa through zone
no-source-validation
Description: Use the no-source-validation commands to accept responses from RIP neighbors in different subnets. If you do not set this switch, the virtual router does not process responses from neighbors in other subnets. Before you can execute the no-source-validation commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set no-source-validation
unset
unset no-source-validation

None.
534
pppoa through zone
poll-timer
Description: Use the poll-timer commands to configure the interval at which triggered requests are sent over a demand circuit to check if the other end of the circuit has come up. Before you can execute the poll-timer commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set poll-timer number [ retry-count number ]
unset
unset poll-timer

Variable Parameter
set poll-timer number
number The interval, in number of seconds, at which triggered requests are sent over the demand circuit to check if the other end of the circuit has come up. The default value is 180 seconds (3 minutes).
535
pppoa through zone
retry-count
set poll-timer number retry-count number
retry-count The number of times that the triggered requests are sent before the demand circuit is declared to be down. The default is 0, which means that the triggered requests are sent indefinitely.
536
pppoa through zone
redistribute
Description: Use the redistribute commands to import known routes from a router running a different protocol into the current RIP routing instance. You can import the following types of routes: Manually-created routes (static) BGP routes (bgp) OSPF routes (ospf) Directly-connected interface with an IP address assigned to it (connected) Routes that have already been imported (imported)
Before you can execute the redistribute commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get routes-redistribute get rules-redistribute
set
set redistribute route-map name_str protocol { bgp | connected | imported | ospf | static }
unset
unset redistribute route-map name_str protocol { bgp | connected | imported | ospf | static }
537
pppoa through zone

protocol
set redistribute route-map name_str protocol { ... }
protocol Specifies the routing protocol type. The route map can use the protocol type to the determine whether to permit or deny a route. bgp specifies that the route map performs an action only on BGP routes in the subnetwork. connected specifies that the route map performs an action only on routes sent from an external router that has at least one interface with an IP address assigned to it. imported specifies that the route map performs an action only on imported routes in the subnetwork. ospf specifies that the route map performs an action only on OSPF routes in the subnetwork. static specifies that the route map performs an action only on static routes in the subnetwork.
route-map
set redistribute route-map name_str protocol { ... }
route-map Identifies the route map that specifies the routes to be imported.
Example: The following command redistributes a route that originated from a BGP routing domain into the current RIP routing instance: ns(trust-vr/rip)-> set redistribute route-map map1 protocol bgp
538
pppoa through zone
Description: Use the reject-default-route commands to cause RIP to reject default routes learned from a neighbor in the RIP domain. Before you can execute the reject-default-route commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
set
unset

None.
539
pppoa through zone
retransmit-timer
Description: Use the retransmit-timer commands to configure the interval at which triggered responses are retransmitted over a demand circuit. Before you can execute the retransmit-timer commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set retransmit-timer number [ retry-count number ]
unset
unset retransmit-timer

Variable Parameter
set retransmit-timer number
number The interval, in number of seconds, at which triggered responses are retransmitted over a demand circuit. The default is 5 seconds.
540
pppoa through zone
retry-count
set retransmit-timer number retry-count number
retry-count The number of times any response is retransmitted before the demand circuit is placed into POLL state. The default is 10 times.
541
pppoa through zone
route-map
Description: Use the route-map commands to filter incoming or outgoing routes. Before you can execute the route-map commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get route-map
set
set route-map name_str { in | out }
unset
set route-map name_str { in | out }

Variable Parameter
set route-map name_str
name_str The name of the route map to filter routes.
in
set route-map name_str in
in Specifies the route map is applied to routes to be learned by RIP.
542
pppoa through zone
out
set route-map name_str out
out Specifies the route map is applied to routes to be advertised by RIP.
Example: The following command applies the route map map1 to routes to be advertised by RIP: ns(trust-vr/rip)-> set route-map map1 out
543
pppoa through zone
routes-redistribute
Description: Use the routes-redistribute command to display details about routes imported from other protocols into RIP. Before you can execute the routes-redistribute command, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get routes-redistribute

None.
544
pppoa through zone
rules-redistribute
Description: Use the rules-redistribute command to display conditions set for routes imported from other protocols into RIP. Before you can execute the rules-redistribute command, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get rules-redistribute

None.
545
pppoa through zone
summary
Description: Use the summary command to display summary routes configured with the summary-ip command. Before you can execute the summary command, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get summary

None.
546
pppoa through zone
summary-ip
Description: Use the summary-ip commands to summarize the routes that are advertised by RIP. You enable the advertising of summary routes on a per-interface basis. Before you can execute the summary-ip commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set summary-ip ip_addr/mask [ metric number ]
unset
unset summary-ip ip_addr/mask

Variable Parameter
set summary-ip ip_addr/mask
ip_addr/mask The summary range that encompasses constituent routes.
metric
set summary-ip ip_addr/mask [ metric number ]
metric Specifies the metric for the summary route. If no metric is specified, the largest metric for a constituent route is used.
547
pppoa through zone
threshold-update
Description: Use the threshold-update commands to set the maximum number of routing packets received and processed per update interval, per neighbor. Before you can execute the threshold-update commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set threshold-update number
unset
unset threshold-update

Variable Parameter
set threshold-update number
number The maximum number of routing packets allowed per update interval. This value must be greater than zero.
548
pppoa through zone
timer
Description: Use the timer command to display information about various RIP timers. Before you can execute the timer command, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get timer

None.
549
pppoa through zone
trusted-neighbors
Description: Use the trusted-neighbors commands to specify an access list that defines allowed RIP neighbors. Before you can execute the trusted-neighbors commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get trusted-neighbors
set
set trusted-neighbors id_num
unset
unset trusted-neighbors

Variable Parameter
set trusted-neighbors id_num
id_num The number of the access list that defines the allowed RIP neighbors.
550
pppoa through zone
update-timer
Description: Use the update-timer commands to set the interval that RIP sends route updates to neighbors. Before you can execute the update-timer commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set update-timer number
unset
unset update-timer

Variable Parameter
set update-timer number
number The interval, in seconds, that RIP sends route updates to neighbors. This value must be at least one, and no greater than the current invalid-timer value. The default is 30 seconds.
551
pppoa through zone
update-threshold
Description: Use the update-threshold command to display the number of routing packets per update interval. Before you can execute the update-threshold command, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
get
get update-threshold

None.
552
pppoa through zone
version
Description: Use the version commands to set the RIP protocol version in the virtual router. Before you can execute the version commands, you must initiate the rip context. (See Context Initiation on page 516.)
Syntax
set
set version { v1 | v2 }
unset
unset version

v1 | v2
set version v1 | v2
v1 | v2 Sets the RIP protocol version in the virtual router and on all RIP interfaces to either version 1 or version 2. The default is version 2. You can override the protocol version on a per-interface basis.
553
pppoa through zone
route
Description: Use the route commands to display entries in the static route table. The get route command displays: The IP address, netmask, interface, gateway, protocol, preference, metric, and owner vsys The protocol value can be any of the following: C (Connected) S (Static) A (Auto Exported) I (Imported; that is, route imported from another virtual router) iB (internal BGP) eB (external BGP) H (host) O (OSPF) E1 (OSPF external type 1) E2 (OSPF external type 2)
Use the get route command to see if the NetScreen device has a route to the IP address on the correct interface.
Syntax
get
get route [ id id_num | ip [ ip_addr ] | prefix ip_addr/mask | protocol { bgp | connected | imported | ospf | rip | static } | summary ]
pppoa through zone

id
get route id id_num
id Displays a specific route for the ID number id_num.
Example: The following command displays the route information for a route with ID number 477: get route id 477
ip
get route ip ip_addr
ip Displays a specific route for the target IP address (ip_addr).
Example: The following command displays the route information to a machine with the IP address 172.16.60.1: get route ip 172.16.60.1
prefix
get route prefix ip_addr/mask
prefix Displays routes within a specified subnet (ip_addr/mask).
Example: The following command displays the routes within the subnet 1.1.1.1/24: get route prefix 1.1.1.1/24
555
pppoa through zone
protocol
get route protocol { bgp | connected | imported | ospf | rip | static }
protocol Specifies the routing protocol, and directs the NetScreen device to display the routes derived from that protocol. bgp Directs the device to display BGP routes. connected Directs the device to display only routes sent from an external router that has at least one interface with an IP address assigned to it. imported Directs the device to display imported routes. rip Directs the device to display RIP routes. ospf Directs the device to display only OSPF routes. static Directs the device to display only static routes.
summary
get route summary
summary Displays summary information, including number of routes, for each protocol.
Defaults
The get route command displays all entries in the route table unless a particular target IP address is specified.
556
pppoa through zone
sa
Description: Use the sa commands to display active or inactive security associations (SAs) or to clear a specified SA. A security association (SA) is a unidirectional agreement between VPN participants regarding the methods and parameters to use while securing a communication channel. Full bidirectional communication requires at least two SAs, one for each direction. An SA groups together the following components for securing communications: Security algorithms and keys Protocol mode (transport or tunnel) Key management method (Manual Key or AutoKey IKE) SA lifetime
For outbound VPN traffic, a security policy invokes the SA associated with the VPN tunnel. For inbound traffic, the NetScreen device looks up the SA by using the following triplet: destination IP, security protocol (AH or ESP), and security parameter index (SPI) value, which are sent to the peer in the first message of a Phase 1 IKE exchange.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] sa id_num
get
get sa [ id id_num | [ active | inactive ] stat ]
557
pppoa through zone

Variable Parameter
clear [ cluster ] sa id_num
id_num Specifies a security association (SA) ID number.
cluster
clear cluster sa id_num
id
get sa id id_num
id Displays an SA entry for the specified ID number.
stat
get sa [ ... ] stat
stat Shows the SA statistics for the device. Displays these statistics for all incoming or outgoing SA pairs: Fragment: The total number of fragmented incoming and outgoing packets. Auth-fail: The total number of packets for which authentication has failed. Other: The total number of miscellaneous internal error conditions other than those listed in the auth-fail category. Total Bytes: The amount of active incoming and outgoing traffic
558
pppoa through zone
sa-statistics
Description: Use the sa-statistics command to clear all statistical information (such as the number of fragmentations and total bytes through the tunnel) in a security association (SA) for an AutoKey IKE VPN tunnel.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] sa-statistics [ id id_num ]

cluster
clear cluster sa-statistics id id_num
cluster If the NetScreen device is in a high availability (HA) configuration, propagates the clear operation to all other devices in the NetScreen Redundancy Protocol (NSRP) cluster.
id
clear [ cluster ] sa-statistics id id_num
id id_num Clears the statistics for a particular SA.
Example: The following command clears the SA statistics for SA 2: clear sa-statistics id 2
559
pppoa through zone
save
Description: Use the save commands to save ScreenOS images to a NetScreen device, and device configuration settings to or from a NetScreen device. You can also use this command to save the authentication certificate to the NetScreen device for authenticating ScreenOS images and attack object database downloads for Deep Inspection.
Syntax
save
save
save config
save config [ all-virtual-system | to { flash | slot1 filename | tftp ip_addr filename } [ merge ] | from { flash | slot1 filename | tftp ip_addr filename [ merge | to { flash [ from interface ] |
pppoa through zone
last-known-good | slot1 filename | tftp ip_addr filename [ from interface ] } [ from interface ] } ]
save image-key
save image-key tftp ip_addr filename
save software
save software from { flash | slot1 filename | tftp ip_addr filename } to { flash | slot1 filename | tftp ip_addr filename } [ from interface ]
save attack-db
save attack-db from tftp ip_addr filename to flash [ from interface ]
561
pppoa through zone

all-virtual-system
save config all-virtual-system
all-virtual-system Saves all virtual system configurations.
attack-db
save attack-db from tftp ip_addr filename to flash [ from interface ]
attack-db Saves the attack database to the NetScreen device.
flash
save save save save
flash
config from { ... } to flash [ from interface ] config from flash to { ... } [ from interface ] software from flash to { ... } [ from interface ] software from { ... } flash to [ from interface ]
Saves from (or to) flash memory. The from interface option specifies the source interface if you specify TFTP.
Example: The following command saves the current configuration from flash memory to a file (output.txt) on a TFTP server (172.16.10.10): save config from flash to tftp 172.16.10.10 output.txt
from { ... } to
save config from { ... } to { ... } save software from { ... } to { ... }
from Saves from the specified source.
562
pppoa through zone
to
Saves to the specified destination.
Example: The following command saves the current configuration from flash memory to a file (output.txt) on a TFTP server (IP address 172.16.10.10): save config from flash to tftp 172.16.10.10 output.txt
563
pppoa through zone
image-key
save image-key from tftp ip_addr filename
image-key Saves the authentication certificate (imagekey.cer) to the NetScreen device. After you save this certificate onto the NetScreen device, the device uses it to verify the integrity of ScreenOS images when you save them to the device and when it reboots. The NetScreen device also uses this certificate to verify the integrity of Deep Inspection (DI) attack object database files during the download process. The authentication certificate is available on the NetScreen Production Documentation CD-ROM that ships with each NetScreen device. It is also available online at the Juniper Networks Web site. Log in at www.juniper.net/support/, click ScreenOS Software in the Download Software section, and click Download the Authentication Certificate at the top of the page. Saving this certificate onto a NetScreen device automatically causes the device to perform authentication checks on ScreenOS images and DI attack object database downloads. To stop these checks, you must remove the authentication certificate, using the delete crypto auth-key command.
last-known-good
save config to last-known-good
last-known-good Saves the current configuration to flash memory as the LKG (last-known-good) configuration. The NetScreen device can revert to this LKG file by doing a configuration rollback. The NetScreen device automatically names the LKG file $LKG$.cfg. You cannot rename the LKG file or give it a different name upon saving it.
merge
save config from { ... } merge [ from interface ]
merge Merges the saved configuration with the current configuration. The from interface option specifies the source interface.
Example: The following command merges the current configuration with the configuration in a file (input.txt) on a TFTP server (IP address 172.16.10.10): save config from tftp 172.16.10.10 input.txt merge
pppoa through zone
slot1
save save save save
slot1
config from { ... } to slot1 [ ... ] config from slot1 to { ... } software from slot1 to { ... } software from { ... } to slot1 [ ... ]
Saves from (or to) a file in the memory card slot.
Example: The following commands saves the current configuration from a file (input.txt) in the slot1 memory card to flash memory: save config from slot1 input.txt to flash
tftp
save config from tftp filename to { ... } [ from interface ] save image-key tftp ip_addr filename save software from tftp filename to { ... } [ from interface ]
tftp Saves from (or to) a file on a TFTP server.
Example: The following command saves an authentication certificate onto a NetScreen device from a file named imagekey.cer on a TFTP server at 10.10.1.2: save image-key tftp 10.10.1.2 nskey.cer
565
pppoa through zone
scheduler
Description: Use the scheduler commands to create or modify a schedule, or to display the settings in a schedule. A schedule is a configurable object that you can use to define when policies are in effect. NetScreen devices use schedules to enforce the policies at specified times or intervals. Through the application of schedules, you can control network traffic flow and enforce network security.
Syntax
get
get scheduler [ name name_str | once | recurrent ]
set
set scheduler name_str [ once start date time stop date time [ comment string ] | recurrent { monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday | friday | saturday | sunday start time stop time } [ start time stop time ] [ comment string ] ]
unset
unset scheduler name_str
566
pppoa through zone

name
get scheduler name name_str
name name_str Defines a name for the schedule.
once
get scheduler once set scheduler name_str once start date time stop date time [ ... ]
once Apply the schedule once, starting on the day, month, year, hour, and minute defined, and stopping on the month, day, year, hour, and minute defined.
recurrent
get scheduler recurrent set scheduler name_str recurrent { ... } [ ... ]
recurrent Directs the NetScreen device to repeat the schedule according to the defined day of the week, hour, and minutes. monday Repeats every Monday. tuesday Repeat every Tuesday. wednesday Repeat every Wednesday. thursday Repeat every Thursday. friday Repeat every Friday. saturday Repeat every Saturday. sunday Repeat every Sunday.
567
pppoa through zone
- start Defines when to start the schedule. - stop Defines when to stop the schedule. - comment Defines a descriptive character string.
start | stop
set scheduler name_str once start date time stop date time [ ... ] set scheduler name_str recurrent { ... } start time stop time [ ... ]
start | stop Defines the day, month, and year (date) in USA format (mm/dd/yyyy). Defines the hour and minutes (time) in the 24-hour clock format (hh:mm).
Examples: The following command creates a schedule definition named mytime which starts on 1/10/2003 at 11:00 AM and ends on 2/12/2003 at 7:00 PM: set scheduler mytime once start 1/10/2003 11:00 stop 2/12/2003 19:00 The following command creates a schedule definition named weekend which starts at 8:00 AM and ends at 5:00 PM and repeats every Saturday and Sunday: set scheduler weekend recurrent saturday start 8:00 stop 17:00 set scheduler weekend recurrent sunday start 8:00 stop 17:00
568
pppoa through zone
scp
Description: Use the scp commands to configure the Secure Copy (SCP) client/server on NetScreen devices. SCP provides a way of transferring files to or from the NetScreen device using the SSH protocol. Note: It is possible to initiate file transfer from an external host, not from the NetScreen device itself.
Syntax
get
get scp
set
set scp enable
unset
unset scp enable

enable
set scp enable unset scp enable
enable Enables the Secure Copy (SCP) task. When SCP is enabled, the SSH task is activated if it is not already active.
569
pppoa through zone
service
Description: Use the service commands to create custom service definitions, modify existing service definitions, or display the current entries in the service definition list. Use service definitions in policies to specify how the NetScreen device provides a service during a secure session. For example, a custom service definition might permit sessions using TCP protocol to exchange traffic between specified source and destination ports. Any policy that uses this definition conforms to these specifications.
Syntax
get
get service [ svc_name | group [ name_str ] | pre-defined | timeout { other | tcp | udp } [ port number1 [ number2 ] ] | user ]
set
set service svc_name { + { icmp type number code number | ptcl_num | tcp | udp { src-port number-number dst-port number-number } ms-rpc uuid UUID_string | sun-rpc { program id_num1-id_num2 } } |
570
pppoa through zone
protocol { { ptcl_num | tcp | udp } [ src-port number-number ] [ dst-port number-number [ timeout { number | never } ] ] icmp type number code number | ms-rpc { uuid UUID_string [ timeout { number | never } ] } | sun-rpc { program id_num1-id_num2} [ timeout { number | never } ] } | timeout { number | never } }
unset
unset service svc_name [ timeout ]

Variable Parameters
get service svc_name set service svc_name [ ... ] unset service svc_name svc_name
Identifies a service by name.
+
set service svc_name + { ... }
+ Appends a service entry to the custom services list.
571
pppoa through zone
pre-defined
get service pre-defined
pre-defined Displays all the pre-defined services.
protocol
set service svc_name protocol { ... } [ ... ]
protocol Defines the service by IP protocol. Defines a protocol for the specified service. ptcl_num specifies the protocol by protocol number. icmp specifies a ICMP-based service. - type identifies the ICMP message type, for example, Destination Unreachable. - code identifies a specific message from a ICMP message type group. For example, from the Destination Unreachable type group, there are various more specific messages identified by code such as Net Unreachable, Host Unreachable, Protocol Unreachable, and so on. ms-rpc specifies a Microsoft RPC service. - uuid specifies the interface (16 bytes). sun-rpc specifies a Sun RPC service - program specifies the program (32 bit integer). tcp specifies a TCP-based service. udp specifies a UDP-based service.
Example: The following command sets a service named ipsec that uses protocol 50: set service ipsec protocol 50
572
pppoa through zone
src-port | dst-port
set service svc_name protocol { ... } [ src-port number-number ] [ dst-port number-number ]
src-port dst-port Defines a range of source port numbers valid for the service and protocol. Defines a range of destination port numbers valid for the service and protocol.
Example: The following command sets a service named test1 that uses destination TCP port 1001: set service test1 protocol tcp src-port 0-65535 dst-port 1001-1001
timeout
get service timeout { other | tcp | udp } [ port number1 [ number2 ] ] set service svc_name timeout { number | never } unset service svc_name timeout
timeout Sets or displays the timeout value for session sessions created on a port for TCP, UDP, or other protocols. You can specify session timeout value (number) in minutes or as never.
Example1: The following command is a service named telnet with a timeout value of 10 minutes: set service telnet timeout 10 Example2: The following command displays timeouts for UDP from port 1720 to 1800: get service timeout udp port 1720 1800
user
get service user
user Displays all user-defined services.
573
pppoa through zone
Defaults
The default timeout for TCP connections is 30 minutes. The default timeout for UDP connections is 1 minute. Note: The maximum timeout value for TCP connections and UDP connections is 2160 minutes. Using the get service command without any arguments displays all pre-defined, user-defined, and service group information in the service book.
574
pppoa through zone
session
Description: Use the session commands to clear or display entries in the session table of the NetScreen device. The session table contains information about individual sessions between hosts that communicate through the NetScreen device. Because each session entry uniquely identifies two communicating hosts, it contains a unique combination of the following criteria: An individual IP address for the source host (no subnets with multiple addresses). An individual IP address for the destination host (no subnets with multiple addresses). An individual port number for the source host (not a range of ports). An individual port number for the destination host (not a range of ports).
Every time the NetScreen device initiates a new session, it creates a session entry and uses the information in the entry while processing subsequent traffic between the hosts. The kind of session information listed by the get session command depends upon the NetScreen platform. (For example, on any NetScreen platform with a management module in slot 1, the get session command lists currently active sessions on that module.) Such sessions include management, log, and other administrative traffic. On any NetScreen device with one or more Secure Port Modules (SPMs), the get session command lists sessions that are active on the ASIC for each module. If a session crosses two ASICs, it counts as two sessions, one for each ASIC.
Syntax
clear
clear [ cluster ] session [ all | id id_num | [ src-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ] [ dst-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ] [ src-mac mac_addr ] [ dst-mac mac_addr ] [ protocol ptcl_num [ ptcl_num ] ]
575
pppoa through zone
[ src-port port_num [ port_num ] ] [ dst-port port_num [ port_num ] ] [ vsd-id id_num ] ]
get
get session [ id id_num | ike-nat | fragment | [ tunnel ] [ src-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ] [ dst-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ] [ src-mac mac_addr ] [ dst-mac mac_addr ] [ protocol ptcl_num [ ptcl_num ] ] [ src-port port_num [ port_num ] ] [ dst-port port_num [ port_num ] ] ]

all
clear [ cluster ] session all
all Specifies all sessions.
576
pppoa through zone
cluster
clear cluster session [ ... ]
id
clear [ cluster ] session id id_num get session id id_num
id id_num Identifies a specific session with Session Identification number id_num.
Example: The following command displays the session table entry for the session with ID 5116: get session id 5116
ike-nat
get session ike-nat
ike-nat Identifies all IKE NAT ALG session information.
src-ip | dst-ip
clear [ cluster ] session [ src-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ] [ dst-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ] [ ... ] get session [ ... ] [ src-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ] [ dst-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ][ ... ]
src-ip ip_addr dst-ip ip_addr Identifies all sessions initiated by packets containing source IP address ip_addr. For example, ip_addr could be the source IP address in the first TCP SYN packet. Identifies all sessions initiated by packets containing destination IP address ip_addr.
Example: The following command displays all the entries in the session table for a specific source IP address:
pppoa through zone
get session src-ip 172.16.10.92
src-mac | dst-mac
clear [ cluster ] session [ ... ] [ dst-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ] [ src-mac mac_addr ] [ dst-mac mac_addr ] get session [ ... ] [ src-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ] [ dst-ip ip_addr [ netmask mask ] ]
src-mac dst-mac Identifies all sessions initiated by packets containing source MAC address mac_addr. Identifies all sessions initiated by packets containing destination MAC address mac_addr.
protocol
clear [ cluster ] session [ ... ] protocol ptcl_num [ ptcl_num ] [ ... ] get session [ ... ] protocol ptcl_num [ ptcl_num ] [ ... ]
protocol Identifies all sessions that use protocol ptcl_num. You can also specify any protocol within a range (ptcl_num ptcl_num).
src-port | dst-port
clear [ cluster ] session [ ... ] [ src-port port_num [ port_num ] ] [ dst-port port_num [ port_num ] ] [ ... ] get session [ ... ] [ src-port port_num [ port_num ] ] [ dst-port port_num [ port_num ] ]
src-port Identifies all sessions initiated by packets that contain the Layer 4 source port port_num in the Layer 4 protocol header. You can also specify any Layer 4 destination port within a range (port_num port_num). Identifies all sessions initiated by packets that contain the Layer 4 destination port port_num in the Layer 4 protocol header. You can also specify any Layer 4 destination port within a range (port_num port_num).
dst-port
578
pppoa through zone
Example: The following command displays all the entries in the session table for protocol 5 and for source ports 2 through 5: get session protocol 5 src-port 2 5
tunnel
get session tunnel [ ... ]
tunnel Directs the NetScreen device to display tunnel sessions.
vsd-id
clear [ cluster ] session [ ... ] vsd-id id_num get session [ ... ] vsd-id id_num
vsd-id id_num Identifies all sessions that belong the VSD group id_num.
Example: The following command clears all sessions belonging to VSD group 2001, and initiated from the host at IP address 172.16.10.12: clear session src-ip 172.16.10.12 vsd-id 2001
579
pppoa through zone
sip
Description: Use the sip commands to configure SIP functionality on the NetScreen device and also to obtain information.
Syntax
get
get sip { call | setting }
set
set sip { media-inactivity-timeout number | protect deny [ dst-ip ip_addr/mask | timeout [ number ] ] | signaling-inactivity-timeout number }
unset
unset sip { media-inactivity-timeout | protect deny [ dst-ip ip_addr/mask | timeout ] | signaling-inactivity-timeout }
580
pppoa through zone

call
get sip call
call Displays the number of active calls. The maximum number of calls possible on a NetScreen device depends on the platform type. For more information, refer to the specifications sheet for your product.
media-inactivity-timeout
set sip media-inactivity-timeout number unset sip media-inactivity-timeout
media-inactivity- Configures or removes the maximum length of time (in seconds) a call can remain active without any timeout media (RTP or RTCP) traffic within a group. Each time a RTP or RTCP packet occurs within a call, this timeout resets. The default setting is 120 seconds.
protect deny
set sip protect deny [ dst-ip ip_addr/mask | timeout [ number ] ] unset sip protect deny [ dst-ip ip_addr/mask | timeout ]
protect deny Specifies that repeat SIP INVITE requests from a source be denied to a proxy server that denied the initial request. dst-ip ip_addr/mask specifies the address of the proxy server. timeout [ number ] specifies the number of seconds (the default is 3) the proxy server will deny repeated SIP INVITE requests before it begins accepting them again.
581
pppoa through zone
setting
get sip setting
setting Displays the inactivity timeout parameters of the SIP ALG (application-layer gateway) for SIP signaling and SIP media, and the destination address of a SIP proxy server protected from repeat SIP INVITE requests the proxy server initially rejected.
signaling-inactivity-timeout
set sip signaling-inactivity-timeout number unset sip signaling-inactivity-timeout
signalingConfigures or removes the maximum length of time (in seconds) a call can remain active without any inactivity-timeout SIP signaling traffic. Each time a SIP signaling message occurs within a call, this timeout resets. The default setting is 43200 seconds (12 hours).
582
pppoa through zone
snmp
Description: Use the snmp commands to configure the NetScreen device for Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), to gather statistical information from the NetScreen device, and receive notification when significant events occur.
Syntax
clear
get snmp statistics
get
get snmp [ auth-trap | community name_str | settings | statistics ]
set
set snmp { auth-trap enable | community name_str { read-only | read-write } [ trap-off | trap-on [ traffic ] | version { any | v1 | v2 } ] | contact name_str | host comm_name ip_addr[/mask ] [ src-interface interface | trap { v1 | v2c }
583
pppoa through zone
] | location string | name name_str | port { listen [ port_num ] | trap [ port_num ] } | }
unset
unset snmp { auth-trap enable | community name_str | contact | host comm_name ip_addr [ src-interface ] | location | name | port { listen [ port_num ] | trap [ port_num ] } | }

auth-trap enable
get snmp auth-trap set snmp auth-trap enable unset snmp auth-trap enable
auth-trap enable Enables Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) authentication traps.
community
get snmp community name_str set snmp community name_str { ... }
584
pppoa through zone
unset snmp community name_str

community Defines the name for the SNMP community. It supports maximum 3 communities in all products. read-only Defines the permission for the community as read-only. read-write Defines the permission for the community as read-write. - trap-off Disables SNMP traps for the community. - trap-on Enables SNMP traps for the community. The traffic switch includes traffic alarms as SNMP traps.
Examples: The following command configures a community named public. Allows hosts to read MIB data from the SNMP agent Enables SNMP traps for the community set snmp community public read-only trap-on The following command configures an SNMP host with IP address 10.20.25.30 for the community named public: set snmp host public 10.20.25.30
contact
set snmp contact name_str unset snmp contact
contact Defines the system contact.
585
pppoa through zone
host
set snmp host comm_name ip_addr[/mask ] [ ... ] unset snmp host comm_name ip_addr [ ... ]
host Defines the community name string and the IP address of the SNMP management host. The mask value defines a SNMP community member as a subnet. Note: When you define an SNMP community member as a subnet, that member can poll the NetScreen device but it cannot receive SNMP traps. To receive SNMP traps, the community member must be a single host.
Example: The following commands configure a community named netscreen. set set Specifies read and write permission Allows the NetScreen device to send traps to all hosts in the community Assigns the community to an SNMP host with IP address 10.40.40.15 snmp community netscreen read-write trap-on snmp host netscreen 10.40.40.15
Example: The following command defines the subnet 10.5.1.0/24 as a member of the SNMP community named olympia: set snmp host olympia 10.5.1.0/24
location
set snmp location string unset snmp location
location Defines the physical location of the system.
586
pppoa through zone
name
set snmp name name_str unset snmp name
name Defines the name of the system.
port
set snmp port { ... } unset snmp port { ... }
port Specifies the SNMP listen and trap port ( listen | trap ).
settings
get snmp settings
settings Displays the name of the contact person, and the name and physical location of the NetScreen device.
src-interface
set snmp host comm_name ip_addr[/mask ] src-interface interface unset snmp host comm_name ip_addr[/mask ] src-interface
src-interface Specifies the source interface.
587
pppoa through zone
statistics
clear snmp statistics get snmp statistics
statistics Displays or clears SNMP statistics.
trap
set snmp host comm_name ip_addr[/mask ] trap v1 | v2c
trap If an SNMP community supports both SNMP versions (SNMPv1 (v1) and SNMPv2c (v2c), you must specify a trap version for each community member.
version
set snmp community { ... } version { any | v1 | v2c }
version When you create an SNMP community, you can specify whether the community supports SNMPv1 (v1), SNMPv2c (v2c), or both SNMP versions, as required by the SNMP management stations. For backward compatibility with earlier ScreenOS releases that only support SNMPv1, NetScreen devices support SNMPv1 by default.
588
pppoa through zone
socket
Description: Use the socket commands to display socket information on a NetScreen device. A socket is a software object that serves as a connection to a network protocol. A NetScreen device can send and receive TCP/IP or UDP traffic by opening a socket and reading and writing data to and from the socket.
Syntax
get
get socket [ id id_num ]

id
get socket id id_num
id Displays the information for an identified socket (id_num).
Example: The following command displays the information concerning socket 5: get socket id 5
589
pppoa through zone
ssh
Description: Use the ssh commands to configure the Secure Shell (SSH) server task. The SSH server task is an SSH-compatible server application that resides on the NetScreen device. When you enable the SSH server task, SSH client applications can manage the device through a secure connection. (The look and feel of a SSH client session is identical to a Telnet session.) You can run either SSH version 1 (SSHv1) or SSH version 2 (SSHv2) on the NetScreen device; the commands available depend on the SSH version that you activate.
Syntax
clear
clear ssh { all | enables | host-key | pka-key | sessions }
exec (SSHv1)
exec ssh tftp pka-rsa [ user-name name_str ] file-name filename ip-addr ip_addr [ from interface ]
exec (SSHv2)
exec ssh tftp pka-dsa [ user-name name_str ] file-name filename ip-addr ip_addr [ from interface ]
590
pppoa through zone
get (SSHv1)
get ssh [ host-key | pka-rsa [ all | [ username name_str ] [ index number ] ] | report ]
get (SSHv2)
get ssh [ host-key | pka-dsa [ all | [ user-name name_str ] [ index number ] ] | report ]
set (SSHv1)
set ssh { enable | key-gen-time number | pka-rsa [ username name_str ] key number1 number2 number3 }
591
pppoa through zone
set (SSHv2)
set ssh { enable | pka-dsa { user-name name_str { key string | pka-key-id string } | key string } | pub-key string | version { v1 | v2 } }
unset (SSHv1)
unset ssh { enable | host-key | key-gen-time | pka-rsa { all | username name_str { all | index id_num } } }
592
pppoa through zone
unset (SSHv2)
unset ssh { enable | host-key | pka-dsa { all | user-name name_str { all | index id_num } } | pub-key string }

all
clear ssh all
all Clear all SSH sessions, enables, PKA keys, and host keys on device.
enable
set ssh enable unset ssh enable
enable Enables the Secure Shell (SSH) task. When issued from a vsys, enables SSH for the vsys.
593
pppoa through zone
host-key
get ssh host-key unset ssh host-key
host-key The get command shows the SSH host key (RSA public key for SSHv1 and DSA public key for SSHv2) for the root or current vsys, including the fingerprint of the host key. The clear command deletes the SSH host key for the root or current vsys; SSH must be disabled first before you can delete the host key.
key-gen-time
set ssh key-gen-time number unset ssh key-gen-time
key-gen-time Specifies the SSHv1 server key regenerating time (in minutes).
pka-dsa
get ssh pka-dsa [ ... ] set ssh pka-dsa [ ... ] unset ssh pka-dsa { ... }
pka-dsa Public Key Authentication (PKA) using Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA) for SSHv2. all Shows all PKA public keys bound to all users. You must be the root user to execute this option; read-write users and read-only users cannot execute this command. index number allows the admin user and read-only user to view the details of a key bound to the active admin. It also allows the root user to view the details of a key bound to the specified user. key string Binds a PKA key to the current user. Read-only users cannot execute this option.
594
pppoa through zone
pka-key-id string Binds a PKA key identified by the key ID to the current user. Read-only users cannot execute this option. user-name name_str Specifies the name of the user to bind the PKA key. file-name filename Specifies the file containing the key to bind to the user. For the get command, user-name displays all PKA public keys bound to a specified user name_str. Admin users and read-only users can execute this option only if name_str identifies the current admin user or read-only user.
Example: The following command binds a hypothetical key to a user named chris: set ssh pka-dsa user-name chris key AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAABBAPrdVkvpSiLMT7NfZJm24pqMU2 FFpO49+LFmbOipljEYelWTA4J5... The following command: loads a key contained in a file named key_file takes the file from a server at IP address 172.16.10.11 binds the key to a user named chris exec ssh tftp pka-dsa user-name chris file-name key_file ip-addr 172.16.10.11
pka-key
clear ssh pka-key
pka-key Deletes all SSH PKA keys on the device.
595
pppoa through zone
pka-rsa
get ssh pka-rsa [ ... ] set ssh pka-rsa [ ... ] unset ssh pka-rsa { ... }
pka-rsa Public Key Authentication (PKA) using RSA for SSHv1. all Shows all PKA public keys bound to all users. You must be the root user to execute this option; admin users and read-only users cannot execute this command. index number allows the admin user and read-only user to view the details of a key bound to the active admin. It also allows the root user to view the details of a key bound to the specified user. key number1 number2 number3 Binds a PKA key to the current user. The number1, number2, and number3 values represent the key length, the exponent, and the modulus, respectively. Read-only users cannot execute this option. username name_str Specifies the name of the user to bind the PKA key. file-name filename Specifies the file containing the key to bind to the user. For the get command, username displays all PKA public keys bound to a specified user name_str. Admin users and read-only users can execute this option only if name_str identifies the current admin user or read-only user.
Example: The following command binds a hypothetical key to a user named chris: set ssh pka-rsa username chris key 512 655376875272488448958071956054093391935 033213724615582796813757422715643970626128793365599992658289801116115376527150 77837089019119296718115311887359071551679 The following command loads a key. Key contained in a file named key_file File taken from a server at IP address 172.16.10.11 Key bound to a user named chris exec ssh tftp pka-rsa username chris file-name key_file ip-addr 172.16.10.11
596
pppoa through zone
pub-key
set ssh pub-key string unset ssh pub-key string
pub-key Sets the public key for SSHv2.
report
get ssh report
report Displays SSHv1 (or SSHv2) key, session, and vsys information for the device on which SSH is currently enabled.
sessions
clear ssh sessions
sessions Logs out all administrators that currently have active SSH sessions.
version
set ssh version v1 | v2
version (Available only at the root level.) Sets the version of SSH on the NetScreen device. Specify either SSH version 1 or version 2. Before you can set an SSH version, make sure that all keys created with the previous version are removed by executing the delete ssh device all command. To clear SSHv2 keys; issue the clear scs all command to clear SSHv1 keys.
Defaults
This feature is disabled by default. The default key generation time for SSHv1 is 60 minutes.
597
pppoa through zone
ssl
Description: Use the ssl commands to configure a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) connection, or to display the SSL configuration on a NetScreen device. Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a set of protocols that can provide a secure connection between a Web client and a Web server communicating over a TCP/IP network.
Syntax
get
get ssl [ ca-list | cert-list ]
set
set ssl { cert number | enable | encrypt { { 3des | des } sha-1 | { rc4 | rc4-40 } md5 } port port_num }
unset
unset ssl { cert | enable | encrypt | port }
598
pppoa through zone

ca-list | cert-list
get ssl ca-list get ssl cert-list
ca-list | cert-list Displays currently configured Certificate Authorities (ca-list) or currently available certificates (cert-list).
Example: The following command displays the SSL certificate list: get ssl cert-list
cert
set ssl cert number unset ssl cert
cert Specifies that the named certificate is required.
enable
set ssl enable set ssl enable unset ssl enable
enable Turns on SSL.
599
pppoa through zone
encrypt
set ssl encrypt { 3des | des } sha-1 | { rc4 | rc4-40 } md5 unset ssl encrypt
encrypt Enables encryption over the SSL connection. 3des Set the 3DES security level. des Sets the DES security level. rc4 md5 Sets the RC4 MD3 security level. rc4-40 md5 Sets the RC4-40 MD3 security level.
Example: The following command specifies triple-DES encryption with SHA-1 authentication hashing: set ssl encrypt 3des sha-1
port
set ssl port port_num unset ssl port
port Specifies the SSL port number.
Example: The following command changes the SSL port to 11533: set ssl port 11533
Defaults
The default SSL port is 443.
600
pppoa through zone
sys-clock
Description: Use the sys-clock command to display information on the system clock.
Syntax
get
get sys_clock

None.
601
pppoa through zone
syslog
Description: Use the syslog commands to configure the NetScreen device to send traffic and event messages to up to four syslog hosts or to display the current syslog configuration. Note: The syslog host must be enabled before you can enable syslog.
Syntax
get
get syslog
set
set syslog { config { name_str | ip_addr } [ facilities AUTH/SEC | local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7 { AUTH/SEC | local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7 } | log { all | event | traffic } | port number | transport tcp ] | enable | src-interface interface | }
602
pppoa through zone
unset
unset syslog config [ name_str | ip_addr ] { log all | event | traffic | port transport } enable | src-interface

config
set syslog config { name_str | ip_addr } { ... } unset syslog config [ ip_addr ]
config Defines the configuration settings for the syslog utility. The { name_str | ip_addr } parameters define the name or the IP address of the syslog host device. You can define up to four syslog hosts. Specifying an IP address with the unset syslog config command removes the configuration for the specified syslog host. Otherwise, this command removes the configuration for all syslog hosts.
enable
set syslog enable unset syslog enable
enable Enables the NetScreen device to send messages to the syslog host(s).
603
pppoa through zone
facility
set syslog config { name_str | ip_addr } facility { AUTH/SEC | local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7 } { AUTH/SEC | local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7 }
facility Defines the security facility level and the regular facility level for each syslog host that you specify. The security facility classifies and sends messages to the syslog host for security-related actions such as attacks. The regular facility classifies and sends messages for events unrelated to security, such as user logins and logouts, and system status reports.
Example: The following command sets the syslog host configuration to report all logs: set syslog config 172.16.20.249 facility local0 local1
log
set syslog config { name_str | ip_addr } log all | event | traffic unset syslog config { name_str | ip_addr } log all | event | traffic
log Directs the NetScreen device to send traffic log entries, event log entries or both traffic and event log entries to the syslog host.
604
pppoa through zone
port
set syslog config { name_str | ip_addr } port port_num unset syslog config { name_str | ip_addr } port
port Defines the port number on the syslog host that receives the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets from the NetScreen device.
Example: The following command changes the syslog port number to 911: set syslog config port 911
src-interface
set syslog config { name_str | ip_addr } src-interface interface unset syslog config { name_str | ip_addr } src-interface
src-interface Specifies the source interface.
transport tcp
set syslog config { ip_addr | name_str } transport tcp
transport tcp Directs the device to use TCP protocol instead of UDP protocol.
Defaults
This feature is disabled by default. The default syslog port number is 514, and the default WebTrends port number is 514.
605
pppoa through zone
system
Description: Use the get system command to display general system information. The information displayed by the get system command includes: Descriptive indices of the ScreenOS operating system, including Serial Number, Control Number, Software Number, and image source file name Descriptive indices of the NetScreen hardware platform, including hardware version, MAC address, and type Chronological and timekeeping information Current operational mode (transparent, NAT, or route) Configuration port and user IP Interface settings
Syntax
get
get system

None.
606
pppoa through zone
tech-support
Description: Use the tech-support command to display system information. The information displayed by the get tech-support command is useful for troubleshooting the NetScreen device. Most of this information consists of the current authentication and routing settings.
Syntax
get
get tech-support

None.
607
pppoa through zone
temperature-threshold
Description: Use the temperature-threshold commands to set the normal and severe temperature thresholds for triggering temperature alarms.
Syntax
set
set temperature-threshold { alarm | severe } { celsius number | fahrenheit number }
unset
unset temperature-threshold { alarm | severe } { celsius number | fahrenheit number }
Arguments
alarm | severe Defines the temperature (celsius or fahrenheit) required to trigger a regular alarm or a severe alarm. A severe alarm sounds a greater frequency of audible alarms and a generates greater number of event log entries.
Example: To enable the audible alarm to sound when the temperature of the device reaches or exceeds 190 degrees fahrenheit: set temperature-threshold alarm fahrenheit 190
608
pppoa through zone
tftp
Description: Use the tftp commands to specify the interface the device uses to communicate via TFTP sessions.
Syntax
get
get tftp ip_addr filename
set
unset tftp source-interface ip_addr
unset
unset tftp source-interface

Variable Parameters
get tftp ip_addr filename set tftp source-interface ip_addr
ip_addr Specifies the IP address of the TFTP interface. Specifies the name of the file to access with the TFTP service.
filename
action
source-interface Specifies the IP address of the interface through which the device communicates using TFTP.
609
pppoa through zone
timer
Description: Use the timer commands to display timer settings, or to configure the NetScreen device to automatically execute management or diagnosis at a specified time. All timer settings remain in the configuration script after the specified time has expired.
Syntax
get
get timer
set
set timer date time action reset
unset
unset timer id_num

Variable Parameters
set timer date time action reset unset timer id_num
date time id_num Specifies the date when the NetScreen device executes the defined action. Date is in mm/dd/yyyy format. Specifies the time when the NetScreen device executes the defined action. Time is in hh:mm format. Identifies a specific action by ID number in the list of timer settings (generated by the set timer command.)
610
pppoa through zone
action
action Defines the event that the command triggers at the given date and time.
reset
reset Resets the timer.
Example: The following command configures NetScreen to reset at a given time and date: set timer 1/31/2000 19:00 action reset
611
pppoa through zone
trace-route
Description: Use the trace-route command to display the route to a host.
Syntax
trace-route { ip_addr | name_str } [ hop number [ time-out number ] ]
Keywords
Variable Parameters
trace-route ip_addr trace-route name_str
ip_addr | name_str The IP address (ip_addr) or object name (name_str) of the host.
hop
trace-route { ip_addr | name_str } hop number [ ... ]
hop The maximum number of trace route hops (number) to evaluate and display.
Example: The following command: evaluates and displays up to four route trace hops sends the output to a host with IP address 172.16.10.10 trace-route 172.16.10.10 hop 4
612
pppoa through zone
time-out
trace-route { ip_addr | name_str } hop number time-out number
time-out Specifies the amount of time in seconds (number) to elapse before abandoning the route trace.
Example: The following command performs a trace-route operation. Evaluates and displays up to four route trace hops Sends the output to a host with IP address 172.16.10.10 Specifies a timeout value of four seconds trace-route 172.16.10.10 hop 4 time-out 4
613
pppoa through zone
traffic-shaping
Description: Use the traffic-shaping commands to determine the settings for the system with the traffic-shaping function, or to display information on traffic management device interfaces. Traffic shaping is the allocation of the appropriate amount of network bandwidth to every user and application on an interface. The appropriate amount of bandwidth is defined as cost-effective carrying capacity at a guaranteed Quality of Service (QoS). You can use a NetScreen device to shape traffic by creating policies and by applying appropriate rate controls to each class of traffic going through the device. Note: You can only apply traffic shaping to policies for which the destination zone has a single bound interface.
Syntax
get
get traffic-shaping { dscp-class-selector | interface [ interface ] | ip_precedence | mode }
set
set traffic-shaping { dscp-class-selector | ip_precedence number1 number2 number3 number4 number5 number6 number7 number8 | mode { auto | off | on } }
614
pppoa through zone
unset
unset traffic-shaping { dscp-class-selector | ip_precedence | mode }

dscp-class-selector
get traffic-shaping dscp-class-selector set traffic-shaping dscp-class-selector unset traffic-shaping dscp-class-selector
dscp-class-selector Subsumes IP precedence into class selector codepoints, ensuring that priority levels set with ip_precedence are preserved and handled correctly by downstream routers.
interface
get traffic-shaping interface [ interface ]
interface Displays the traffic shaping info for an interface.
ip_precedence
get traffic-shaping ip_precedence set traffic-shaping ip_precedence number1 number2 number3 number4 number5 number6 number7 number8 unset traffic-shaping mode ip_precedence
ip_precedence Specifies the Priorities 0 through 7 for IP precedence (TOS) mapping. Each setting should be a single-digit value.
615
pppoa through zone
mode
get traffic-shaping mode set traffic-shaping mode { auto | off | on } unset traffic-shaping mode
mode Defines the mode settings for the system with the traffic-shaping function. If you select auto, the system automatically determines the mode settings. If there is at least one policy in the system with traffic-shaping turned on, the system automatically sets the mode to on. If there is no such policy, the auto mode default setting is off.
Defaults
By default, the traffic shaping function is set up to automatic mode.
616
pppoa through zone
url
Description: Use the url commands to enable or disable URL filtering for use in policies and to configure and display URL filter settings. Note: A Websense server provides the URL filtering.
Syntax
get
get url [ all | vsys-name vsys_name ]
set (root level)

set url { config { disable | enable } | fail-mode { block | permit } | message string | profile name name_str | protocol sc-cpa | type { sc-cpa | scfp | websense } server { ip_addr | dom_name } port_num number | src-interface interface | type { netScreen | server } }
set (vsys level)

set url { config { disable | enable } | use-root | use-vsys }
pppoa through zone
unset
unset url { config | fail-mode | message | profile name | protocol | server | src-interface | type }
URL Filtering Context

Some NetScreen devices support a URL filtering solution that employs Content Portal Authority (CPA) servers from SurfControl. To run this integrated URL filtering feature on the NetScreen device, you must initiate the URL filtering context. Executing the set url protocol sc-cpa command places the CLI in the URL filtering routing context. For more information on this feature, refer to the Juniper Networks NetScreen Concepts & Examples ScreenOS Reference Guide. Once you initiate the URL filtering context, all subsequent command executions apply to this integrated URL filtering feature The following commands are executable in the URL filtering context:.
cache cate-list-query-interval category enable Use the cache command to enable caching. You can also change the cache size or timeout. Use the cate-list-query-interval command to specify the interval at which the NetScreen device queries the SurfControl CPA server for categorization updates. Use the category command to create a category or to add a URL to a category. You can add up to 20 URLs in a category. Use the enable command to enable URL filtering using the SurfControl Content Portal Authority (CPA) servers.
618
pppoa through zone
fail-mode profile ns-profile server
Use the fail-mode command to block or permit all requests when the URL Filtering server fails. Use the profile command to create a new URL filtering profile or to add a category to a profile. Use the ns-profile to display the default URL filtering profile. Use the server command to define the primary URL filtering server.

cache
set cache { enable | size number | timeout number } unset cache { enable | size | timeout }
enable size timeout Enables the NetScreen device to cache the categorization of URLs. Specifies the memory size of the categorization cache. Specifies how many hours the NetScreen device stores entries in the categorization cache.
You must initiate the URL filtering context before you can execute this command.
cate-list-query-interval
set cate-list-query-interval number unset cate-list-query-interval
cate-list-query-interval Specifies the interval at which the NetScreen device queries the SurfControl CPA server for categorization updates.
619
pppoa through zone
category
set category name url url_str get category [ name | pre | user ] unset category name [ url url_str ]
category pre url user Specifies the category you are creating or to which you are adding a URL Displays the pre-defined categories. Specifies the URL you are adding. Displays the user-defined categories.
config
set url config { disable | enable } unset url config
config { disable | enable } Disables or enables URL filtering at the device level for use in policies. By itself, enabling URL filtering at the device level does not activate it. You must enable URL filtering at the device and policy level to apply filtering to URL requests.
enable
set enable unset enable
enable Enables URL filtering using the SurfControl CPA servers.
620
pppoa through zone
fail-mode
set url fail-mode { block | permit } unset url fail-mode
fail-mode { block | permit } If the connection between the NetScreen device and the Websense server is lost, the NetScreen device either blocks or permits all HTTP requests to which a policy requiring URL filtering applies. The default fail-mode behavior is to block HTTP requests.
message
set url message string unset url message
message string Defines a custom message, 1-500 characters in length, to send to the client who is blocked from reaching a URL.
Example: The following command defines the URL blocking message This site is blocked: set url message This site is blocked.
ns-profile
get ns-profile
ns-profile Displays the NetScreen pre-defined profile.
621
pppoa through zone
profile
set profile string1 { other block | permit } | string2 { block | permit | black-list | white-list } unset profile string1 [ other | string2 | black-list | white-list ] get profile [ string ]
profile string1 other block permit string2 black-list white-list Specifies the profile you are creating or updating. Specifies the Other category. Use this keyword to define the action for the Other category. The NetScreen device blocks access to URLs in the specified category. The NetScreen device permits access to URLs in the specified category. Specifies the category for which you are defining an action. The NetScreen device blocks access to URLs in this category. The NetScreen device permits access to URLs in this category.
profile name
set url profile name name_str unset url profile name
profile name_str Identifies a virtual system that connects to a Websense URL-filtering server.
protocol
set url protocol sc-cpa | type { sc-cpa | scfp | websense } unset url protocol sc-cpa
protocol sc-cpa Initiates the URL filtering context.
622
pppoa through zone
type
Indicates which URL filtering protocol you are configuring: sc-cpa Integrated URL filtering with the SurfControl servers. scfp Redirect URL filtering with the SurfControl servers. websense Redirect URL filtering with the Websense servers. For more information on the URL filtering protocols, see the Juniper Networks NetScreen Concepts & Examples ScreenOS Reference Guide.)
server
set url server { ip_addr | dom_name } port_num number unset url server
server Defines the following connection parameters for the URL filtering server: ip_addr | dom_name Sets the IP address or DNS name of the URL filtering server. port_num Sets the port number on which the NetScreen device communicates with the URL filtering server. The default port number is 15868. number Sets the timeout interval, in seconds, that the NetScreen device waits for a response from the Websense filter. If Websense does not respond within the time interval, the NetScreen device either blocks the request or allows it, as you choose. The default is 10 seconds. Example: The following command sets the IP address, port number, and timeout value for the URL filtering server (the port number and timeout interval use the default values):
set url server 1.2.2.20 15868 10 set server { america | asia | europe } unset server { america | asia | europe } get server
server Defines the primary CPA server to which the NetScreen device sends URLs for categorization. You must initiate the URL filtering context before you can execute this command.
623
pppoa through zone
src-interface
set url src-interface interface unset url src-interface
src-interface interface Specifies the source interface that the NetScreen device uses when communicating with the Websense server. If you specify a source interface, the device enforces use of that interface, without consulting the routing table. If you do not specify an interface, the device picks an interface according to entries in the routing table.
type
set url type { NetScreen | server } unset url type
type { NetScreen | server } Specifies the source of the message that the NetScreen device delivers to clients when URLs are blockedthe NetScreen device or the Websense server.
use-root
set url use-root
use-root When entering this command in a virtual system (vsys), it instructs the vsys to share the URL filtering server defined at the root level.
use-vsys
set url use-vsys
use-vsys When entering this command in a virtual system (vsys), it instructs the vsys to use the URL filtering server defined for that vsys.
624
pppoa through zone
user
Description: Use the user commands to create, remove, or display entries in the internal user authentication database. The basic user categories are as follows: Authentication users (for using network connections) IKE users (for using AutoKey IKE VPNs) L2TP users (for using L2TP tunnels) XAuth users
Syntax
get
get user { name_str | all | id id_num }
set
set user name_str { disable | enable | hash-password string | ike-id { asn1-dn { [ container string ] wildcard string } [ share-limit number ] | fqdn name_str | ip ip_addr | u-fqdn name_str } | password pswd_str |
625
pppoa through zone
remote-settings { dns1 ip_addr | dns2 ip_addr | ipaddr ip_addr | ippool name_str | wins1 ip_addr | wins2 ip_addr } | type { [ auth ] [ ike ] [ l2tp ] [ xauth ] } | uid id_num }
unset
unset user name_str | id_str [ remote-settings { dns1 | dns2 | ipaddr | ippool | wins1 | wins2 } | type [ auth ] [ ike ] [ l2tp ] [ xauth ] ]

Variable Parameters
get user name_str set user name_str { ... } unset user name_str [ ... ]
user Defines the users name.
Examples: The following command displays information for a user named roger: get user roger
626
pppoa through zone
The following command deletes the user named jane: unset user jane
all
get user all
all Displays the following information for all the entries in the internal user database: User ID number User name Status (enabled or disabled) User type IKE ID types e-mail address, IP address, or domain nameand IKE identity
disable | enable
set user name_str disable set user name_str enable
disable | enable Disables or enables the user in the internal database. By default, the user is disabled. I you set a password for an auth user or an IKE ID for an IKE user, the user becomes enabled automatically.
id
get user id id_num
id Displays information on the user, identified by id_num. This option displays the same information as get user name_str option.
Example: The following command displays a particular user with user ID 10: get user id 10
pppoa through zone
hash-password
set user name_str hash-password string
hash-password Creates a hashed password for the specified user and stores it in the configuration. Only an auth user can have a hashed password. The NetScreen device generates a hashed password randomly using either the crypt () or SHA-1 algorithm.
ike-id
set user name_str ike-id { ... }
ike-id { ip_addr | name_str } Adds and defines an AutoKey IKE dialup user. ip ip_addr The IP address of the dialup user. fqdn name_str The Fully Qualified Domain Name, the complete string, such as www.netscreen.com. u-fqdn name_str Specifies the dialup user identity, usually equivalent to an e-mail address such as admin@acme.com. asn1-dn Specifies the user certificate distinguished name fields, and field values that define user identity. - container string Specifies a container identity. This identity allows multiple identity fields for each type (CN, OU, O, L, ST, C, and E). To match a local ASN1_DN identity, the peer IKE identity fields must match all identity fields specified in the container identity. The NetScreen device does not check any undefined container fields. Field sequence must be identical. - wildcard string Specifies a wildcard identity. This identity allows only one identity field for each type (CN, OU, O, L, ST, C, and E). To match a local ASN1_DN identity configuration, the peer IKE identity must contain fields matching all non-empty identity fields specified in the wildcard identity. For example, the wildcard identity o=ACME,ou=Marketing allows tunnel communication with any user whose certificate contains these field values. The NetScreen device does not check any undefined wildcard fields. Field sequence is not important. share-limit number Specifies the number of users that can establish tunnels concurrently using this identity. When this number is larger than 1, the NetScreen device treats it as a Group IKE ID user. With Group IKE ID, multiple dialup users can establish tunnels using partial IKE identities.
628
pppoa through zone
Examples: The following command creates an IKE user named branchsf with the IKE-ID number 2.2.2.2: set user branchsf ike-id ip 2.2.2.2 The following command creates a new user definition named market. Configures the user definition to recognize up to 10 hosts Specifies that the hosts must possess certificates containing ACME in the O field, and Marketing in the OU field set user market ike-id asn1-dn wildcard o=ACME,ou=Marketing share-limit 10 (This command uses Group IKE ID, which allows multiple hosts to use a single user definition. For more information on Group IKE ID, see the NetScreen Concepts & Examples ScreenOS Reference Guide.)
password
set user name_str password pswd_str
password Defines a top-level password, used to authenticate the auth, L2TP, IKE or XAuth user.
Example: The following command creates an authentication user in the NetScreen internal database for user guest with the password JnPc3g12: set user guest password JnPc3g12
remote-settings
set set set set user user user user name_str name_str name_str name_str remote-settings remote-settings remote-settings remote-settings { dns1 ip_addr | dns2 ip_addr } ipaddr ip_addr ippool name_str | { wins1 ip_addr | wins2 ip_addr }
remote-settings
Sets the remote settings for the user. dns1 | dns2 Specifies the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS servers. ipaddr Specifies the static IPaddress for the user.
629
pppoa through zone
ippool Specifies the named L2TP IP pool, which contains a range of IP addresses. The NetScreen device uses IP pools when it assigns addresses to dialup users using L2TP. (To define a L2TP pool, use the set ippool command.) wins1 | wins2 Specifies primary and secondary servers that provide WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service). WINS is a service for mapping IP addresses to NetBIOS computer names on Windows NT server-based networks. A WINS server maps a NetBIOS name used in a Windows network environment to an IP address used on an IP-based network.
Example: The following command directs the device to obtain an IP address from an L2TP ippool named NY_Pool for a dialup user named John_Doe: set user John_Doe remote-settings ippool NY_Pool
type
set user name_str type { [ auth ] [ ike ] [ l2tp ] [ xauth ] }
type Sets the user type, in any of the following combinations: auth, ike, l2tp, xauth, auth ike l2tp xauth, auth ike, auth l2tp, auth xauth, ike l2tp, ike xauth, l2tp xauth, auth ike l2tp, auth l2tp xauth, or ike l2tp xauth.
Example: The following command changes the user guest to an authentication/L2TP user: set user guest type auth l2tp
630
pppoa through zone
user-group
Description: Use the user-group commands to create or delete a user group, to modify it, or to add or remove a user from it. User groups allow policies to treat multiple users in the same way, thus avoiding individual configurations for individual users. For example, even though you can configure dialup VPN tunnels for IKE users on a per-user basis, it is often more efficient to aggregate the users into a group, for which only one tunnel configuration is necessary. Any policy that references a user group applies to all the members in the group. An authentication user can be a member of up to four different user groups. Note: Different NetScreen platforms allow a different number of members in a user group.
Syntax
get
get user-group { name_str | all | external | id id_num | local }
set
set user-group name_str { id id_num | location { external | local } | type { [ auth ] [ ike ] [ l2tp ] [ xauth ] } | user name_str }
631
pppoa through zone
unset
unset user-group { name_str [ location | type | user name_str ] | id id_num }

Variable Parameter
get user-group name_str set user-group name_str { ... } unset user-group name_str [ ... ]
name_str Specifies the name of the user group.
Example: The following command displays the contents of a user group named Corp_Dial: get user-group Corp_Dial
all
get user-group all
all Displays all existing user groups.
632
pppoa through zone
external
get user-group external set user-group name_str location external
external Defines a user group as external. You can store user definitions in groups on an external RADIUS server. You can then define a user group on the NetScreen device, define the type of user it contains, leave it unpopulated of users, and define the user group as external. Defining an external user group on the NetScreen device allows you to reference that group in policies requiring authentication. When the policy requires an authentication check, the NetScreen device then contacts the RADIUS server, which performs the authentication check.
id
get user-group id id_num set user-group name_str id id_num unset user-group name_str [ ... ]
id Identifies the user group with an identification number id_num.
unset user-group name_str [ ... ]

name_str Specifies the name of the user group.
Example: The following command creates a user group named Corp_Dial and assigns the group an ID of 10: set user-group Corp_Dial id 10
local
get user-group local
local Displays all local user groups.
633
pppoa through zone
location
set user-group name_str location { external | local } unset user-group name_str location
location Specifies the location of the user group: external Indicates that the user group is stored on an external authentication server. (NetScreen supports user groups on RADIUS servers.) local Indicates that the user group is stored in the local database on the NetScreen device.
type
set user-group name_str type { ... }
type Specifies the type of user group when that group is stored on an external RADIUS server. (When the user-group is stored in the local database, the user types determine the type of user group.) The following are the possible user group types: auth Specifies that the group is comprised of authentication users. ike Specifies that the group uses IKE. l2tp Specifies L2TP users. xauth Specifies XAuth users.
user
set user-group name_str user name_str unset user-group name_str user name_str
user name_str Adds or removes the named user to the specified user group.
634
pppoa through zone
Examples: The following commands create a new authentication user named guest. set set set A authentication user group named Corp_Dial with ID 1010 User added to the user group user guest password JnPc3g12 user-group Corp_Dial location local user-group Corp_Dial user guest
The following command removes the user guest from the group: unset user-group Corp_Dial user guest
635
pppoa through zone
vip
Description: Use the vip commands to display the virtual IP (VIP) address configuration settings and to enable all VIPs to support multi-port services. A virtual IP (VIP) address maps traffic received at one IP address to another address based on the destination port number in the TCP or UDP segment header.
Syntax
get
get vip [ ip_addr { port port_num | port-status } | server | session timeout ]
set
set vip { multi-port | session timeout number }
636
pppoa through zone

Variable Parameters
get vip ip_addr { port port_num | port-status }
ip_addr port port_num port-status Identifies the VIP address. Identifies the destination port, so that the NetScreen device can display information about the specified virtual port defined on the VIP. Displays information about port allocation on the specified VIP.
multi-port
set vip multi-port
multi-port Enables the support of multiple virtual ports per custom service. By default, VIPs support single-port services. Warning: After you execute this command, you must restart the device. This command changes the functionality of the VIP, so it is highly inadvisable to switch back and forth between enabling and disabling the multi-port modes.
server
get vip server
server Displays the connectivity status of servers receiving traffic via VIPs.
session
get vip session
session timeout Displays the outstanding session timeout value for VIP.
637
pppoa through zone
vpn
Description: Use the vpn commands to create or remove a Virtual Private Network (VPN) tunnel, or to display current VPN tunnel parameters. A tunnel is a way to secure VPN communication across a WAN. The tunnel consists of a pair of unidirectional security associations (SAs), one at each end of the tunnel, that specify the security parameter index (SPI), destination IP address, and security protocol (Authentication Header or Encapsulating Security Payload) used to exchange packets through the tunnel. NetScreen devices support two keying methods for establishing VPN tunnels, AutoKey IKE and Manual Key. AutoKey IKE (Internet Key Exchange) is a standard protocol that automatically establishes and maintains encryption keys between the participants. Manual Key VPNs use predefined keys that remain unchanged until the participants change them explicitly.
Syntax
get
get vpn [ name_str [ detail ] | auto | manual | proxy-id | ]
set (AutoKey IKE)

set vpn tunn_str gateway { ip_addr | name_str } [ replay | no-replay ] [ transport | tunnel ] [ idletime number ] { proposal [ name_str1 [ name_str2 [ name_str3 [ name_str4 ] ] ] ] | sec-level { basic | compatible | standard } }
638
pppoa through zone
set (Manual Key)

set vpn tunn_str manual spi_num1 spi_num2 gateway ip_addr [ outgoing-interface interface ] { ah { md5 | sha-1 } { key key_str | password pswd_str } | esp { aes128 | aes192 | aes256 | des | 3des { key key_str | password pswd_str } | null } [ auth { md5 | sha-1 } { key key_str | password pswd_str } ] }
Other set Commands

set vpn tunn_str { bind { interface interface | zone name_str } | df-bit { clear | copy | set } | failover-weight number monitor [ source-interface interface [ destination-ip ip_addr ] ] [ optimized } [ rekey ] | proxy-id local-ip ip_addr/mask remote-ip ip_addr/mask svc_name }
unset
unset vpn vpn_name [ bind { interface | zone } | monitor | proxy-id ]
639
pppoa through zone

Variable Parameters
get vpn tunn_str [ ... ]
name_str Defines a name for the VPN.
Example: The following command displays a VPN named branch: get vpn branch
ah
set vpn tunn_str manual spi_num1 spi_num2 gateway ip_addr [ ... ] ah { ... }
ah Specifies Authentication Header (AH) protocol to authenticate IP packet content. md5 Specifies the Message Digest 5 (MD5) hashing algorithm. (128-bit) sha-1Specifies the Secure Hash Algorithm (version) 1 (SHA-1) hashing algorithm. (160-bit) The key key_str value defines a 16-byte (MD5) or 20-byte (SHA-1) hexadecimal key, which the NetScreen device uses to produce a 96-bit message digest (or hash) from the message. password pswd_str Specifies a password the NetScreen device uses to generate an encryption or authentication key automatically.
Example: The following command creates a Manual Key VPN tunnel named Mkt_vpn. Sets the local and remote SPI values as 2002 and 3003 Defines the remote gateway address 2.2.2.2 Specifies Authentication Header (AH) protocol for IP packet authentication using the SHA-1 algorithm, the key for which is generated from the password swordfish set vpn Mkt_vpn manual 2002 3003 gateway 2.2.2.2 ah sha-1 password swordfish
640
pppoa through zone
auto
get vpn auto
auto Displays all AutoKey IKE VPNs.
Example: The following command displays all AutoKey IKE VPNs: get vpn auto
bind
set vpn tunn_str bind { interface interface | zone name_str } unset vpn vpn_name bind { interface | zone }
bind Binds VPN tunnel to a tunnel interface or a security zone. interface interface specifies the tunnel interface to use for VPN binding. zone name_str specifies the tunnel zone to use for VPN binding.
Example: The following command binds the VPN tunnel named vpn1 to the tunnel.1 interface: set vpn vpn1 bind interface tunnel.1 Example: The following command binds the VPN tunnel named vpn2 to the Untrust-Tun tunnel zone: set vpn vpn2 bind zone untrust-tun
641
pppoa through zone
df-bit
set vpn tunn_str df-bit { clear | copy | set }
df-bit Determines how the NetScreen device handles the Don't Fragment (DF) bit in the outer header. clear Clears (disables) DF bit from the outer header. This is the default value. copy Copies the DF bit to the outer header. set Sets (enables) the DF bit in the outer header.
esp
set vpn tunn_str manual spi_num1 spi_num2 gateway ip_addr esp { ... }
esp Specifies the use of the Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) protocol, which the NetScreen device uses to encrypt and authenticate IP packets. aes128 Specifies Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). The key key_str value defines a 128-bit hexadecimal key. aes192 Specifies Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). The key key_str value defines a 192-bit hexadecimal key. aes256 Specifies Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). The key key_str value defines a 256-bit hexadecimal key. des Specifies Data Encryption Standard (DES). The key key_str value defines a 64-bit hexadecimal key (truncated to 56 bits). 3des Specifies Triple Data Encryption Standard (3DES). The key key_str value defines a 192-bit hexadecimal key (truncated to 168 bits). null Specifies no encryption. (When you specify this option, you must specify an authentication algorithm (MD5 or SHA-1) using the auth option.)
642
pppoa through zone
auth Specifies the use of an authentication (hashing) method. The available choices are MD5 or SHA-1. (Some NetScreen devices do not support SHA-1.) The key key_str value defines a 16-byte (MD5) or 20-byte (SHA-1) hexadecimal key, which the NetScreen device uses to produce a 96-bit message digest (or hash) from the message. password pswd_str Specifies a password the NetScreen device uses to generate an encryption or authentication key automatically.
Example: The following command creates a Manual Key VPN tunnel named Mkt_vpn. set Specifies local and remote SPI values 2002 and 3003 Specifies the IP address of the remote gateway 2.2.2.2 Specifies ESP with 3DES encryption and SHA-1 authentication Generates the encryption and authentication keys from the passwords swordfish and avalanche vpn Mkt_vpn manual 2002 3003 gateway 2.2.2.2 esp 3des password swordfish auth sha-1 password avalanche
failover-weight
set vpn name_str failover-weight number }
failover-weight Assigns a weight to a VPN tunnel. When the accumulated weight of failed or down VPN tunnels bound to the primary Untrust zone interface reaches or exceeds 100%, ScreenOS fails over to the backup Untrust zone interface. Note: This option is available only on devices that support the DIAL-backup feature.
Example: The following command assigns a failover weight of 50% to the VPN to_remote1: set vpn to_remote1 failover-weight 50
643
pppoa through zone
gateway
set vpn tunn_str gateway ip_addr [ ... ] { ... } set vpn tunn_str gateway name_str [ ... ] { ... } get vpn gateway [ detail ]
gateway Specifies the autokey IKE gateway (ip_addr or name_str) to use. idletime number The length of time in minutes that a connection can remain inactive before the NetScreen device terminates it. replay | no-replay Enables or disables replay protection. The default setting is no-replay. transport | tunnel Defines the IPSec mode. In tunnel mode, the active IP packet is encapsulated. In transport mode, no encapsulation occurs. Tunnel mode is appropriate when both of end points in an exchange lie beyond gateway devices. Transport mode is appropriate when either end point is a gateway. proposal name_str Defines up to four Phase 2 proposals. A Phase 2 proposal determines how a NetScreen device sends VPN session traffic. sec_level Specifies a predefined set of proposals.
Example: In the following example you define an IKE gateway for a remote site in London. The gateway has the following elements: The remote gateway is named London_Office, with IP address 2.2.2.2. The outgoing interface is ethernet3. The Phase 1 proposal consists of the following components: DSA certificate for data source authentication Diffie-Hellman group 2 to protect the exchange of keying information AES-128 encryption algorithm MD-5 authentication algorithm
644
pppoa through zone
You then reference that gateway in a VPN tunnel that has the following elements: The tunnel is named London_Tunnel. The Phase 2 proposal consists of the following components: Diffie-Hellman group 2 to protect the keying information during Phase 2 key exchanges Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) to provide both confidentiality through encryption and encapsulation of the original IP packet and integrity through authentication AES-128 encryption algorithm MD-5 authentication algorithm set ike gateway London_Office ip 2.2.2.2 outgoing-interface ethernet3 proposal dsa-g2-aes128-md5 set vpn London_Tunnel gateway London_Office proposal g2-esp-aes128-sha
manual
get vpn tunn_str [ detail ] manual set vpn tunn_str manual spi_num1 spi_num2 gateway ip_addr [ ... ] { ... }
manual Specifies a Manual Key VPN. When the NetScreen device is in Manual mode, you can encrypt and authenticate by HEX key or password. spi_num1 and spi_num2 are 32-bit local and remote security parameters index (SPI) numbers. Each SPI number uniquely distinguishes a particular tunnel from any other active tunnel. Each must be a hexadecimal value between 3000 and 2fffffff. The local SPI corresponds to the remote SPI at the other end of the tunnel, and vice-versa.
645
pppoa through zone
monitor
set vpn tunn_str monitor [ ... ] [ destination-ip ip_addr ] [ ... ] unset vpn tunn_str monitor
monitor Directs the NetScreen device to send VPN monitor messages to a NetScreen-Remote client or a non-NetScreen peer device. The source-interface interface option specifies the interface through which the NetScreen device sends the monitor messages. destination-ip specifies the destination IP address for the VPN monitoring feature to ping. optimized performs optimization for scalability. rekey triggers rekey of an autokey VPN is a tunnel is down.
Example: The following command uses ethernet3 as the source interface and 10.1.1.5 as the destination IP address for VPN monitoring through a VPN tunnel named tun1: set vpn tun1 monitor source-interface ethernet3 destination-ip 10.1.1.5
outgoing-interface
set vpn tunn_str manual spi_num1 spi_num2 gateway ip_addr [ ... ] outgoing-interface interface { ... }
outgoing-interface Defines the interface through which the NetScreen device sends traffic for this Manual Key VPN. For more information on interfaces, see Interface Names on page A-I.
646
pppoa through zone
proxy-id
get vpn proxy-id set vpn tunn_str proxy-id local-ip ip_addr/mask remote-ip ip_addr/mask svc_name unset vpn vpn_name proxy-id
proxy-id Specifies the three-part tuple consisting of local IP addressremote IP addressservice. local-ip ip_addr/mask The local IP address that sends and receives traffic through the tunnel. remote-ip ip_addr/mask The remote IP address that sends and receives traffic through the tunnel. svc_name The name of the service, such as FTP, TELNET, DNS or HTTP that passes through the tunnel. (Specifying any enables all services.)
Example: The following command creates a VPN proxy configuration for a VPN (Sales) with the HTTP service: set vpn Sales proxy-id local-ip 10.1.1.0/24 remote-ip 10.2.2.0/24 HTTP
rekey
set vpn corp monitor rekey
rekey Keeps the SA active even if there is no other VPN traffic.
sec-level
set vpn tunn_str gateway { name_str | ip_addr } [ ... ] { ... } sec-level { basic | compatible | standard }
sec-level Specifies which pre-defined security proposal to use for IKE. The basic proposal provides basic-level security settings. The compatible proposal provides the most widely-used settings. The standard proposal provides settings recommended by NetScreen.
647
pppoa through zone
vpn-group
Description: Use the vpn-group commands to define or remove VPN groups, or to display VPN groups. A VPN group is a collection of defined VPN tunnels. A VPN group allows the NetScreen device to perform tunnel failover. Each tunnel in the group has an assigned weight. When the NetScreen device invokes a policy that uses a VPN group, the device constructs all tunnels in the group, and the tunnel with the greatest weight becomes active by default. The IKE heartbeat periodically checks to see if this tunnel is working. If it is not, the device uses the tunnel with the next highest weight.
Syntax
get
get vpn-group [ id id_num ]
set
set vpn-group id id_num [ vpn tunn_str [ weight number ] ]
unset
unset vpn-group id id_num [ vpn tunn_str [ weight number ] ]

id
get vpn-group id id_num set vpn-group id id_num [ ... ] unset vpn-group id id_num [ ... ]
id Specifies an identification number for a VPN group.
648
pppoa through zone
vpn
set vpn-group id id_num vpn tunn_str [ ... ] unset vpn-group id id_num vpn tunn_str
vpn Specifies the name of a VPN to be placed in a VPN group or removed from it.
weight
set vpn-group id id_num vpn tunn_str weight number unset vpn-group id id_num vpn tunn_str weight number
weight Specifies a weight (priority) for the VPN relative to other VPNs in the group. The higher the number, the higher the priority.
Example: With the following commands, you create two VPN tunnels (vpn1 and vpn2). You place them in a VPN group with ID 1001, which you then reference in a policy permitting traffic from addr1 in the Trust zone to addr2 in the Untrust zone beyond the remote gateway. You assign vpn1 a greater weight, giving it priority. If traffic cannot pass through vpn1, the NetScreen device redirects it through vpn2: set set set set set set set ike gateway gw1 ip 1.1.1.1 preshare bi273T1L proposal pre-g2-3des-md5 ike gateway gw2 ip 2.2.2.2 preshare r3ix6403 proposal pre-g2-aes128-md5 vpn vpn1 gateway gw1 replay proposal g2-esp-3des-sha vpn vpn2 gateway gw2 replay proposal g2-esp-3des-sha vpn-group id 1001 vpn vpn1 weight 1 vpn-group id 1001 vpn vpn2 weight 2 policy from trust to untrust addr1 addr2 HTTP tunnel vpn-group 1001
649
pppoa through zone
vpnmonitor
Description: Use the vpnmonitor commands to set the monitor frequency and threshold. The NetScreen ScreenOS provides the ability to determine the status and condition of active VPNs through the use of ICMP pings, and report the conditions by using SNMP VPN monitoring objects and traps. To enable your SNMP manager application to recognize the VPN monitoring MIBs, you must import the NetScreen-specific MIB extension files into the application. The MIB extension files are on the NetScreen documentation CD that shipped with the NetScreen device.
Syntax
get
get vpnmonitor
set
set vpnmonitor { interval number | threshold number }
unset
unset vpnmonitor interval { interval | threshold }
650
pppoa through zone

interval
set vpnmonitor interval number unset vpnmonitor interval
interval Specifies the monitor frequency interval (in seconds).
threshold
set vpnmonitor threshold number unset vpnmonitor threshold
threshold Specifies the monitor threshold, the number of consecutive times the device can send vpnmonitor requests without getting a response before the device changes the VPN Link-Status to down.
651
pppoa through zone
vrouter
Description: Use the vrouter commands to configure a virtual router on the NetScreen device. Executing the set vrouter name_str command without specifying further options places the CLI in the routing context. For example, the following command places the CLI in the trust-vr routing context: set vrouter trust-vr To set protocol specific parameters, refer to the Interfaces section of this CLI Reference Guide. Protocol-specific commands for RIP, OSPF, IGMP, and PIM are listed alphabetically by name in this CLI Reference Guide.
Syntax
exec
exec vrouter name_str protocol bgp neighbor ip_addr { connect | disconnect | tcp-connect }
652
pppoa through zone
get
get vrouter name_str [ access-list | config | default-vrouter | interface | mcore [ cachemiss ] | mroute [ brief ] [ mgroup <ip_addr> brief | source <ip_addr> [ brief | iif interface ] ] preference | protocol { bgp | ospf | rip | pim}1 | route [ id id_num | ip ip_addr | prefix ip_addr/mask | protocol { bgp | connected | imported | ospf | rip | static } source [ id id_num | in-interface [ interface ] | ip ip_addr | prefix ip_addr/mask | ] |
1. For more information on the protocol { bgp | ospf | rip } options, see the bgp, ospf, and rip command descriptions.
653
pppoa through zone
summary ] | route-lookup preference | route-map [ name_str ] [ config | number [ config | match | set ] ] | router-id | rule | statistics | zone
]
set
set vrouter { name name_str | name_str } [ access-list id_num { permit | deny } { ip ip_addr/mask | default-route } number | add-default-route vrouter untrust-vr | adv-inact-interface auto-route-export | default-vrouter | export-to | import-from vrouter name_str route-map name_str protocol { bgp | connected | imported | ospf | rip | static } ignore-subnet-conflict | max-ecmp-routes number | max-routes number | mroute { max-entries number | mgroup ip_addr source ip_addr iif interface oif interface out-group ip_addr| multiple-iif-enable |
654
pppoa through zone
negative-cache [ timer number ] } nsrp-config-sync | preference { auto-exported number | connected number | ebgp number | ibgp number | imported number | ospf number | ospf-e2 number | rip number static number } | protocol { bgp | ospf | rip | pim}2 | route [ source ] [ in-interface interface ] ip_addr/mask { interface interface [ gateway ip_addr ] [ metric number ] [ permanent ] [ preference number ][ tag id_num ] | vrouter name_str } | route-lookup preference [ destination-routing number | sibr-routing number | source-routing number | ]| route-map { name name_str { permit | deny } number | name_str number }
2. For more information on the protocol options, see the bgp, ospf, or rip command descriptions.
655
pppoa through zone
[ as-path id_num | community id_num | local-pref number | match { as-path id_num | community id_num | interface interface | ip id_num | metric number | next-hop id_num | route-type { internal-ospf | type1-external-ospf | type2-external-ospf } | tag { number | ip_addr } }| metric number | metric-type { type-1 | type-2 } | next-hop ip_addr | offset-metric number | origin { igp | incomplete } preserve preference | preserve metric | tag { number | ip_addr } | weight number ] router-id { id_num | ip_addr } | sharable | sibr-routing enable | snmp trap private | source-routing enable ]
656
pppoa through zone
unset
unset vrouter name_str [ access-list id_num [ ip_addr/mask number | default-route number ] | add-default-route | adv-inact-interface | auto-route-export | export-to | import-from vrouter name_str route-map name_str protocol { bgp | connected | imported | ospf | rip | static } | ignore-subnet-conflict | max-ecmp-routes | max-routes | mroute { max-entries | mgroup ip_addr source ip_addr iif interface oif interface | multiple-iif-enable | negative-cache [ timer ] } nsrp-config-sync | preference { auto-exported | connected | ebgp | ibgp | imported | ospf | ospf-e2 | rip | static } | 3 protocol { bgp | ospf | rip | pim } |
657
pppoa through zone
route [ source ] [ in-interface interface ] ip_addr/mask [ vrouter name_str | interface interface [ gateway ip_addr ] ] | route-lookup preference | route-map name_str [ number ] | as-path | community | local-pref | match { as-path | community | interface | ip | metric | next-hop | route-type | tag | }| metric | metric-type | next-hop | offset-metric | preserve metric | preserve preference | tag | weight
3.
For more information on the protocol { bgp | ospf | rip } options, see the bgp, ospf, and rip command descriptions.
658
pppoa through zone
] | router-id | sharable sibr-routing enable | snmp trap private | source-routing enable | ]

Variable Parameter
set vrouter name_str
name_str The name of the virtual router. The name can be a predefined virtual router, such as trust-vr or untrust-vr, or it can be a user-defined virtual router created with the name keyword. (Creating custom virtual routers is only supported on certain NetScreen devices and requires a vsys software key.).
Example: The following commands activate the trust-vr virtual router context, activate the BGP routing context, and execute the context-dependent command get config. set vrouter trust-vr ns(trust-vr)-> set protocol bgp ns(trust-vr/bgp)-> get config
access-list
get vrouter name_str access-list set vrouter name_str access-list id_num { permit | deny } { ip ip_addr/mask | default-route } number }
659
pppoa through zone
unset vrouter name_str access-list id_num [ ip_addr/mask | default-route ] number

access-list Creates or removes an access list, or entries in the access list. Each entry permits (or denies) routes according to IP address and mask, or default route. The id_num value identifies the access list. The number identifies the sequence number for this entry in the access list. permit Directs the virtual router to permit the route. deny Directs the virtual router to deny the route. default-route Enters the default route for the virtual router into the access list.
add-default-route
set vrouter name_str add-default-route vrouter name_str unset vrouter name_str add-default-route
add-default-route Adds a default route with the next hop as another virtual router. (This command is available only in the default virtual router of the current vsys, and only if this virtual router is not untrust-vr.)
adv-inact-interface
set vrouter name_str adv-inact-interface unset vrouter name_str adv-inact-interface
adv-inact-interface Directs the virtual router to consider active routes on inactive interfaces for redistribution or export. By default, only active routes defined on active interfaces can be redistributed to other protocols or exported to other virtual routers.
auto-route-export
set vrouter name_str auto-route-export
660
pppoa through zone
unset vrouter name_str auto-route-export

auto-route-export Directs the virtual router to export public interface routes to the untrust-vr vrouter. An interface is public if it is in Route mode, and private if it is in NAT mode. For information on Route mode and NAT mode, refer to the NetScreen Concepts and Examples Reference Guide. Note: The auto-route-export switch does not take effect if the specified vrouter (name_str) has export or import rules to the untrust-vr virtual router.
config
get vrouter name_str config
config Displays configuration information about the virtual router.
default-vrouter
get vrouter name_str default-vrouter set vrouter name_str default-vrouter
default-vrouter Sets the specified virtual router as the default router for the vsys.
export-to | import-from
set vrouter name_str { export-to | import-from } vrouter name_str { ... } unset vrouter name_str { export-to | import-from } vrouter name_str { ... }
export-to | import-from Directs the virtual router to import routes from another virtual router (source), or to export routes to another virtual router (destination). vrouter name_str identifies the source or destination virtual router. route-map name_str identifies the route map that filters the imported or exported routes. protocol Specifies the protocol for the imported or exported routes. - bgp Directs the virtual router to import or export Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routes.
661
pppoa through zone
- connected Directs the virtual router to import or export connected routes. - imported Directs the virtual router to import or export routes that were redistributed into the virtual router from another virtual router. - ospf Directs the virtual router to import or export Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routes. - rip Directs the virtual router to import or export Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routes. - static Directs the virtual router to import or export static routes. default-route Directs the virtual router to export or import the default route.
ignore-subnet-conflict
set vrouter name_str ignore-subnet-conflict unset vrouter name_str ignore-subnet-conflict
ignore-subnetconflict Directs the virtual router to ignore overlapping subnet addresses for interfaces in the virtual router. By default, you cannot configure overlapping subnet IP addresses on interfaces in the same virtual router.
interface
get vrouter name_str interface
interface Displays the interfaces in the virtual router.
max-ecmp-routes
set vrouter name_str max-ecmp-routes number unset vrouter name_str max-ecmp-routes
max-ecmproutes Specifies the maximum number of equal cost multipath (ECMP) routes to the same destination network. Enter a value between 1 and 4 (1 is the default).
662
pppoa through zone
max-routes
set vrouter name_str max-routes number unset vrouter name_str max-routes
max-routes Specifies the maximum number of routing entries allowed for this virtual router. By default, the maximum number of entries allowed for a virtual router depends upon the NetScreen device and the number of virtual routers configured on the device.
mcore
get vrouter name_str mcore [ cachemiss ]
mcore cachemiss Displays multicast routing information for each interface on which a multicast routing protocol is enabled. Displays the current multicast cachemiss data.
mroute
get vrouter name_str brief get vrouter name_str mroute mgroup ip_addr1 brief get {...} mroute mgroup ip_addr1 source ip_addr2 [ brief | iif interface1 ] set vrouter name_str mroute max-entries number set {...} mroute mgroup ip_addr1 source ip_addr2 iif interface1 oif interface2 set {...} mroute mgroup ip_addr1 {...} out-group ip_addr3 set vrouter name_str mroute multiple-iif-enable set vrouter name_str negative-cache [ timer number ] unset vrouter name_str mroute max-entries unset {...} mroute mgroup ip_addr1 source ip_addr2 iif interface1 oif interface2
663
pppoa through zone
unset vrouter name_str mroute multiple-iif-enable unset vrouter name_str negative-cache [ timer number ]
brief max-entries mroute Displays summary information. Specifies the maximum number of multicast routes allowed in the multicast routing table. Configures a static multicast route in the specified virtual router. ip_addr1 is the multicast group address of the route ip_addr2 is the source address of the multicast data interface1 is the incoming interface of the multicast data interface2 is the outgoing interface of the multicast data ip_addr3 is the multicast group address on the outgoing interface multiple-iif-enable negative-cache Permits multiple multicast routes for the same source and group. Creates negative multicast routes if the protocol that owns the interface on which the packet was received cannot create a forwarding multicast route. The NetScreen device drops packets when they need to go on a negative multicast route. You can also set the timer value to specify the duration, in seconds, that the NetScreen device maintains the entries in the negative cache. The NetScreen device removes the entry in the negative cache when it receives information enabling it to create a forwarding multicast route entry.
name
set vrouter name name_str
name Specifies the name of a user-defined virtual router. Creating custom virtual routers is only supported on certain NetScreen devices and requires a vsys software key.
664
pppoa through zone
nsrp-config-sync
set vrouter name_str nsrp-config-sync unset vrouter name_str nsrp-config-sync
nsrp-config-sync Synchronizes the specified virtual router (name_str) with the same virtual router on a NSRP peer. This switch is enabled by default.
preference
get vrouter name_str preference set vrouter name_str preference unset vrouter name_str preference
preference Specifies route preference level based upon protocol. The lower the value, the more preference given to the route. You can specify a value between 1-255. auto-exported Specifies preference levels for routes (defined on public interfaces) that the virtual router automatically exports to the untrust-vr virtual router. The default is 30. connected Specifies preference level for connected routes. The default is 0. ebgp Specifies preference level for External Border Gateway Protocol (EBGP) routes. The default is 120. ibgp Specifies preference level for Internal Border Gateway Protocol (IBGP) routes. The default is 40. imported Specifies preference level for pre-existing routes exported to another protocol and passed on to other routers. The default is 140. ospf Specifies preference level for Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routes. The default is 60. ospf-e2 Specifies preference level for OSPF External Type 2 routes. The default is 200. rip Specifies preference level for Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routes. The default is 100. static Specifies preference level for static routes. The default is 20.
665
pppoa through zone
protocol
exec vrouter name_str protocol { ... } get vrouter name_str protocol { bgp | ospf | rip | pim } set vrouter name_str protocol { bgp | ospf | rip | pim } unset vrouter name_str protocol { bgp | ospf | rip | pim }
protocol Places the NetScreen device in the context of the specified protocol : BGP, OSPF, RIP or PIM. (For information on these contexts, see the bgp, ospf, rip or pim command descriptions in this manual.) The exec vrouter name_str protocol bgp neighbor ip_addr command has the following options: connect Establishes a BGP connection to the specified neighbor. disconnect Terminates a BGP connection to the specified neighbor. tcp-connect Tests the TCP connection to the neighbor.
route
get vrouter name_str route [ ... ] set vrouter name_str route [ source ] [ in-interface interface ] ip_addr/mask [ ... ] unset vrouter name_str route [ source ] [ in-interface interface ] ip_addr/mask [ ... ]
route Configures routes for the routing table for the virtual router. ip_addr/mask Specifies the IP address that appears in the routing table. gateway ip_addr Specifies the gateway for the next hop. id id_num Displays information for the route that matches the ID number. The ID number is a system-assigned number that you can see when you enter the get vrouter name_str route command with no options. in-interface interface For source interface-based routes, specifies the interface on which a packet arrives on the NetScreen device.
666
pppoa through zone
interface interface Specifies the interface on which a packet for this route is to be forwarded. ip ip_addr Displays the route for the specified IP address. metric number Specifies the cost of the route. Specify a value between 1 and 65535. permanent Specifies that the route is kept active when the interface is down or the IP address is removed from the interface. preference number Specifies the preference value for the route. Specify a value between 0 and 255. prefix ip_addr/mask Displays the routes within the specified subnet address. protocol Displays BGP, connected, imported, OSPF, RIP, or static routes. source Specifies that the route is a source-based route. When displaying a source-based route, you can optionally specify: - id id_num - ip ip_addr - prefix ip_addr/mask summary Displays a summary of the routes. tag number For destination-based routes, specifies the tag for this route. The tag can be used as a filter when redistributing routes (see the route-map keyword). Specify a value between 1 and 65535. vrouter name_str Specifies a virtual router as the next hop.
route-lookup preference
get vrouter name_str route-lookup preference set vrouter name_str route-lookup preference [ destination-routing number ] [ sibr-routing number ] [ source-routing number ] unset vrouter name_str route-lookup preference
route-lookup preference Configures the order in which route lookups occur in the virtual router. The route lookup type that has the highest preference value is performed first, followed by the next highest preference value. The route lookup type that has the lowest preference value is performed last. Enter a number between 1-255 for the preference.
667
pppoa through zone
destination-routing number Specifies the preference for route lookups based on destination IP address. The default value is 1. sibr-routing number Specifies the preference for route lookups based on source interface. The default value is 3. source-routing number Specifies the preference for route lookups based on source IP address. The default is 2.
route-map
get vrouter name_str route-map [ ... ] set vrouter name_str { ... } vrouter name_str route-map { name name_str | name_str } [ ... ] unset vrouter name_str { ... } vrouter name_str route-map name_str [ ... ]
route-map Configures a route map for the virtual router. With the name keyword, the route-map option creates a new route map (name_str). Otherwise, name_str configures an existing route map. Each entry in the route map must have a sequence number (number) that identifies the order in which the route map entries are compared against an incoming or outgoing route. The permit and deny switches determine if the entry allows redistribution of routes to another virtual router or another protocol. The match keyword directs the virtual router to match routes to specified parameters. You can match the following parameters: as-path id_num Specifies an AS path access list that defines the BGP AS path attribute to be matched. community id_num Specifies a BGP community list (id_num) that defines the community attribute to be matched. interface interface Specifies an interface on the NetScreen device. ip id_num Specifies an access list that defines the IP addresses of routes to be matched. metric number The cost of the route. Enter a number between 1-65535. next-hop id_num Specifies an access list that defines the next-hop for routes to be matched
668
pppoa through zone
route-type Specifies which kind of OSPF route matches the route map entry. - internal-ospf Matches only OSPF internal routes. - type1-external-ospf Matches only external OSPF Type-1 routes. - type2-external-ospf Matches only external OSPF Type-2 routes. tag { number | ip_addr } Matches either a route tag or an IP address. Other keywords allow you to optionally set values for parameters on matching routes. You can set the following parameters: as-path id_num Specifies the AS path access list values that are prepended to the path list of the matching route. community id_num Specifies the community list values that are set in the community attribute for the matching route. local-pref number Specifies the path preference for the matching route. metric number Specifies the metric for the matching route. Enter a number between 1-65535. metric-type Specifies OSPF metric type that is set for the matching route. - type-1 Specifies OSPF Type-1 route. - type-2 Specifies OSPF Type-2 route. next-hop ip_addr Specifies the next hop IP address for the matching route. offset-metric number Specifies the value to increment the metric for the matching route. For RIP routes, you can use this option for routes that are advertised or routes that are learned. For other routes, you can use this option to routes that are exported into another virtual router. origin Specifies the origin of a route advertised by BGP preserve metric Specifies that the metric value for the matching route is preserved when the route is exported to another virtual router. preserve preference Specifies that the preference value for the matching route is preserved when the route is exported to another virtual router. tag { number | ip_addr } Specifies a tag or IP address for the matching route. weight number Sets the weight of the matching route for BGP.
669
pppoa through zone
While configuring a route map, you can use the get config, get match, and get set commands to display route map configuration commands, or match or set conditions.
router-id
get vrouter name_str router-id set vrouter name_str router-id { id_num | ip_addr } unset vrouter name_str router-id
router-id Specifies the router identification that the virtual router uses to communicate with other routing devices. You can enter the router identification in either a dotted decimal notation (like an IP address) or a decimal number (this is converted to 0.0.0.number). If you do not specify a router identification, the device uses the highest IP address of the any interface in the virtual router as the router identification.
rule
get vrouter name_str rule
rule Displays import and export rules for the virtual router.
sharable
set vrouter name_str sharable unset vrouter name_str sharable
sharable Makes the root-level virtual router accessible from any virtual system (vsys) on the device.
670
pppoa through zone
sibr-routing enable
set vrouter name_str sibr-routing enable unset vrouter name_str sibr-routing enable
source- routing enable Directs the virtual router to perform routing table lookups based on the source interface.
snmp
set vrouter name_str snmp trap private unset vrouter name_str snmp trap private
snmp Makes SNMP traps private for the dynamic routing MIBs under the virtual router. Private traps include the virtual router identification.This option is available only for the default root-level virtual router. (This is usually the trust-vr virtual router, although you can change the default virtual router at the root level.)
source-routing enable
set vrouter name_str source-routing enable unset vrouter name_str source-routing enable
source- routing enable Directs the virtual router to perform routing table lookups based on source IP address.
statistics
get vrouter name_str statistics
statistics Displays statistics for the virtual router.
671
pppoa through zone
zone
get vrouter name_str zone
zone Displays the zones bound to the virtual router.
672
pppoa through zone
vsys
Description: Use the vsys commands to create and configure virtual systems from the root level of a NetScreen device. Virtual systems allow you to logically partition a single NetScreen security system to provide multi-tenant services. Each virtual system (vsys) is a unique security domain and can have its own administrators, called virtual system administrators or vsys admins. Such adminstrators can individualize their security domain by setting their own address books, virtual routers, user lists, custom services, VPNs, and policies. (Only a root-level administrator can set firewall security options, create virtual system administrators, and define interfaces and subinterfaces.) When you execute the set vsys command, the command prompt changes to indicate that you are now operating within a virtual system. Use the unset vsys command to remove a specific virtual system and all its settings.
Syntax
get
get vsys [ name_str ]
set
set vsys name_str [ vrouter [ name [ name_str ] [ id id_num ] [ vsd number ] | share [ name_str ] [ vsd number ] | vsd number ] | vsd number ]
673
pppoa through zone
unset
unset vsys name_str

Variable Parameters
get vsys [ name_str ] set vsys name_str unset vsys name_str
name_str Defines the name of a virtual system (vsys) and automatically places the root level admin within the vsys. Subsequent commands configure the newly created vsys.
Example: The following command creates a virtual system named vsys1 and switches the console to the new virtual system: set vsys vsys1
vrouter
set vsys name_str vrouter [ name [ name_str ] [ id id_num ] [ vsd number ] ] set vsys name_str vrouter [ share [ name_str ] [ vsd number ] ]
vrouter Defines and configures the default virtual router for the vsys. name Specifies a name for the virtual router. - id id_num Assigns an identification number to the virtual router. - vsd id_num See vsd on page 675. share Specifies a shared root-level virtual router to use as a default router. vsd id_num See vsd on page 675.
674
pppoa through zone
Examples: The following command creates a vsys named Acme_Org, creates a virtual router named Acme_Router with ID 1025, and switches the console to the new virtual system: set vsys Acme_Org vrouter name Acme_Router id 1025 The following command creates a vsys named Acme_Org and specifies a default, root-level virtual router (trust-vr): set vsys Acme_Org vrouter share trust-vr
vsd
set vsys name_str vrouter [ vsd number ]
vsd number Assigns a Virtual Security Device (VSD) group number to the virtual router. A VSD group is a pair of physical NetScreen devices (a primary and a backup) that collectively comprise a single VSD. A VSD provides failover capability, allowing the backup device to take over if the primary device fails. For more information on VSD groups, see the NetScreen Concepts & Examples ScreenOS Reference Guide.
Example: The following command creates a vsys named Acme_Org, creates a virtual router named Acme_Router, creates a VSD ID 5, and switches the console to the new virtual system: set vsys Acme_Org vrouter vsd 5
675
pppoa through zone
webauth
Description: Use the webauth commands to configure the NetScreen device to perform WebAuth authentication. WebAuth is an authentication method that requires the user to initiate an HTTP session and input authentication information, before the user can send traffic to the destination node. You specify authentication in policy definitions (see the auth keyword description in policy on page 471).
Syntax
get
get webauth [ banner ]
set
set webauth { banner success string | server name_str }
unset
unset webauth { banner success | server }
676
pppoa through zone

banner success
get webauth banner set webauth banner success string unset webauth banner success
banner success Specifies the banner (string) displayed in response to WebAuth success.
Example: The following command changes the WebAuth success banner to WebAuth service successful: set webauth banner success WebAuth service successful
server
set webauth server name_str unset webauth banner server
server Specifies the WebAuth server name (name_str). (You can obtain all existing WebAuth server names by executing the command get auth-server all.)
Example: The following command specifies a WebAuth server named wa_serv1: set webauth server wa_serv1
Defaults
The default banner value is WebAuth Success.
677
pppoa through zone
webtrends
Description: Use the webtrends commands to configure the NetScreen device for WebTrends. The WebTrends Firewall Suite allows you to customize syslog reports of critical, alert, and emergency events to display the information you want in a graphical format. You can create reports that focus on areas such as firewall attacks (emergency-level events) or on all events with the severity levels of critical, alert, and emergency.
Syntax
get
get webtrends
set
set webtrends { VPN | enable | host-name name_str | port port_num }
unset
unset webtrends { VPN | enable | host-name | port }
678
pppoa through zone

vpn
set webtrends VPN unset webtrends VPN
vpn Enables WebTrends VPN encryption.
enable
set webtrends enable unset webtrends enable
enable Enables WebTrends.
host-name
set webtrends host-name name_str unset webtrends host-name
host-name Specifies the WebTrends host name.
port
set webtrends port port_num unset webtrends port
port port_num Specifies the WebTrends host port.
679
pppoa through zone
xauth
Description: Use the xauth commands to configure the NetScreen device to perform XAuth authentication. An XAuth user or user group is one or more remote users who authenticate themselves when connecting to the NetScreen device via an AutoKey IKE VPN tunnel and optionally receive TCP/IP settings from the NetScreen device. Whereas IKE user authentication is actually the authentication of VPN gateways or clients, XAuth user authentication is the authentication of the users themselves. It requires each user to enter information unique to that user (the user name and password).
Syntax
get
get xauth { active | default | lifetime }
set
set xauth { default { auth server name_str [ chap ] [ query-config ] | dns1 ip_addr | dns2 ip_addr | ippool name_str | wins1 ip_addr | wins2 ip_addr } | lifetime number }
680
pppoa through zone
unset
unset xauth { default { dns1 | dns2 | ippool | wins1 | wins2 } | lifetime }

active
get xauth active
active Displays all currently active XAuth login instances.
default
get xauth default set xauth default { ... } unset xauth default { ... }
default Sets or displays default XAuth settings. auth server Identifies the XAuth server by object name (name_str). - chap Directs the NetScreen device to use Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) while performing authentication with the XAuth client. - query-config Queries client settings (such as IP addresses for XAuth clients and DNS server IP addresses) from an external authentication server. dns1 Identifies the DNS primary server by IP address (ip_addr). dns2 Identifies the DNS secondary server by IP address (ip_addr). ippool Identifies the pool of IP addresses from which the NetScreen device draws when assigning addresses to XAuth clients.
681
pppoa through zone
wins1 Identifies the WINS primary server by IP address (ip_addr). wins2 Identifies the WINS secondary server by IP address (ip_addr).
Example: The following command sets up the NetScreen device to use a XAuth server (Our_Auth): set xauth default auth server Our_Auth
lifetime
get xauth lifetime set xauth lifetime number unset xauth lifetime number
lifetime number Specifies the maximum length of time (in minutes) that the XAuth server holds resources (such as IP address) on behalf of a client.
Example: The following command specifies a maximum XAuth session length of 30 minutes: set xauth lifetime 30
682
pppoa through zone
zone
Description: Use the zone commands to create, remove, or display a security zone, and to set screen options. A security zone is method for sectioning the network into segments to which you can apply various security options. You can configure multiple security zones for individual NetScreen devices, thus dividing the network into segments to which you can apply security options. There must be at least two security zones per device, basically to protect one area of the network from the other. On some NetScreen platforms, you can define many security zones, bringing finer granularity to your network security design, without deploying multiple security appliances. Each security zone has at least one interface bound to it. For a brief description of the interfaces, see Interface Names on page A-I. For information on security zones, see Zone Names on page B-I.
Syntax
get
get zone [ id id_num | all | zone [ screen { all | attack | counter | info } ] ]
set
set zone { name zone [ { L2 id_num | tunnel zone } ] | zone { asymmetric-vpn | block | screen
683
pppoa through zone
{ alarm-without-drop | block-frag | component-block [ activex | java | zip | exe ] | fin-no-ack | icmp-flood [ threshold number ] | icmp-fragment | icmp-large | ip-bad-option | ip-filter-src | ip-loose-src-route | ip-record-route | ip-security-opt | ip-spoofing [ drop-no-rpf-route | zone-based ] | ip-stream-opt | ip-strict-src-route | ip-sweep [ threshold number ] | ip-timestamp-opt | land | limit-session [ source-ip-based number | destination-ip-based [ number ] ] | mal-url { string1 string2 number | code-red } | ping-death | port-scan [ threshold number ] | syn-ack-ack-proxy [ threshold number ] | syn-fin | syn-flood [ alarm-threshold number | attack-threshold number | destination-threshold number | drop-unknown-mac | queue-size number | source-threshold number | timeout number ] |
pppoa through zone
syn-frag | tcp-no-flag | tear-drop | udp-flood [ dst-ip ip_addr | threshold number ] | unknown-protocol | winnuke } reassembly-for-alg | tcp-rst | vrouter name_str } | }
unset
unset zone zone { asymmetric-vpn | block | screen { block-frag | component-block | fin-no-ack | icmp-flood [ threshold ] | icmp-fragment | icmp-large | ip-bad-option | ip-filter-src | ip-loose-src-route | ip-record-route | ip-security-opt | ip-spoofing [ drop-no-rpf-route | zone-based ] | ip-stream-opt | ip-strict-src-route |
685
pppoa through zone
ip-sweep [ threshold ] | ip-timestamp-opt | land | limit-session [ source-ip-based | destination-ip-based ] | mal-url { string1 | code-red } | ping-death | port-scan [ threshold ] | syn-ack-ack-proxy [ threshold number ] | syn-fin | syn-flood [ alarm-threshold | attack-threshold | destination-threshold number | drop-unknown-mac | queue-size | source-threshold | timeout ] | syn-frag | tcp-no-flag | tear-drop | udp-flood [ threshold number ] | unknown-protocol | winnuke } tcp-rst | }
686
pppoa through zone

Variable Parameters
get zone zone [ ... ] set zone zone { ... } unset zone zone { ... }
zone The name of the zone. For more information on zones and zone names, see Zone Names on page B-I.
all
get zone all [ ... ]
all Displays information on all existing zones.
asymmetric-vpn
set zone asymmetric-vpn
asymmetric-vpn When enabled, this option allows any incoming VPN traffic in a zone to match any applicable VPN session, regardless of the origin for the original VPN tunnel. For example, traffic coming from VPN A can match a session created by traffic for VPN B. This feature allows free routing of VPN traffic between two or more sites when there are multiple possible paths for VPN traffic. Note: It is not advisable to mix policy-based and route-based VPNs for asymmetric traffic.
block
set zone zone block unset zone zone block
block Imposes intra-zone traffic blocking.
687
pppoa through zone
name
set zone name zone { ... }
name Creates a new zone with name zone. L2 id_num specifies that the zone is Layer-2 (for running the device in Transparent Mode). The ID number (id_num) identifies the VLAN to which the zone is bound. The name you specify (zone) must begin with L2-. tunnel zone specifies that the new zone is a VPN tunnel zone, and identifies the tunnel-out zone (zone).
Examples: The following command creates a new Layer-2 zone named L2-Sales, with VLAN ID number 1: set zone name L2-Sales L2 1 The following command creates a tunnel zone named Engineering, and specify untrust as the out zone: set zone name Engineering tunnel untrust
reassembly-for-alg
set zone untrust reassembly-for-alg
reassembly-for-alg Reassembles all fragmented IP packets and TCP segments for HTTP and FTP traffic that arrives at any interface bound to the zone on which you enable this option. With this option enabled, the NetScreen device can better detect malicious URLs that an attacker has deliberately broken into packet or segment fragments. Packet and segment reassembly also improves application layer gateway (ALG) filtering by allowing the NetScreen device to examine the complete text within payloads.
688
pppoa through zone
screen
set zone zone screen { ... } set zone zone screen { ... }
screen Enables or disables firewall services through the interface. alarm-without-drop Generates an alarm when detecting an attack, but does not block the attack. This option is useful if you allow the attack to enter a segment of your network that you have previously prepared to receive itsuch as a honeynet, which is essentially a decoy network with extensive monitoring capabilities. block-frag Enables IP packet fragmentation blocking. component-block Selectively blocks HTTP traffic containing any of the following components: - activex ActiveX controls - java Java applets - exe .EXE files - zip ZIP files An attacker can use any of these components to load an application (a Trojan Horse) on a protected host, then use the application to gain control of the host. If you enable the blocking of HTTP components without specifying which components, the NetScreen device blocks them all. Alternatively, you can configure the NetScreen device to block only specified components. Note: If you enable ActiveX-blocking, the NetScreen device also blocks packets containing Java applets, .exe files, and .zip files because they might be contained within an ActiveX control. fin-no-ack Detects an illegal combination of flags, and rejects packets that have them. icmp-flood [ threshold number ] Detects and prevents Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) floods. An ICMP flood occurs when ICMP echo requests are broadcast with the purpose of flooding a system with so much data that it first slows down, and then times out and is disconnected. The threshold defines the number of ICMP packets per second allowed to ping the same destination address before the NetScreen device rejects further ICMP packets. The range is 1 to 1,000,000. icmp-fragment Detects and drops any ICMP frame with the More Fragments flag set, or with an offset indicated in the offset field.
689
pppoa through zone
icmp-large Detects and drops any ICMP frame with an IP length greater the 1024. ip-bad-option Detects and drops any packet with an incorrectly formatted IP option in the IP packet header. The NetScreen device records the event in the SCREEN counters list for the ingress interface. ip-filter-src Detects and drops all packets with the Source Route Option enabled. The Source Route Option can allow an attacker to use a false IP address to access a network, and receive returned traffic addressed to the real IP address of the attackers host device. The administrator can block all IP Source Routed frames having Strict Source Routing (or Loose Source Routing) enabled. ip-loose-src-route Detects packets where the IP option is 3 (Loose Source Routing) and records the event in the SCREEN counters list for the ingress interface. This option specifies a partial route list for a packet to take on its journey from source to destination. The packet must proceed in the order of addresses specified, but it is allowed to pass through other routers in between those specified. ip-record-route Detects packets where the IP option is 7 (Record Route) and records the event in the SCREEN counters list for the ingress interface. ip-security-opt Detects packets where the IP option is 2 (security) and records the event in the SCREEN counters list for the ingress interface.
690
pppoa through zone
ip-spoofing Prevents spoofing attacks. Spoofing attacks occur when unauthorized agents attempt to bypass firewall security by imitating valid client IP addresses. Using the ip-spoofing option invalidates such false source IP address connections. The drop-no-rpf-route option instructs the NetScreen device to drop any packet with a source address that is not contained in the route table. For example, the device drops the packet if it does not contain a source route, or if the source IP address is reserved (non-routable, as with 127.0.0.1). Conversely, the device does not drop the packet if the routing table contains a reverse path forwarding route that matches the source IP address on the packet. For example, the device drops an incoming packet with source IP address 10.5.1.5, if the device receives the packet on ethernet1, and there is no reverse path route for 10.5.1.5 (such as 0.0.0.0/0 or 10.5.1.0/24) on that interface. This is true even if such a reverse path exists on another interface. The zone-based option instructs the NetScreen device to base spoofing decisions on zones, instead of on individual interfaces. Enabling this setting allows sessions to continue when the device asymmetrically routes traffic between multiple interfaces in the same zone. Thus, the user can specify spoofing decisions based on either the zone or an exact interface. Note: The default behavior is to base spoofing decisions on individual interfaces. To restore the default behavior, execute the following command: unset zone zone screen ip-spoofing zone-based ip-stream-opt Detects packets where the IP option is 8 (Stream ID) and records the event in the SCREEN counters list for the ingress interface. ip-strict-src-route Detects packets where the IP option is 9 (Strict Source Routing) and records the event in the SCREEN counters list for the ingress interface. This option specifies the complete route list for a packet to take on its journey from source to destination. The last address in the list replaces the address in the destination field. ip-sweep threshold number Detects and prevents an IP Sweep attack. An IP Sweep attack occurs when an attacker sends ICMP echo requests (pings) to multiple destination addresses. If a target host replies, it reveals the targets IP address to the attacker. You can set the IP Sweep threshold to a value between 1 and 1,000,000 microseconds. Each time the NetScreen device receives 10 ICMP echo requests within this interval, it flags this as an IP Sweep attack, and rejects the 11th and all further ICMP packets from that host for the remainder of the second. ip-timestamp-opt Detects packets where the IP option list includes option 4 (Internet Timestamp) and records the event in the SCREEN counters list for the ingress interface.
691
pppoa through zone
land Prevents Land attacks by combining the SYN flood defense mechanism with IP spoofing protection. Land attacks occur when an attacker sends spoofed IP packets with headers containing the targets IP address for both the source and destination IP addresses. The attacker sends these packets with the SYN flag set to any available port. This induces the target to create empty sessions with itself, filling its session table and overwhelming its resources. limit-session [ source-ip-based number | destination-ip-based number ] Limits the number of concurrent sessions the device can initiate from a single source IP address, or the number of sessions it can direct to a single destination IP address. By default, the limit is 128 sessions. Limit value range is 1 to 49,999. mal-URL [ name_str id_str number | code-red ] Sets up a filter that scans HTTP packets for suspect URLs. The NetScreen device drops packets that contain such URLs. The code-red switch enables blocking of the Code Red worm virus. Using the name_str option works as follows. - name_str A user-defined identification name. - id_str Specifies the starting pattern to search for in the HTTP packet. Typically, this starting pattern begins with the HTTP command GET, followed by at least one space, plus the beginning of a URL. (The NetScreen device treats multiple spaces between the command GET and the character / at the start of the URL as a single space.) - number Specifies a minimum length for the URL before the CR-LF. ping-of-death Detects and rejects oversized and irregular ICMP packets. Although the TCP/IP specification requires a specific packet size, many ping implementations allow larger packet sizes. This can trigger a range of adverse system reactions including crashing, freezing, and restarting. port-scan threshold number Prevents port scan attacks. A port scan attack occurs when an attacker sends packets with different port numbers to scan available services. The attack succeeds if a port responds. To prevent this attack, the NetScreen device internally logs the number of different ports scanned from a single remote source. For example, if a remote host scans 10 ports in 0.005 seconds (equivalent to 5000 microseconds, the default threshold setting), the NetScreen device flags this as a port scan attack, and rejects further packets from the remote source. The port-scan threshold number value determines the threshold setting, which can be from 1000 to 1,000,000 microseconds. syn-ack-ack-proxy Prevents the SYN ACK ACK attack. Such an attach occurs when the attacker establishes multiple Telnet sessions without allowing each session to terminate. This consumes all open slots, generating a Denial of Service condition.
692
pppoa through zone
syn-fin Detects an illegal combination of flags attackers can use to consume sessions on the target device, thus resulting in a denial of service. syn-flood Detects and prevents SYN flood attacks. Such attacks occur when the connecting host continuously sends TCP SYN requests without replying to the corresponding ACK responses. - alarm-threshold number Defines the number of half-complete proxy connections per second at which the NetScreen device makes entries in the event alarm log. - attack_threshold number Defines the number of SYN packets per second required to trigger the SYN proxy mechanism. - destination-threshold number Specifies the number of SYN segments received per second for a single destination IP address before the NetScreen device begins dropping connection requests to that destination. If a protected host runs multiple services, you might want to set a threshold based on destination IP address only-regardless of the destination port number. - drop-unknown-mac Drops packets when they contain unknown destination MAC addresses. - queue-size number Defines the number of proxy connection requests held in the proxy connection queue before the system starts rejecting new connection requests. - source-threshold number Specifies the number of SYN segments received per second from a single source IP address (regardless of the destination IP address and port number) before the NetScreen device begins dropping connection requests from that source. - timeout number Defines the maximum length of time before a half-completed connection is dropped from the queue. You can set it between 1 and 50 seconds. syn-frag Detects a SYN fragment attack, and drops any packet fragments used for the attack. A SYN fragment attack floods the target host with SYN packet fragments. The host caches these fragments, waiting for the remaining fragments to arrive so it can reassemble them. By flooding a server or host with connections that cannot be completed, the hosts memory buffer eventually fills. No further connections are possible, and damage to the hosts operating system can occur. tcp-no-flag Drops an illegal packet with missing or malformed flags field. tear-drop Blocks the Teardrop attack. Teardrop attacks occur when fragmented IP packets overlap and cause the host attempting to reassemble the packets to crash. The tear-drop option directs the NetScreen device to drop any packets that have such a discrepancy.
693
pppoa through zone
udp-flood threshold number UDP flooding occurs when an attacker sends UDP packets to slow down the system to the point that it can no longer process valid connection requests. The threshold number parameter is the number of packets allowed per second to the same destination IP address/port pair. When the number of packets exceeds this value within any one-second period, the NetScreen device generates an alarm and drops subsequent packets for the remainder of that second. The valid range is from 1 to 1,000,000. unknown-protocol Discards all received IP frames with protocol numbers greater than 135. Such protocol numbers are undefined or reserved. winnuke Detects attacks on Windows NetBios communications, modifies the packet as necessary, and passes it on. (Each WinNuke attack triggers an attack log entry in the event alarm log.)
Example 1: The following command enables the ip-spoofing firewall service for the trust zone: set zone trust screen ip-spoofing The following command enables the ip-spoofing firewall service for the untrust zone, and instructs the device to drop any packet that has no source IP address, or that has a non-routable source IP address: set zone untrust screen ip-spoofing drop-no-rpf-route Example 2: The following command sets up a filter that scans HTTP packets for the code-red Code Red worm virus and drops such packets. set zone untrust screen mal-url code-red Example 3: The following commands block ActiveX and Java applets in HTTP traffic received on interfaces bound to the Untrust zone: set zone untrust block-component activex set zone untrust block-component java Example 4: The following commands limit the number of sessions from any host in the Trust and Untrust zones to any single IP address to 80 sessions: set set set set zone zone zone zone trust screen limit-session destination-ip-based 80 trust screen limit-session untrust screen limit-session destination-ip-based 80 untrust screen limit-session
694
pppoa through zone
tcp-rst
set zone zone tcp-rst unset zone zone tcp-rst
tcp-rst Directs the NetScreen device to send back the TCP reset packet when it receives non-sync packets.
vrouter
set zone zone vrouter
vrouter Binds the zone to a virtual router.
Creating Interfaces
Example: The following commands: set set Create a new Layer-2 zone named L2-Marketing with VLAN ID number 1 Assign physical interface ethernet7 to the zone Retrieve zone information: zone name L2-Marketing L2 1 interface ethernet7 zone L2-Marketing
Example: The following commands: set set set set set Create a new Layer-3 zone named Ext_Dept Bind the zone to the untrust-vr virtual router Enable ip-spoofing and tear-drop screening Bind interface ethernet4 to the zone: zone name Ext_Dept zone Ext_Dept vrouter untrust-vr zone Ext_Dept screen ip-spoofing zone Ext_Dept screen tear-drop interface ethernet4 zone Ext_Dept
695
pppoa through zone
696
Appendix A
Interface Names
ADSL interface Aggregate interfaces Ethernet interfaces
Most security zones exchange traffic with other zones (or with other devices) through physical interfaces or logical sub-interfaces. The interface names are as follows.
adsl1 is the main ADSL interface on which you configure a virtual circuit. You can configure subinterfaces to adsl1, such as adsl1.1, adsl1.2, etc., to support additional virtual circuits. aggregaten An aggregate interface, which is a grouping of two physical interfaces. An aggregate interface provides interface redundancy, allowing load sharing and failover. ethernetn A physical ethernet interface, denoted by an interface port n and no slots. ethernetn1/n2 A physical ethernet interface, denoted by an interface slot (n1) and a port (n2). Function interfaces mgt An interface bound to the MGT zone. ha | ha1 | ha2 The name of the dedicated HA port. Layer-2 interface Loopback interfaces Redundant interfaces vlan1 The interface used for VPNs and management traffic while the NetScreen device is in Transparent mode. loopback.n A logical interface that emulates a physical interface on the NetScreen device. A loopback interface is always in the up state as long as the device on which it resides is up. redundantn1 A redundant interface, which is a grouping of physical interfaces (each denoted by n1). Redundant interfaces perform interface failover. redundantn1.n2 A logical redundant sub-interface. Sub-interfaces ethernetn1.n2 A logical sub-interface, denoted by an interface port (n1) with no slots. The .n2 parameter identifies the logical interface. You create logical interfaces using the set interface command. ethernetn1/n2.n3 A logical sub-interface, denoted by an interface slot (n1) and a port (n2). The .n3 parameter identifies the logical interface. You create logical interfaces using the set interface command.
A-I
Appendix A Interface Names
Tunnel interfaces
tunnel.n A tunnel interface, used for VPN traffic.
A-II
Appendix B
Zone Names
B
Use Layer-2 security zones when the Juniper Networks NetScreen device operates in Transparent mode. v1-trust The V1-Trust zone, which hosts physical interfaces that communicate with trusted network space. v1-untrust The V1-Untrust zone, which hosts physical interfaces that communicate with untrusted network space. v1-dmz The DMZ zone, which hosts the DMZ physical interface. name name_str A user-defined Layer-2 security zone. (You create such zones using the set zone name name_str L2 command.)
Juniper Networks NetScreen devices use zones to host physical and logical interfaces, tunnels, and special-purpose items. Although ScreenOS has a number of default predefined zones, you can create new zones and configure them to meet the requirements of your organization. The names of ScreenOS security zones are as follows.
Layer-2 security zones
Layer-3 security zones
Use Layer-3 security zones when the Juniper Networks NetScreen device operates in NAT mode or Router mode. trust The Trust zone, which hosts physical interfaces (and logical sub-interfaces) that communicate with trusted network space. untrust The Untrust zone, which hosts physical interfaces (and logical sub-interfaces) that communicate with untrusted network space. global The Global zone, which serves as a storage area for mapped IP (MIP) and virtual IP (VIP) addresses. Because traffic going to these addresses is mapped to other addresses, the Global zone does not require an interface. dmz The DMZ zone, which hosts the DMZ physical interface. name name_str A user-defined Layer-2 security zone. (You create such zones using the set zone name name_str command.)
B-I
Appendix B Zone Names
Tunnel zones
Use tunnel zones to set up VPN tunnels with other NetScreen security devices. untrust-tun The Untrust-Tun zone, which hosts VPN tunnels. name name_str A user-defined tunnel zone. You create such zones using the set zone name name_str tunnel command.
Function zones
Use function zones as described below. null The Null zone, which serves as temporary storage for any interfaces that are not currently bound to another zone. self The Self zone, which hosts the interface for remote management connections. For example, when you connect to the Juniper Networks NetScreen device via HTTP, SCS, or Telnet, you connect to the Self zone. ha The HA zone, which hosts the high-availability interfaces, HA1 and HA2. mgt The MGT zone, which hosts the out-of-band management interface, MGT.
B-II
Appendix C
Command Availability
C
NS-50 No NS-200 NS-500 NS-2000 NS-5000 No No No No No
Most CLI commands are available across all Juniper Networks NetScreen device platforms. However, some platforms do not support certain commands. The following table lists the CLI commands described in this manual, and shows which platforms do not support them.
Command active-user address admin alarm alias all arp attack attack-db audible-alarm auth auth-server av bgp chassis clock common-criteria No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No NS-5XP NS-5XT NS-5GT NS-25 No No
C-I
Appendix C Command Availability
Command config console counter delete di dip dns domain downgrade envar event exit failover file firewall flow gate group group-expression hostname ike ike-cookie interface
NS-5XP NS-5XT NS-5GT NS-25
NS-50
NS-200 NS-500 NS-2000 NS-5000
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
C-II
Command ip ip-classification ippool l2tp lcd led license-key log mac mac-learn memory mip mirror modem nrtp nsmgmt nsrp ntp os ospf performance ping pki
NS-50
NS-200 NS-500 NS-2000 NS-5000
No
No
No
No
No
No No
No No
No No
No
No
No
No
No No
No
No
No No
No No
No No
No No No
No
No
C-III
Command policy port-mode pppoe proxy-id reset rip route sa sa-filter sa-statistics save scheduler scp service session sip snmp socket ssh ssl sys_clock syslog system
NS-50
NS-200 NS-500 NS-2000 NS-5000
No
No
No
No No
No
No No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
C-IV
Command tech-support temperature-threshold tftp timer trace-route traffic-shaping url user user-group vip vpn vpn-group vpnmonitor vrouter vsys vwire webauth webtrends xauth zone
NS-50
NS-200 NS-500 NS-2000 NS-5000
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No No
No No
No No
No No
No No
No No No No
C-V
C-VI

Netscreen CLI

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Netscreen CLI

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Netscreen CLI

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

Version 5.2.0 Command Descriptions

Version 5.2.0 P/N 093-1592-000 Rev. A

av .............................................................................. 65 BGP Commands........................................................ 74

New, Modified and Deleted Commands ..................xii

Juniper Networks NetScreen Publications................. xiii

active-user through common-criteria.......................1

chassis ..................................................................... 127 clock........................................................................ 129 common-criteria ..................................................... 131

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

config through interface ......................................133

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

RIP Commands ....................................................... 516

performance........................................................... 427 PIM Commands ...................................................... 429

pppoa through zone ............................................497

route ........................................................................ 554 sa............................................................................. 557 sa-statistics............................................................... 559

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

Availability of CLI Commands and Features

Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

Object Name Conventions

OBJECT NAME CONVENTIONS

Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

Common CLI Variable Names

Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

New, Modified and Deleted Commands

NEW, MODIFIED AND DELETED COMMANDS

Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

Juniper Networks NetScreen Publications

JUNIPER NETWORKS NETSCREEN PUBLICATIONS

Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

Juniper Networks NetScreen Publications

Juniper Networks NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

active-user through common-criteria

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

active-user through common-criteria

Keywords and Variables

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

active-user through common-criteria

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

active-user through common-criteria

Keywords and Variables

fqdn ip_addr/mask string

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

active-user through common-criteria

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

active-user through common-criteria

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

active-user through common-criteria

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

active-user through common-criteria

ssh [ port ] | telnet { access tunnel | port } | user name_str }

Keywords and Variables

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide

active-user through common-criteria

NetScreen CLI Reference Guide